Micom P40 Agile: Ge Grid Solutions

GE
Grid Solutions
MiCOM P40 Agile

P345
Addendum
Generator Protection IED
Hardware Version: M
Software Version: 91
Publication Reference: P345-AD-EN-1
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction 1
1 Chapter Overview 3
2 Foreword 4
2.1 Target Audience 4
2.2 Typographical Conventions 4
2.3 Nomenclature 4
3 Scope of this addendum 6
4 Product Scope 7
4.1 Ordering Options 7
5 Features and Functions 8
5.1 Protection Functions 8
5.2 Control Functions 10
5.3 Measurement Functions 11
5.4 Communication Functions 11
6 Functional Overview 12
Chapter 2 Safety Information 13

2 Health and Safety 16
3 Symbols 17
4 Installation, Commissioning and Servicing 18
4.1 Lifting Hazards 18
4.2 Electrical Hazards 18
4.3 UL/CSA/CUL Requirements 19
4.4 Fusing Requirements 19
4.5 Equipment Connections 20
4.6 Protection Class 1 Equipment Requirements 20
4.7 Pre-energisation Checklist 21
4.8 Peripheral Circuitry 21
4.9 Upgrading/Servicing 23
5 Decommissioning and Disposal 24
6 Regulatory Compliance 25
6.1 EMC Compliance: 2014/30/EU 25
6.2 LVD Compliance: 2014/35/EU 25
6.3 R&TTE Compliance: 2014/53/EU 25
6.4 UL/CUL Compliance 25
Chapter 3 Hardware Design 27

2 Hardware Architecture 30
3 Mechanical Implementation 31
3.1 Housing Variants 31
3.2 List of Boards 32
4 Front Panel 33
4.1 Front Panel 33
4.1.1 Front Panel Compartments 33
4.1.2 HMI Panel 34
4.1.3 Keypad 34
4.1.4 USB Port 35
4.1.5 Fixed Function LEDs 36
4.1.6 Function Keys 36
4.1.7 Programable LEDs 36
Contents P345
5 Rear Panel 37
5.1 Terminal Block Ingress Protection 38
6 Boards and Modules 39
6.1 PCBs 39
6.2 Subassemblies 39
6.3 Main Processor Board 40
6.4 Power Supply Board 41
6.4.1 Watchdog 43
6.4.2 Rear Serial Port 44
6.5 Input Module - 1 Transformer Board 45
6.5.1 Input Module Circuit Description 46
6.5.2 Frequency Response 47
6.5.3 Transformer Board 48
6.5.4 Input Board 49
6.6 Standard Output Relay Board 50
6.7 IRIG-B Board 51
6.8 Fibre Optic Board 52
6.9 Rear Communication Board 53
6.10 Redundant Ethernet Board 54
6.11 RTD Board 56
6.12 CLIO Board 57
6.13 High Break Output Relay Board 59
Chapter 4 Software Design 61

2 Sofware Design Overview 64
3 System Level Software 65
3.1 Real Time Operating System 65
3.2 System Services Software 65
3.3 Self-Diagnostic Software 65
3.4 Startup Self-Testing 65
3.4.1 System Boot 65
3.4.2 System Level Software Initialisation 66
3.4.3 Platform Software Initialisation and Monitoring 66
3.5 Continuous Self-Testing 66
4 Platform Software 67
4.1 Record Logging 67
4.2 Settings Database 67
4.3 Interfaces 67
5 Protection and Control Functions 68
5.1 Acquisition of Samples 68
5.2 Frequency Tracking 68
5.3 Direct Use of Sampled Values 68
5.4 Fourier Signal Processing 68
5.5 Programmable Scheme Logic 69
5.6 Event Recording 70
5.7 Disturbance Recorder 70
5.8 Fault Locator 70
5.9 Function Key Interface 70
Chapter 5 Configuration 71
2 Settings Application Software 74
3 Using the HMI Panel 75
3.1 Navigating the HMI Panel 76
ii P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Contents
3.2 Getting Started 76

3.3 Default Display 77
3.4 Default Display Navigation 78
3.5 Password Entry 79
3.6 Processing Alarms and Records 80
3.7 Menu Structure 80
3.8 Changing the Settings 81
3.9 Direct Access (The Hotkey menu) 82
3.9.1 Setting Group Selection Using Hotkeys 82
3.9.2 Control Inputs 83
3.10 Function Keys 83
4 Configuring the Data Protocols 85
4.1 Courier Configuration 85
4.2 DNP3 Configuration 86
4.2.1 DNP3 Configurator 87
4.3 IEC 60870-5-103 Configuration 87
4.4 MODBUS Configuration 88
4.5 IEC 61850 Configuration 89
4.5.1 IEC 61850 Configuration Banks 90
4.5.2 IEC 61850 Network Connectivity 90
5 Date and Time Configuration 91
5.1 Using an SNTP Signal 91
5.2 Using an IRIG-B Signal 91
5.3 Using an IEEE 1588 PTP Signal 91
5.4 Without a Timing Source Signal 92
5.5 Time Zone Compensation 92
5.6 Daylight Saving Time Compensation 92
6 Phase Rotation 94
6.1 CT and VT Reversal 94
Chapter 6 Supervision 95
2 Voltage Transformer Supervision 98
2.1 Loss of One or Two Phase Voltages 98
2.2 Loss of all Three Phase Voltages 98
2.3 Absence of all Three Phase Voltages on Line Energisation 98
2.4 VTS Implementation 99
2.5 VTS Logic 99
3 Current Transformer Supervision 101
3.1 Differential CTS Implementation 101
3.2 Differential CTS Logic 102
3.3 Application Notes 102
3.3.1 Setting Guidelines 102
4 Trip Circuit Supervision 104
4.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 1 104
4.1.1 Resistor Values 104
4.1.2 PSL for TCS Scheme 1 105
Chapter 7 Communications 109
P345-AD-EN-1 iii
Contents P345

2 Communication Interfaces 112
3 Serial Communication 113
3.1 USB Front Port 113
3.2 EIA(RS)485 Bus 113
3.2.1 EIA(RS)485 Biasing Requirements 114
3.3 K-Bus 114
4 Standard Ethernet Communication 116
5 Redundant Ethernet Communication 117
5.1 Supported Protocols 117
5.2 Parallel Redundancy Protocol 117
5.3 High-Availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) 118
5.3.1 HSR Multicast Topology 118
5.3.2 HSR Unicast Topology 119
5.3.3 HSR Application in the Substation 120
5.4 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 121
5.5 Failover 122
5.6 Configuring IP Addresses 122
5.6.1 Configuring the IED IP Address 122
5.6.2 Configuring the REB IP Address 122
5.7 Redundant Ethernet Configurator 123
5.7.1 Connecting the IED to a PC 123
5.7.2 Installing the Configurator 123
5.7.3 Starting the Configurator 124
5.7.4 PRP/HSR Device Identification 124
5.7.5 Selecting the Device Mode 124
5.7.6 PRP/HSR IP Address Configuration 124
5.7.7 SNTP IP Address Configuration 124
5.7.8 Check for Connected Equipment 125
5.7.9 PRP Configuration 125
5.7.10 HSR Configuration 125
5.7.11 Filtering Database 125
5.7.12 End of Session 126
5.8 RSTP Configurator 126
5.8.1 Connecting the IED to a PC 126
5.8.2 Installing the Configurator 127
5.8.3 Starting the Configurator 127
5.8.4 RSTP Device Identification 127
5.8.5 RSTP IP Address Configuration 128
5.8.6 SNTP IP Address Configuration 128
5.8.7 Check for Connected Equipment 128
5.8.8 RSTP Configuration 128
6 Data Protocols 131
6.1 Courier 131
6.1.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer 131
6.1.2 Courier Database 132
6.1.3 Settings Categories 132
6.1.4 Setting Changes 132
6.1.5 Event Extraction 132
6.1.6 Disturbance Record Extraction 134
6.1.7 Programmable Scheme Logic Settings 134
6.1.8 Time Synchronisation 134
6.1.9 Courier Configuration 135
6.2 IEC 60870-5-103 136
6.2.2 Initialisation 137
6.2.4 Configurable IEC 60870-5-103 Signal List 137
iv P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Contents
6.2.5 Spontaneous Events 138

6.2.6 General Interrogation (GI) 138
6.2.7 Cyclic Measurements 138
6.2.8 Commands 138
6.2.9 Test Mode 138
6.2.10 Disturbance Records 138
6.2.11 Command/Monitor Blocking 139
6.2.12 IEC 60870-5-103 Configuration 139
6.3 MODBUS 140
6.3.2 MODBUS Functions 140
6.3.3 Response Codes 141
6.3.4 Register Mapping 141
6.3.5 Event Extraction 142
6.3.6 Disturbance Record Extraction 143
6.3.7 Setting Changes 150
6.3.8 Password Protection 150
6.3.9 Protection and Disturbance Recorder Settings 150
6.3.11 Power and Energy Measurement Data Formats 152
6.3.12 MODBUS Configuration 153
6.4 DNP 3.0 154
6.4.2 Object 1 Binary Inputs 154
6.4.3 Object 10 Binary Outputs 155
6.4.4 Object 20 Binary Counters 156
6.4.5 Object 30 Analogue Input 156
6.4.6 Object 40 Analogue Output 156
6.4.7 Object 50 Time Synchronisation 156
6.4.8 DNP3 Device Profile 156
6.4.9 DNP3 Configuration 164
6.5 IEC 61850 166
6.5.1 Benefits of IEC 61850 166
6.5.2 IEC 61850 Interoperability 166
6.5.3 The IEC 61850 Data Model 166
6.5.4 IEC 61850 in MiCOM IEDs 167
6.5.5 IEC 61850 Data Model Implementation 168
6.5.6 IEC 61850 Communication Services Implementation 168
6.5.7 IEC 61850 Peer-to-peer (GOOSE) communications 168
6.5.8 GOOSE Message Validation 168
6.5.9 Mapping GOOSE Messages to Virtual Inputs 168
6.5.10 Ethernet Functionality 169
6.5.11 IEC 61850 Configuration 169
6.5.12 IEC 61850 Edition 2 170
7 Read Only Mode 174
7.1 IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol Blocking 174
7.2 Courier Protocol Blocking 174
7.3 IEC 61850 Protocol Blocking 175
7.4 Read-Only Settings 175
7.5 Read-Only DDB Signals 175
8 Time Synchronisation 176
8.1 Demodulated IRIG-B 176
8.1.1 IRIG-B Implementation 177
8.2 SNTP 177
8.3 IEEE 1588 Precision time Protocol 177
8.3.1 Accuracy and Delay Calculation 177
8.3.2 PTP Domains 178
8.4 Time Synchronisation using the Communication Protocols 178
P345-AD-EN-1 v
Contents P345
Chapter 8 Cyber-Security 179

1 Overview 181
2 The Need for Cyber-Security 182
3 Standards 183
3.1 NERC Compliance 183
3.1.1 CIP 002 184
3.1.2 CIP 003 184
3.1.3 CIP 004 184
3.1.4 CIP 005 184
3.1.5 CIP 006 184
3.1.6 CIP 007 185
3.1.7 CIP 008 185
3.1.8 CIP 009 185
3.2 IEEE 1686-2013 185
4 Cyber-Security Implementation 187
4.1 Initial Setup 187
5 Roles and Permissions 188
5.1 Roles 188
5.2 Permissions 189
6 Authentication 191
6.1 Authentication Methods 191
6.2 Bypass 191
6.3 Login 192
6.3.1 Front Panel Login 193
6.3.2 MiCOM S1 Login 193
6.3.3 Warning Banner 193
6.3.4 Login Failed 193
6.4 User Sessions 193
6.5 User Locking Policy 194
6.6 Logout 195
6.6.1 Front Panel Logout 195
6.6.2 MiCOM S1 Logout 195
6.7 Device Users 195
6.8 Password Policy 196
6.9 Change Password 196
6.10 RADIUS 196
6.10.1 RADIUS Users 196
6.10.2 RADIUS Client 197
6.10.3 RADIUS Server Settings 197
6.10.4 RADIUS Accounting 198
6.10.5 RADIUS Client-Server Validation 198
6.11 Recovery 198
6.11.1 Restore to Local Factory Default 198
6.11.2 Password Reset Procedure 199
6.11.3 Access Level DDBs 200
6.12 Disabling Physical Ports 200
6.13 Disabling Logical Ports 201
7 Security Event Management 202
7.1 Security Events: Courier 202
7.2 Syslog 204
7.3 Syslog Client 204
7.4 Syslog Functionality 205
Chapter 9 Installation 207

2 Handling the Goods 210
vi P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Contents
2.1 Receipt of the Goods 210

2.2 Unpacking the Goods 210
2.3 Storing the Goods 210
2.4 Dismantling the Goods 210
3 Mounting the Device 211
3.1 Flush Panel Mounting 211
3.2 Rack Mounting 211
4 Cables and Connectors 213
4.1 Terminal Blocks 213
4.2 Power Supply Connections 214
4.3 Earth Connnection 214
4.4 Current Transformers 214
4.5 Voltage Transformer Connections 215
4.6 Watchdog Connections 215
4.7 EIA(RS)485 and K-Bus Connections 215
4.8 IRIG-B Connection 215
4.9 Opto-input Connections 215
4.10 Output Relay Connections 216
4.11 Ethernet Metallic Connections 216
4.12 Ethernet Fibre Connections 216
4.13 USB Connection 216
4.14 GPS Fibre Connection 216
4.15 Fibre Communication Connections 217
4.16 RTD Connections 217
4.17 CLIO Connections 218
5 Case Dimensions 219
5.1 Case Dimensions 40TE 219
Chapter 10 Commissioning Instructions 223

2 General Guidelines 226
3 Commissioning Test Menu 227
3.1 Opto I/P Status Cell (Opto-input Status) 227
3.2 Relay O/P Status Cell (Relay Output Status) 227
3.3 Test Mode Cell 227
3.4 Test Pattern Cell 228
3.5 Contact Test Cell 228
3.6 Test LEDs Cell 228
3.7 Red and Green LED Status Cells 228
3.8 PSL Verificiation 228
3.8.1 Test Port Status Cell 228
3.8.2 Monitor Bit 1 to 8 Cells 228
4 Commissioning Equipment 230
4.1 Recommended Commissioning Equipment 230
4.2 Essential Commissioning Equipment 230
4.3 Advisory Test Equipment 231
5 Product Checks 232
5.1 Product Checks with the IED De-energised 232
5.1.1 Visual Inspection 232
5.1.2 Current Transformer Shorting Contacts 233
5.1.3 Insulation 233
5.1.4 External Wiring 233
5.1.5 Watchdog Contacts 233
5.1.6 Power Supply 234
P345-AD-EN-1 vii
Contents P345
5.2 Product Checks with the IED Energised 234

5.2.1 Watchdog Contacts 234
5.2.2 Test LCD 235
5.2.3 Date and Time 235
5.2.4 Test LEDs 235
5.2.5 Test Alarm and Out-of-Service LEDs 236
5.2.6 Test Trip LED 236
5.2.7 Test User-programmable LEDs 236
5.2.8 Test Opto-inputs 236
5.2.9 Test Output Relays 236
5.2.10 RTD Inputs 236
5.2.11 Current Loop Outputs 237
5.2.12 Current Loop Inputs 237
5.2.13 Test Serial Communication Port RP1 237
5.2.14 Test Serial Communication Port RP2 239
5.2.15 Test Ethernet Communication 240
5.3 Secondary Injection Tests 240
5.3.1 Test Current Inputs 240
5.3.2 Test Voltage Inputs 241
6 Setting Checks 242
6.1 Apply Application-specific Settings 242
6.1.1 Transferring Settings from a Settings File 242
6.1.2 Entering settings using the HMI 242
7 IEC 61850 Edition 2 Testing 244
7.1 Using IEC 61850 Edition 2 Test Modes 244
7.1.1 IED Test Mode Behaviour 244
7.1.2 Sampled Value Test Mode Behaviour 244
7.2 Simulated Input Behaviour 245
7.3 Testing Examples 245
7.3.1 Test Procedure for Real Values 246
7.3.2 Test Procedure for Simulated Values - No Plant 246
7.3.3 Test Procedure for Simulated Values - With Plant 247
7.3.4 Contact Test 248
8 Onload Checks 249
8.1 Confirm Current Connections 249
8.2 Confirm Voltage Connections 249
9 Final Checks 251
Chapter 11 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 253

2 Maintenance 256
2.1 Maintenance Checks 256
2.1.1 Alarms 256
2.1.2 Opto-isolators 256
2.1.3 Output Relays 256
2.1.4 Measurement Accuracy 256
2.2 Replacing the Device 257
2.3 Repairing the Device 258
2.4 Removing the front panel 258
2.5 Replacing PCBs 259
2.5.1 Replacing the main processor board 259
2.5.2 Replacement of communications boards 260
2.5.3 Replacement of the input module 261
2.5.4 Replacement of the power supply board 261
2.5.5 Replacement of the I/O boards 262
2.6 Recalibration 262
2.7 Supercapacitor Discharged 262
viii P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Contents
2.8 Cleaning 263

3 Troubleshooting 264
3.1 Self-Diagnostic Software 264
3.2 Power-up Errors 264
3.3 Error Message or Code on Power-up 264
3.4 Out of Service LED on at power-up 265
3.5 Error Code during Operation 266
3.6 Mal-operation during testing 266
3.6.1 Failure of Output Contacts 266
3.6.2 Failure of Opto-inputs 266
3.6.3 Incorrect Analogue Signals 267
3.7 PSL Editor Troubleshooting 267
3.7.1 Diagram Reconstruction 267
3.7.2 PSL Version Check 267
4 Repair and Modification Procedure 268
Chapter 12 Technical Specifications 269

2 Interfaces 272
2.1 Front USB Port 272
2.2 Rear Serial Port 1 272
2.3 Fibre Rear Serial Port 1 272
2.4 Rear Serial Port 2 272
2.5 IRIG-B (Demodulated) 273
2.6 IRIG-B (Modulated) 273
2.7 Rear Ethernet Port Copper 273
2.8 Rear Ethernet Port Fibre 273
2.8.1 100 Base FX Receiver Characteristics 274
2.8.2 100 Base FX Transmitter Characteristics 274
3 Performance of Generator Differential Protection and Monitoring Functions 275
3.1 Generator Differential Protection 275
3.2 Transformer Differential Protection 275
3.3 Circuitry Fault Alarm 275
3.4 Through Fault Monitoring 276
3.5 Thermal Overload 276
3.6 Transformer Thermal 276
3.7 Loss of Life 276
3.8 Field Failure 277
3.9 Negative Phase Sequence Thermal 277
3.10 Volt/HZ 277
3.11 Unintentional Energization At Standstill (Dead Machine) 277
3.12 Resistive Temperature Detectors 278
3.13 Pole Sipping 278
3.14 Low Impedance Restricted Earth Fault 278
3.15 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault 278
4 Performance of Current Protection Functions 279
4.1 Transient Overreach and Overshoot 279
4.2 Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Protection 279
4.3 Non Directional Earth Fault 279
4.4 Rotor Earth Fault 279
4.5 100% Stator Earth Fault (3rd Harmonic) 280
4.6 100% Stator Earth Fault (Low Frequency Injection) 280
5 Performance of Voltage Protection Functions 281
5.1 Undervoltage Protection 281
5.2 Overvoltage Protection 281
5.3 Residual Overvoltage Protection 281
P345-AD-EN-1 ix
Contents P345
5.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 281

6 Performance of Frequency Protection Functions 282
6.1 Overfrequency Protection 282
6.2 Underfrequency Protection 282
6.3 Rate of Change of Frequency Protection (dv/dt) 282
6.4 Generator Abnormal Frequency 283
7 Power Protection Functions 284
7.1 Three-Phase Power Protection 284
7.2 Negative Phase Sequence Overpower 284
7.3 Sensitive Power 284
8 Performance of Monitoring and Control Functions 286
8.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision 286
8.2 Standard Current Transformer Supervision 286
8.3 Differential Current Transformer Supervision 286
8.4 PSL Timers 286
9 Measurements and Recording 287
9.1 General 287
9.2 Disturbance Records 287
9.3 Event, Fault and Maintenance Records 287
9.4 Current Loop Inputs/Outputs 287
10 Regulatory Compliance 289
10.1 EMC Compliance: 2014/30/EU 289
10.2 LVD Compliance: 2014/35/EU 289
10.3 R&TTE Compliance: 2014/53/EU 289
10.4 UL/CUL Compliance 289
11 Mechanical Specifications 290
11.1 Physical Parameters 290
11.2 Enclosure Protection 290
11.3 Mechanical Robustness 290
11.4 Transit Packaging Performance 290
12 Ratings 291
12.1 AC Measuring Inputs 291
12.2 Current Transformer Inputs 291
12.3 Voltage Transformer Inputs 291
13 Power Supply 292
13.1 Auxiliary Supply Voltage 292
13.2 Nominal Burden 292
13.3 Power Supply Interruption 292
13.4 Supercapacitor 293
14 Input / Output Connections 294
14.1 Isolated Digital Inputs 294
14.1.1 Nominal Pickup and Reset Thresholds 294
14.2 Standard Output Contacts 294
14.3 High Break Output Contacts 295
14.4 Watchdog Contacts 295
15 Environmental Conditions 296
15.1 Ambient Temperature Range 296
15.2 Temperature Endurance Test 296
15.3 Ambient Humidity Range 296
15.4 Corrosive Environments 296
16 Type Tests 297
16.1 Insulation 297
16.2 Creepage Distances and Clearances 297
16.3 High Voltage (Dielectric) Withstand 297
16.4 Impulse Voltage Withstand Test 297
17 Electromagnetic Compatibility 298
x P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Contents
17.1 1 MHz Burst High Frequency Disturbance Test 298

17.2 Damped Oscillatory Test 298
17.3 Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge 298
17.4 Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements 298
17.5 Surge Withstand Capability 298
17.6 Surge Immunity Test 299
17.7 Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy 299
17.8 Radiated Immunity from Digital Communications 299
17.9 Radiated Immunity from Digital Radio Telephones 299
17.10 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields 299
17.11 Magnetic Field Immunity 300
17.12 Conducted Emissions 300
17.13 Radiated Emissions 300
17.14 Power Frequency 300
Appendix A Ordering Options 301
Appendix B Settings and Signals 303
Appendix C Wiring Diagrams 305
P345-AD-EN-1 xi
Contents P345
xii P345-AD-EN-1
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 1 - Introduction P345
2 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Chapter 1 - Introduction
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter provides some general information about the technical manual and an introduction to the device(s)
described in this technical manual.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Chapter Overview 3
Foreword 4
Scope of this addendum 6
Product Scope 7
Features and Functions 8
Functional Overview 12
P345-AD-EN-1 3
2 FOREWORD
This technical manual provides a functional and technical description of GE's P345, as well as a comprehensive set
of instructions for using the device. The level at which this manual is written assumes that you are already familiar
with protection engineering and have experience in this discipline. The description of principles and theory is
limited to that which is necessary to understand the product. For further details on general protection engineering
theory, we refer you to GE's publication NPAG, which is available online or from our contact centre.
We have attempted to make this manual as accurate, comprehensive and user-friendly as possible. However we
cannot guarantee that it is free from errors. Nor can we state that it cannot be improved. We would therefore be
very pleased to hear from you if you discover any errors, or have any suggestions for improvement. Our policy is to
provide the information necessary to help you safely specify, engineer, install, commission, maintain, and
eventually dispose of this product. We consider that this manual provides the necessary information, but if you
consider that more details are needed, please contact us.
All feedback should be sent to our contact centre via:
[email protected]
2.1 TARGET AUDIENCE

This manual is aimed towards all professionals charged with installing, commissioning, maintaining,
troubleshooting, or operating any of the products within the specified product range. This includes installation and
commissioning personnel as well as engineers who will be responsible for operating the product.
The level at which this manual is written assumes that installation and commissioning engineers have knowledge
of handling electronic equipment. Also, system and protection engineers have a thorough knowledge of protection
systems and associated equipment.
2.2 TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS

The following typographical conventions are used throughout this manual.
● The names for special keys appear in capital letters.
For example: ENTER
● When describing software applications, menu items, buttons, labels etc as they appear on the screen are
written in bold type.
For example: Select Save from the file menu.
● Filenames and paths use the courier font
For example: Example\File.text
● Special terminology is written with leading capitals
For example: Sensitive Earth Fault
● If reference is made to the IED's internal settings and signals database, the menu group heading (column)
text is written in upper case italics
For example: The SYSTEM DATA column
● If reference is made to the IED's internal settings and signals database, the setting cells and DDB signals are
written in bold italics
For example: The Language cell in the SYSTEM DATA column
● If reference is made to the IED's internal settings and signals database, the value of a cell's content is
written in the Courier font
For example: The Language cell in the SYSTEM DATA column contains the value English
2.3 NOMENCLATURE
Due to the technical nature of this manual, many special terms, abbreviations and acronyms are used throughout
the manual. Some of these terms are well-known industry-specific terms while others may be special product-
4 P345-AD-EN-1
specific terms used by GE. The first instance of any acronym or term used in a particular chapter is explained. In
addition, a separate glossary is available on the GE website, or from the GE contact centre.
We would like to highlight the following changes of nomenclature however:
● The word 'relay' is no longer used to describe the device itself. Instead, the device is referred to as the 'IED'
(Intelligent Electronic Device), the 'device', or the 'product'. The word 'relay' is used purely to describe the
electromechanical components within the device, i.e. the output relays.
● British English is used throughout this manual.
● The British term 'Earth' is used in favour of the American term 'Ground'.
P345-AD-EN-1 5
3 SCOPE OF THIS ADDENDUM

This document covers software version 91 and describes the functional enhancements, which have occurred since
the release of the last full technical manual. The P345 includes the following updates:
● Front panel design
● USB port and supercapacitor functions
● Redundant Ethernet port protocols
● IEC 61850 Edition 2
● Cyber Security Role-Based Access Control (RBAC)
● Technical Specification standards
This document should be read alongside the last full technical manual covering this product:
● P34x/EN M/Ia8 - software version 38 & 72
6 P345-AD-EN-1
4 PRODUCT SCOPE
The generator protection relays have been designed for the protection of a wide range of generators.
The P345 is suitable for protection of large generators (>50 MVA) providing 100% stator earth fault protection via a
low frequency injection technique. in addition, it includes a second neutral voltage input for earth fault/interturn
protection.
The P345 model variants are summarised below:
Feature P345
Case 80TE
Number of CT Inputs 9
Number of VT inputs 6
Optically coupled digital inputs 16 - 32 (order option)
Standard relay output contacts 16 - 32 (order option)
Function keys 10
Programmable LEDs (tri-colour) 18
4.1 ORDERING OPTIONS

All current models and variants for this product are defined in an interactive spreadsheet called the CORTEC. This is
available on the company website.
Alternatively, you can obtain it via the Contact Centre at:
[email protected]
A copy of the CORTEC is also supplied as a static table in the Appendices of this document. However, it should only
be used for guidance as it provides a snapshot of the interactive data taken at the time of publication.
P345-AD-EN-1 7
5 FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
5.1 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The device provides the following protection functions:
ANSI Protection Function Model
Phase segregated generator differential protection is provided for high speed
87 discriminative protection for all fault types. The differential protection can be selected as P345
biased or high impedance or interturn.
Phase-segregated generator-transformer biased differential protection is provided for
high-speed discriminative protection for all fault types. The differential protection includes
87 P345
ratio and vector compensation and 2nd/5th harmonic blocking for magnetizing inrush
conditions.
Restricted earth fault is configurable as a high impedance or a biased low impedance
element. This can be used to provide high speed earth fault protection and is mainly
64 applicable to small machines where differential protection is not possible or for P345
transformer applications. The CT input is selectable as IA-1/IB-1/IC-1 or IA-2/IB-2/IC-2 via a
setting.
Four definite time stages of power/VAr protection are provided and each stage can be
independently configured to operate as under/over and forward/reverse. The power
protection can be used to provide simple back-up overload protection (Overpower),
protection against motoring (Reverse Power), CB interlocking to prevent overspeeding
during machine shutdown (Low Forward Power) and motor loss of load protection (Low
32P/Q Reverse Power). The reverse VAr protection can be used to provide simple under excitation P345
protection. The P342-6 relays provide a standard 3 phase power/VAr protection element
and also a single phase sensitive power/VAr protection element. The P345 sensitive power
protection can be a single or wattmetric power/VAr element. The sensitive power/VAr
protection can be used with dedicated metering class CTs using the sensitive current
inputs (1 for single phase or 2 for wattmetric).
A two stage offset mho definite time impedance element with a supervising directional
40 line is provided to detect failure of the machine excitation. A power factor alarm element is P345
also available to offer more sensitive protection.
Negative phase sequence thermal overload protection is provided to protect against
46T unbalanced loading which can cause overheating in the rotor. Both alarm and trip stages P345
are provided.
A voltage dependent overcurrent (controlled or restrained) or underimpedance protection
is provided for back-up protection of phase faults. The voltage dependent overcurrent
51V, 21 protection may be set as controlled or restrained with an Inverse Definite Minimum Time P345
(IDMT) or Definite Time (DT). There are 2 stages of underimpedance protection which may
be set as definite time only.
Four overcurrent protection stages are provided which can be selected to be either non-
directional, directional forward or directional reverse. Stages 1 and 2 may be set Inverse
50/51/67 P345
Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) or Definite Time (DT); stages 3 and 4 may be set DT only. The
CT input is selectable as IA-1/IB-1/IC-1 or IA-2/IB-2/IC-2 via a setting.
Four definite time stages of negative phase sequence overcurrent protection are provided
for remote back-up protection for both phase to earth and phase to phase faults. Each
46OC P345
stage can be selected to be either non-directional, directional forward or directional
reverse. The CT input is selectable as IA-1/IB-1/IC-1 or IA-2/IB-2/IC-2 via a setting.
Generator thermal overload protection based on I1 and I2 is provided to protect the
49G stator/rotor against overloading due to balanced and unbalanced currents. Both alarm P345
and trip stages are provided.
Transformer thermal overload protection is provided based on IEEE Std C57.91-1995. The
49T thermal trip can be based on either hot spot or top oil temperature, each with three time- P345
delayed stages available.
8 P345-AD-EN-1

Two stages of non-directional earth fault protection are provided for stator earth fault
50N/51N protection. Stage 1 may be set Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) or Definite Time (DT); P345
stage 2 may be set DT only.
Rotor earth fault protection can be provided by a low frequency injection method. There
are 2 stages of definite time under resistance protection. An external injection, coupling
and measurement unit (P391) is required with this function. The measurement of the rotor
64R resistance is passed to the P34x via a current loop output (0-20 mA) on the P391 connected P345
to one of the 4 current loop inputs on the P34x. The rotor ground fault protection is only
available if the relay includes the CLIO hardware option. The injection frequency is
selectable 0.25/0.5/1 Hz via a jumper link in the P391
One sensitive earth fault element is provided for discriminative earth fault protection of
parallel generators. The protection can be selected to be either non-directional, directional
forward or directional reverse. Either Zero sequence or negative sequence polarizing is
67N/67W P345
available.
The Sensitive Earth Fault element can be configured as an Icosf, Isinf or VIcosf (Wattmetric)
element for application to isolated and compensated networks.
Residual overvoltage protection is available for stator earth fault protection where there is
an isolated or high impedance earth. The residual voltage can be measured from a broken
delta VT, from the secondary winding of a distribution transformer earth at the generator
neutral, or can be calculated from the three phase to neutral voltage measurements. Two
59N independent stages of protection are provided for each measured neutral voltage input P345
and also for the calculated value, each stage can be selected as either IDMT or DT. The
P342/3/4/5 have 2 measured and 2 calculated stages of residual overvoltage protection.
The P344/5 has an additional neutral voltage input and so has an additional 2 stages of
measured residual overvoltage protection.
A 3rd harmonic voltage element is provided to detect earth fault close to the generator
star point. This element combined with the standard stator earth fault protection
(59N/50N/51N) provides 100% stator earth fault protection.
A definite time 3rd harmonic undervoltage element is provided if neutral voltage
27TN/59TN P345
measurement is available at the neutral of the machine. This element is supervised by a 3
phase undervoltage element and optionally by 3 phase W/VA/VAr elements. A 3rd
harmonic overvoltage element is provided if neutral voltage measurement is available
from the terminals of the machine.
100% stator earth fault protection can also be provided by a low frequency injection
method. There are 2 stages of definite time under resistance protection and 1 stage of
64S P345
definite time overcurrent protection. An external 20 Hz generator and bandpass filter is
required with this function.
A five stage overfluxing (V/Hz) element is provided to protect the generator, or connected
transformer, against overexcitation. The first stage is a definite time alarm, the second
24 P345
stage can be used to provide an inverse or definite time trip characteristic and stages
3/4/5 are definite time.
A 4-stage rate of change of frequency element (df/dt) is provided for Loss of Mains/Grid
81R P345
and load shedding applications.
A voltage supervised overcurrent scheme is provided for dead machine/generator
unintentional energization at standstill (GUESS) protection to detect if the machine circuit
50/27 P345
breaker is closed accidentally, when the machine is not running. The CT input is selectable
as IA-1/IB-1/IC-1 or IA-2/IB-2/IC-2 via a setting.
A 3 stage undervoltage protection element, configurable as either phase to phase or
27 phase to neutral measuring is provided to back up the automatic voltage regulator. Stage P345
1 may be selected as either IDMT or DT and stage 2 and 3 are DT only.
A 2 stage overvoltage protection element, configurable as either phase to phase or phase
59 to neutral measuring is provided to back up the automatic voltage regulator. Stage 1 may P345
be selected as either IDMT or DT and stage 2 is DT only.
A definite time negative phase sequence overvoltage protection element is provided for
47 P345
either a tripping or interlocking function upon detection of unbalanced supply voltages.
P345-AD-EN-1 9

A 4 stage definite time underfrequency and 2 stage definite time overfrequency protection
81U/O P345
is provided for load shedding and back-up protection of the speed control governor.
Turbine abnormal frequency protection is provided to protect the turbine blade from
potential damage due to prolonged under/overfrequency operation of the generator. Up
81AB P345
to six frequency bands can be programmed, each having an integrating timer to record
the time spent within the band.
10 RTDs (PT100) are provided to monitor the temperature accurately in the windings and
RTD bearings of the machine. Each RTD has an instantaneous alarm and definite time trip P345(option)
stage.
A 2 stage circuit breaker failure function is provided with a 3 pole initiation input from
50BF P345
external protection.
Phase, neutral and sensitive earth fault undercurrent elements are available for use with
37P/37N P345
for example the circuit breaker fail function.
A lens shaped impedance characteristic is used to detect loss of synchronization (pole
slipping) between the generation and the power system. Two zones are created by a
reactance line which is used to distinguish whether the impedance centre of the pole slip is
78 P345
located in the power system or in the generator. Separate counters are used to count pole
slips in the 2 zones. A setting is also provided to determine whether the protection
operates in a generating mode, motoring mode or both.
Blocked overcurrent logic is available on each stage of the overcurrent, earth fault and
BOL sensitive earth fault protection. This consists of start outputs and block inputs that can be P345
used to implement busbar blocking schemes for example.
Through faults are a major cause of transformer damage and failure. An I2t calculation
LOL based on the recorded time duration and maximum through fault current is performed for P345
each phase. A single stage alarm is available for through-fault condition monitoring.
Through faults are a major cause of transformer damage and failure. An I2t calculation
Thru based on the recorded time duration and maximum through fault current is performed for P345
each phase. A single stage alarm is available for through-fault condition monitoring.
5.2 CONTROL FUNCTIONS

The device provides the following protection functions:
Feature IEC 61850 ANSI Model
Watchdog contacts P345
Read-only mode P345
NERC compliant cyber-security P345
Function keys (up to 10) FnkGGIO P345
Programmable tricolor LEDs (up to 18) LedGGIO P345
Programmable hotkeys (2) P345
Programmable allocation of digital inputs and outputs P345
Fully customizable menu texts P345
Circuit breaker control, status & condition monitoring XCBR 52 P345
Current Loop Input/Output (CLIO) CLIO P345 (option)
CT supervision CTS P345
VT supervision VTS P345
Trip circuit and coil supervision P345
Check Synchronization 25 P345
Phase Rotation P345
Control inputs PloGGIO1 P345
10 P345-AD-EN-1
Feature IEC 61850 ANSI Model

Power-up diagnostics and continuous self-monitoring P345
Dual rated 1A and 5A CT inputs P345
Alternative setting groups (4) P345
Graphical programmable scheme logic (PSL) P345
Fault locator RFLO
5.3 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS
Measurement Function IEC 61850 ANSI

Measurement of all instantaneous & integrated values
MET
(Exact range of measurements depend on the device model)
Disturbance recorder for waveform capture – specified in samples per cycle RDRE DFR
Fault Records
Maintenance Records
Event Records / Event logging Event records
Time Stamping of Opto-inputs Yes Yes
5.4 COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS

The device offers the following communication functions:
Feature ANSI
NERC compliant cyber-security
USB port for configuration 16S
Rear serial RS485 communication port for SCADA control 16S
2nd Additional rear serial communication ports for SCADA control and
16S
teleprotection (fibre and copper) (optional)
Ethernet communication (optional) 16E
Redundant Ethernet communication (optional) 16E
Courier protocol 16S
IEC 61850 protocol (optional) 16E
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (optional) 16S
Modbus protocol (optional) 16S
DNP3.0 protocol over serial link (optional) 16S
IRIG-B time synchronisation (optional) CLK
P345-AD-EN-1 11
6 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW
IEC 2nd R emote R emote L oc al R ecord

F aultR ec ords
61850 C omm. P ort Comm. P ort C ommunic ation D is turbance
Low Fre que ncy
Ge ne rator Meas urements
B and P as s 64S 25
Fi lter Low F V
Low F I
59N 59T N
U NE UT R AL 2
VT S 27 81R 81O 8 1AB 24 47

59 81U
I S E N S IT I VE
I2
+
67
87T 64 50 51 V 50
8 7G C TS 51 32 P/Q 40 46 T 27 78 49GT 67 N 50B F 4 6O C LoL Thru
21
_
I1
IE
UN E UT R AL 1
50N
5 9N 27TN 51N 64 R
P 3 91
P3 45 on ly
P 34 4 on ly Gen erator Pro tec tion
R otor
P 343/4 /5 o nly P 342 / P 343 /
Binary RT D s C L IO P343/4/5/6 only
Gro und F aul t P 344 / P 345 / P34 6
C ou plin g Uni t Input /O utput always available
op tio nal
V00004
Figure 1: Functional Overview
12 P345-AD-EN-1
CHAPTER 2
SAFETY INFORMATION
Chapter 2 - Safety Information P345
14 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Chapter 2 - Safety Information
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter provides information about the safe handling of the equipment. The equipment must be properly
installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition and to keep personnel safe at all times. You must
be familiar with information contained in this chapter before unpacking, installing, commissioning, or servicing the
equipment.
Chapter Overview 15
Health and Safety 16
Symbols 17
Installation, Commissioning and Servicing 18
Decommissioning and Disposal 24
Regulatory Compliance 25
P345-AD-EN-1 15
2 HEALTH AND SAFETY

Personnel associated with the equipment must be familiar with the contents of this Safety Information.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages are present in certain parts of the equipment.
Improper use of the equipment and failure to observe warning notices will endanger personnel.
Only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who are:
● familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and the system to which it is
being connected.
● familiar with accepted safety engineering practises and are authorised to energise and de-energise
equipment in the correct manner.
● trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practises
● trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The documentation provides instructions for installing, commissioning and operating the equipment. It cannot,
however cover all conceivable circumstances. In the event of questions or problems, do not take any action
without proper authorisation. Please contact your local sales office and request the necessary information.
16 P345-AD-EN-1
3 SYMBOLS
Throughout this manual you will come across the following symbols. You will also see these symbols on parts of
the equipment.
Caution:
Refer to equipment documentation. Failure to do so could result in damage to the
equipment
Warning:
Risk of electric shock
Warning:
Risk of damage to eyesight
Earth terminal. Note: This symbol may also be used for a protective conductor (earth) terminal if that terminal
is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly.
Protective conductor (earth) terminal
Instructions on disposal requirements
Note:
The term 'Earth' used in this manual is the direct equivalent of the North American term 'Ground'.
P345-AD-EN-1 17
4 INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING
4.1 LIFTING HAZARDS

Many injuries are caused by:
● Lifting heavy objects
● Lifting things incorrectly
● Pushing or pulling heavy objects
● Using the same muscles repetitively
Plan carefully, identify any possible hazards and determine how best to move the product. Look at other ways of
moving the load to avoid manual handling. Use the correct lifting techniques and Personal Protective Equipment
(PPE) to reduce the risk of injury.
4.2 ELECTRICAL HAZARDS
Caution:
All personnel involved in installing, commissioning, or servicing this equipment must be
familiar with the correct working procedures.
Caution:
Consult the equipment documentation before installing, commissioning, or servicing
the equipment.
Caution:
Always use the equipment as specified. Failure to do so will jeopardise the protection
provided by the equipment.
Warning:
Removal of equipment panels or covers may expose hazardous live parts. Do not touch
until the electrical power is removed. Take care when there is unlocked access to the
rear of the equipment.
Warning:
Isolate the equipment before working on the terminal strips.
Warning:
Use a suitable protective barrier for areas with restricted space, where there is a risk of
electric shock due to exposed terminals.
Caution:
Disconnect power before disassembling. Disassembly of the equipment may expose
sensitive electronic circuitry. Take suitable precautions against electrostatic voltage
discharge (ESD) to avoid damage to the equipment.
18 P345-AD-EN-1
Warning:
NEVER look into optical fibres or optical output connections. Always use optical power
meters to determine operation or signal level.
Warning:
Testing may leave capacitors charged to dangerous voltage levels. Discharge
capacitors by reducing test voltages to zero before disconnecting test leads.
Caution:
Operate the equipment within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
Caution:
Before cleaning the equipment, ensure that no connections are energised. Use a lint
free cloth dampened with clean water.
Note:
Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.
4.3 UL/CSA/CUL REQUIREMENTS

The information in this section is applicable only to equipment carrying UL/CSA/CUL markings.
Caution:
Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1
enclosure, as defined by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Caution:
To maintain compliance with UL and CSA/CUL, install the equipment using UL/CSA-
recognised parts for: cables, protective fuses, fuse holders and circuit breakers,
insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal batteries.
4.4 FUSING REQUIREMENTS
Caution:
Where UL/CSA listing of the equipment is required for external fuse protection, a UL or
CSA Listed fuse must be used for the auxiliary supply. The listed protective fuse type is:
Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A and a minimum DC
rating of 250 V dc (for example type AJT15).
Caution:
Where UL/CSA listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture capacity (HRC)
fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a minimum dc rating of 250 V
dc may be used for the auxiliary supply (for example Red Spot type NIT or TIA).
For P50 models, use a 1A maximum T-type fuse.
For P60 models, use a 4A maximum T-type fuse.
P345-AD-EN-1 19
Caution:
Digital input circuits should be protected by a high rupture capacity NIT or TIA fuse with
maximum rating of 16 A. for safety reasons, current transformer circuits must never be
fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused to protect the wire used.
Caution:
CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal hazardous
voltages
4.5 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
Warning:
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a
hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
Caution:
Tighten M4 clamping screws of heavy duty terminal block connectors to a nominal
torque of 1.3 Nm.
Tighten captive screws of terminal blocks to 0.5 Nm minimum and 0.6 Nm maximum.
Caution:
Always use insulated crimp terminations for voltage and current connections.
Caution:
Always use the correct crimp terminal and tool according to the wire size.
Caution:
Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided to indicate the health of the device
on some products. We strongly recommend that you hard wire these contacts into the
substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
4.6 PROTECTION CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Caution:
Earth the equipment with the supplied PCT (Protective Conductor Terminal).
Caution:
Do not remove the PCT.
Caution:
The PCT is sometimes used to terminate cable screens. Always check the PCT’s integrity
after adding or removing such earth connections.
20 P345-AD-EN-1
Caution:
Use a locknut or similar mechanism to ensure the integrity of stud-connected PCTs.
Caution:
The recommended minimum PCT wire size is 2.5 mm² for countries whose mains supply
is 230 V (e.g. Europe) and 3.3 mm² for countries whose mains supply is 110 V (e.g. North
America). This may be superseded by local or country wiring regulations.
For P60 products, the recommended minimum PCT wire size is 6 mm². See product
documentation for details.
Caution:
The PCT connection must have low-inductance and be as short as possible.
Caution:
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are
pre-wired, but not used, should be earthed, or connected to a common grouped
potential.
4.7 PRE-ENERGISATION CHECKLIST
Caution:
Check voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation).
Caution:
Check CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections.
Caution:
Check protective fuse or miniature circuit breaker (MCB) rating.
Caution:
Check integrity of the PCT connection.
Caution:
Check voltage and current rating of external wiring, ensuring it is appropriate for the
application.
4.8 PERIPHERAL CIRCUITRY
Warning:
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be
lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Short the secondary of the line CT
before opening any connections to it.
P345-AD-EN-1 21
Note:
For most GE equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination is
automatically shorted if the module is removed. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required. Check the
equipment documentation and wiring diagrams first to see if this applies.
Caution:
Where external components such as resistors or voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) are
used, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns if touched.
Warning:
Take extreme care when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG,
MMLB and P990, as hazardous voltages may be exposed. Ensure that CT shorting links
are in place before removing test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
Warning:
Data communication cables with accessible screens and/or screen conductors,
(including optical fibre cables with metallic elements), may create an electric shock
hazard in a sub-station environment if both ends of the cable screen are not connected
to the same equipotential bonded earthing system.
To reduce the risk of electric shock due to transferred potential hazards:
i. The installation shall include all necessary protection measures to ensure that no
fault currents can flow in the connected cable screen conductor.
ii. The connected cable shall have its screen conductor connected to the protective
conductor terminal (PCT) of the connected equipment at both ends. This connection
may be inherent in the connectors provided on the equipment but, if there is any doubt,
this must be confirmed by a continuity test.
iii. The protective conductor terminal (PCT) of each piece of connected equipment shall
be connected directly to the same equipotential bonded earthing system.
iv. If, for any reason, both ends of the cable screen are not connected to the same
equipotential bonded earth system, precautions must be taken to ensure that such
screen connections are made safe before work is done to, or in proximity to, any such
cables.
v. No equipment shall be connected to any download or maintenance circuits or

connectors of this product except temporarily and for maintenance purposes only.
vi. Equipment temporarily connected to this product for maintenance purposes shall be
protectively earthed (if the temporary equipment is required to be protectively
earthed), directly to the same equipotential bonded earthing system as the product.
Warning:
Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) modules which provide copper Ethernet connections
typically do not provide any additional safety isolation. Copper Ethernet SFP modules
must only be used in connector positions intended for this type of connection.
22 P345-AD-EN-1
4.9 UPGRADING/SERVICING
Warning:
Do not insert or withdraw modules, PCBs or expansion boards from the equipment
while energised, as this may result in damage to the equipment. Hazardous live
voltages would also be exposed, endangering personnel.
Caution:
Internal modules and assemblies can be heavy and may have sharp edges. Take care
when inserting or removing modules into or out of the IED.
P345-AD-EN-1 23
5 DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL
Caution:
Before decommissioning, completely isolate the equipment power supplies (both poles
of any dc supply). The auxiliary supply input may have capacitors in parallel, which may
still be charged. To avoid electric shock, discharge the capacitors using the external
terminals before decommissioning.
Caution:
Avoid incineration or disposal to water courses. Dispose of the equipment in a safe,
responsible and environmentally friendly manner, and if applicable, in accordance with
country-specific regulations.
24 P345-AD-EN-1
6 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE
Compliance with the European Commission Directive on EMC and LVD is demonstrated using a technical file.
6.1 EMC COMPLIANCE: 2014/30/EU

The product specific Declaration of Conformity (DoC) lists the relevant harmonised standard(s) or conformity
assessment used to demonstrate compliance with the EMC directive.
6.2 LVD COMPLIANCE: 2014/35/EU

The product specific Declaration of Conformity (DoC) lists the relevant harmonized standard(s) or conformity
assessment used to demonstrate compliance with the LVD directive.
Safety related information, such as the installation I overvoltage category, pollution degree and operating
temperature ranges are specified in the Technical Data section of the relevant product documentation and/or on
the product labelling.
Unless otherwise stated in the Technical Data section of the relevant product documentation, the equipment is
intended for indoor use only. Where the equipment is required for use in an outdoor location, it must be mounted
in a specific cabinet or housing to provide the equipment with the appropriate level of protection from the
expected outdoor environment.
6.3 R&TTE COMPLIANCE: 2014/53/EU

Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) directive 2014/53/EU.
Conformity is demonstrated by compliance to both the EMC directive and the Low Voltage directive, to zero volts.
6.4 UL/CUL COMPLIANCE

If marked with this logo, the product is compliant with the requirements of the Canadian and USA Underwriters
Laboratories.
The relevant UL file number and ID is shown on the equipment.
P345-AD-EN-1 25
26 P345-AD-EN-1
CHAPTER 3
HARDWARE DESIGN
Chapter 3 - Hardware Design P345
28 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Chapter 3 - Hardware Design
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter provides information about the product's hardware design.
Chapter Overview 29
Hardware Architecture 30
Mechanical Implementation 31
Front Panel 33
Rear Panel 37
Boards and Modules 39
P345-AD-EN-1 29
2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
The main components comprising devices based on the Px4x platform are as follows:
● The housing, consisting of a front panel and connections at the rear
● The Main processor module consisting of the main CPU (Central Processing Unit), memory and an interface
to the front panel HMI (Human Machine Interface)
● A selection of plug-in boards and modules with presentation at the rear for the power supply,
communication functions, digital I/O, analogue inputs, and time synchronisation connectivity
All boards and modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus, which allows the processor module to
send and receive information to and from the other modules as required. There is also a separate serial data bus
for conveying sampled data from the input module to the CPU. These parallel and serial databuses are shown as a
single interconnection module in the following figure, which shows typical modules and the flow of data between
them.
Keypad
Output relay boards Output relay contacts
Processor module
Front panel HMI
LCD
Opto-input boards Digital inputs
LEDs
I/O
Front port
CTs Power system currents
Memory
Interconnection
Flash memory for settings VTs Power system voltages
Backed-up SRAM Analogue Inputs

for records
RS485 modules RS485 communication

Watchdog
contacts Watchdog module
IRIG-B module Time synchronisation
+ LED
Ethernet modules Ethernet communication

Auxiliary
PSU module
Supply Communications
Note: Not all modules are applicable to all products
V00233
Figure 2: Hardware architecture
30 P345-AD-EN-1
3 MECHANICAL IMPLEMENTATION
All products based on the Px4x platform have common hardware architecture. The hardware is modular and
consists of the following main parts:
● Case and terminal blocks
● Boards and modules
● Front panel
The case comprises the housing metalwork and terminal blocks at the rear. The boards fasten into the terminal
blocks and are connected together by a ribbon cable. This ribbon cable connects to the processor in the front
panel.
The following diagram shows an exploded view of a typical product. The diagram shown does not necessarily
represent exactly the product model described in this manual.
Figure 3: Exploded view of IED
3.1 HOUSING VARIANTS

The Px4x range of products are implemented in a range of case sizes. Case dimensions for industrial products
usually follow modular measurement units based on rack sizes. These are: U for height and TE for width, where:
● 1U = 1.75 inches = 44.45 mm
● 1TE = 0.2 inches = 5.08 mm
The products are available in panel-mount or standalone versions. All products are nominally 4U high. This equates
to 177.8 mm or 7 inches.
The cases are pre-finished steel with a conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good grounding
at all joints, providing a low resistance path to earth that is essential for performance in the presence of external
noise.
The case width depends on the product type and its hardware options. There are three different case widths for
the described range of products: 40TE, 60TE and 80TE. The case dimensions and compatibility criteria are as
follows:
Case width (TE) Case width (mm) Case width (inches)
40TE 203.2 8
P345-AD-EN-1 31
Case width (TE) Case width (mm) Case width (inches)

60TE 304.8 12
80TE 406.4 16
Note:
Not all case sizes are available for all models.
3.2 LIST OF BOARDS

The product's hardware consists of several modules drawn from a standard range. The exact specification and
number of hardware modules depends on the model number and variant. Depending on the exact model, the
product in question will use a selection of the following boards.
Board Use
Main Processor board – 60TE or larger Main Processor board – with support for function keys
Power supply board 24/54 V DC Power supply input. Accepts DC voltage between 24 V and 54 V
Power supply board - 48/125 V DC Power supply input. Accepts DC voltage between 48 V and 125 V
Power supply board 110/250 V DC Power supply input. Accepts DC voltage between 110 V and 250 V
Instrument Transformer board Contains the voltage and current transformers
Input board Contains the A/D conversion circuitry
Input board with opto-inputs Contains the A/D conversion circuitry + 8 digital opto-inputs
Opto-input board Contains 8 digital opto-inputs
Output relay board Contains 8 digital output relays
Combined Opto-input / Output relay board Contains 4 digital opto-inputs and 4 digital output relays
IRIG-B board - modulated Interface board for modulated IRIG-B timing signal
IRIG-B - demodulated input Interface board for demodulated IRIG-B timing signal
Fibre optic board Interface board for fibre-based RS485 connection
Fibre optic board + IRIG-B Interface board for fibre-based RS485 connection + demodulated IRIG-B
2nd rear communications board Interface board for RS232 / RS485 connections
2nd rear communications board with IRIG-B input Interface board for RS232 / RS485 + IRIG-B connections
Redundant Ethernet RSTP + PRP + HSR + Failover Redundant Ethernet running RSTP + PRP + HSR + Failover (two fibre pairs), with on-
universal IRIG-B board universal IRIG-B
Redundant Ethernet RSTP + PRP + HSR + Failover Redundant Ethernet running RSTP + PRP + HSR + Failover (two copper pairs), with
universal IRIG-B on-board universal IRIG-B
Redundant Ethernet RSTP + PRP + HSR + Failover Redundant Ethernet running RSTP + PRP + HSR + Failover (one copper, one multi-
universal IRIG-B mode fibre), with on-board universal IRIG-B
Output relay output board (8 outputs) Standard output relay board with 8 outputs
RTD board Contains 10 Resistive Temperature Device inputs
CLIO board Contains 4 current loop inputs and 4 current loop outputs
High Break Output Relay Board Output relay board with high breaking capacity relays
32 P345-AD-EN-1
4 FRONT PANEL
4.1 FRONT PANEL

Depending on the exact model and chosen options, the product will be housed in either a 40TE, 60TE or 80TE case.
The front panels of the products based on 40TE and 80TE cases have a lot of commonality and differ only in that
the 40TE front panel does not include 10 function keys with their associated user-programmable LEDs.
Figure 4: Front panel (80TE)
The front panel consists of:

● Top and bottom compartments with hinged cover
● LCD display
● Keypad
● USB Type B port inside the bottom compartment
● Fixed function LEDs
● Function keys and LEDs (60TE and 80TE models)
● Programmable LEDs
4.1.1 FRONT PANEL COMPARTMENTS

The top compartment contains labels for the:
● Serial number
● Current and voltage ratings.
P345-AD-EN-1 33
The bottom compartment contains:

● USB type B port
4.1.2 HMI PANEL

The keypad provides full access to the device functionality using a range of menu options. The information is
displayed on the LCD. The LCD is a high resolution monochrome display with 16 characters by 3 lines and
controllable back light.
Figure 5: HMI panel
Note:
As the LCD display has a resolution of 16 characters by 3 lines, some of the information is in a condensed mnemonic form.
4.1.3 KEYPAD
The keypad consists of the following keys:
4 arrow keys to navigate the menus (organised around the Enter key)
34 P345-AD-EN-1
An enter key for executing the chosen option
A clear key for clearing the last command
A read key for viewing larger blocks of text (arrow keys now used for
scrolling)
2 hot keys for scrolling through the default display and for control of
setting groups. These are situated directly below the LCD display.
4.1.3.1 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

The LCD is a high resolution monochrome display with 16 characters by 3 lines and controllable back light.
4.1.4 USB PORT

The USB port is situated inside the bottom compartment, and is used to communicate with a locally connected PC.
It has two main purposes:
● To transfer settings information to/from the PC from/to the device.
● For downloading firmware updates and menu text editing.
The port is intended for temporary connection during testing, installation and commissioning. It is not intended to
be used for permanent SCADA communications. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only.
Courier is a proprietary communication protocol to allow communication with a range of protection equipment,
and between the device and the Windows-based support software package.
You can connect the unit to a PC with a USB cable up to 5 m in length.
The inactivity timer for the front port is set to 15 minutes. This controls how long the unit maintains its level of
password access on the front port. If no messages are received on the front port for 15 minutes, any password
access level that has been enabled is cancelled.
Note:
The front USB port does not support automatic extraction of event and disturbance records, although this data can be
accessed manually.
Caution:
When not in use, always close the cover of the USB port to prevent contamination.
P345-AD-EN-1 35
4.1.5 FIXED FUNCTION LEDS

Four fixed-function LEDs on the left-hand side of the front panel indicate the following conditions.
● Trip (Red) switches ON when the IED issues a trip signal. It is reset when the associated fault record is
cleared from the front display. Also the trip LED can be configured as self-resetting.
● Alarm (Yellow) flashes when the IED registers an alarm. This may be triggered by a fault, event or
maintenance record. The LED flashes until the alarms have been accepted (read), then changes to
constantly ON. When the alarms are cleared, the LED switches OFF.
● Out of service (Yellow) is ON when the IED's functions are unavailable.
● Healthy (Green) is ON when the IED is in correct working order, and should be ON at all times. It goes OFF if
the unit’s self-tests show there is an error in the hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is
reflected by the watchdog contacts at the back of the unit.
4.1.6 FUNCTION KEYS

The programmable function keys are available for custom use for some models.
Factory default settings associate specific functions to these keys, but by using programmable scheme logic, you
can change the default functions of these keys to fit specific needs. Adjacent to these function keys are
programmable LEDs, which are usually set to be associated with their respective function keys.
4.1.7 PROGRAMABLE LEDS

The device has a number of programmable LEDs, which can be associated with PSL-generated signals. The
programmable LEDs for most models are tri-colour and can be set to RED, YELLOW or GREEN. However the
programmable LEDs for some models are single-colour (red) only. The single-colour LEDs can be recognised by
virtue of the fact they are large and slightly oval, whereas the tri-colour LEDs are small and round.
36 P345-AD-EN-1
5 REAR PANEL
The MiCOM Px40 series uses a modular construction. Most of the internal workings are on boards and modules
which fit into slots. Some of the boards plug into terminal blocks, which are bolted onto the rear of the unit.
However, some boards such as the communications boards have their own connectors. The rear panel consists of
these terminal blocks plus the rears of the communications boards.
The back panel cut-outs and slot allocations vary. This depends on the product, the type of boards and the
terminal blocks needed to populate the case. The following diagram shows a typical rear view of a case populated
with various boards.
Figure 6: Rear view of populated case
Note:
This diagram is just an example and may not show the exact product described in this manual. It also does not show the full
range of available boards, just a typical arrangement.
Not all slots are the same size. The slot width depends on the type of board or terminal block. For example, HD
(heavy duty) terminal blocks, as required for the analogue inputs, require a wider slot size than MD (medium duty)
terminal blocks. The board positions are not generally interchangeable. Each slot is designed to house a particular
type of board. Again this is model-dependent.
The device may use one or more of the terminal block types shown in the following diagram. The terminal blocks
are fastened to the rear panel with screws.
● Heavy duty (HD) terminal blocks for CT and VT circuits
● Medium duty (MD) terminal blocks for the power supply, opto-inputs, relay outputs and rear
communications port
● MiDOS terminal blocks for CT and VT circuits
● RTD/CLIO terminal block for connection to analogue transducers
P345-AD-EN-1 37
,
Figure 7: Terminal block types
Note:
Not all products use all types of terminal blocks. The product described in this manual may use one or more of the above
types.
5.1 TERMINAL BLOCK INGRESS PROTECTION

IP2x shields and side cover panels are designed to provide IP20 ingress protection for MiCOM terminal blocks. The
shields and covers may be attached during installation or retrofitted to upgrade existing installations—see figure
below. For more information, contact your local sales office or our worldwide Contact Centre.
Figure 8: Example—fitted IP2x shields (cabling omitted for clarity)
38 P345-AD-EN-1
6 BOARDS AND MODULES

Each product comprises a selection of PCBs (Printed Circuit Boards) and subassemblies, depending on the chosen
configuration.
6.1 PCBS
A PCB typically consists of the components, a front connector for connecting into the main system parallel bus via
a ribbon cable, and an interface to the rear. This rear interface may be:
● Directly presented to the outside world (as is the case for communication boards such as Ethernet Boards)
● Presented to a connector, which in turn connects into a terminal block bolted onto the rear of the case (as is
the case for most of the other board types)
Figure 9: Rear connection to terminal block
6.2 SUBASSEMBLIES
A sub-assembly consists of two or more boards bolted together with spacers and connected with electrical
connectors. It may also have other special requirements such as being encased in a metal housing for shielding
against electromagnetic radiation.
Boards are designated by a part number beginning with ZN, whereas pre-assembled sub-assemblies are
designated with a part number beginning with GN. Sub-assemblies, which are put together at the production
stage, do not have a separate part number.
P345-AD-EN-1 39
The products in the Px40 series typically contain two sub-assemblies:

● The power supply assembly comprising:
○ A power supply board
○ An output relay board
● The input module comprising:
○ One or more transformer boards, which contains the voltage and current transformers (partially or
fully populated)
○ One or more input boards
○ Metal protective covers for EM (electromagnetic) shielding
The input module is pre-assembled and is therefore assigned a GN number, whereas the power supply module is
assembled at production stage and does not therefore have an individual part number.
6.3 MAIN PROCESSOR BOARD
Figure 10: Main processor board
The main processor board performs all calculations and controls the operation of all other modules in the IED,
including the data communication and user interfaces. This is the only board that does not fit into one of the slots.
It resides in the front panel and connects to the rest of the system using an internal ribbon cable.
The LCD and LEDs are mounted on the processor board along with the front panel communication ports.
The memory on the main processor board is split into two categories: volatile and non-volatile. The volatile
memory is fast access SRAM, used by the processor to run the software and store data during calculations. The
non-volatile memory is sub-divided into two groups:
● Flash memory to store software code, text and configuration data including the present setting values.
● Supercapacitor-backed SRAM to store disturbance, event, fault and maintenance record data.
There are two board types available depending on the size of the case:
● For models in 40TE cases
● For models in 60TE cases and larger
40 P345-AD-EN-1
6.4 POWER SUPPLY BOARD
Figure 11: Power supply board
The power supply board provides power to the unit. One of three different configurations of the power supply
board can be fitted to the unit. This is specified at the time of order and depends on the magnitude of the supply
voltage that will be connected to it.
There are three board types, which support the following voltage ranges:
● 24/54 V DC
● 48/125 V DC or 40-100V AC
● 110/250 V DC or 100-240V AC
The power supply board connector plugs into a medium duty terminal block. This terminal block is always
positioned on the right hand side of the unit looking from the rear.
The power supply board is usually assembled together with a relay output board to form a complete subassembly,
as shown in the following diagram.
P345-AD-EN-1 41
Figure 12: Power supply assembly
The power supply outputs are used to provide isolated power supply rails to the various modules within the unit.
Three voltage levels are used by the unit’s modules:
● 5.1 V for all of the digital circuits
● +/- 16 V for the analogue electronics such as on the input board
● 22 V for driving the output relay coils.
All power supply voltages, including the 0 V earth line, are distributed around the unit by the 64-way ribbon cable.
The power supply board incorporates inrush current limiting. This limits the peak inrush current to approximately
10 A.
Power is applied to pins 1 and 2 of the terminal block, where pin 1 is negative and pin 2 is positive. The pin
numbers are clearly marked on the terminal block as shown in the following diagram.
42 P345-AD-EN-1
Figure 13: Power supply terminals
6.4.1 WATCHDOG
The Watchdog contacts are also hosted on the power supply board. The Watchdog facility provides two output
relay contacts, one normally open and one normally closed. These are used to indicate the health of the device
and are driven by the main processor board, which continually monitors the hardware and software when the
device is in service.
P345-AD-EN-1 43
Figure 14: Watchdog contact terminals
6.4.2 REAR SERIAL PORT

The rear serial port (RP1) is housed on the power supply board. This is a three-terminal EIA(RS)485 serial
communications port and is intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a remote control centre for
SCADA communication. The interface supports half-duplex communication and provides optical isolation for the
serial data being transmitted and received.
The physical connectivity is achieved using three screw terminals; two for the signal connection, and the third for
the earth shield of the cable. These are located on pins 16, 17 and 18 of the power supply terminal block, which is
on the far right looking from the rear. The interface can be selected between RS485 and K-bus. When the K-Bus
option is selected, the two signal connections are not polarity conscious.
The polarity independent K-bus can only be used for the Courier data protocol. The polarity conscious MODBUS,
IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3.0 protocols need RS485.
The following diagram shows the rear serial port. The pin assignments are as follows:
● Pin 16: Earth shield
● Pin 17: Negative signal
● Pin 18: Positive signal
44 P345-AD-EN-1
Figure 15: Rear serial port terminals
An additional serial port with D-type presentation is available as an optional board, if required.
6.5 INPUT MODULE - 1 TRANSFORMER BOARD
Figure 16: Input module - 1 transformer board
The input module consists of the main input board coupled together with an instrument transformer board. The
instrument transformer board contains the voltage and current transformers, which isolate and scale the
analogue input signals delivered by the system transformers. The input board contains the A/D conversion and
digital processing circuitry, as well as eight digital isolated inputs (opto-inputs).
The boards are connected together physically and electrically. The module is encased in a metal housing for
shielding against electromagnetic interference.
P345-AD-EN-1 45
6.5.1 INPUT MODULE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Optical 8 digital inputs Optical

Isolator Isolator
Noise Noise
filter filter
Parallel Bus
Buffer
Transformer
board
VT
or
CT
Serial Serial Link

A/D Converter
interface
VT
or
CT
V00239
Figure 17: Input module schematic
A/D Conversion
The differential analogue inputs from the CT and VT transformers are presented to the main input board as shown.
Each differential input is first converted to a single input quantity referenced to the input board’s earth potential.
The analogue inputs are sampled and converted to digital, then filtered to remove unwanted properties. The
samples are then passed through a serial interface module which outputs data on the serial sample data bus.
The calibration coefficients are stored in non-volatile memory. These are used by the processor board to correct
for any amplitude or phase errors introduced by the transformers and analogue circuitry.
Opto-isolated inputs
The other function of the input board is to read in the state of the digital inputs. As with the analogue inputs, the
digital inputs must be electrically isolated from the power system. This is achieved by means of the 8 on-board
optical isolators for connection of up to 8 digital signals. The digital signals are passed through an optional noise
filter before being buffered and presented to the unit’s processing boards in the form of a parallel data bus.
This selectable filtering allows the use of a pre-set filter of ½ cycle which renders the input immune to induced
power-system noise on the wiring. Although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly for inter-tripping. This
can be improved by switching off the ½ cycle filter, in which case one of the following methods to reduce ac noise
should be considered.
● Use double pole switching on the input
● Use screened twisted cable on the input circuit
46 P345-AD-EN-1
The opto-isolated logic inputs can be configured for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit for which they are a
part, allowing different voltages for different circuits such as signalling and tripping.
Note:
The opto-input circuitry can be provided without the A/D circuitry as a separate board, which can provide supplementary
opto-inputs.
6.5.2 FREQUENCY RESPONSE

With the exception of the RMS measurements, all other measurements and protection functions are based on the
Fourier-derived fundamental component. The fundamental component is extracted by using a 24 sample Discrete
Fourier Transform (DFT). This gives good harmonic rejection for frequencies up to the 23rd harmonic. The 23rd is
the first predominant harmonic that is not attenuated by the Fourier filter and this is known as an ‘Alias’. However,
the Alias is attenuated by approximately 85% by an additional, analogue, ‘anti-aliasing’ filter (low pass filter). The
combined affect of the anti-aliasing and Fourier filters is shown below.
1
Ideal anti-alias filter response
0.8
Real anti-alias filter Fourier response without

0.6 anti-alias filter
response
0.4
Fourier response with
anti-alias filter
0.2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Alias frequency
50 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz
V00301
Figure 18: Frequency response
For power frequencies that are not equal to the selected rated frequency, the harmonics are attenuated to zero
amplitude. For small deviations of +/-1 Hz, this is not a problem but to allow for larger deviations, frequency
tracking is used.
Frequency tracking automatically adjusts the sampling rate of the analog to digital conversion to match the
applied signal. In the absence of a suitable signal to amplitude track, the sample rate defaults to the selected rated
frequency (Fn).
If the signal is in the tracking range of 5 to 70 Hz, the relay locks on to the signal and the measured frequency
coincides with the power frequency, as shown in the figure above. The resulting outputs for harmonics up to the
23rd will be zero. The device frequency tracks off any voltage or current in the order VA/VB/VC/IA/IB/IC down to
10% Vn for voltage and 5%In for current.
P345-AD-EN-1 47
6.5.3 TRANSFORMER BOARD
Figure 19: Transformer board
The transformer board hosts the current and voltage transformers. These are used to step down the currents and
voltages originating from the power systems' current and voltage transformers to levels that can be used by the
devices' electronic circuitry. In addition to this, the on-board CT and VT transformers provide electrical isolation
between the unit and the power system.
The transformer board is connected physically and electrically to the input board to form a complete input module.
For terminal connections, please refer to the wiring diagrams.
48 P345-AD-EN-1
6.5.4 INPUT BOARD
Figure 20: Input board
The input board is used to convert the analogue signals delivered by the current and voltage transformers into
digital quantities used by the IED. This input board also has on-board opto-input circuitry, providing eight optically-
isolated digital inputs and associated noise filtering and buffering. These opto-inputs are presented to the user by
means of a MD terminal block, which sits adjacent to the analogue inputs HD terminal block.
The input board is connected physically and electrically to the transformer board to form a complete input module.
The terminal numbers of the opto-inputs are as follows:
Terminal Number Opto-input
Terminal 1 Opto 1 -ve
Terminal 2 Opto 1 +ve
Terminal 13 Opto 7 –ve
Terminal 15 Opto 8 –ve
P345-AD-EN-1 49
Terminal Number Opto-input

Terminal 17 Common
Terminal 18 Common
6.6 STANDARD OUTPUT RELAY BOARD
Figure 21: Standard output relay board - 8 contacts
This output relay board has 8 relays with 6 Normally Open contacts and 2 Changeover contacts.
The output relay board is provided together with the power supply board as a complete assembly, or
independently for the purposes of relay output expansion.
There are two cut-out locations in the board. These can be removed to allow power supply components to
protrude when coupling the output relay board to the power supply board. If the output relay board is to be used
independently, these cut-out locations remain intact.
The terminal numbers are as follows:
Terminal Number Output Relay
Terminal 1 Relay 1 NO
50 P345-AD-EN-1
Terminal Number Output Relay

Terminal 13 Relay 7 changeover
Terminal 15 Relay 7 common
Terminal 18 Relay 8 common
6.7 IRIG-B BOARD
Figure 22: IRIG-B board
The IRIG-B board can be fitted to provide an accurate timing reference for the device. The IRIG-B signal is
connected to the board via a BNC connector. The timing information is used to synchronise the IED's internal real-
time clock to an accuracy of 1 ms. The internal clock is then used for time tagging events, fault, maintenance and
disturbance records.
IRIG-B interface is available in modulated or demodulated formats.
The IRIG-B facility is provided in combination with other functionality on a number of additional boards, such as:
● Fibre board with IRIG-B
● Second rear communications board with IRIG-B
● Ethernet board with IRIG-B
● Redundant Ethernet board with IRIG-B
There are three types of each of these boards; one type which accepts a modulated IRIG-B input, one type which
accepts a demodulated IRIG-B input and one type which accepts a universal IRIG-B input.
P345-AD-EN-1 51
6.8 FIBRE OPTIC BOARD
Figure 23: Fibre optic board
This board provides an interface for communicating with a master station. This communication link can use all
compatible protocols (Courier, IEC 60870-5-103, MODBUS and DNP 3.0). It is a fibre-optic alternative to the metallic
RS485 port presented on the power supply terminal block. The metallic and fibre optic ports are mutually exclusive.
The fibre optic port uses BFOC 2.5 ST connectors.
The board comes in two varieties; one with an IRIG-B input and one without:
52 P345-AD-EN-1
6.9 REAR COMMUNICATION BOARD
Figure 24: Rear communication board
The optional communications board containing the secondary communication ports provide two serial interfaces
presented on 9 pin D-type connectors. These interfaces are known as SK4 and SK5. Both connectors are female
connectors, but are configured as DTE ports. This means pin 2 is used to transmit information and pin 3 to receive.
SK4 can be used with RS232, RS485 and K-bus. SK5 can only be used with RS232 and is used for electrical
teleprotection. The optional rear communications board and IRIG-B board are mutually exclusive since they use
the same hardware slot. However, the board comes in two varieties; one with an IRIG-B input and one without.
P345-AD-EN-1 53
6.10 REDUNDANT ETHERNET BOARD
Figure 25: Redundant Ethernet board
This board provides dual redundant Ethernet together with an IRIG-B interface for timing.
Different board variants are available, depending on the redundancy protocol and the type of IRIG-B signal
(unmodulated and modulated). The available redundancy protocols are:
● RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
● PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol)
● HSR (High-availability Seamless Redundancy)
● Failover
There are several variants for this board as follows:

● 100 Mbps redundant Ethernet running RSTP + PRP + HSR + Failover (two fibre pairs), with on-board universal
IRIG-B
● 100 Mbps redundant Ethernet running RSTP + PRP + HSR + Failover (two copper pairs), with on-board
universal IRIG-B
● 100 Mbps redundant Ethernet running RSTP + PRP + HSR + Failover (one copper, one multi-mode fibre), with
on-board universal IRIG-B
The Ethernet and other connection details are described below:
IRIG-B Connector
● Centre connection: Signal
● Outer connection: Earth
Link Fail Connector (Ethernet Board Watchdog Relay)

Pin Closed Open
1-2 Link fail Channel 1 (A) Link ok Channel 1 (A)
2-3 Link fail Channel 2 (B) Link ok Channel 2 (B)
54 P345-AD-EN-1
LEDs
LED Function On Off Flashing
Green Link Link ok Link broken
Yellow Activity Running PRP, RSTP traffic
Optical Fibre Connectors (ST)

Connector RSTP PRP HSR
A RX1 RXA RXA
B TX1 TXA TXA
C RX2 RXB RXB
D TX2 TXB TXB
RJ45 connector
Pin Signal name Signal definition
1 TXP Transmit (positive)
2 TXN Transmit (negative)
3 RXP Receive (positive)
4 - Not used
5 - Not used
6 RXN Receive (negative)
7 - Not used
8 - Not used
P345-AD-EN-1 55
6.11 RTD BOARD
Figure 26: RTD board
The RTD board provides two banks of 15 terminals to support ten RTD inputs, of the type PT100, Ni100, or Ni120,
depending on the product. There are three terminals for each RTD, therefore 30 terminals altogether. The RTD
board fits into slot B or slot C, depending on the model variant.
The terminal numbers of the RTDs are as follows:
Terminal Number RTD connection
Terminal 1 RTD1 wire 1
56 P345-AD-EN-1
Terminal Number RTD connection

6.12 CLIO BOARD
Figure 27: RTD board
The CLIO board provides two banks of 15 terminals to support four current loop inputs and four current loop
outputs. There are three terminals for each input and three for each output, therefore 24 of the terminals are used
altogether. The CLIO board fits into slot B or slot C, depending on the model variant.
The terminal numbers of the current loop inputs and outputs are as follows:
P345-AD-EN-1 57
Terminal Number Current Loop Connection

Terminal 1 CLO1 - 20 mA input
Terminal 3 CLO1 - common input
Terminal 4 Not used
Terminal 8 Not used
Terminal 12 Not used
Terminal 16 CLI1 - 20 mA input
Terminal 18 CLI1 - common input
58 P345-AD-EN-1
6.13 HIGH BREAK OUTPUT RELAY BOARD
Figure 28: High Break relay output board
A High Break output relay board is available as an option. It comprises four normally open output contacts, which
are suitable for high breaking loads.
A High Break contact consists of a high capacity relay with a MOSFET in parallel with it. The MOSFET has a varistor
placed across it to provide protection, which is required when switching off inductive loads. This is because the
stored energy in the inductor causes a high reverse voltage that could damage the MOSFET, if not protected.
When there is a control input command to operate an output contact the miniature relay is operated at the same
time as the MOSFET. The miniature relay contact closes in nominally 3.5 ms and is used to carry the continuous
load current. The MOSFET operates in less than 0.2 ms, but is switched off after 7.5 ms.
When the control input is reset, the MOSFET is again turned on for 7.5 mS. The miniature relay resets in nominally
3.5 ms before the MOSFET. This means the MOSFET is used to break the load. The MOSFET absorbs the energy
when breaking inductive loads and so limits the resulting voltage surge. This contact arrangement is for switching
DC circuits only.
The board number is:
● ZN0042 001
High Break Contact Operation

The following figure shows the timing diagram for High Break contact operation.
P345-AD-EN-1 59
Databus on off
control input
MOSFET operate 7ms 7ms

on on
MOSFET reset
Relay contact
Closed
3.5ms + contact bounce 3.5ms
Load current
V00246
Figure 29: High Break contact operation
High Break Contact Applications

● Efficient scheme engineering
In traditional hard wired scheme designs, High Break capability could only be achieved using external
electromechanical trip relays. Instead, these internal High Break contacts can be used thus reducing space
requirements.
● Accessibility of CB auxiliary contacts
It is common practise to use circuit breaker 52a (CB Closed) auxiliary contacts to break the trip coil current
on breaker opening, thereby easing the duty on the protection contacts. In some cases (such as operation
of disconnectors, or retrofitting), it may be that 52a contacts are either unavailable or unreliable. In such
cases, High Break contacts can be used to break the trip coil current in these applications.
● Breaker fail
In the event of failure of the local circuit breaker (stuck breaker), or defective auxiliary contacts (stuck
contacts), it is incorrect to use 52a contact action. The interrupting duty at the local breaker then falls on the
relay output contacts, which may not be rated to perform this duty. High Break contacts should be used in
this case to avoid the risk of burning out relay contacts.
● Initiation of teleprotection
The High Break contacts also offer fast making, which results in faster tripping. In addition, fast keying of
teleprotection is a benefit. Fast keying bypasses the usual contact operation time, such that permissive,
blocking and intertrip commands can be routed faster.
Warning:
These relay contacts are POLARITY SENSITIVE. External wiring must comply with the polarity
requirements described in the external connection diagram to ensure correct operation.
60 P345-AD-EN-1
CHAPTER 4
SOFTWARE DESIGN
Chapter 4 - Software Design P345
62 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Chapter 4 - Software Design
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the software design of the IED.
Chapter Overview 63
Sofware Design Overview 64
System Level Software 65
Platform Software 67
Protection and Control Functions 68
P345-AD-EN-1 63
2 SOFWARE DESIGN OVERVIEW

The device software can be conceptually categorized into several elements as follows:
● The system level software
● The platform software
● The protection and control software
These elements are not distinguishable to the user, and the distinction is made purely for the purposes of
explanation. The following figure shows the software architecture.
Protection and Control Software Layer

Protection Task
Programmable & Fourier signal Protection

fixed scheme logic processing algorithms Fault locator Disturbance
task recorder task
Supervisor task
Records
and control
Protection
settings
Platform Software Layer
Event, fault,
Remote
disturbance,
Settings database communications
maintenance record
Sampling function interfaces
logging
Front panel Local

interface communications
(LCD + Keypad) interfaces
Sample data + digital Control of interfaces to keypad, LCD, LEDs,

logic inputs front & rear ports.
Control of output contacts
and programmable LEDs Self-checking maintenance records
System Level Software Layer

System services (e.g. device drivers) / Real time operating system / Self-diagnostic software
Hardware Device Layer

LEDs / LCD / Keypad / Memory / FPGA
V00300
Figure 30: Software Architecture
The software, which executes on the main processor, can be divided into a number of functions as illustrated
above. Each function is further broken down into a number of separate tasks. These tasks are then run according
to a scheduler. They are run at either a fixed rate or they are event driven. The tasks communicate with each other
as and when required.
64 P345-AD-EN-1
3 SYSTEM LEVEL SOFTWARE
3.1 REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM

The real-time operating system is used to schedule the processing of the various tasks. This ensures that they are
processed in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system also plays a part in
controlling the communication between the software tasks, through the use of operating system messages.
3.2 SYSTEM SERVICES SOFTWARE

The system services software provides the layer between the hardware and the higher-level functionality of the
platform software and the protection and control software. For example, the system services software provides
drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad and the remote communication ports. It also controls things
like the booting of the processor and the downloading of the processor code into RAM at startup.
3.3 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE

The device includes several self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its hardware and software while in
service. If there is a problem with the hardware or software, it should be able to detect and report the problem, and
attempt to resolve the problem by performing a reboot. In this case, the device would be out of service for a short
time, during which the ‘Healthy’ LED on the front of the device is switched OFF and the watchdog contact at the
rear is ON. If the restart fails to resolve the problem, the unit takes itself permanently out of service; the ‘Healthy’
LED stays OFF and watchdog contact stays ON.
If a problem is detected by the self-monitoring functions, the device attempts to store a maintenance record to
allow the nature of the problem to be communicated to the user.
The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic check which is performed on boot-
up, and secondly a continuous self-checking operation, which checks the operation of the critical functions whilst
it is in service.
3.4 STARTUP SELF-TESTING

The self-testing takes a few seconds to complete, during which time the IED's measurement, recording, control,
and protection functions are unavailable. On a successful start-up and self-test, the ‘Healthy' state LED on the
front of the device is switched on. If a problem is detected during the start-up testing, the device remains out of
service until it is manually restored to working order.
The operations that are performed at start-up are:
1. System boot
2. System software initialisation
3. Platform software initialisation and monitoring
3.4.1 SYSTEM BOOT

The integrity of the Flash memory is verified using a checksum before the program code and stored data is loaded
into RAM for execution by the processor. When the loading has been completed, the data held in RAM is compared
to that held in the Flash memory to ensure that no errors have occurred in the data transfer and that the two are
the same. The entry point of the software code in RAM is then called. This is the IED's initialisation code.
P345-AD-EN-1 65
3.4.2 SYSTEM LEVEL SOFTWARE INITIALISATION

The initialization process initializes the processor registers and interrupts, starts the watchdog timers (used by the
hardware to determine whether the software is still running), starts the real-time operating system and creates
and starts the supervisor task. In the initialization process the device checks the following:
● The status of the supercapacitor
● The integrity of the supercapacitor-backed SRAM that is used to store event, fault and disturbance records
● The operation of the LCD controller
● The watchdog operation
At the conclusion of the initialization software the supervisor task begins the process of starting the platform
software.
3.4.3 PLATFORM SOFTWARE INITIALISATION AND MONITORING

When starting the platform software, the IED checks the following:
● The integrity of the data held in non-volatile memory (using a checksum)
● The operation of the real-time clock
● The optional IRIG-B function (if applicable)
● The presence and condition of the input board
● The analog data acquisition system (it does this by sampling the reference voltage)
At the successful conclusion of all of these tests the unit is entered into service and the application software is
started up.
3.5 CONTINUOUS SELF-TESTING

When the IED is in service, it continually checks the operation of the critical parts of its hardware and software. The
checking is carried out by the system services software and the results are reported to the platform software. The
functions that are checked are as follows:
● The Flash memory containing all program code and language text is verified by a checksum.
● The code and constant data held in system memory is checked against the corresponding data in Flash
memory to check for data corruption.
● The system memory containing all data other than the code and constant data is verified with a checksum.
● The integrity of the digital signal I/O data from the opto-inputs and the output relay coils is checked by the
data acquisition function every time it is executed.
● The operation of the analog data acquisition system is continuously checked by the acquisition function
every time it is executed. This is done by sampling the reference voltages.
● The operation of the optional Ethernet board is checked by the software on the main processor card. If the
Ethernet board fails to respond an alarm is raised and the card is reset in an attempt to resolve the problem.
● The operation of the optional IRIG-B function is checked by the software that reads the time and date from
the board.
In the event that one of the checks detects an error in any of the subsystems, the platform software is notified and
it attempts to log a maintenance record.
If the problem is with the IRIG-B board, the device continues in operation. For problems detected in any other area,
the device initiates a shutdown and re-boot, resulting in a period of up to 10 seconds when the functionality is
unavailable.
A restart should clear most problems that may occur. If, however, the diagnostic self-check detects the same
problem that caused the IED to restart, it is clear that the restart has not cleared the problem, and the device takes
itself permanently out of service. This is indicated by the ‘’health-state’ LED on the front of the device, which
switches OFF, and the watchdog contact which switches ON.
66 P345-AD-EN-1
4 PLATFORM SOFTWARE
The platform software has three main functions:
● To control the logging of records generated by the protection software, including alarms, events, faults, and
maintenance records
● To store and maintain a database of all of the settings in non-volatile memory
● To provide the internal interface between the settings database and the user interfaces, using the front
panel interface and the front and rear communication ports
4.1 RECORD LOGGING

The logging function is used to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance records. The records are stored in
non-volatile memory to provide a log of what has happened. The IED maintains four types of log on a first in first
out basis (FIFO). These are:
● Alarms
● Event records
● Fault records
● Maintenance records
The logs are maintained such that the oldest record is overwritten with the newest record. The logging function
can be initiated from the protection software. The platform software is responsible for logging a maintenance
record in the event of an IED failure. This includes errors that have been detected by the platform software itself or
errors that are detected by either the system services or the protection software function. See the Monitoring and
Control chapter for further details on record logging.
4.2 SETTINGS DATABASE

The settings database contains all the settings and data, which are stored in non-volatile memory. The platform
software manages the settings database and ensures that only one user interface can modify the settings at any
one time. This is a necessary restriction to avoid conflict between different parts of the software during a setting
change.
Changes to protection settings and disturbance recorder settings, are first written to a temporary location SRAM
memory. This is sometimes called 'Scratchpad' memory. These settings are not written into non-volatile memory
immediately. This is because a batch of such changes should not be activated one by one, but as part of a
complete scheme. Once the complete scheme has been stored in SRAM, the batch of settings can be committed to
the non-volatile memory where they will become active.
4.3 INTERFACES
The settings and measurements database must be accessible from all of the interfaces to allow read and modify
operations. The platform software presents the data in the appropriate format for each of the interfaces (LCD
display, keypad and all the communications interfaces).
P345-AD-EN-1 67
5 PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS

The protection and control software processes all of the protection elements and measurement functions. To
achieve this it has to communicate with the system services software, the platform software as well as organise its
own operations.
The protection task software has the highest priority of any of the software tasks in the main processor board. This
ensures the fastest possible protection response.
The protection and control software provides a supervisory task, which controls the start-up of the task and deals
with the exchange of messages between the task and the platform software.
5.1 ACQUISITION OF SAMPLES

After initialization, the protection and control task waits until there are enough samples to process. The acquisition
of samples on the main processor board is controlled by a ‘sampling function’ which is called by the system
services software.
This sampling function takes samples from the input module and stores them in a two-cycle FIFO buffer. The
sample rate is 24 samples per cycle. This results in a nominal sample rate of 1,200 samples per second for a 50 Hz
system and 1,440 samples per second for a 60 Hz system. However the sample rate is not fixed. It tracks the
power system frequency as described in the next section.
5.2 FREQUENCY TRACKING

The device provides a frequency tracking algorithm so that there are always 24 samples per cycle irrespective of
frequency drift within a certain frequency range (see technical specifications). If the frequency falls outside this
range, the sample rate reverts to its default rate of 1200 Hz for 50 Hz or 1440 Hz for 60 Hz.
The frequency tracking of the analog input signals is achieved by a recursive Fourier algorithm which is applied to
one of the input signals. It works by detecting a change in the signal’s measured phase angle. The calculated value
of the frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by the input module, in order to achieve a constant
sample rate per cycle of the power waveform. The value of the tracked frequency is also stored for use by the
protection and control task.
The frequency tracks off any voltage or current in the order VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, down to 10%Vn for voltage and
5%In for current.
5.3 DIRECT USE OF SAMPLED VALUES

Most of the IED’s protection functionality uses the Fourier components calculated by the device’s signal processing
software. However RMS measurements and some special protection algorithms available in some products use
the sampled values directly.
The disturbance recorder also uses the samples from the input module, in an unprocessed form. This is for
waveform recording and the calculation of true RMS values of current, voltage and power for metering purposes.
In the case of special protection algorithms, using the sampled values directly provides exceptionally fast response
because you do not have to wait for the signal processing task to calculate the fundamental. You can act on the
sampled values immediately.
5.4 FOURIER SIGNAL PROCESSING

When the protection and control task is re-started by the sampling function, it calculates the Fourier components
for the analog signals. Although some protection algorithms use some Fourier-derived harmonics (e.g. second
harmonic for magnetizing inrush), most protection functions are based on the Fourier-derived fundamental
components of the measured analog signals. The Fourier components of the input current and voltage signals are
stored in memory so that they can be accessed by all of the protection elements’ algorithms.
68 P345-AD-EN-1
The Fourier components are calculated using single-cycle Fourier algorithm. This Fourier algorithm always uses
the most recent 24 samples from the 2-cycle buffer.
Most protection algorithms use the fundamental component. In this case, the Fourier algorithm extracts the power
frequency fundamental component from the signal to produce its magnitude and phase angle. This can be
represented in either polar format or rectangular format, depending on the functions and algorithms using it.
The Fourier function acts as a filter, with zero gain at DC and unity gain at the fundamental, but with good
harmonic rejection for all harmonic frequencies up to the nyquist frequency. Frequencies beyond this nyquist
frequency are known as alias frequencies, which are introduced when the sampling frequency becomes less than
twice the frequency component being sampled. However, the Alias frequencies are significantly attenuated by an
anti-aliasing filter (low pass filter), which acts on the analog signals before they are sampled. The ideal cut-off point
of an anti-aliasing low pass filter would be set at:
(samples per cycle) ´ (fundamental frequency)/2
At 24 samples per cycle, this would be nominally 600 Hz for a 50 Hz system, or 720 Hz for a 60 Hz system.
The following figure shows the nominal frequency response of the anti-alias filter and the Fourier filter for a 24-
sample single cycle fourier algorithm acting on the fundamental component:
1
Ideal anti-alias filter response
0.8
Real anti-alias filter Fourier response without

0.6 anti-alias filter
response
0.4
Fourier response with
anti-alias filter
0.2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Alias frequency
50 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz
V00301
Figure 31: Frequency Response (indicative only)
5.5 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC

The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow you to configure your own protection schemes to
suit your particular application. This is done with programmable logic gates and delay timers. To allow greater
flexibility, different PSL is allowed for each of the four setting groups.
The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators on the
input board, the outputs of the protection elements such as protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed
protection scheme logic (FSL). The fixed scheme logic provides the standard protection schemes. The PSL consists
of software logic gates and timers. The logic gates can be programmed to perform a range of different logic
functions and can accept any number of inputs. The timers are used either to create a programmable delay,
and/or to condition the logic outputs, such as to create a pulse of fixed duration on the output regardless of the
length of the pulse on the input. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front panel of the relay and the output
contacts at the rear.
The execution of the PSL logic is event driven. The logic is processed whenever any of its inputs change, for
example as a result of a change in one of the digital input signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also,
only the part of the PSL logic that is affected by the particular input change that has occurred is processed. This
reduces the amount of processing time that is used by the PSL. The protection & control software updates the logic
delay timers and checks for a change in the PSL input signals every time it runs.
The PSL can be configured to create very complex schemes. Because of this PSL design is achieved by means of a
PC support package called the PSL Editor. This is available as part of the settings application software MiCOM S1
Agile, or as a standalone software module.
P345-AD-EN-1 69
5.6 EVENT RECORDING

A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal is used to indicate that an event has taken
place. When this happens, the protection and control task sends a message to the supervisor task to indicate that
an event is available to be processed and writes the event data to a fast buffer controlled by the supervisor task.
When the supervisor task receives an event record, it instructs the platform software to create the appropriate log
in non-volatile memory (backed-up SRAM). The operation of the record logging to backed-up SRAM is slower than
the supervisor buffer. This means that the protection software is not delayed waiting for the records to be logged
by the platform software. However, in the rare case when a large number of records to be logged are created in a
short period of time, it is possible that some will be lost, if the supervisor buffer is full before the platform software
is able to create a new log in backed-up SRAM. If this occurs then an event is logged to indicate this loss of
information.
Maintenance records are created in a similar manner, with the supervisor task instructing the platform software to
log a record when it receives a maintenance record message. However, it is possible that a maintenance record
may be triggered by a fatal error in the relay in which case it may not be possible to successfully store a
maintenance record, depending on the nature of the problem.
For more information, see the Monitoring and Control chapter.
5.7 DISTURBANCE RECORDER

The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection and control task. It can record the
waveforms of the calibrated analog channels, plus the values of the digital signals. The recording time is user
selectable up to a maximum of 10.5 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection and
control task once per cycle, and collates the received data into the required length disturbance record. The
disturbance records can be extracted using application software or the SCADA system, which can also store the
data in COMTRADE format, allowing the use of other packages to view the recorded data.
For more information, see the Monitoring and Control chapter.
5.8 FAULT LOCATOR

The fault locator uses 12 cycles of the analog input signals to calculate the fault location. The result is returned to
the protection and control task, which includes it in the fault record. The pre-fault and post-fault voltages are also
presented in the fault record. When the fault record is complete, including the fault location, the protection and
control task sends a message to the supervisor task to log the fault record.
The Fault Locator is not available on all models.
5.9 FUNCTION KEY INTERFACE

The function keys interface directly into the PSL as digital input signals. A change of state is only recognized when
a key press is executed on average for longer than 200 ms. The time to register a change of state depends on
whether the function key press is executed at the start or the end of a protection task cycle, with the additional
hardware and software scan time included. A function key press can provide a latched (toggled mode) or output
on key press only (normal mode) depending on how it is programmed. It can be configured to individual protection
scheme requirements. The latched state signal for each function key is written to non-volatile memory and read
from non-volatile memory during relay power up thus allowing the function key state to be reinstated after power-
up, should power be inadvertently lost.
70 P345-AD-EN-1
CHAPTER 5
CONFIGURATION
Chapter 5 - Configuration P345
72 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Chapter 5 - Configuration
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
Each product has different configuration parameters according to the functions it has been designed to perform.
There is, however, a common methodology used across the entire product series to set these parameters.
Some of the communications setup can only be carried out using the HMI, and cannot be carried out using
settings applications software. This chapter includes concise instructions of how to configure the device,
particularly with respect to the communications setup, as well as a description of the common methodology used
to configure the device in general.
Chapter Overview 73
Settings Application Software 74
Using the HMI Panel 75
Configuring the Data Protocols 85
Date and Time Configuration 91
Phase Rotation 94
P345-AD-EN-1 73
2 SETTINGS APPLICATION SOFTWARE

To configure this device you will need to use the Settings Application Software. The settings application software
used in this range of IEDs is called MiCOM S1 Agile. It is a collection of software tools, which is used for setting up
and managing the IEDs.
Although you can change many settings using the front panel HMI, some of the features cannot be configured
without the Settings Application Software; for example the programmable scheme logic, or IEC61850
communications.
If you do not already have a copy of the Settings Application Software, you can obtain it from GE contact centre.
To configure your product, you will need a data model that matches your product. When you launch the Settings
Application Software, you will be presented with a panel that allows you to invoke the “Data Model Manager”. This
will close the other aspects of the software in order to allow an efficient import of the chosen data model. If you
don’t have, or can’t find, the data model relating to your product, please call the GE contact centre.
When you have loaded all the data models you need, you should restart the Settings Application Software and
start to create a model of your system using the “System Explorer” panel.
The software is designed to be intuitive, but help is available in an online help system and also the Settings
Application Software user guide P40-M&CR-SAS-UG-EN-n, where 'Language' is a 2 letter code designating the
language version of the user guide and 'n' is the latest version of the settings application software.
74 P345-AD-EN-1
3 USING THE HMI PANEL

Using the HMI, you can:
● Display and modify settings
● View the digital I/O signal status
● Display measurements
● Display fault records
● Reset fault and alarm indications
The keypad provides full access to the device functionality using a range of menu options. The information is
displayed on the LCD.
Keys Description Function
To change the menu level or change between settings in a

Up and down cursor keys
particular column, or changing values within a cell
To change default display, change between column headings, or

Left and right cursor keys
changing values within a cell
ENTER key For changing and executing settings
For executing commands and settings for which shortcuts have

Hotkeys
been defined
Cancel key To return to column header from any menu cell
Read key To read alarm messages
Function keys (not all models) For executing user programmable functions
P345-AD-EN-1 75
Note:
As the LCD display has a resolution of 16 characters by 3 lines, some of the information is in a condensed mnemonic form.
3.1 NAVIGATING THE HMI PANEL

The cursor keys are used to navigate the menus. These keys have an auto-repeat function if held down
continuously. This can be used to speed up both setting value changes and menu navigation. The longer the key is
held pressed, the faster the rate of change or movement.
The navigation map below shows how to navigate the menu items.
Default display Default display

option option
Alarm message
Default display options
Column 00 Subsequent column headings Last Column

System data
Vertical cursor keys move

Horizontal cursor
between setting rows
Row 01 keys move Row 01
Language between values
within a cell
The Cancel key
returns to
column header
Subsequent rows Subsequent rows
V00437
Figure 32: Navigating the HMI
3.2 GETTING STARTED

When you first start the IED, it will go through its power up procedure. After a few seconds it will settle down into
one of the top level menus. There are two menus at this level:
● The Alarms menu for when there are alarms present
● The default display menu for when there are no alarms present.
If there are alarms present, the yellow Alarms LED will be flashing and the menu display will read as follows:
76 P345-AD-EN-1
Alarms / Faults
Present
HOTKEY
Even though the device itself should be in full working order when you first start it, an alarm could still be present,
for example, if there is no network connection for a device fitted with a network card. If this is the case, you can
read the alarm by pressing the 'Read' key.
ALARMS
NIC Link Fail
If the device is fitted with an Ethernet card, you will first need to connect the device to an active Ethernet network
to clear the alarm and get the default display.
If there are other alarms present, these must also be cleared before you can get into the default display menu
options.
3.3 DEFAULT DISPLAY

The HMI contains a range of possible options that you can choose to be the default display. The options available
are:
NERC Compliant banner

If the device is a cyber-security model, it will provide a NERC-compliant default display. If the device does not
contain the cyber-security option, this display option is not available.
ACCESS ONLY FOR

AUTHORISED USERS
HOTKEY
Date and time

For example:
11:09:15
23 Nov 2011
HOTKEY
Description (user-defined)
For example:
Description
MiCOM P14NB
HOTKEY
Plant reference (user-defined)

For example:
P345-AD-EN-1 77
Plant Reference
MiCOM
HOTKEY
Access Level
For example:
Access Level
3
HOTKEY
In addition to the above, there are also displays for the system voltages, currents, power and frequency etc.,
depending on the device model.
3.4 DEFAULT DISPLAY NAVIGATION

The following diagram is an example of the default display navigation. In this example, we have used a cyber-
secure model. This is an example only and may not apply in its entirety to all models. The actual display options
available depend on the exact model.
Use the horizontal cursor keys to step through from one display to the next.
NERC compliant
banner
NERC Compliance NERC Compliance

Warning Warning
System Current
Access Level
Measurements
System Voltage
System Frequency
Measurements
System Power
Plant Reference
Measurements
Description Date & Time
V00403
Figure 33: Default display navigation
If the device is cyber-secure but is not yet configured for NERC compliance (see Cyber-security chapter), a warning
will appear when moving from the "NERC compliant" banner. The warning message is as follows:
78 P345-AD-EN-1
DISPLAY NOT NERC

COMPLIANT. OK?
You will have to confirm with the Enter button before you can go any further.
Note:
Whenever the IED has an uncleared alarm the default display is replaced by the text Alarms/ Faults present. You cannot
override this default display. However, you can enter the menu structure from the default display, even if the display shows
the Alarms/Faults present message.
3.5 PASSWORD ENTRY

Configuring the default display (in addition to modification of other settings) requires level 3 access. You will be
prompted for a password before you can make any changes, as follows. The default level 3 password is AAAA.
Enter Password
1. A flashing cursor shows which character field of the password can be changed. Press the up or down cursor
keys to change each character (tip: pressing the up arrow once will return an upper case "A" as required by
the default level 3 password).
2. Use the left and right cursor keys to move between the character fields of the password.
3. Press the Enter key to confirm the password. If you enter an incorrect password, an invalid password
message is displayed then the display reverts to Enter password. On entering a valid password a message
appears indicating that the password is correct and which level of access has been unlocked. If this level is
sufficient to edit the selected setting, the display returns to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If
the correct level of password has not been entered, the password prompt page appears again.
4. To escape from this prompt press the Clear key. Alternatively, enter the password using the Password
setting in the SYSTEM DATA column. If the keypad is inactive for 15 minutes, the password protection of the
front panel user interface reverts to the default access level.
To manually reset the password protection to the default level, select Password, then press the CLEAR key instead
of entering a password.
Note:
In the SECURITY CONFIG column, you can set the maximum number of attemps, the time window in which the failed attempts
are counted and the time duration for which the user is blocked.
P345-AD-EN-1 79
3.6 PROCESSING ALARMS AND RECORDS

If there are any alarm messages, they will appear on the default display and the yellow alarm LED flashes. The
alarm messages can either be self-resetting or latched. If they are latched, they must be cleared manually.
1. To view the alarm messages, press the Read key. When all alarms have been viewed but not cleared, the
alarm LED changes from flashing to constantly on, and the latest fault record appears (if there is one).
2. Scroll through the pages of the latest fault record, using the cursor keys. When all pages of the fault record
have been viewed, the following prompt appears.
Press Clear To
Reset Alarms
3. To clear all alarm messages, press the Clear key. To return to the display showing alarms or faults present,
and leave the alarms uncleared, press the Read key.
4. Depending on the password configuration settings, you may need to enter a password before the alarm
messages can be cleared.
5. When all alarms are cleared, the yellow alarm LED switches off. If the red LED was on, this will also be
switched off.
Note:
To speed up the procedure, you can enter the alarm viewer using the Read key and subsequently pressing the Clear key. This
goes straight to the fault record display. Press the Clear key again to move straight to the alarm reset prompt, then press the
Clear key again to clear all alarms.
3.7 MENU STRUCTURE

Settings, commands, records and measurements are stored in a local database inside the IED. When using the
Human Machine Interface (HMI) it is convenient to visualise the menu navigation system as a table. Each item in
the menu is known as a cell, which is accessed by reference to a column and row address. Each column and row is
assigned a 2-digit hexadecimal numbers, resulting in a unique 4-digit cell address for every cell in the database.
The main menu groups are allocated columns and the items within the groups are allocated rows, meaning a
particular item within a particular group is a cell.
Each column contains all related items, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings and records are in the
same column.
There are three types of cell:
● Settings: this is for parameters that can be set to different values
● Commands: this is for commands to be executed
● Data: this is for measurements and records to be viewed, which are not settable
Note:
Sometimes the term "Setting" is used generically to describe all of the three types.
The table below, provides an example of the menu structure:

SYSTEM DATA (Col 00) VIEW RECORDS (Col 01) MEASUREMENTS 1 (Col 02) …
Language (Row 01) "Select Event [0...n]" (Row 01) IA Magnitude (Row 01) …
Password (Row 02) Menu Cell Ref (Row 02) IA Phase Angle (Row 02) …
Sys Fn Links (Row 03) Time & Date (Row 03) IB Magnitude (Row 03) …
… … … …
80 P345-AD-EN-1
It is convenient to specify all the settings in a single column, detailing the complete Courier address for each
setting. The above table may therefore be represented as follows:
Setting Column Row Description
SYSTEM DATA 00 00 First Column definition
Language (Row 01) 00 01 First setting within first column
Password (Row 02) 00 02 Second setting within first column
Sys Fn Links (Row 03) 00 03 Third setting within first column
… … …
VIEW RECORDS 01 00 Second Column definition
Select Event [0...n] 01 01 First setting within second column
Menu Cell Ref 01 02 Second setting within second column
Time & Date 01 03 Third setting within second column
… … …
MEASUREMENTS 1 02 00 Third Column definition
IA Magnitude 02 01 First setting within third column
IA Phase Angle 02 02 Second setting within third column
IB Magnitude 02 03 Third setting within third column
… … …
The first three column headers are common throughout much of the product ranges. However the rows within
each of these column headers may differ according to the product type. Many of the column headers are the
same for all products within the series. However, there is no guarantee that the addresses will be the same for a
particular column header. Therefore you should always refer to the product settings documentation and not make
any assumptions.
3.8 CHANGING THE SETTINGS

1. Starting at the default display, press the Down cursor key to show the first column heading.
2. Use the horizontal cursor keys to select the required column heading.
3. Use the vertical cursor keys to view the setting data in the column.
4. To return to the column header, either press the Up cursor key for a second or so, or press the Clear key
once. It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading level.
5. To return to the default display, press the Up cursor key or the Clear key from any of the column headings. If
you use the auto-repeat function of the Up cursor key, you cannot go straight to the default display from
one of the column cells because the auto-repeat stops at the column heading.
6. To change the value of a setting, go to the relevant cell in the menu, then press the Enter key to change the
cell value. A flashing cursor on the LCD shows that the value can be changed. You may be prompted for a
password first.
7. To change the setting value, press the Up and Down cursor keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary
value or a text string, select the required bit or character to be changed using the horizontal cursor keys.
P345-AD-EN-1 81
8. Press the Enter key to confirm the new setting value or the Clear key to discard it. The new setting is
automatically discarded if it is not confirmed within 15 seconds.
9. For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be confirmed before
they are used. When all required changes have been entered, return to the column heading level and press
the Down cursor key. Before returning to the default display, the following prompt appears.
Update settings?
ENTER or CLEAR
10. Press the Enter key to accept the new settings or press the Clear key to discard the new settings.
Note:
For the protection group and disturbance recorder settings, if the menu time-out occurs before the changes have been
confirmed, the setting values are discarded. Control and support settings, howeverr, are updated immediately after they are
entered, without the Update settings? prompt.
3.9 DIRECT ACCESS (THE HOTKEY MENU)

It can be an onerous process to configure settings using the HMI panel, especially for settings and commands that
need to be executed quickly or on a regular basis. The IED provides a pair of keys directly below the LCD display,
which can be used to execute specified settings and commands directly.
The functions available for direct access using these keys are:
● Setting group selection
● Control Inputs
These functions are enabled or disabled in the Direct Access cell in the CONFIGURATION column.
3.9.1 SETTING GROUP SELECTION USING HOTKEYS

In some models you can use the hotkey menu to select the settings group. By default, only Setting group 1 is
enabled. Other setting groups will only be available if they are first enabled. To be able to select a different setting
group, you must first enable them in the CONFIGURATION column.
To access the hotkey menu from the default display, you press the key directly below the HOTKEY text on the LCD.
The following screen will appear.
¬User32 STG GP®

HOTKEY MENU
EXIT
Use the right cursor keys to enter the SETTING GROUP menu.
¬Menu User01®
SETTING GROUP 1
Nxt Grp Select
Select the setting group with Nxt Grp and confirm by pressing Select. If neither of the cursor keys is pressed within
20 seconds of entering a hotkey sub menu, the device reverts to the default display.
82 P345-AD-EN-1
3.9.2 CONTROL INPUTS

The control inputs are user-assignable functions. You can use the CTRL I/P CONFIG column to configure the control
inputs for the hotkey menu. In order to do this, use the first setting Hotkey Enabled cell to enable or disable any of
the 32 control inputs. You can then set each control input to latched or pulsed and set its command to On/Off,
Set/Reset, In/Out, or Enabled/Disabled.
By default, the hotkey is enabled for all 32 control inputs and they are set to Set/Reset and are Latched.
To access the hotkey menu from the default display, you press the key directly below the HOTKEY text on the LCD.
The following screen will appear.
¬User32 STG GP®

HOTKEY MENU
EXIT
Press the right cursor key twice to get to the first control input, or the left cursor key to get to the last control input.
¬STP GP User02®
Control Input 1
EXIT SET
Now you can execute the chosen function (Set/Reset in this case).
If neither of the cursor keys is pressed within 20 seconds of entering a hotkey sub menu, the device reverts to the
default display.
3.10 FUNCTION KEYS

Most products have a number of function keys for programming control functionality using the programmable
scheme logic (PSL).
Each function key has an associated programmable tri-colour LED that can be programmed to give the desired
indication on function key activation.
These function keys can be used to trigger any function that they are connected to as part of the PSL. The function
key commands are in the FUNCTION KEYS column.
The first cell down in the FUNCTION KEYS column is the Fn Key Status cell. This contains a binary string, which
represents the function key commands. Their status can be read from this binary string.
FUNCTION KEYS
Fn Key Status
0000000000
The next cell down (Fn Key 1) allows you to activate or disable the first function key (1). The Lock setting allows a
function key to be locked. This allows function keys that are set to Toggled mode and their DDB signal active
‘high’, to be locked in their active state, preventing any further key presses from deactivating the associated
function. Locking a function key that is set to the Normal mode causes the associated DDB signals to be
permanently off. This safety feature prevents any inadvertent function key presses from activating or deactivating
critical functions.
P345-AD-EN-1 83
FUNCTION KEYS
Fn Key 1
Unlocked
The next cell down (Fn Key 1 Mode) allows you to set the function key to Normal or Toggled. In the Toggle mode
the function key DDB signal output stays in the set state until a reset command is given, by activating the function
key on the next key press. In the Normal mode, the function key DDB signal stays energised for as long as the
function key is pressed then resets automatically. If required, a minimum pulse width can be programmed by
adding a minimum pulse timer to the function key DDB output signal.
FUNCTION KEYS
Fn Key 1 Mode
Toggled
The next cell down (Fn Key 1 Label) allows you to change the label assigned to the function. The default label is
Function key 1 in this case. To change the label you need to press the enter key and then change the text on
the bottom line, character by character. This text is displayed when a function key is accessed in the function key
menu, or it can be displayed in the PSL.
FUNCTION KEYS
Fn Key 1 Label
Function Key 1
Subsequent cells allow you to carry out the same procedure as above for the other function keys.
The status of the function keys is stored in non-volatile memory. If the auxiliary supply is interrupted, the status of
all the function keys is restored. The IED only recognises a single function key press at a time and a minimum key
press duration of approximately 200 ms is required before the key press is recognised. This feature avoids
accidental double presses.
84 P345-AD-EN-1
4 CONFIGURING THE DATA PROTOCOLS

Different protocols can be used with the various ports. The choice of protocol depends on the chosen model. Each
port can support only one protocol at a time. The range of available communication settings depend on which
protocol has been chosen.
Depending on the exact model, the following choices may be available:
● Courier over RS485
● Tunneled Courier over Ethernet
● MODBUS over RS485
● DNP3 over RS485
● DNP3 over Ethernet
● IEC 60870-5-103 over RS485
● IEC61850 over Ethernet
Note:
Not all protocols are available on all products
You configure most of the communication settings using the HMI. Depending on the model, you will also need to
use the settings applications software to carry out some of the configuration, such as the IEC61850 configurator.
Detailed information on configuring the data protocols can be found in the communications chapter.
4.1 COURIER CONFIGURATION

To configure the device:
1. Select the CONFIGURATION column and check that the Comms settings cell is set to Visible.
2. Select the COMMUNICATIONS column.
3. Move to the first cell down (RP1 protocol). This is a non-settable cell, which shows the chosen
communication protocol – in this case Courier.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Protocol
Courier
4. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Address). This cell controls the address of the RP1 port on the device. Up to
32 IEDs can be connected to one spur. It is therefore necessary for each IED to have a unique address so
that messages from the master control station are accepted by one IED only. Courier uses an integer
number between 1 and 254 for the Relay Address. It is set to 255 by default, which has to be changed. It is
important that no two IEDs share the same address.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Address
100
5. Move down to the next cell (RP1 InactivTimer). This cell controls the inactivity timer. The inactivity timer
controls how long the IED waits without receiving any messages on the rear port before revoking any
password access that was enabled and discarding any changes. For the rear port this can be set between 1
and 30 minutes.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Inactivtimer
10.00 mins.
P345-AD-EN-1 85
6. If the optional fibre optic connectors are fitted, the RP1 PhysicalLink cell is visible. This cell controls the
physical media used for the communication (Copper or Fibre optic).
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 PhysicalLink
Copper
7. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Card Status). This cell is not settable. It displays the status of the chosen
physical layer protocol for RP1.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Card Status
K-Bus OK
8. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Port Config). This cell controls the type of serial connection. Select between
K-Bus or RS485.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Port Config
K-Bus
9. If using EIA(RS)485, the next cell (RP1 Comms Mode) selects the communication mode. The choice is either
IEC 60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or 10-bit no parity. If using K-Bus this cell will not
appear.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Comms Mode
IEC 60870 FT1.2
10. If using EIA(RS)485, the next cell down controls the baud rate. Three baud rates are supported; 9600, 19200
and 38400. If using K-Bus this cell will not appear as the baud rate is fixed at 64 kbps.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Baud rate
19200
4.2 DNP3 CONFIGURATION

communication protocol – in this case DNP3.0.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Protocol
DNP3.0
4. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Address). This cell controls the DNP3.0 address of the IED. Up to 32 IEDs can
be connected to one spur, therefore it is necessary for each IED to have a unique address so that messages
from the master control station are accepted by only one IED. DNP3.0 uses a decimal number between 1
and 65519 for the Relay Address. It is important that no two IEDs have the same address.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Address
1
86 P345-AD-EN-1
5. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Baud Rate). This cell controls the baud rate to be used. Six baud rates are
supported by the IED 1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps and 38400 bps. Make sure that
the baud rate selected on the IED is the same as that set on the master station.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Baud rate
9600 bits/s
6. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Parity). This cell controls the parity format used in the data frames. The
parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. Make sure that the parity format selected on the IED is
the same as that set on the master station.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Parity
None
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 PhysicalLink
Copper
8. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Time Sync). This cell affects the time synchronisation request from the
master by the IED. It can be set to enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP3.0 master to
synchronise the time on the IED.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Time Sync
Enabled
4.2.1 DNP3 CONFIGURATOR

A PC support package for DNP3.0 is available as part of the supplied settings application software (MiCOM S1 Agile)
to allow configuration of the device's DNP3.0 response. The configuration data is uploaded from the device to the
PC in a block of compressed format data and downloaded in a similar manner after modification. The new DNP3.0
configuration takes effect after the download is complete. To restore the default configuration at any time, from
the CONFIGURATION column, select the Restore Defaults cell then select All Settings.
In MiCOM S1 Agile, the DNP3.0 data is shown in three main folders, one folder each for the point configuration,
integer scaling and default variation (data format). The point configuration also includes screens for binary inputs,
binary outputs, counters and analogue input configuration.
If the device supports DNP Over Ethernet, the configuration related settings are done in the folder DNP Over
Ethernet.
4.3 IEC 60870-5-103 CONFIGURATION

communication protocol – in this case IEC 60870-5-103.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
P345-AD-EN-1 87
4. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Address). This cell controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the IED. Up to 32
IEDs can be connected to one spur. It is therefore necessary for each IED to have a unique address so that
messages from the master control station are accepted by one IED only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an integer
number between 0 and 254 for the address. It is important that no two IEDs have the same IEC 60870 5 103
address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the IED.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 address
162
5. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Baud Rate). This cell controls the baud rate to be used. Two baud rates are
supported by the IED, 9600 bits/s and 19200 bits/s. Make sure that the baud rate selected on the
IED is the same as that set on the master station.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Baud rate
9600 bits/s
6. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Meas Period). The next cell down controls the period between
IEC 60870-5-103 measurements. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the IED to supply measurements at
regular intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be set between 1
and 60 seconds.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Meas Period
30.00 s
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 PhysicalLink
Copper
8. The next cell down (RP1 CS103Blcking) can be used for monitor or command blocking.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 CS103Blcking
Disabled
9. There are three settings associated with this cell; these are:
Setting: Description:
Disabled No blocking selected.
When the monitor blocking DDB Signal is active high, either by energising an opto input or control input,
Monitor Blocking reading of the status information and disturbance records is not permitted. When in this mode the device
returns a "Termination of general interrogation" message to the master station.
When the command blocking DDB signal is active high, either by energising an opto input or control input,
Command Blocking all remote commands will be ignored (i.e. CB Trip/Close, change setting group etc.). When in this mode the
device returns a "negative acknowledgement of command" message to the master station.
4.4 MODBUS CONFIGURATION

88 P345-AD-EN-1
3. Move to the first cell down (RP1 protocol). This is a non settable cell, which shows the chosen
communication protocol – in this case Modbus.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Protocol
Modbus
4. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Address). This cell controls the Modbus address of the IED. Up to 32 IEDs
can be connected to one spur, therefore it is necessary for each IED to have a unique address so that
messages from the master control station are accepted by only one IED. Modbus uses a decimal number
between 1 and 247 for the Relay Address. It is important that no two IEDs have the same address.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Address
1
controls how long the IED waits without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its
default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set
between 1 and 30 minutes.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Inactivtimer
10.00 mins
supported by the IED 1200 bits/s, 2400 bits/s, 4800 bits/s, 9600 bits/s, 19200 bits/s and 38400 bits/s. Make
sure that the baud rate selected on the IED is the same as that set on the master station.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Baud rate
9600 bits/s
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Parity
None
8. Move down to the next cell (Modbus IEC Time). This cell controls the order in which the bytes of information
are transmitted. There is a choice of Standard or Reverse. When Standard is selected the time format
complies with IEC 60870-5-4 requirements such that byte 1 of the information is transmitted first, followed
by bytes 2 through to 7. If Reverse is selected the transmission of information is reversed.
COMMUNICATIONS
Modbus IEC Time
Standard
4.5 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATION

You cannot configure the device for IEC 61850 edition 1 using the HMI panel on the product. For this you must use
the IEC 61850 Configurator, which is part of the settings application software. If the device is compatible with
edition 2, however, you can configure it with the HMI. To configure IEC61850 edition 2 using the HMI, you must first
enable the IP From HMI setting, after which you can set the media (copper or fibre), IP address, subnet mask and
gateway address.
P345-AD-EN-1 89
IEC 61850 allows IEDs to be directly configured from a configuration file. The IED’s system configuration
capabilities are determined from an IED Capability Description file (ICD), supplied with the product. By using ICD
files from the products to be installed, you can design, configure and test (using simulation tools), a substation’s
entire protection scheme before the products are installed into the substation.
To help with this process, the settings application software provides an IEC 61850 Configurator tool, which allows
the pre-configured IEC 61850 configuration file to be imported and transferred to the IED. As well as this, you can
manually create configuration files for all products, based on their original IED capability description (ICD file).
Other features include:
● The extraction of configuration data for viewing and editing.
● A sophisticated error checking sequence to validate the configuration data before sending to the IED.
Note:
Some configuration data is available in the IEC61850 CONFIG. column, allowing read-only access to basic configuration data.
4.5.1 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATION BANKS

There are two configuration banks:
● Active Configuration Bank
● Inactive Configuration Bank
Any new configuration sent to the IED is automatically stored in the inactive configuration bank, therefore not
immediately affecting the current configuration.
Following an upgrade, the IEC 61850 Configurator tool can be used to transmit a command, which authorises
activation of the new configuration contained in the inactive configuration bank. This is done by switching the
active and inactive configuration banks. The capability of switching the configuration banks is also available using
the IEC61850 CONFIG. column of the HMI.
The SCL Name and Revision attributes of both configuration banks are available in the IEC61850 CONFIG. column
of the HMI.
4.5.2 IEC 61850 NETWORK CONNECTIVITY

Configuration of the IP parameters and SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) time synchronisation parameters is
performed by the IEC 61850 Configurator tool. If these parameters are not available using an SCL (Substation
Configuration Language) file, they must be configured manually.
Every IP address on the Local Area Network must be unique. Duplicate IP addresses result in conflict and must be
avoided. Most IEDs check for a conflict on every IP configuration change and at power up and they raise an alarm
if an IP conflict is detected.
The IED can be configured to accept data from other networks using the Gateway setting. If multiple networks are
used, the IP addresses must be unique across networks.
90 P345-AD-EN-1
5 DATE AND TIME CONFIGURATION

The date and time setting will normally be updated automatically by the chosen UTC (Universal Time Co-
ordination) time synchronisation mechanism when the device is in service. You can also set the date and time
manually using the Date/Time cell in the DATE AND TIME column.
5.1 USING AN SNTP SIGNAL

When using SNTP to maintain the clock, the IED must first be connected to the SNTP server, which should be
energized and functioning.
1. In the DATE AND TIME column, check that either the Primary Source or Secondary Source setting is set to
SNTP.
2. Ensure that the IED is receiving valid time synchronisation messages by checking that the SNTP Status cell
reads Server 1 OK or Server 2 OK.
3. Check that the Act. Time Source cell reads SNTP. This indicates that the IED is using PTP as the source for
its time. Note that If IRIG-B or PTP have been selected as the Primary Source, these must first be
disconnected before the device can switch to SNTP as the active source.
4. Once the IED is using SNTP as the active time source, adjust the time offset of the universal coordinated
time on the SNTP Server equipment, so that local time is displayed.
5. Check that the time, date and month are correct in the Date/Time cell.
5.2 USING AN IRIG-B SIGNAL

When using IRIG-B to maintain the clock, the IED must first be connected to the timing source equipment (usually a
P594/RT430), which should be energized and functioning.
IRIG-B.
2. Ensure the IED is receiving the IRIG-B signal by checking that IRIG-B Status cell reads Active
3. Check that the Act. Time Source cell reads IRIG-B. This indicates that the IED is using IRIG-B as the
source for its time. Note that If SNTP or PTP have been selected as the Primary Source, these must first be
disconnected before the device can switch to IRIG-B as the active source.
4. Once the IED is using IRIG-B as the active time source, adjust the time offset of the universal coordinated
time (satellite clock time) on the satellite clock equipment, so that local time is displayed.
5. Check that the time, date and month are correct in the Date/Time cell. The IRIG-B signal does not contain
the current year so this also needs to be set manually in this cell.
6. If the auxiliary supply fails, the time and date are maintained by the supercapacitor. Therefore, when the
auxiliary supply is restored, you should not have to set the time and date again. To test this, remove the
IRIG-B signal, and then remove the auxiliary supply. Leave the device de-energized for approximately 30
seconds. On re-energization, the time should be correct.
7. Reconnect the IRIG-B signal.
5.3 USING AN IEEE 1588 PTP SIGNAL

When using IEEE 1588 PTP to maintain the clock, the IED must first be connected to the PTP Grandmaster, which
should be energized and functioning.
PTP.
2. Set the Domain Number setting. The domain defines which clocks the IED will use for synchronisation.
Therefore this number must match the domain used by the other clocks on the network.
P345-AD-EN-1 91
3. Ensure that the IED is receiving valid time synchronisation messages by checking that the PTP Status cell
reads Valid Master.
4. Check that Act. Time Source cell reads PTP. This indicates that the IED is using PTP as the source for its
time. Note that If IRIG-B or SNTP have been selected as the Primary Source, these must first be
disconnected before the device can switch to PTP as the active source.
5. Once the IED is using PTP as the active time source, adjust the time offset of the universal coordinated time
on the Master Clock equipment, so that local time is displayed.
6. Check that the time, date and month are correct in the Date/Time cell.
5.4 WITHOUT A TIMING SOURCE SIGNAL

If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B, PTP or SNTP signal, in the DATE AND TIME column, ensure
that both the Primary Source and Secondary Source are set to NONE.
1. Check that Act. Time Source cell reads Free Running.
2. Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using the Date/Time cell or the serial protocol.
3. If the auxiliary supply fails, the time and date are maintained by the supercapacitor. Therefore, when the
auxiliary supply is restored, you should not have to set the time and date again. To test this, remove the
auxiliary supply. Leave the device de-energized for approximately 30 seconds. On re-energization, the time
should be correct.
5.5 TIME ZONE COMPENSATION

The UTC time standard uses Greenwich Mean Time as its standard. Without compensation, the date and time
would be displayed on the device irrespective of its location.
You may wish to display the local time corresponding to its geographical location. You can do this with the settings
LocalTime Enable and LocalTime Offset.
The LocalTime Enable has three setting options; Disabled, Fixed, and Flexible.
With Disabled, no local time zone is maintained. Time synchronisation from any interface will be used to directly
set the master clock. All times displayed on all interfaces will be based on the master clock with no adjustment.
With Fixed, a local time zone adjustment is defined using the LocalTime Offset setting and all non-IEC 61850
interfaces, which uses the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP), are compensated to display the local time.
With Flexible, a local time zone adjustment is defined using the LocalTime Offset setting. The non-local and
non-IEC 61850 interfaces can be set to either the UTC zone or the local time zone. The local interfaces are always
set to the local time zone and the Ethernet interface is always set to the UTC zone.
The interfaces where you can select between UTC and Local Time are the serial interfaces RP1, RP2 and Tunnelled
Courier (if applicable). This is achieved by means of the following settings, each of which can be set to UTC or
Local.:
● RP1 Time Zone
● RP2 Time Zone
● Tunnel Time Zone
The LocalTime Offset setting allows you to enter the local time zone compensation from -12 to + 12 hours at 15
minute intervals.
5.6 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME COMPENSATION

It is possible to compensate for Daylight Saving time using the following settings
● DST Enable
● DST Offset
92 P345-AD-EN-1
● DST Start
● DST Start Day
● DST Start Month
● DST Start Mins
● DST End
● DST End Day
● DST End Month
● DST End Mins
These settings are described in the DATE AND TIME settings table in the configuration chapter.
P345-AD-EN-1 93
6 PHASE ROTATION
The product provides a facility to maintain correct operation of all the protection functions even when the system
is running in a reverse phase sequence. This is achieved by the Phase Sequence setting in the SYSTEM CONFIG
column, and is available for all four setting groups.
You can configure the Phase Sequence setting to Standard ABC or Reverse ABC. This setting does not
perform any internal phase swapping of the analog channels.
The Phase Sequence setting affects the sequence component calculation as follows (In this example, the positive
and negative sequence currents are shown. The same principle applies to voltages):
Standard ABC
Ī1 = 1/3(ĪA + aĪB +a2ĪC)
Ī2 = 1/3(ĪA + aĪB +a2ĪC)
Reverse ABC
Ī1 = 1/3(ĪA + a2ĪB +aĪC)
Ī2 = 1/3(ĪA + a2ĪB +aĪC)

where a is the operator 1Ð120°
The phase Sequence setting also affects the directional overcurrent protection as follows:
Standard ABC
● Phase A: Use IA and VBC
● Phase B: Use IB and VCA
● Phase C: Use IC and VAB
Reverse ABC
● Phase A: Use IA and -VBC
● Phase B: Use IB and -VCA
● Phase C: Use IC and -VAB
6.1 CT AND VT REVERSAL

The product also provides VT and CT reversal settings (in the SYSTEM CONFIG column), which can be used in
applications where some or all of the voltage or current inputs are temporarily reversed, for example in pump
storage applications. These settings affect the order of the analog channels in the device and are set to emulate
the order of the channels on the power system. So assuming the settings emulate the change in phase
configuration on the power system, all the protection functions will naturally operate as per a standard phase
rotation system. The phase sequence calculations and the protection functions all remain unchanged.
94 P345-AD-EN-1
CHAPTER 6
SUPERVISION
Chapter 6 - Supervision P345
96 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Chapter 6 - Supervision
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the supervison functions.
Chapter Overview 97
Voltage Transformer Supervision 98
Current Transformer Supervision 101
Trip Circuit Supervision 104
P345-AD-EN-1 97
2 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION

The Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) function is used to detect failure of the AC voltage inputs to the
protection. This may be caused by voltage transformer faults, overloading, or faults on the wiring, which usually
results in one or more of the voltage transformer fuses blowing.
If there is a failure of the AC voltage input, the IED could misinterpret this as a failure of the actual phase voltages
on the power system, which could result in unnecessary tripping of a circuit breaker.
The VTS logic is designed to prevent such a situation by detecting voltage input failures, which are NOT caused by
power system phase voltage failure, and automatically blocking associated voltage dependent protection
elements. A time-delayed alarm output is available to warn of a VTS condition.
The following scenarios are possible with respect to the failure of the VT inputs.
● Loss of one or two-phase voltages
● Loss of all three-phase voltages under load conditions
● Absence of three-phase voltages upon line energisation
2.1 LOSS OF ONE OR TWO PHASE VOLTAGES

If the power system voltages are healthy, no Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) current will be present. If however,
one or two of the AC voltage inputs are missing, there will be Negative Phase Sequence voltage present, even if the
actual power system phase voltages are healthy. VTS works by detecting Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) voltage
without the presence of Negative Phase Sequence current. So if there is NPS voltage present, but no NPS current,
it is certain that there is a problem with the voltage transformers and a VTS block should be applied to voltage
dependent protection functions to prevent maloperation. The use of negative sequence quantities ensures correct
operation even where three-limb or V-connected VTs are used.
2.2 LOSS OF ALL THREE PHASE VOLTAGES

If all three voltage inputs are lost, there will be no Negative Phase Sequence quantities present, but the device will
see that there is no voltage input. If this is caused by a power system failure, there will be a step change in the
phase currents. However, if this is not caused by a power system failure, there will be no change in any of the
phase currents. So if there is no measured voltage on any of the three phases and there is no change in any of the
phase currents, this indicates that there is a problem with the voltage transformers and a VTS block should be
applied to voltage dependent protection functions to prevent maloperation.
2.3 ABSENCE OF ALL THREE PHASE VOLTAGES ON LINE ENERGISATION

On line energization there should be a change in the phase currents as a result of loading or line charging current.
Under this condition we need an alternative method of detecting three-phase VT failure.
If there is no measured voltage on all three phases during line energization, two conditions might apply:
● A three-phase VT failure
● A close-up three-phase fault.
The first condition would require VTS to block the voltage-dependent functions.
In the second condition, voltage dependent functions should not be blocked, as tripping is required.
To differentiate between these two conditions overcurrent level detectors are used (VTS I> Inhibit and VTS I2>
Inhibit). These prevent a VTS block from being issued in case of a genuine fault. These elements should be set in
excess of any non-fault based currents on line energisation (load, line charging current, transformer inrush current
if applicable), but below the level of current produced by a close-up three-phase fault.
98 P345-AD-EN-1
If the line is closed where a three-phase VT failure is present, the overcurrent detector will not operate and a VTS
block will be applied. Closing onto a three-phase fault will result in operation of the overcurrent detector and
prevent a VTS block being applied.
2.4 VTS IMPLEMENTATION

VTS is implemented in the SUPERVISION column of the relevant settings group, under the sub-heading VT
SUPERVISION.
The following settings are relevant for VT Supervision:
● VTS Status: determines whether the VTS Operate output will be a blocking output or an alarm indication
only
● VTS Reset Mode: determines whether the Reset is to be manual or automatic
● VTS Time delay: determines the operating time delay
● VTS I> Inhibit: inhibits VTS operation in the case of a phase overcurrent fault
● VTS I2> Inhibit: inhibits VTS operation in the case of a negative sequence overcurrent fault
VTS is only enabled during a live line condition (as indicated by the pole dead logic) to prevent operation under
dead system conditions.
2.5 VTS LOGIC

This logic will only be enabled during a live line condition (as indicated by the pole dead logic) to prevent operation
under dead system conditions (i.e. where no voltage will be present and the VTS I> Inhibit overcurrent element will
not be picked up).
P345-AD-EN-1 99
All Poles Dead
IA
IA
VTS I> Inhibit

IB
IB
1
VTS I> Inhibit
IC
VTS I> Inhibit

VA
VA
Hardcoded threshold
VB
VB
& tVT S
1 & S
Hardcoded threshold 0
Q
VC
VC R 1
& VTS Slow Block
Hardcoded threshold
Delta IA
1 & VTS Fast Block

Hardcoded threshold
Delta IB
1 & S
Q
Hardcoded threshold
R
Delta IC
Hardcoded threshold
V2
V2
Hardcoded threshold &
I2
I2
I2>1 Current Set &
VTS Reset Mode

Manual &
1
Auto
MCB/VTS
VTS Status
Indication
Blocking
20 ms 1 S 1 VT Fail Alarm
Any Pole Dead 20 ms & Q
0 R
&
VTS Acc Ind
V01297 Note: This diagram does not show all stages. Other stages follow similar principles.
Figure 34: VTS logic
As can be seen from the diagram, the VTS function is inhibited if:
● An All Poles Dead DDB signal is present
● A phase overcurrent condition exists
● A Negative Phase Sequence current exists
● If the phase current changes over the period of 1 cycle
100 P345-AD-EN-1
3 CURRENT TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION

The Current Transformer Supervision function (CTS) is used to detect failure of the AC current inputs to the
protection. This may be caused by internal current transformer faults, overloading, or faults on the wiring. If there
is a failure of the AC current input, the protection could misinterpret this as a failure of the actual phase currents
on the power system, which could result in maloperation. Also, an open circuit in the AC current circuits can cause
dangerous CT secondary voltages to be generated.
3.1 DIFFERENTIAL CTS IMPLEMENTATION

The differential current transformer supervision function is only available for the transformer differential
protection. This function is enabled when the Winding Config setting is set to Xformer.
Differential current transformer supervision is based on the measurement of the ratio of negative sequence
current to positive sequence current (I2/I1) for each CT. When this ratio is not zero, one of the following two
conditions may be present:
● There is an unbalanced fault
● There is a 1 or 2 phase CT problem
If the I2/I1 ratio is greater than the high set value, CTS I2/I1>2 at all ends, it is almost certainly a genuine fault
condition, thus the CTS will not operate. If this ratio is detected at one end only, one of the following conditions
may be present:
● A CT problem
● A single end fed fault condition
The positive sequence current I1 is used to confirm whether it is a CT problem or not. If I1 is greater than the
setting CTS I1 at all terminals, it must be a CT problem and CTS is allowed to operate. If this condition is detected at
only one end, the device assumes it is caused by either an inrush condition or a single-end fed internal fault. In this
case, CTS operation is blocked.
The CTS status setting under the CT SUPERVISION sub-heading can be set to either indication or
restraint. In indication mode, the CTS alarm time delay is automatically set to zero. If a CT failure is present, an
alarm would be issued without delay, but the differential protection would remain unrestricted. In restraint mode,
the differential protection is blocked for 20 ms after CT failure has been detected, after which the restraint region
of the bias characteristic increases according to the setting Is-CTS , which has been defined in the DIFF
PROTECTION column.
Idiff/In
Operating region K2
Is-CTS
K1
Is1
Restraint region
Is1/K1 Is2 Ibias/In

V01226
Figure 35: CTS restraint region increase
P345-AD-EN-1 101
The low impedance REF, derived earth fault (P341) and NPS overcurrent protections are internally blocked by the
CTS when a CT failure is detected in the CT used by each protection function.
The CTS monitors the positive and negative sequence currents of all CTs (2 to 5, depending on the model). A faulty
CT is determined if the following conditions are present at the same time:
● The positive sequence current in at least two current inputs exceeds the set release threshold I1 (CTS I1
setting under the SUPERVISON column). This also means that CTS can only operate if minimum load current
of the protected object is present.
● A high set ratio of negative to positive sequence current, CTS I2/I1>2, is exceeded at one end.
● At all other ends the ratio of negative to positive sequence current is less than a low set value, CTS I2/I1> 1,
or no significant current is present (positive sequence current is below the release threshold I1).
Only a single or double phase CT failure can be detected by this logic. The probability of symmetrical three-phase
CT failures is very low, therefore in practice this is not a significant problem.
3.2 DIFFERENTIAL CTS LOGIC

CT1 I1 > CTS I1
CT2 I1 > CTS I1 >
CT3 I1 > CTS I1 =
CT4 I1 > CTS I1 2 1 Diff CTS BLK
CT5 I1 > CTS I1
Inhibit CTS 1
Inrush detector
CT1 I2/I1 > CTS I2/I1>2

CT2 I2/I1 > CTS I2/I1>1
& Diff CTS CT1
CT3 I2/I1 > CTS I2/I1>1 &
CT4 I2/I1 > CTS I2/I1>1
CT5 I2/I1 > CTS I2/I1>1
CT1 I2/I1 > CTS I2/I1>1

CT2 I2/I1 > CTS I2/I1>2
& Diff CTS CT2
CT3 I2/I1 > CTS I2/I1>1 &
CT4 I2/I1 > CTS I2/I1>1
CT5 I2/I1 > CTS I2/I1>1
V01298
Figure 36: Differential CTS Logic diagram
3.3 APPLICATION NOTES
3.3.1 SETTING GUIDELINES

The differential current transformer supervision function is only available for the transformer differential
protection. This function is enabled when the Winding Config setting is set to Xformer.
The positive sequence current in at least two current inputs exceeds the CTS I1 setting. The CTS I1 setting should
be below the minimum load current of the protected object. Therefore, 10% of the rated current might be used.
The high set ratio of negative to positive sequence current, CTS I2/I1>2, should be set below the ratio of negative
sequence to positive sequence current for the minimum unbalanced fault current. A typical setting of 40% might
be used.
The low set ratio of negative to positive sequence current, CTS I2/I1>1, should be set above the maximum load
unbalance. In practise, the levels of standing negative phase sequence current present on the system govern this
minimum setting. This can be determined from a system study, or by making use of the device's measurement
102 P345-AD-EN-1
facilities at the commissioning stage. If the latter method is adopted, it is important to take the measurements
during maximum system load conditions, to ensure that all single-phase loads are accounted for. A 20% setting
might be used.
If the following information is recorded by the relay during commissioning:
I full load = 500 A
I2 = 50 A
Therefore I2/I1 ratio is given by I2/I1 = 50/500 = 0.1
To allow for tolerances and load variations a setting of 20% of this value may be typical. Therefore set CTS I2/I1>1
= 20%.
Due to the sensitive settings suggested above, a long time delay is necessary to ensure a true CT failure. We
recommend using the default setting for this time time delay. After the CTS Time Delay expires (CTS Time Delay),
the CTS Fail Alarm is asserted.
P345-AD-EN-1 103
4 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION

In most protection schemes, the trip circuit extends beyond the IED enclosure and passes through components
such as links, relay contacts, auxiliary switches and other terminal boards. Such complex arrangements may
require dedicated schemes for their supervision.
There are two distinctly separate parts to the trip circuit; the trip path, and the trip coil. The trip path is the path
between the IED enclosure and the CB cubicle. This path contains ancillary components such as cables, fuses and
connectors. A break in this path is possible, so it is desirable to supervise this trip path and to raise an alarm if a
break should appear in this path.
The trip coil itself is also part of the overall trip circuit, and it is also possible for the trip coil to develop an open-
circuit fault.
This product supports a number of trip circuit supervision (TCS) schemes.
4.1 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION SCHEME 1

This scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the CB open or closed, however, it does not provide
supervision of the trip path whilst the breaker is open. The CB status can be monitored when a self-reset trip
contact is used. However, this scheme is incompatible with latched trip contacts, as a latched contact will short out
the opto-input for a time exceeding the recommended Delayed Drop-off (DDO) timer setting of 400 ms, and
therefore does not support CB status monitoring. If you require CB status monitoring, further opto-inputs must be
used.
Note:
A 52a CB auxiliary contact follows the CB position. A 52b auxiliary contact is the opposite.
+ve
Trip Output Relay 52A Trip coil

Trip path
Blocking diode
52B
R1 Opto-input Circuit Breaker

V01214 -ve
Figure 37: TCS Scheme 1
When the CB is closed, supervision current passes through the opto-input, blocking diode and trip coil. When the
CB is open, supervision current flows through the opto-input and into the trip coil via the 52b auxiliary contact.
This means that Trip Coil supervision is provided when the CB is either closed or open, however Trip Path
supervision is only provided when the CB is closed. No supervision of the trip path is provided whilst the CB is open
(pre-closing supervision). Any fault in the trip path will only be detected on CB closing, after a 400 ms delay.
4.1.1 RESISTOR VALUES

The supervision current is a lot less than the current required by the trip coil to trip a CB. The opto-input limits this
supervision current to less than 10 mA. If the opto-input were to be short-circuited however, it could be possible for
the supervision current to reach a level that could trip the CB. For this reason, a resistor R1 is often used to limit the
current in the event of a short-circuited opto-input. This limits the current to less than 60mA. The table below
shows the appropriate resistor value and voltage setting for this scheme.
Trip Circuit Voltage Opto Voltage Setting with R1 Fitted Resistor R1 (ohms)
48/54 24/27 1.2k
104 P345-AD-EN-1
Trip Circuit Voltage Opto Voltage Setting with R1 Fitted Resistor R1 (ohms)
110/125 48/54 2.7k
220/250 110/125 5.2k
Warning:
This Scheme is not compatible with Trip Circuit voltages of less than 48 V.
4.1.2 PSL FOR TCS SCHEME 1
0 0
Opto Input dropoff Straight *Output Relay
400 0
50
& pickup Latching LED
0
User Alarm
*NC stands for Normally Closed. V01217
Figure 38: PSL for TCS Scheme 1
The opto-input can be used to drive a Normally Closed Output Relay, which in turn can be used to drive alarm
equipment. The signal can also be inverted to drive a latching programmable LED and a user alarm DDB signal.
The DDO timer operates as soon as the opto-input is energised, but will take 400 ms to drop off/reset in the event
of a trip circuit failure. The 400 ms delay prevents a false alarm due to voltage dips caused by faults in other
circuits or during normal tripping operation when the opto-input is shorted by a self-reset trip contact. When the
timer is operated the NC (normally closed) output relay opens and the LED and user alarms are reset.
The 50 ms delay on pick-up timer prevents false LED and user alarm indications during the power up time,
following a voltage supply interruption.

This scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed but does not provide pre-closing
supervision of the trip path. However, using two opto-inputs allows the IED to correctly monitor the circuit breaker
status since they are connected in series with the CB auxiliary contacts. This is achieved by assigning one opto-
input to the 52a contact and another opto-input to the 52b contact. Provided the CB Status setting in the CB
CONTROL column is set to Both 52A and 52B, the IED will correctly monitor the status of the breaker. This
scheme is also fully compatible with latched contacts as the supervision current will be maintained through the
52b contact when the trip contact is closed.
+ve
Trip Output Relay Trip coil

Trip path 52A
52B
R1 Opto-input 1
Circuit Breaker
-ve
R2 Opto-input 2
V01215
P345-AD-EN-1 105
When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through opto input 1 and the trip coil. When the breaker is
open current flows through opto input 2 and the trip coil. No supervision of the trip path is provided whilst the
breaker is open. Any fault in the trip path will only be detected on CB closing, after a 400 ms delay.

Optional resistors R1 and R2 can be added to prevent tripping of the CB if either opto-input is shorted. The table
below shows the appropriate resistor value and voltage setting for this scheme.
Trip Circuit Voltage Opto Voltage Setting with R1 Fitted Resistor R1 and R2 (ohms)
48/54 24/27 1.2k
110/125 48/54 2.7k
220/250 110/125 5.2k
Warning:
Opto Input 1 CB Aux 3ph(52 -A)
0 0
1 dropoff straight *Output Relay
400 0
Opto Input 2 CB Aux 3ph(52 -B)
50
0
User Alarm
In TCS scheme 2, both opto-inputs must be low before a trip circuit fail alarm is given.

TCS Scheme 3 is designed to provide supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed. It provides pre-
closing supervision of the trip path. Since only one opto-input is used, this scheme is not compatible with latched
trip contacts. If you require CB status monitoring, further opto-inputs must be used.
+ve
R3
Output Relay Trip coil
Trip path 52A
R2
52B
Opto-input R1 Circuit Breaker

-ve
V01216
When the CB is closed, supervision current passes through the opto-input, resistor R2 and the trip coil. When the
CB is open, current flows through the opto-input, resistors R1 and R2 (in parallel), resistor R3 and the trip coil. The
106 P345-AD-EN-1
supervision current is maintained through the trip path with the breaker in either state, therefore providing pre-
closing supervision.

Resistors R1 and R2 are used to prevent false tripping, if the opto-input is accidentally shorted. However, unlike the
other two schemes. This scheme is dependent upon the position and value of these resistors. Removing them
would result in incomplete trip circuit monitoring. The table below shows the resistor values and voltage settings
required for satisfactory operation.
Opto Voltage Setting with R1
Trip Circuit Voltage Resistor R1 & R2 (ohms) Resistor R3 (ohms)
Fitted
48/54 24/27 1.2k 600
110/250 48/54 2.7k 1.2k
220/250 110/125 5.0k 2.5k
Warning:
0 0
Opto Input dropoff Straight *Output Relay
400 0
50
0
User Alarm
P345-AD-EN-1 107
108 P345-AD-EN-1
CHAPTER 7
COMMUNICATIONS
Chapter 7 - Communications P345
110 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Chapter 7 - Communications
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This product supports Substation Automation System (SAS), and Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
communication. The support embraces the evolution of communications technologies that have taken place since
microprocessor technologies were introduced into protection, control, and monitoring devices which are now
ubiquitously known as Intelligent Electronic Devices for the substation (IEDs).
As standard, all products support rugged serial communications for SCADA and SAS applications. By option, any
product can support Ethernet communications for more advanced SCADA and SAS applications.

Chapter Overview 111
Communication Interfaces 112
Serial Communication 113
Standard Ethernet Communication 116
Redundant Ethernet Communication 117
Data Protocols 131
Read Only Mode 174
Time Synchronisation 176
P345-AD-EN-1 111
2 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
The products have a number of standard and optional communication interfaces. The standard and optional
hardware and protocols are summarised below:
Port Availability Physical layer Use Data Protocols
Front Standard USB Type B Local settings Courier
Rear Port 1 RS232 / RS485 / K- SCADA Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0
Standard
(RP1 copper) Bus Remote settings (order option)
Rear Port 1 SCADA Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0
Optional Fibre
(RP1 fibre) Remote settings (order option)
Rear Port 2 RS232 / RS485 / K- SCADA SK4: Courier only
Optional
(RP2) Bus Remote settings SK5: InterMicom only
IEC 61850
Ethernet Optional Ethernet IEC 61850, Courier (tunnelled)
Remote settings
Note:
Optional communications boards are always fitted into slot A.
Note:
It is only possible to fit one optional communications board, therefore RP2 and Ethernet communications are mutually
exclusive.
112 P345-AD-EN-1
3 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
The physical layer standards that are used for serial communications for SCADA purposes are:
● EIA(RS)485 (often abbreviated to RS485)
● K-Bus (a proprietary customization of RS485)
USB is used for local communication with the IED (for transferring settings and downloading firmware updates).
RS485 is similar to RS232 but for longer distances and it allows daisy-chaining and multi-dropping of IEDs.
K-Bus is a proprietary protocol quite similar to RS485, but it cannot be mixed on the same link as RS485. Unlike
RS485, K-Bus signals applied across two terminals are not polarised.
It is important to note that these are not data protocols. They only describe the physical characteristics required
for two devices to communicate with each other.
For a description of the K-Bus standard see K-Bus (on page114) and GE's K-Bus interface guide reference R6509.
A full description of the RS485 is available in the published standard.
3.1 USB FRONT PORT

The USB interface uses the proprietary Courier protocol for local communication with the MiCOM S1 Agile settings
application software.
This is intended for temporary local connection and is not suitable for permanent connection. This interface uses a
fixed baud rate of 19200 bps, 11-bit frame (8 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, even parity bit), and a fixed device
address of '1'.
The USB interface is a Type B connector. Normally a Type A to Type B USB cable will be required to communicate
between MiCOM S1 Agile and the IED.
3.2 EIA(RS)485 BUS

The RS485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex, fully isolated serial connection to the IED. The connection is
polarized but there is no agreed definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with
the product, and the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is
reversed.
The RS485 bus must be terminated at each end with 120 Ω 0.5 W terminating resistors between the signal wires.
The RS485 standard requires that each device be directly connected to the actual bus. Stubs and tees are
forbidden. Loop bus and Star topologies are not part of the RS485 standard and are also forbidden.
Two-core screened twisted pair cable should be used. The final cable specification is dependent on the application,
although a multi-strand 0.5 mm2 per core is normally adequate. The total cable length must not exceed 1000 m. It
is important to avoid circulating currents, which can cause noise and interference, especially when the cable runs
between buildings. For this reason, the screen should be continuous and connected to ground at one end only,
normally at the master connection point.
The RS485 signal is a differential signal and there is no signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is
present in the bus cable then it must be ignored. At no stage should this be connected to the cable's screen or to
the product’s chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
It may be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal level has an
indeterminate state because the bus is not being actively driven. This can occur when all the slaves are in receive
mode and the master is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit mode. This may be because the master is
waiting in receive mode, in a high impedance state, until it has something to transmit. Jabber causes the receiving
device(s) to miss the first bits of the first character in the packet, which results in the slave rejecting the message
and consequently not responding. Symptoms of this are; poor response times (due to retries), increasing message
error counts, erratic communications, and in the worst case, complete failure to communicate.
P345-AD-EN-1 113
3.2.1 EIA(RS)485 BIASING REQUIREMENTS

Biasing requires that the signal lines be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1 V. There should only be
one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point. The DC source used for the bias
must be clean to prevent noise being injected.
Note:
Some devices may be able to provide the bus bias, in which case external components would not be required.
6 – 9 V DC
180 Ω bias
Master 120 Ω
180 Ω bias
0V 120 Ω
Slave Slave Slave
V01000
Figure 43: RS485 biasing circuit
Warning:
It is extremely important that the 120 Ω termination resistors are fitted. Otherwise
the bias voltage may be excessive and may damage the devices connected to the
bus.
3.3 K-BUS
K-Bus is a robust signalling method based on RS485 voltage levels. K-Bus incorporates message framing, based on
a 64 kbps synchronous HDLC protocol with FM0 modulation to increase speed and security.
The rear interface is used to provide a permanent connection for K-Bus, which allows multi-drop connection.
A K-Bus spur consists of up to 32 IEDs connected together in a multi-drop arrangement using twisted pair wiring.
The K-Bus twisted pair connection is non-polarised.
It is not possible to use a standard EIA(RS)232 to EIA(RS)485 converter to convert IEC 60870-5 FT1.2 frames to K-
Bus. A protocol converter, namely the KITZ101, KITZ102 or KITZ201, must be used for this purpose. Please consult
GE for information regarding the specification and supply of KITZ devices. The following figure demonstrates a
typical K-Bus connection.
114 P345-AD-EN-1
C C C
IED IED IED
RS232 K-Bus
Computer RS232-USB converter KITZ protocol converter

V01001
Figure 44: Remote communication using K-Bus
Note:
An RS232-USB converter is only needed if the local computer does not provide an RS232 port.
Further information about K-Bus is available in the publication R6509: K-Bus Interface Guide, which is available on
request.
P345-AD-EN-1 115
4 STANDARD ETHERNET COMMUNICATION

The type of Ethernet board depends on the chosen model. The available boards and their features are described in
the Hardware Design chapter of this manual.
The Ethernet interface is required for IEC 61850. With this protocol, the Ethernet interface offers communication
with the settings application software for remote configuration and record extraction.
Fibre optic connection is recommended for use in permanent connections in a substation environment, as it offers
advantages in terms of noise rejection. The fibre optic port provides 100 Mbps communication and uses type
BFOC 2.5 (ST) connectors. Fibres should be suitable for 1300 nm transmission and be multimode 50/125 µm or
62.5/125 µm.
Connection can also be made to a 10Base-T or a 100Base-TX Ethernet switch using the RJ45 port.
116 P345-AD-EN-1
5 REDUNDANT ETHERNET COMMUNICATION

Redundancy is required where a single point of failure cannot be tolerated. It is required in critical applications
such as substation automation. Redundancy acts as an insurance policy, providing an alternative route if one
route fails.
Ethernet communication redundancy is available for most GE products, using a Redundant Ethernet Board (REB).
The REB is a Network Interface Card (NIC), which incorporates an integrated Ethernet switch. The board provides
two Ethernet transmitter/receiver pairs.
In addition to the two Ethernet transmitter/receiver pairs, the REB provides link activity indication in the form of
LEDs, link fail indication in the form of watchdog contacts, and a dedicated time synchronisation input.
The dedicated time synchronisation input is designed to connect to an IRIG-B signal. Both modulated and un-
modulated IRIG-B formats are supported according to the selected option. Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is
supported over the Ethernet communications.
5.1 SUPPORTED PROTOCOLS

A range of Redundant Ethernet Boards are available to support different protocols for different requirements. One
of the key requirements of substation redundant communications is "bumpless" redundancy. This means the
ability to transfer from one communication path to another without noticeable consequences. Standard protocols
of the time could not meet the demanding requirements of network availability for substation automation
solutions. Switch-over times were unacceptably long. For this reason, companies developed proprietary protocols.
More recently, however, standard protocols, which support bumpless redundancy (namely PRP and HSR) have
been developed and ratified.
As well as supporting standard non-bumpless protocols such as RSTP, the REB was originally designed to support
bumpless redundancy, using proprietary protocols (SHP, DHP) before the standard protocols became available.
Since then, variants have been produced for the newer standard protocols.
REB variants for each of the following protocols are available:
● PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol)
● HSR (High-availability Seamless Redundancy)
● RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
● Failover
Note:
The protocol you require must be selected at the time of ordering.
5.2 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL

PRP (Parallel Reundancy Protocol) is defined in IEC 62439-3. PRP provides bumpless redundancy and meets the
most demanding needs of substation automation. The PRP implementation of the REB is compatible with any
standard PRP device.
PRP uses two independent Ethernet networks operating in parallel. PRP systems are designed so that there should
be no common point of failure between the two networks, so the networks have independent power sources and
are not connected together directly.
Devices designed for PRP applications have two ports attached to two separate networks and are called Doubly
Attached Nodes (DAN). A DAN has two ports, one MAC address and one IP address.
The sending node replicates each frame and transmits them over both networks. The receiving node processes the
frame that arrives first and discards the duplicate. Therefore there is no distinction between the working and
backup path. The receiving node checks that all frames arrive in sequence and that frames are correctly received
on both ports.
P345-AD-EN-1 117
Devices such as printers that have a single Ethernet port can be connected to either of the networks but will not
directly benefit from the PRP principles. Such devices are called Singly Attached Nodes (SAN). For devices with a
single Ethernet port that need to connect to both LANs, this can be achieved by employing Ethernet Redundancy
Boxes (sometimes abbreviated to RedBox). Devices with a single Ethernet port that connect to both LANs by
means of a RedBox are known as Virtual DAN (VDAN).
The figure below summarises DAN, SAN, VDAN, LAN, and RedBox connectivity.
DAN DAN
SAN DAN
LAN B
LAN A
REDUNDANCY
BOX
VDAN
VDAN SAN SAN
VDAN
E01028
Figure 45: IED attached to separate LANs
In a DAN, both ports share the same MAC address so it does not affect the way devices talk to each other in an
Ethernet network (Address Resolution Protocol at layer 2). Every data frame is seen by both ports.
When a DAN sends a frame of data, the frame is duplicated on both ports and therefore on both LAN segments.
This provides a redundant path for the data frame if one of the segments fails. Under normal conditions, both LAN
segments are working and each port receives identical frames.
5.3 HIGH-AVAILABILITY SEAMLESS REDUNDANCY (HSR)

HSR is standardized in IEC 62439-3 (clause 5) for use in ring topology networks. Similar to PRP, HSR provides
bumpless redundancy and meets the most demanding needs of substation automation. HSR has become the
reference standard for ring-topology networks in the substation environment. The HSR implementation of the
redundancy Ethernet board (REB) is compatible with any standard HSR device.
HSR works on the premise that each device connected in the ring is a doubly attached node running HSR (referred
to as DANH). Similar to PRP, singly attached nodes such as printers are connected via Ethernet Redundancy Boxes
(RedBox).
5.3.1 HSR MULTICAST TOPOLOGY

When a DANH is sending a multicast frame, the frame (C frame) is duplicated (A frame and B frame), and each
duplicate frame A/B is tagged with the destination MAC address and the sequence number. The frames A and B
differ only in their sequence number, which is used to identify one frame from the other. Each frame is sent to the
network via a separate port. The destination DANH receives two identical frames, removes the HSR tag of the first
frame received and passes this (frame D) on for processing. The other duplicate frame is discarded. The nodes
forward frames from one port to the other unless it was the node that injected it into the ring.
118 P345-AD-EN-1
Source
DANH DANH Redbox Switch
D frame C frame D frame

A frame B frame
Singly Attached
Nodes
D frame D frame D frame
DANH DANH DANH

V01030
Figure 46: HSR multicast topology
Only about half of the network bandwidth is available in HSR for multicast or broadcast frames because both
duplicate frames A & B circulate the full ring.
5.3.2 HSR UNICAST TOPOLOGY

With unicast frames, there is just one destination and the frames are sent to that destination alone. All non-
recipient devices simply pass the frames on. They do not process them in any way. In other words, D frames are
produced only for the receiving DANH. This is illustrated below.
P345-AD-EN-1 119
Source
DANH DANH Redbox Switch
C frame
A frame B frame
Singly Attached
Nodes
D frame
DANH DANH DANH
Destination V01031
Figure 47: HSR unicast topology
For unicast frames, the whole bandwidth is available as both frames A & B stop at the destination node.
5.3.3 HSR APPLICATION IN THE SUBSTATION
120 P345-AD-EN-1
T1000 switch
LINK
RX
PC SCADA
TX
reset LINK
RX
TX
DS Agile gateways
Px4x H49 H49 H49 Px4x
C C
C C C C C C
Px4x Px4x Px4x Px4x Px4x Px4x
Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3

E01066
Figure 48: HSR application in the substation
5.4 RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL

RSTP is a standard used to quickly reconnect a network fault by finding an alternative path. It stops network loops
whilst enabling redundancy. It can be used in star or ring connections as shown in the following figure.
Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 1 Switch 2
IED 1 IED 2 IED 1 IED 2
Star connection with redundant ports Ring connection managed by RST P

managed by RSTP blocking function . blocking function on upper switches
and IEDs interconnected directly .
V01010
Figure 49: IED attached to redundant Ethernet star or ring circuit
The RSTP implementation in this product is compatible with any devices that use RSTP.
RSTP can recover network faults quickly, but the fault recovery time depends on the number of devices on the
network and the network topology. A typical figure for the fault recovery time is 300ms. Therefore, RSTP cannot
achieve the “bumpless” redundancy that some other protocols can.
Refer to IEEE 802.1D 2004 standard for detailed information about the opration of the protocol.
P345-AD-EN-1 121
5.5 FAILOVER
Failover is a simple redundancy mechanism that is not tied to any protocol. It works by selecting a main port and a
switching time that can be as low as 2 seconds. When the main port link fails, the redundant port becomes
physically active. At no point are both ports physically active, which means it can be used on any redundant or
non-redundant network.
5.6 CONFIGURING IP ADDRESSES

An IP address is a logical address assigned to devices in a computer network that uses the Internet Protocol (IP) for
communication between nodes. IP addresses are stored as binary numbers but they are represented using
Decimal Dot Notation, where four sets of decimal numbers are separated by dots as follows:
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
For example:
10.86.254.85
An IP address in a network is usually associated with a subnet mask. The subnet mask defines which network the
device belongs to. A subnet mask has the same form as an IP address.
For example:
255.255.255.0
Both the IED and the REB each have their own IP address. The following diagram shows the IED as IP1 and the REB
as IP2.
Note:
IP1 and IP2 are different but use the same subnet mask.
The REB IP address (IP2) must be configured through the Ethernet network.
Set by IED Configurator
IED (IP1) AAA.BBB.CCC.DDD
REB (IP2) WWW.XXX.YYY.ZZZ

Set by Hardware Dip Switch SW2 for SHP, DHP
Set by Redundant Ethernet Configurator for PRP, HSR or
Set by Switch Manager for SHP and DHP RSTP
Set by Redundant Ethernet Configurator for
PRP, HSR or RSTP Fixed at 254 for SHP or DHP
Set by Redundant Ethernet Configurator for PRP, HSR or RSTP
V01069
Figure 50: IED and REB IP address configuration
5.6.1 CONFIGURING THE IED IP ADDRESS

If you are using IEC 61850, set the IED IP1 address using the IEC 61850 Configurator software. In the IEC 61850
Configurator, set Media to Single Copper or Redundant Fibre for all Redundant Ethernet Board variants.
5.6.2 CONFIGURING THE REB IP ADDRESS

The board IP address must be configured before connecting the IED to the network to avoid an IP address conflict.
The way you configure the IP address depends on the redundancy protocol you have chosen.
122 P345-AD-EN-1
PRP/HSR/RSTP/Failover
From S1 Agile 2.0.1. onwards cards that support the PRP/HSR/RSTP/Failover protocols in any of the combinations
are configured using the Redundant Ethernet Configurator software tool. If you are using a ZN008700X card only
this tool supports it. If using S1 Agile 1.4.2 or older you will need to use the PRP/HSR Configurator for PRP and/or
HSR, and the RSTP Configurator for RSTP cards.
5.7 REDUNDANT ETHERNET CONFIGURATOR

The Redundant Ethernet Configurator tool is intended for MiCOM Px4x IEDs with redundant Ethernet using PRP
(Parallel Redundancy Protocol), or HSR (High-availability Seamless Redundancy). This tool is used to identify IEDs,
switch between PRP and HSR or configure their parameters, configure the redundancy IP address, or configure the
SNTP IP address.
5.7.1 CONNECTING THE IED TO A PC

Connect the IED to the PC on which the Configurator tool is used. This connection is done through an Ethernet
switch or through a media converter.
RJ45
Ethernet switch
Media
Converter
TXA RXA TXB RXB
TX RX
RXA TXA RXB TXB RXA TXA RXB TXB
IED IED
(a) (b)
V01806
Figure 51: Connection using (a) an Ethernet switch and (b) a media converter
5.7.2 INSTALLING THE CONFIGURATOR

To install the configurator:
1. Double click the Configurator installer.
2. Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions.
P345-AD-EN-1 123
5.7.3 STARTING THE CONFIGURATOR

To start the configurator:
1. Select the Configurator from the Windows Programs menu.
2. The Login screen appears. For user mode login, enter the Login name as User and click OK with no
password.
3. If the login screen does not appear, check all network connections.
4. The main window appears. In the bottom right-hand corner of the main window, click the Language button
to select the language.
5. The Network Board drop-down list shows the Network Board, IP Address and MAC Address of the PC in
which the Configurator is running
5.7.4 PRP/HSR DEVICE IDENTIFICATION

To configure the redundant Ethernet board, go to the main window and click the Identify Device button. A list of
devices are shown with the following details:
● Device address
● MAC address
● Version number of the firmware
● SNTP IP address
● Date & time of the real-time clock, from the board.
Select the device you wish to configure. The MAC address of the selected device is highlighted.
5.7.5 SELECTING THE DEVICE MODE

You must now select the device mode that you wish to use. This will be either PRP or HSR. To do this, select the
appropriate radio button then click the Update button. You will be asked to confirm a device reboot. Click OK to
confirm
5.7.6 PRP/HSR IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION

To change the network address component of the IP address:
1. From the main window click the IP Config button. The Device setup screen appears.
2. Enter the required board IP address and click OK. This is the redundancy network address, not the IEC 61850
IP address.
3. The board network address is updated and displayed in the main window.
5.7.7 SNTP IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION

To configure the SNTP server IP address:
1. From the main window click the SNTP Config button. The Device setup screen appears.
2. Enter the required MAC SNTP address and server IP SNTP Address. Click OK.
3. The updated MAC and IP SNTP addresses appear in the main screen.
124 P345-AD-EN-1
5.7.8 CHECK FOR CONNECTED EQUIPMENT

To check what devices are connected to the device being monitored:
1. From the main window, select the device.
2. Click the Equipment button.
3. At the bottom of the main window, a box shows the ports where devices are connected and their MAC
addresses.
5.7.9 PRP CONFIGURATION

To view or configure the PRP Parameters:
1. Ensure that you have set the device mode to PRP.
2. Click the PRP/HSR Configuration button. The PRP Configuration Parameters screen appears.
3. To view the available parameters, click the Get PRP Parameters button.
4. To change the parameters, click the Set Parameters button and modify their values.
If you need to restore the default values of the parameters, click the Restore Defaults button.
The configurable parameters are as follows:
● Multicast Address: Use this field to configure the multicast destination address. All DANPs in the network
must be configured to operate with the same multicast address for the purpose of network supervision.
● Node Forget Time: This is the time after which a node entry is cleared in the nodes table.
● Life Check Interval: This defines how often a node sends a PRP_Supervision frame. All DANPs shall be
configured with the same Life Check Interval.
5.7.10 HSR CONFIGURATION

To view or configure the HSR Parameters:
1. Click the PRP/HSR Configuration button. The HSR Configuration Parameters screen appears.
2. To view the available parameters in the board that is connected, click the Get HSR Parameters button.
3. To change the parameters, click the Set HSR Parameters button and modify their values.
If you need to restore the default values of the parameters, click the Restore Defaults button.
The configurable parameters are as follows:
● Multicast Address: Use this field to configure the multicast destination address. All DANPs in the network
must be configured to operate with the same multicast address for the purpose of network supervision.
● Node Forget Time: This is the time after which a node entry is cleared in the nodes table.
● Life Check Interval: This defines how often a node sends a PRP Supervision frame. All DANPs must be
configured with the same Life Check Interval.
● Proxy Node Table Forget Time: This is the time after which a node entry is cleared in the ProxyTable
● Proxy Node Table Max Entries: This is the maximum number of entries in the ProxyTable
● Entry Forget Time: This is the time after which an entry is removed from the duplicates
● Node Reboot Interval: This is the minimum time during which a node that reboots remains silent
5.7.11 FILTERING DATABASE

The Filtering Database is used to determine how frames are forwarded or filtered across the on-board Ethernet
switch. Filtering information specifies the set of ports to which frames received from a specific port are forwarded.
The Ethernet switch examines each received frame to see if the frame's destination address matches a source
address listed in the Filtering Database. If there is a match, the device uses the filtering/forwarding information for
that source address to determine how to forward or filter the frame. Otherwise the frame is forwarded to all the
ports in the Ethernet switch (broadcast).
P345-AD-EN-1 125
General tab
The Filtering Database contains two types of entry; static and dynamic. The Static Entries are the source addresses
entered by an administrator. The Dynamic Entries are the source addresses learnt by the switch process. The
Dynamic Entries are removed from the Filtering Database after the Ageing Time. The Database holds a maximum
of 1024 entries.
1. To access the forwarding database functions, if required, click the Filtering Database button in the main
window.
2. To view the Forwarding Database Size, Number of Static Entries and Number of Dynamic Entries, click Read
Database Info.
3. To set the Aging Time, enter the number of seconds in the text box and click the Set button.
Filtering Entries tab

The Filtering Database configuration pages are used to view, add or delete entries from the Filtering Database. This
feature is available only for the administrator. This Filtering Database is mainly used during the testing to verify the
PRP/HSR functionality. To add an entry in the forwarding database, click the Filtering Entries tab. Configure as
follows:
1. Select the Port Number and MAC Address
2. Set the Entry type (Dynamic or Static)
3. Set the cast type (Unicast or Multicast)
4. Set theMGMT and Rate Limit
5. Click the Create button. The new entry appears in the forwarding database.
To delete an entry from the forwarding database, select the entry and click the Delete Entry button.
Goose Filtering tab

This page configures the source MACs from which GOOSE messages will be allowed or blocked. The filtering can be
configured by either the MAC address range boxes or by selecting or unselecting the individual MAC addresses in
the MAC table. After you have defined the addresses to be allowed or blocked you need to update the table and
apply the filter:
● Update Table: This updates the MAC table according to the filtering range entered in the MAC address
range boxes.
● Apply Filter: This applies the filtering configuration in the MAC table to the HSR/PRP board.
5.7.12 END OF SESSION

To finish the session:
1. In the main window, click the Quit button, a new screen appears.
2. If a database backup is required, click Yes, a new screen appears.
3. Click the ... button to browse the path. Enter the name in the text box.
5.8 RSTP CONFIGURATOR

The RSTP Configurator tool is intended for MiCOM Px4x IEDs with redundant Ethernet using RSTP (Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol). This tool is used to identify IEDs, configure the redundancy IP address, configure the SNTP IP
address and configure the RSTP parameters.
5.8.1 CONNECTING THE IED TO A PC

Connect the IED to the PC on which the Configurator tool is used. This connection is done through an Ethernet
switch or through a media converter.
126 P345-AD-EN-1
RJ45
Ethernet switch
Media
Converter
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
TX RX
RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2 RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2
IED IED
(a) (b)
V01803
Figure 52: Connection using (a) an Ethernet switch and (b) a media converter
5.8.2 INSTALLING THE CONFIGURATOR

To install the configurator:
1. Double click the Configurator installer.
2. Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions.
5.8.3 STARTING THE CONFIGURATOR

To start the configurator:
1. Select the Configurator from the Windows Programs menu.
2. The Login screen appears. For user mode login, enter the Login name as User and click OK with no
password.
3. If the login screen does not appear, check all network connections.
4. The main window appears. In the bottom right-hand corner of the main window, click the Language button
to select the language.
5. The Network Board drop-down list shows the Network Board, IP Address and MAC Address of the PC in
which the Configurator is running
5.8.4 RSTP DEVICE IDENTIFICATION

To configure the redundant Ethernet board, go to the main window and click Identify Device.
P345-AD-EN-1 127
Note:
Due to the time needed to establish the RSTP protocol, wait 25 seconds between connecting the PC to the IED and clicking the
Identify Device button.
The redundant Ethernet board connected to the PC is identified and its details are listed.
● Device address
● MAC address
● Version number of the firmware
● SNTP IP address
● Date & time of the real-time clock, from the board.
5.8.5 RSTP IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION

To change the network address component of the IP address,
1. From the main window click the IP Config button.
2. The Device Setup screen appears showing the IP Base Address. This is the board redundancy network
address, not the IEC 61850 IP address.
3. Enter the required board IP address.
4. Click OK. The board network address is updated and displayed in the main window.
5.8.6 SNTP IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION

To configure the SNTP server IP address:
1. From the main window click the SNTP Config button. The Device setup screen appears.
2. Enter the required MAC SNTP address and server IP SNTP Address. Click OK.
3. The updated MAC and IP SNTP addresses appear in the main screen.
5.8.7 CHECK FOR CONNECTED EQUIPMENT

To check what devices are connected to the device being monitored:
1. From the main window, select the device.
2. Click the Equipment button.
3. At the bottom of the main window, a box shows the ports where devices are connected and their MAC
addresses.
5.8.8 RSTP CONFIGURATION

1. To view or configure the RSTP Bridge Parameters, from the main window, click the device address to select
the device. The selected device MAC address appears highlighted.
2. Click the RSTP Configuration button. The RSTP Configuration screen appears.
3. To view the available parameters in the board that is connected, click the Get RSTP Parameters button.
4. To set the configurable parameters such as Bridge Max Age, Bridge Hello Time, Bridge Forward Delay, and
Bridge Priority, modify the parameter values according to the following table and click Set RSTP
Parameters.
Maximum value
S.No Parameter Default value (second) Minimum value (second)
(second)
1 Bridge Max Age 20 6 40
2 Bridge Hello Time 2 1 10
128 P345-AD-EN-1
Maximum value
S.No Parameter Default value (second) Minimum value (second)
(second)
3 Bridge Forward Delay 15 4 30
4 Bridge Priority 32768 0 61440
5.8.8.1 BRIDGE PARAMETERS

To read the RSTP bridge parameters from the board,
1. From the main window click the device address to select the device. The RSTP Configuration window
appears and the default tab is Bridge Parameters.
2. Click the Get RSTP Parameters button. This displays all the RSTP bridge parameters from the Ethernet
board.
3. To modify the RSTP parameters, enter the values and click Set RSTP Parameters.
4. To restore the default values, click Restore Default and click Set RSTP Parameters.
The grayed parameters are read-only and cannot be modified.
Note:
When assigning the bridge priority, make sure the root of the network is the Ethernet switch, not the IEDs. This reduces the
number of hops to reach all devices in the network. Also make sure the priority values for all IEDs are higher than that of the
switch.
5.8.8.2 PORT PARAMETERS

This function is useful if you need to view the parameters of each port.
1. From the main window, click the device address to select the device. The RSTP Configuration window
appears.
2. Select the Port Parameters tab, then click Get Parameters to read the port parameters. Alternatively, select
the port numbers to read the parameters.
5.8.8.3 PORT STATES

This is used to see which ports of the board are enabled or disabled.
1. From the main window, click the device address to select the device. The RSTP Configuration window
appears.
2. Select the Port States tab then click the Get Port States button. This lists the ports of the Ethernet board. A
tick shows they are enabled.
5.8.8.4 FAILOVER CONFIGURATION

To view or configure the Failover Parameters:
Click the Failover Configuration button. The Failover Configuration screen appears.
1. To view the available parameters in the board that is connected, click the Get Failover Parameters button.
2. To change the parameters, click the Set Failover Parameters button and modify their values.
If you need to restore the default values of the parameters, click the Restore Defaults button. The configurable
parameters are as follows:
● Port A and Port B select your main port for the Failover (Port A is the port at the top of your REB).
● The Failover time defines how long it takes for the redundancy switch over to trigger. The minimum value is
2s.
P345-AD-EN-1 129
5.8.8.5 END OF SESSION

To finish the session:
1. In the main window, click the Quit button, a new screen appears.
2. If a database backup is required, click Yes, a new screen appears.
3. Click the ... button to browse the path. Enter the name in the text box.
130 P345-AD-EN-1
6 DATA PROTOCOLS
The products supports a wide range of protocols to make them applicable to many industries and applications.
The exact data protocols supported by a particular product depend on its chosen application, but the following
table gives a list of the data protocols that are typically available.
SCADA data protocols

Data Protocol Layer 1 protocol Description
USB, K-Bus, RS232, RS485,
Courier Standard for SCADA communications developed by GE.
Ethernet
MODBUS RS485 Standard for SCADA communications developed by Modicon.
IEC 60870-5-103 RS485 IEC standard for SCADA communications
DNP 3.0 RS485 Standard for SCADA communications
IEC 61850 Ethernet IEC standard for substation automation. Facilitates interoperability.
The relationship of these protocols to the lower level physical layer protocols are as follows:
IEC 60870-5-103
MODBUS
Data Protocols
DNP3.0 IEC 61850
Courier Courier Courier Courier Courier
Data Link Layer EIA(RS)485 Ethernet EIA(RS)232 K-Bus USB
Physical Layer Copper or Optical Fibre USB Type B
6.1 COURIER
This section should provide sufficient detail to enable understanding of the Courier protocol at a level required by
most users. For situations where the level of information contained in this manual is insufficient, further
publications (R6511 and R6512) containing in-depth details about the protocol and its use, are available on
request.
Courier is an GE proprietary communication protocol. Courier uses a standard set of commands to access a
database of settings and data in the IED. This allows a master to communicate with a number of slave devices. The
application-specific elements are contained in the database rather than in the commands used to interrogate it,
meaning that the master station does not need to be preconfigured. Courier also provides a sequence of event
(SOE) and disturbance record extraction mechanism.
6.1.1 PHYSICAL CONNECTION AND LINK LAYER

Courier can be used with four physical layer protocols: USB, K-Bus, EIA(RS)232 or EIA(RS)485.
Several connection options are available for Courier
● The front USB port (for connection to Settings application software on, for example, a laptop)
● Rear Port 1 (RP1) - for permanent SCADA connection via RS485 or K-Bus
● Optional fibre port (RP1 in slot A) - for permanent SCADA connection via optical fibre
● Optional Rear Port 2 (RP2) - for permanent SCADA connection via RS485, K-Bus, or RS232
For either of the rear ports, both the IED address and baud rate can be selected using the front panel menu or by
the settings application software.
P345-AD-EN-1 131
6.1.2 COURIER DATABASE

The Courier database is two-dimensional and resembles a table. Each cell in the database is referenced by a row
and column address. Both the column and the row can take a range from 0 to 255 (0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal.
Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal values, for example, 0A02 is column 0A row 02.
Associated settings or data are part of the same column. Row zero of the column has a text string to identify the
contents of the column and to act as a column heading.
The product-specific menu databases contain the complete database definition.
6.1.3 SETTINGS CATEGORIES

There are two main categories of settings in protection IEDs:
● Control and support settings
● Protection settings
With the exception of the Disturbance Recorder settings, changes made to the control and support settings are
implemented immediately and stored in non-volatile memory. Changes made to the Protection settings and the
Disturbance Recorder settings are stored in ‘scratchpad’ memory and are not immediately implemented. These
need to be committed by writing to the Save Changes cell in the CONFIGURATION column.
6.1.4 SETTING CHANGES

Courier provides two mechanisms for making setting changes. Either method can be used for editing any of the
settings in the database.
Method 1
This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:
First, enter Setting mode: This checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits.
1. Preload Setting: This places a new value into the cell. This value is echoed to ensure that setting corruption
has not taken place. The validity of the setting is not checked by this action.
2. Execute Setting: This confirms the setting change. If the change is valid, a positive response is returned. If
the setting change fails, an error response is returned.
3. Abort Setting: This command can be used to abandon the setting change.
This is the most secure method. It is ideally suited to on-line editors because the setting limits are extracted before
the setting change is made. However, this method can be slow if many settings are being changed because three
commands are required for each change.
Method 2
The Set Value command can be used to change a setting directly. The response to this command is either a
positive confirm or an error code to indicate the nature of a failure. This command can be used to implement a
setting more rapidly than the previous method, however the limits are not extracted. This method is therefore most
suitable for off-line setting editors such as MiCOM S1 Agile, or for issuing preconfigured control commands.
6.1.5 EVENT EXTRACTION

You can extract events either automatically (rear serial port only) or manually (either serial port). For automatic
extraction, all events are extracted in sequential order using the Courier event mechanism. This includes fault and
maintenance data if appropriate. The manual approach allows you to select events, faults, or maintenance data
as desired.
132 P345-AD-EN-1
6.1.5.1 AUTOMATIC EVENT RECORD EXTRACTION

This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it is produced. It is only
supported through the rear Courier port.
When new event information is created, the Event bit is set in the Status byte. This indicates to the Master device
that event information is available. The oldest, non-extracted event can be extracted from the IED using the Send
Event command. The IED responds with the event data.
Once an event has been extracted, the Accept Event command can be used to confirm that the event has been
successfully extracted. When all events have been extracted, the Event bit is reset. If there are more events still to
be extracted, the next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as before.
6.1.5.2 MANUAL EVENT RECORD EXTRACTION

The VIEW RECORDS column (location 01) is used for manual viewing of event, fault, and maintenance records. The
contents of this column depend on the nature of the record selected. You can select events by event number and
directly select a fault or maintenance record by number.
Event Record Selection ('Select Event' cell: 0101)

This cell can be set the number of stored events. For simple event records (Type 0), cells 0102 to 0105 contain the
event details. A single cell is used to represent each of the event fields. If the event selected is a fault or
maintenance record (Type 3), the remainder of the column contains the additional information.
Fault Record Selection ('Select Fault' cell: 0105)

This cell can be used to select a fault record directly, using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five
stored fault records. (0 is the most recent fault and 4 is the oldest). The column then contains the details of the fault
record selected.
Maintenance Record Selection ('Select Maint' cell: 01F0)

This cell can be used to select a maintenance record using a value between 0 and 4. This cell operates in a similar
way to the fault record selection.
If this column is used to extract event information, the number associated with a particular record changes when
a new event or fault occurs.
Event Types
The IED generates events under certain circumstances such as:
● Change of state of output contact
● Change of state of opto-input
● Protection element operation
● Alarm condition
● Setting change
● Password entered/timed-out
Event Record Format

The IED returns the following fields when the Send Event command is invoked:
● Cell reference
● Time stamp
● Cell text
● Cell value
P345-AD-EN-1 133
The Menu Database contains tables of possible events, and shows how the contents of the above fields are
interpreted. Fault and Maintenance records return a Courier Type 3 event, which contains the above fields plus two
additional fields:
● Event extraction column
● Event number
These events contain additional information, which is extracted from the IED using column B4. Row 01 contains a
Select Record setting that allows the fault or maintenance record to be selected. This setting should be set to the
event number value returned in the record. The extended data can be extracted from the IED by uploading the text
and data from the column.
6.1.6 DISTURBANCE RECORD EXTRACTION

The stored disturbance records are accessible through the Courier interface. The records are extracted using
column (B4).
The Select Record cell can be used to select the record to be extracted. Record 0 is the oldest non-extracted
record. Older records which have been already been extracted are assigned positive values, while younger records
are assigned negative values. To help automatic extraction through the rear port, the IED sets the Disturbance bit
of the Status byte, whenever there are non-extracted disturbance records.
Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the record can be read from the
Trigger Time cell (B402). The disturbance record can be extracted using the block transfer mechanism from cell
B40B and saved in the COMTRADE format. The settings application software software automatically does this.
6.1.7 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC SETTINGS

The programmable scheme logic (PSL) settings can be uploaded from and downloaded to the IED using the block
transfer mechanism.
The following cells are used to perform the extraction:
● Domain cell (B204): Used to select either PSL settings (upload or download) or PSL configuration data
(upload only)
● Sub-Domain cell (B208): Used to select the Protection Setting Group to be uploaded or downloaded.
● Version cell (B20C): Used on a download to check the compatibility of the file to be downloaded.
● Transfer Mode cell (B21C): Used to set up the transfer process.
● Data Transfer cell (B120): Used to perform upload or download.
The PSL settings can be uploaded and downloaded to and from the IED using this mechanism. The settings
application software must be used to edit the settings. It also performs checks on the validity of the settings before
they are transferred to the IED.
6.1.8 TIME SYNCHRONISATION

The time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the Courier protocol. The device will correct
for the transmission delay. The time synchronization message may be sent as either a global command or to any
individual IED address. If the time synchronization message is sent to an individual address, then the device will
respond with a confirm message. If sent as a global command, the (same) command must be sent twice. A time
synchronization Courier event will be generated/produced whether the time-synchronization message is sent as a
global command or to any individual IED address.
If the clock is being synchronized using the IRIG-B input then it will not be possible to set the device time using the
Courier interface. An attempt to set the time using the interface will cause the device to create an event with the
current date and time taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.
134 P345-AD-EN-1
6.1.9 COURIER CONFIGURATION

communication protocol – in this case Courier.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Protocol
Courier
4. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Address). This cell controls the address of the RP1 port on the device. Up to
32 IEDs can be connected to one spur. It is therefore necessary for each IED to have a unique address so
that messages from the master control station are accepted by one IED only. Courier uses an integer
number between 1 and 254 for the Relay Address. It is set to 255 by default, which has to be changed. It is
important that no two IEDs share the same address.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Address
100
controls how long the IED waits without receiving any messages on the rear port before revoking any
password access that was enabled and discarding any changes. For the rear port this can be set between 1
and 30 minutes.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Inactivtimer
10.00 mins.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 PhysicalLink
Copper
7. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Card Status). This cell is not settable. It displays the status of the chosen
physical layer protocol for RP1.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Card Status
K-Bus OK
P345-AD-EN-1 135
8. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Port Config). This cell controls the type of serial connection. Select between
K-Bus or RS485.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Port Config
K-Bus
9. If using EIA(RS)485, the next cell (RP1 Comms Mode) selects the communication mode. The choice is either
IEC 60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or 10-bit no parity. If using K-Bus this cell will not
appear.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Comms Mode
IEC 60870 FT1.2
10. If using EIA(RS)485, the next cell down controls the baud rate. Three baud rates are supported; 9600, 19200
and 38400. If using K-Bus this cell will not appear as the baud rate is fixed at 64 kbps.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Baud rate
19200
6.2 IEC 60870-5-103

The specification IEC 60870-5-103 (Telecontrol Equipment and Systems Part 5 Section 103: Transmission
Protocols), defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5, which were designed for communication
with protection equipment
This section describes how the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is applied to the Px40 platform. It is not a description of
the standard itself. The level at which this section is written assumes that the reader is already familiar with the
IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
This section should provide sufficient detail to enable understanding of the standard at a level required by most
users.
The IEC 60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the device as the slave device. The device conforms
to compatibility level 2, as defined in the IEC 60870-5-103.standard.
The following IEC 60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
● Initialization (reset)
● Time synchronization
● Event record extraction
● General interrogation
● Cyclic measurements
● General commands
● Disturbance record extraction
● Private codes

Two connection options are available for IEC 60870-5-103:
● Rear Port 1 (RP1) - for permanent SCADA connection via RS485
If the optional fibre optic port is fitted, a menu item appears in which the active port can be selected. However the
selection is only effective following the next power up.
136 P345-AD-EN-1
The IED address and baud rate can be selected using the front panel menu or by the settings application software.
6.2.2 INITIALISATION
Whenever the device has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been changed a reset
command is required to initialize the communications. The device will respond to either of the two reset
commands; Reset CU or Reset FCB (Communication Unit or Frame Count Bit). The difference between the two
commands is that the Reset CU command will clear any unsent messages in the transmit buffer, whereas the
Reset FCB command does not delete any messages.
The device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5. The Cause of Transmission
(COT) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The
content of ASDU 5 is described in the IEC 60870-5-103 section of the Menu Database, available from GE separately
if required.
In addition to the above identification message, it will also produce a power up event.

The time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. The device
will correct for the transmission delay as specified in IEC 60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent
as a send/confirm message then the device will respond with a confirm message. A time synchronization Class 1
event will be generated/produced whether the time-synchronization message is sent as a send confirm or a
broadcast (send/no reply) message.
IEC 60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set the time via the interface will cause the device to create an event
with the current date and time taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.
6.2.4 CONFIGURABLE IEC 60870-5-103 SIGNAL LIST

From Software Version 91 onwards, there is a setting cell which allows the IEC 60870-5-103 private range signals
to be selected and de-selected from IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
The IEC 60870-5-103 standard (compatible range) signals, that are provided according to the relay type and
implementation, are always enabled. These signals cannot be disabled.
This setting cell is Config Mode in the PROTOCOL CFG column.
There are two settings associated with this cell. These are:
In this mode, the IED behaviour for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is identical to pre-Software Version 91 IEDs.
All the implemented signals (IEC 60870-5-103 compatible range and private range signals) are enabled for
Fixed
IEC 60870-5-103 communication. The COT behaviour will be according to the device IEC 60870-5-103 profile.
This mode is provided for backward compatibility. This is the default setting.
In this mode, the user can select which IEC 60870-5-103 private range signals are enabled for IEC
60870-5-103 communication.
The selection is done using DDB mask setting cells in the PROTOCOL CFG column. The DDB mask value
Std+UserConfig controls only the signal selection (enabled or disabled) for IEC 60870-5-103 communication. It does not
modify the COT behaviour of the signals. The COT behaviour of the private range signals will be according to
the device IEC 60870-5-103 profile.
By default, only IEC 60870-5-103 standard signals are enabled. All private range signals are disabled.
When the Config Mode cell is set to Std+UserConfig, the DDB masks become visible in the PROTOCOL CFG
column. These masks function in a similar way to the DDB masks in the RECORD CONTROL column. Editing these
masks controls the DDB signals that are enabled for communication of the equivalent IEC 60870-5-103 private
range signal, as listed in the IEC 60870-5-103 profile in the Menu Database.
P345-AD-EN-1 137
Within these masks, only individual DDBs that are equivalent to IEC 60870-5-103 private range signals are
editable. By default, all of the individual DDBs that are equivalent to IEC 60870-5-103 private range signals are set
to 0 (zero), that is disabled for communication. Setting any individual DDB to 1 (one), enables the equivalent IEC
60870-5-103 private range signal for communication.
Within these masks, individual DDBs that are either equivalent to IEC 60870-5-103 standard range signals, or do
not have any equivalent IEC 60870-5-103 private range signal, are not editable.
6.2.5 SPONTANEOUS EVENTS

Events are categorized using the following information:
● Function type
● Information Number
The IEC 60870-5-103 profile in the Menu Database contains a complete listing of all events produced by the
device.
From Software Version 91 onwards, the IEC 60870-5-103 private range signals can be individually selected for
spontaneous communication, by settting the Config Mode cell to Std+UserConfig, and configuring the DDB
masks as required.
6.2.6 GENERAL INTERROGATION (GI)

The GI request can be used to read the status of the device, the function numbers, and information numbers that
will be returned during the GI cycle. These are shown in the IEC 60870-5-103 profile in the Menu Database.
From Software Version 91 onwards, the IEC 60870-5-103 private range signals can be individually selected for GI
reporting, by setting the Config Mode cell to Std+UserConfig, and configuring the DDB masks as required.
6.2.7 CYCLIC MEASUREMENTS

The device will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from the device using a
Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used). The rate at which the device produces new measured values can be
controlled using the measurement period setting. This setting can be edited from the front panel menu or using
MiCOM S1 Agile. It is active immediately following a change.
The device transmits its measurands at 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value.
6.2.8 COMMANDS
A list of the supported commands is contained in the Menu Database. The device will respond to other commands
with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) indicating ‘negative acknowledgement’.
6.2.9 TEST MODE

It is possible to disable the device output contacts to allow secondary injection testing to be performed using
either the front panel menu or the front serial port. The IEC 60870-5-103 standard interprets this as ‘test mode’. An
event will be produced to indicate both entry to and exit from test mode. Spontaneous events and cyclic measured
data transmitted whilst the device is in test mode will have a COT of ‘test mode’.
6.2.10 DISTURBANCE RECORDS

The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the standard
mechanisms described in IEC 60870-5-103.
Note:
IEC 60870-5-103 only supports up to 8 records.
138 P345-AD-EN-1
6.2.11 COMMAND/MONITOR BLOCKING

The device supports a facility to block messages in the monitor direction (data from the device) and also in the
command direction (data to the device). Messages can be blocked in the monitor and command directions using
one of the two following methods
● The menu command RP1 CS103Blcking in the COMMUNICATIONS column
● The DDB signals Monitor Blocked and Command Blocked
6.2.12 IEC 60870-5-103 CONFIGURATION

communication protocol – in this case IEC 60870-5-103.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
4. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Address). This cell controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the IED. Up to 32
IEDs can be connected to one spur. It is therefore necessary for each IED to have a unique address so that
messages from the master control station are accepted by one IED only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an integer
number between 0 and 254 for the address. It is important that no two IEDs have the same IEC 60870 5 103
address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the IED.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 address
162
5. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Baud Rate). This cell controls the baud rate to be used. Two baud rates are
supported by the IED, 9600 bits/s and 19200 bits/s. Make sure that the baud rate selected on the
IED is the same as that set on the master station.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Baud rate
9600 bits/s
6. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Meas Period). The next cell down controls the period between
IEC 60870-5-103 measurements. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the IED to supply measurements at
regular intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be set between 1
and 60 seconds.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Meas Period
30.00 s
P345-AD-EN-1 139
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 PhysicalLink
Copper
8. The next cell down (RP1 CS103Blcking) can be used for monitor or command blocking.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 CS103Blcking
Disabled
9. There are three settings associated with this cell; these are:
Disabled No blocking selected.
When the monitor blocking DDB Signal is active high, either by energising an opto input or control input,
Monitor Blocking reading of the status information and disturbance records is not permitted. When in this mode the device
returns a "Termination of general interrogation" message to the master station.
When the command blocking DDB signal is active high, either by energising an opto input or control input,
Command Blocking all remote commands will be ignored (i.e. CB Trip/Close, change setting group etc.). When in this mode the
device returns a "negative acknowledgement of command" message to the master station.
6.3 MODBUS
This section describes how the MODBUS standard is applied to the Px40 platform. It is not a description of the
standard itself. The level at which this section is written assumes that the reader is already familiar with the
MODBUS standard.
The MODBUS protocol is a master/slave protocol, defined and administered by the MODBUS Organization For
further information on MODBUS and the protocol specifications, please see the Modbus web site
(www.modbus.org).

Two connection options are available for MODBUS
The MODBUS interface uses ‘RTU’ mode communication rather than ‘ASCII’ mode as this provides more efficient
use of the communication bandwidth. This mode of communication is defined by the MODBUS standard.
The IED address and baud rate can be selected using the front panel menu or by the settings application software.
When using a serial interface, the data format is: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit with 1 stop bit, or 2 stop bits (a
total of 11 bits per character).
6.3.2 MODBUS FUNCTIONS

The following MODBUS function codes are supported:
● 01: Read Coil Status
● 02: Read Input Status
● 03: Read Holding Registers
● 04: Read Input Registers
● 06: Preset Single Register
140 P345-AD-EN-1
● 08: Diagnostics
● 11: Fetch Communication Event Counter
● 12: Fetch Communication Event Log
● 16: Preset Multiple Registers 127 max
These are interpreted by the MiCOM IED in the following way:

● 01: Read status of output contacts (0xxxx addresses)
● 02: Read status of opto inputs (1xxxx addresses)
● 03: Read setting values (4xxxx addresses)
● 04: Read measured values (3xxxx addresses
● 06: Write single setting value (4xxxx addresses)
● 16: Write multiple setting values (4xxxx addresses)
6.3.3 RESPONSE CODES
MCode MODBUS Description MiCOM Interpretation

01 Illegal Function Code The function code transmitted is not supported by the slave.
The start data address in the request is not an allowable value. If any of the addresses in
the range cannot be accessed due to password protection then all changes within the
02 Illegal Data Address request are discarded and this error response will be returned.
Note: If the start address is correct but the range includes non–implemented addresses
this response is not produced.
A value referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not within range. Other
03 Illegal Value
values transmitted within the same packet will be executed if inside range.
The write command cannot be implemented due to the database being locked by another
06 Slave Device Busy interface. This response is also produced if the software is busy executing a previous
request.
6.3.4 REGISTER MAPPING

The device supports the following memory page references:
● Memory Page: Interpretation
● 0xxxx: Read and write access of the output relays
● 1xxxx: Read only access of the opto inputs
● 3xxxx: Read only access of data
● 4xxxx: Read and write access of settings
where xxxx represents the addresses available in the page (0 to 9999).

A complete map of the MODBUS addresses supported by the device is contained in the relevant menu database,
which is available on request.
Note:
The "extended memory file" (6xxxx) is not supported.
Note:
MODBUS convention is to document register addresses as ordinal values whereas the actual protocol addresses are literal
values. The MiCOM relays begin their register addresses at zero. Therefore, the first register in a memory page is register
address zero. The second register is register address 1 and so on.
P345-AD-EN-1 141
Note:
The page number notation is not part of the address.
6.3.5 EVENT EXTRACTION

The device supports two methods of event extraction providing either automatic or manual extraction of the
stored event, fault, and maintenance records.
6.3.5.1 AUTOMATIC EVENT RECORD EXTRACTION

The automatic extraction facilities allow all types of record to be extracted as they occur. Event records are
extracted in sequential order including any fault or maintenance data that may be associated with the event.
The MODBUS master can determine whether the device has any events stored that have not yet been extracted.
This is performed by reading the status register 30001 (G26 data type). If the event bit of this register is set then the
device has non-extracted events available. To select the next event for sequential extraction, the master station
writes a value of 1 to the record selection register 40400 (G18 data type). The event data together with any fault/
maintenance data can be read from the registers specified below. Once the data has been read, the event record
can be marked as having been read by writing a value of '2' to register 40400.
6.3.5.2 MANUAL EVENT RECORD EXTRACTION

There are three registers available to manually select stored records and three read-only registers allowing the
number of stored records to be determined.
● 40100: Select Event
● 40101: Select Fault
● 40102: Select Maintenance Record
For each of the above registers a value of 0 represents the most recent stored record. The following registers can
be read to indicate the numbers of the various types of record stored.
● 30100: Number of stored records
● 30101: Number of stored fault records
● 30102: Number of stored maintenance records
Each fault or maintenance record logged causes an event record to be created. If this event record is selected, the
additional registers allowing the fault or maintenance record details will also become populated.
6.3.5.3 RECORD DATA

The location and format of the registers used to access the record data is the same whether they have been
selected using either automatic or manual extraction.
MODBUS
Event Description Length Comments
Address
Time and Date 30103 4 See G12 data type description
Event Type 30107 1 See G13 data type description
Nature of value depends on event type. This will contain the status as a binary flag
Event Value 30108 2
for contact, opto-input, alarm, and protection events.
142 P345-AD-EN-1
MODBUS
Event Description Length Comments
Address
This indicates the MODBUS register address where the change occurred.
Alarm 30011
Relays 30723
Optos 30725
MODBUS Address 30110 1
Protection events – like the relay and opto addresses this will map onto the
MODBUS address of the appropriate DDB status register depending on which bit
of the DDB the change occurred. These will range from 30727 to 30785.
For platform events, fault events and maintenance events the default is 0.
This register will contain the DDB ordinal for protection events or the bit number
Event Index 30111 1 for alarm events. The direction of the change will be indicated by the most
significant bit; 1 for 0 – 1 change and 0 for 1 – 0 change.
0 means that there is no additional data.
1 means fault record data can be read from 30113 to 30199 (number of registers
Additional Data Present 30112 1
depends on the product).
2 means maintenance record data can be read from 30036 to 30039.
If a fault record or maintenance record is directly selected using the manual mechanism then the data can be read
from the register ranges specified above. The event record data in registers 30103 to 30111 will not be available.
It is possible using register 40401(G6 data type) to independently clear the stored relay event/fault and
maintenance records. This register also provides an option to reset the device indications, which has the same
effect on the relay as pressing the clear key within the alarm viewer using the HMI panel menu.
6.3.6 DISTURBANCE RECORD EXTRACTION

The IED provides facilities for both manual and automatic extraction of disturbance records.
Records extracted over MODBUS from Px40 devices are presented in COMTRADE format. This involves extracting
an ASCII text configuration file and then extracting a binary data file.
Each file is extracted by reading a series of data pages from the IED The data page is made up of 127 registers,
giving a maximum transfer of 254 bytes per page.
The following set of registers is presented to the master station to support the extraction of uncompressed
disturbance records:
MODBUS registers
MODBUS Register Name Description
Provides the status of the relay as bit flags:
b0: Out of service
b1: Minor self test failure
b2: Event
b3: Time synchronization
3x00001 Status register b4: Disturbance
b5: Fault
b6: Trip
b7: Alarm
b8 to b15: Unused
A ‘1’ on b4 indicates the presence of a disturbance
Indicates the total number of disturbance records currently stored in the
3x00800 No of stored disturbances
relay, both extracted and non-extracted.
Indicates the unique identifier value for the oldest disturbance record
Unique identifier of the oldest stored in the relay. This is an integer value used in conjunction with the
3x00801
disturbance record ‘Number of stored disturbances’ value to calculate a value for manually
selecting records.
P345-AD-EN-1 143
MODBUS Register Name Description

This register is used to manually select disturbance records. The values
written to this cell are an offset of the unique identifier value for the
Manual disturbance record
4x00250 oldest record. The offset value, which ranges from 0 to the Number of
selection register
stored disturbances - 1, is added to the identifier of the oldest record to
generate the identifier of the required record.
This register is used during the extraction process and has a number of
commands. These are:
b0: Select next event
Record selection command b1: Accept event
4x00400
register b2: Select next disturbance record
b3: Accept disturbance record
b4: Select next page of disturbance data
b5: Select data file
3x00930 - 3x00933 Record time stamp These registers return the timestamp of the disturbance record.
This register informs the master station of the number of registers in the
3x00802 No of registers in data page
data page that are populated.
These 127 registers are used to transfer data from the relay to the master
3x00803 - 3x00929 Data page registers
station. They are 16-bit unsigned integers.
The disturbance record status register is used during the extraction
Disturbance record status
3x00934 process to indicate to the master station when data is ready for
register
extraction. See next table.
This is used to select the required data file format. This is reserved for
4x00251 Data file format selection
future use.
Note:
Register addresses are provided in reference code + address format. E.g. 4x00001 is reference code 4x, address 1 (which is
specified as function code 03, address 0x0000 in the MODBUS specification).
The disturbance record status register will report one of the following values:
Disturbance record states

State Description
This will be the state reported when no record is selected; such as after power on or after a record has been
Idle
marked as extracted.
Busy The relay is currently processing data.
Page ready The data page has been populated and the master station can now safely read the data.
Configuration complete All of the configuration data has been read without error.
Record complete All of the disturbance data has been extracted.
An error occurred during the extraction process where the disturbance being extracted was overwritten by a
Disturbance overwritten
new record.
An attempt was made by the master station to automatically select the next oldest non-extracted
No non-extracted disturbances
disturbance when all records have been extracted.
Not a valid disturbance An attempt was made by the master station to manually select a record that did not exist in the relay.
Command out of sequence The master station issued a command to the relay that was not expected during the extraction process.
6.3.6.1 MANUAL EXTRACTION PROCEDURE

The procedure used to extract a disturbance manually is shown below. The manual method of extraction does not
allow for the acceptance of disturbance records.
144 P345-AD-EN-1
Start
Get number of
disturbances from
register 3x00800
No Are there Yes

disturbances?
Get oldest disturbance ID

from register 3x00801
Select required disturbance

by writing the ID value of
the required record to
register 4x00250
Get disturbance time stamp

Extract disturbance data from registers 3x00930 –
3x00933
End
V01003
Figure 53: Manual selection of a disturbance record
6.3.6.2 AUTOMATIC EXTRACTION PROCEDURE

There are two methods that can be used for automatically extracting disturbances:
Method 1
Method 1 is simpler and is better at extracting single disturbance records (when the disturbance recorder is polled
regularly).
P345-AD-EN-1 145
Start
Read status word from

register 3x0001
Is disturbance bit No
(bit 4) set?
Yes
Error
Select next oldest non-

extracted record by writing
0x04 to register 4x00400
Send command to accept

Extract disturbance data record by writing 0x08 to
register 4x00400
V01004
Figure 54: Automatic selection of disturbance record - method 1
Method 2
Method 2 is more complex to implement but is more efficient at extracting large quantities of disturbance records.
This may be useful when the disturbance recorder is polled only occasionally and therefore may have many stored
records.
146 P345-AD-EN-1
Start
FirstTime = True
Read status word from

register 3x0001
FirstTime = True
Is disturbance bit
(bit 4) set? No
Yes
Select next oldest non- Yes Is FirstTime =

extracted record by writing
True?
0x04 to register 4x00400
No
FirstTime = False
Send command to accept

Error and select next record by
FirstTime = True Extract disturbance record
writing 0x0C to register
4x00400
V01005
Figure 55: Automatic selection of disturbance record - method 2
6.3.6.3 EXTRACTING THE DISTURBANCE DATA

The extraction of the disturbance record is a two-stage process that involves extracting the configuration file first
and then the data file. The configuration file must be extracted first, followed by the data file:
P345-AD-EN-1 147
Extracting the Comtrade configuration file
Start
(Record selected)
To parent
procedure
Read DR status value Busy
Check DR status
for error
conditions or Error
Busy status
Configuration complete What is the value Other

of DR status?
Page ready
Read number of
registers in data page
from address 3x00802
Read data page

registers starting at
3x00803
Store data to ASCII file Send ‘Get next page of

Configuration complete
in the order the data data’ to register
(begin extracting data were received 4x00400
file)
V01006
Figure 56: Configuration file extraction
148 P345-AD-EN-1
Extracting the comtrade data file
Start
(Configuration
complete)
Send ‘Select Data File’

to register 4x00400
To parent
procedure
Read DR status value Busy
Check DR status
for error
conditions or Error
Busy status
Record complete What is the value Other

of DR status?
Page ready
Read number of
registers in data page
from address 3x00802
Read data page

registers starting at
3x00803
Record complete (mark Store data to binary file Send ‘Get next page of
record as extracted; in the order the data data’ to register
automatic extraction only) were received 4x00400
V01007
Figure 57: Data file extraction
During the extraction of the COMTRADE files, an error may occur, which will be reported on the DR Status register
3x00934. In this case, you must take action to re-start the record extraction or to abort according to the table
below.
Value State Description
This will be the state reported when no record is selected; such as after power on or after a record has
0 Idle
been marked as extracted.
1 Busy The relay is currently processing data.
2 Page ready The data page has been populated and the master station can now safely read the data.
Configuration
3 All of the configuration data has been read without error.
complete
4 Record complete All of the disturbance data has been extracted.
Disturbance An error occurred during the extraction process where the disturbance being extracted was overwritten
5
overwritten by a new record.
P345-AD-EN-1 149
Value State Description

No unextracted An attempt was made by the master station to automatically select the next oldest unextracted
6
disturbances disturbance when all records have been extracted.
7 Not a valid disturbance An attempt was made by the master station to manually select a record that did not exist in the relay.
Command out of
8 The master station issued a command to the relay that was not expected during the extraction process.
sequence
6.3.7 SETTING CHANGES

All the IED settings are 4xxxx page addresses. The following points should be noted when changing settings:
● Settings implemented using multiple registers must be written to using a multi-register write operation.
● The first address for a multi-register write must be a valid address. If there are unmapped addresses within
the range being written to, the data associated with these addresses will be discarded.
● If a write operation is performed with values that are out of range, the illegal data response will be
produced. Valid setting values within the same write operation will be executed.
● If a write operation is performed, which attempts to change registers requiring a higher level of password
access than is currently enabled then all setting changes in the write operation will be discarded.
6.3.8 PASSWORD PROTECTION

The following registers are available to control password protection:
Function MODBUS Registers
Password entry 4x00001 to 4x00002 and 4x20000 to 4x20003
Setting to change password level 1 (4 character) 4x00023 to 4x00024
Setting to change password level 1 (8 character) 4x20008 to 4x20011
Setting to change password level 2 4x20016 to 4x20019
Setting to change password level 3 4x20024 to 4x20027
Can be read to indicate current access level 3x00010
6.3.9 PROTECTION AND DISTURBANCE RECORDER SETTINGS

Setting changes to either of these areas are stored in a scratchpad area and will not be used by the IED unless
confirmed. Register 40405 can be used either to confirm or abort the setting changes within the scratchpad area.
The IED supports four groups of protection settings. The MODBUS addresses for each of the four groups are
repeated within the following address ranges.
● Group 1: 4x1000 - 4x2999
● Group 2: 4x3000 - 4x4999
● Group 3: 4x5000 - 4x6999
● Group 4: 4x7000 - 4x8999
In addition to the basic editing of the protection setting groups, the following functions are provided:
● Default values can be restored to a setting group or to all of the relay settings by writing to register 4x0402.
● It is possible to copy the contents of one setting group to another by writing the source group to register
40406 and the target group to 4x0407.
The setting changes performed by either of the two operations defined above are made to the scratchpad area.
These changes must be confirmed by writing to register 4x0405.
The active protection setting groups can be selected by writing to register 40404. An illegal data response will be
returned if an attempt is made to set the active group to one that has been disabled.
150 P345-AD-EN-1

The date-time data type G12 allows real date and time information to be conveyed to a resolution of 1 ms. The
structure of the data type is compliant with the IEC 60870-5-4 Binary Time 2a format.
The seven bytes of the date/time frame are packed into four 16-bit registers and are transmitted in sequence
starting from byte 1. This is followed by a null byte, making eight bytes in total.
Register data is usually transmitted starting with the highest-order byte. Therefore byte 1 will be in the high-order
byte position followed by byte 2 in the low-order position for the first register. The last register will contain just byte
7 in the high order position and the low order byte will have a value of zero.
G12 date & time data type structure

Bit Position
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0
2 m15 m14 m13 m12 m11 m10 m9 m8
3 IV R I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 I0
4 SU R R H4 H3 H2 H1 H0
5 W2 W1 W0 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
6 R R R R M3 M2 M1 M0
7 R Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
Key to table:
● m = milliseconds: 0 to 59,999
● I = minutes: 0 to 59
● H = hours: 0 to 23
● W = day of the week: 1 to 7 starting from Monday
● D = day of the month: 1 to 31
● M = month of the year: 1 to 12 starting from January
● Y = year of the century: 0 to 99
● R = reserved: 0
● SU = summertime: 0 = GMT, 1 = summertime
● IV = invalid: 0 = invalid value, 1 = valid value
Since the range of the data type is only 100 years, the century must be deduced. The century is calculated as the
one that will produce the nearest time value to the current date. For example: 30-12-99 is 30-12-1999 when
received in 1999 & 2000, but is 30-12-2099 when received in 2050. This technique allows 2 digit years to be
accurately converted to 4 digits in a ±50 year window around the current date.
The invalid bit has two applications:
● It can indicate that the date-time information is considered inaccurate, but is the best information available.
● It can indicate that the date-time information is not available.
The summertime bit is used to indicate that summertime (day light saving) is being used and, more importantly, to
resolve the alias and time discontinuity which occurs when summertime starts and ends. This is important for the
correct time correlation of time stamped records.
The day of the week field is optional and if not calculated will be set to zero.
The concept of time zone is not catered for by this data type and hence by the relay. It is up to the end user to
determine the time zone. Normal practice is to use UTC (universal co-ordinated time).
P345-AD-EN-1 151
6.3.11 POWER AND ENERGY MEASUREMENT DATA FORMATS

The power and energy measurements are available in two data formats:
Data Type G29: an integer format using 3 registers
Data Type G125: a 32 bit floating point format using 2 registers
The G29 registers are listed in the first part of the MEASUREMENTS 2 column of the Courier database. The G125
equivalents appear at the end of the MEASUREMENTS 2 column.
Data type G29

Data type G29 consists of three registers:
The first register is the per unit (or normalised) power or energy measurement. It is a signed 16 bit quantity. This
register is of Data Type G28.
The second and third registers contain a multiplier to convert the per unit value to a real value. These are unsigned
32-bit quantities. These two registers together are of Data Type G27.
Thee overall power or energy value conveyed by the G29 data type is therefore G29 = G28 x G27.
The IED calculates the G28 per unit power or energy value as:
G28 = (measured secondary quantity/CT secondary)(110V/(VT secondary).
Since data type G28 is a signed 16-bit integer, its dynamic range is constrained to +/- 32768. You should take this
limitation into consideration for the energy measurements, as the G29 value will saturate a long time before the
equivalent G125 does.
The associated G27 multiplier is calculated as:
G27 = (CT primary)(VT primary/110V) when primary value measurements are selected
and
G27 = (CT secondary)(VT secondary/110V) when secondary value measurements are selected.
Due to the required truncations from floating point values to integer values in the calculations of the G29
component parts and its limited dynamic range, we only recommend using G29 values when the MODBUS master
cannot deal with the G125 IEEE754 floating point equivalents.
Note:
The G29 values must be read in whole multiples of three registers. It is not possible to read the G28 and G27 parts with
separate read commands.
Example of Data Type G29

Assuming the CT/VT configurations are as follows:
● Main VT Primary 6.6 kV
● Main VT Secondary 110 V
● Phase CT Primary 3150 A
● Phase CT Secondary 1 A
The Three-phase Active Power displayed on the measurement panel on the front display of the IED would be 21.94
MW
The registers related to the Three-phase Active Power are: 3x00327, 3x00328, 3x00329
Register Address Data read from these registers Format of the data
3x00327 116 G28
3x00328 2 G27
152 P345-AD-EN-1
Register Address Data read from these registers Format of the data
3x00329 57928 G27
The Equivalent G27 value = [216 * Value in the address 3x00328 + Value in the address 3x00329] = 216*2 + 57928 =
189000
The Equivalent value of power G29 = G28 * Equivalent G27 =116 * 189000 =21.92 MW
Note:
The above calculated value (21.92 MW) is same as the power value measured on the front panel display.
Data type G125

Data type G125 is a short float IEEE754 floating point format, which occupies 32 bits in two consecutive registers.
The high order byte of the format is in the first (low order) register and the low order byte in the second register.
The value of the G125 measurement is as accurate as the IED's ability to resolve the measurement after it has
applied the secondary or primary scaling factors. It does not suffer from the truncation errors or dynamic range
limitations associated with the G29 data format.
6.3.12 MODBUS CONFIGURATION

3. Move to the first cell down (RP1 protocol). This is a non settable cell, which shows the chosen
communication protocol – in this case Modbus.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Protocol
Modbus
4. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Address). This cell controls the Modbus address of the IED. Up to 32 IEDs
can be connected to one spur, therefore it is necessary for each IED to have a unique address so that
messages from the master control station are accepted by only one IED. Modbus uses a decimal number
between 1 and 247 for the Relay Address. It is important that no two IEDs have the same address.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Address
1
controls how long the IED waits without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its
default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set
between 1 and 30 minutes.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Inactivtimer
10.00 mins
P345-AD-EN-1 153
supported by the IED 1200 bits/s, 2400 bits/s, 4800 bits/s, 9600 bits/s, 19200 bits/s and 38400 bits/s. Make
sure that the baud rate selected on the IED is the same as that set on the master station.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Baud rate
9600 bits/s
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Parity
None
8. Move down to the next cell (Modbus IEC Time). This cell controls the order in which the bytes of information
are transmitted. There is a choice of Standard or Reverse. When Standard is selected the time format
complies with IEC 60870-5-4 requirements such that byte 1 of the information is transmitted first, followed
by bytes 2 through to 7. If Reverse is selected the transmission of information is reversed.
COMMUNICATIONS
Modbus IEC Time
Standard
6.4 DNP 3.0

This section describes how the DNP 3.0 standard is applied in the product. It is not a description of the standard
itself. The level at which this section is written assumes that the reader is already familiar with the DNP 3.0
standard.
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany the device profile document that is included in the Menu
Database document. The DNP 3.0 protocol is not described here, please refer to the documentation available from
the user group. The device profile document specifies the full details of the DNP 3.0 implementation. This is the
standard format DNP 3.0 document that specifies which objects; variations and qualifiers are supported. The
device profile document also specifies what data is available from the device using DNP 3.0. The IED operates as a
DNP 3.0 slave and supports subset level 2, as described in the DNP 3.0 standard, plus some of the features from
level 3.
The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP Users Group. For further information on DNP 3.0 and
the protocol specifications, please see the DNP website (www.dnp.org).

DNP 3.0 can be used with EIA(RS)485.
Several connection options are available for DNP 3.0
The baud rate can be selected using the front panel menu or by the settings application software.
When using a serial interface, the data format is: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and optional configurable parity
bit.
6.4.2 OBJECT 1 BINARY INPUTS

Object 1, binary inputs, contains information describing the state of signals in the IED, which mostly form part of
the digital data bus (DDB). In general these include the state of the output contacts and opto-inputs, alarm signals,
154 P345-AD-EN-1
and protection start and trip signals. The ‘DDB number’ column in the device profile document provides the DDB
numbers for the DNP 3.0 point data. These can be used to cross-reference to the DDB definition list. See the
relevant Menu Database document. The binary input points can also be read as change events using Object 2 and
Object 60 for class 1-3 event data.
6.4.3 OBJECT 10 BINARY OUTPUTS

Object 10, binary outputs, contains commands that can be operated using DNP 3.0. Therefore the points accept
commands of type pulse on (null, trip, close) and latch on/off as detailed in the device profile in the relevant Menu
Database document, and execute the command once for either command. The other fields are ignored (queue,
clear, trip/close, in time and off time).
There is an additional image of the Control Inputs. Described as Alias Control Inputs, they reflect the state of the
Control Input, but with a dynamic nature.
● If the Control Input DDB signal is already SET and a new DNP SET command is sent to the Control Input, the
Control Input DDB signal goes momentarily to RESET and then back to SET.
● If the Control Input DDB signal is already RESET and a new DNP RESET command is sent to the Control
Input, the Control Input DDB signal goes momentarily to SET and then back to RESET.
DNP Latch DNP Latch DNP Latch DNP Latch

ON ON OFF OFF
Control Input
(Latched)
Aliased Control
Input
(Latched)
Control Input
(Pulsed )
Aliased Control
Input
(Pulsed )
The pulse width is equal to the duration of one protection iteration
V01002
Figure 58: Control input behaviour
Many of the IED’s functions are configurable so some of the Object 10 commands described in the following
sections may not be available. A read from Object 10 reports the point as off-line and an operate command to
Object 12 generates an error response.
Examples of Object 10 points that maybe reported as off-line are:
● Activate setting groups: Ensure setting groups are enabled
● CB trip/close: Ensure remote CB control is enabled
● Reset NPS thermal: Ensure NPS thermal protection is enabled
● Reset thermal O/L: Ensure thermal overload protection is enabled
● Reset RTD flags: Ensure RTD Inputs is enabled
● Control inputs: Ensure control inputs are enabled
P345-AD-EN-1 155
6.4.4 OBJECT 20 BINARY COUNTERS

Object 20, binary counters, contains cumulative counters and measurements. The binary counters can be read as
their present ‘running’ value from Object 20, or as a ‘frozen’ value from Object 21. The running counters of object
20 accept the read, freeze and clear functions. The freeze function takes the current value of the object 20 running
counter and stores it in the corresponding Object 21 frozen counter. The freeze and clear function resets the Object
20 running counter to zero after freezing its value.
Binary counter and frozen counter change event values are available for reporting from Object 22 and Object 23
respectively. Counter change events (Object 22) only report the most recent change, so the maximum number of
events supported is the same as the total number of counters. Frozen counter change events (Object 23) are
generated whenever a freeze operation is performed and a change has occurred since the previous freeze
command. The frozen counter event queues store the points for up to two freeze operations.
6.4.5 OBJECT 30 ANALOGUE INPUT

Object 30, analogue inputs, contains information from the IED’s measurements columns in the menu. All object 30
points can be reported as 16 or 32-bit integer values with flag, 16 or 32-bit integer values without flag, as well as
short floating point values.
Analogue values can be reported to the master station as primary, secondary or normalized values (which takes
into account the IED’s CT and VT ratios), and this is settable in the COMMUNICATIONS column in the IED.
Corresponding deadband settings can be displayed in terms of a primary, secondary or normalized value.
Deadband point values can be reported and written using Object 34 variations.
The deadband is the setting used to determine whether a change event should be generated for each point. The
change events can be read using Object 32 or Object 60. These events are generated for any point which has a
value changed by more than the deadband setting since the last time the data value was reported.
Any analogue measurement that is unavailable when it is read is reported as offline. For example, the frequency
would be offline if the current and voltage frequency is outside the tracking range of the IED. All Object 30 points
are reported as secondary values in DNP 3.0 (with respect to CT and VT ratios).
6.4.6 OBJECT 40 ANALOGUE OUTPUT

The conversion to fixed-point format requires the use of a scaling factor, which is configurable for the various
types of data within the IED such as current, voltage, and phase angle. All Object 40 points report the integer
scaling values and Object 41 is available to configure integer scaling quantities.
6.4.7 OBJECT 50 TIME SYNCHRONISATION

Function codes 1 (read) and 2 (write) are supported for Object 50 (time and date) variation 1. The DNP Need Time
function (the duration of time waited before requesting another time sync from the master) is supported, and is
configurable in the range 1 - 30 minutes.
Courier interface. An attempt to set the time using the interface will cause the device to create an event with the
current date and time taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.
6.4.8 DNP3 DEVICE PROFILE

This section describes the specific implementation of DNP version 3.0 within GE MiCOM P40 Agile IEDs for both
compact and modular ranges.
The devices use the DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library version 3 from Triangle MicroWorks Inc.
This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP Subset Definitions Document,
provides complete information on how to communicate with the devices using the DNP 3.0 protocol.
This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition Level 2. It also contains many
Subset Level 3 and above features.
156 P345-AD-EN-1
6.4.8.1 DNP3 DEVICE PROFILE TABLE

The following table provides the device profile in a similar format to that defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a “Document”, it is just one component of a
total interoperability guide. This table, in combination with the subsequent Implementation and Points List tables
should provide a complete interoperability/configuration guide for the device.
The following table provides the device profile in a similar format to that defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a "Document", it is just one component of a
total interoperability guide. This table, in combination with the subsequent Implementation and Points List tables
should provide a complete interoperability/configuration guide for the device.
DNP 3.0
Device Profile Document
Vendor Name: GE
Device Name: MiCOM P40Agile Protection Relays – compact and modular range
Models Covered: All models
Highest DNP Level Supported*: For Requests: Level 2
*This is the highest DNP level FULLY supported. Parts of level 3 are For Responses: Level 2
also supported
Device Function: Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the highest DNP levels supported (the complete list is described in the
DNP 3.0 Implementation Table):
For static (non-change event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01 (start-stop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index)
are supported in addition to the request qualifier code 06 (no range (all points))
Static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08 will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01
Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28
For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded
16-bit and 32-bit analogue change events with time may be requested
The read function code for Object 50 (time and date) variation 1 is supported
Analogue Input Deadbands, Object 34, variations 1 through 3, are supported
Floating Point Analogue Output Status and Output Block Objects 40 and 41 are supported
Sequential file transfer, Object 70, variations 2 through 7, are supported
Device Attribute Object 0 is supported
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Transmitted: 292
Received: 292
Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets) Transmitted: Configurable (100 to 2048). Default 2048
Received: 249
Maximum Data Link Retries: Fixed at 2
Maximum Application Layer Retries: None
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: Configurable to Never or Always
Requires Application Layer Confirmation: When reporting event data (Slave devices only)
When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only)
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm: Configurable
Complete Application Fragment: None
Application Confirm: Configurable
Complete Application Response: None
Others:
Data Link Confirm Timeout: Configurable from 0 (Disabled) to 120s, default 10s.
Application Confirm Timeout: Configurable from 1 to 120s, default 2s.
P345-AD-EN-1 157
DNP 3.0
Device Profile Document
Select/Operate Arm Timeout: Configurable from 1 to 10s, default 10s.
Need Time Interval (Set IIN1-4): Configurable from 1 to 30, default 10min.
Application File Timeout 60 s
Analog Change Event Scan Period: Fixed at 0.5s
Counter Change Event Scan Period Fixed at 0.5s
Frozen Counter Change Event Scan Period Fixed at 1s
Maximum Delay Measurement Error: 2.5 ms
Time Base Drift Over a 10-minute Interval: 7 ms
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
Write Binary Outputs: Never
Select/Operate: Always
Direct Operate: Always
Direct Operate - No Ack: Always
Count > 1 Never
Pulse On Always
Pulse Off Sometimes
Latch On Always
Latch Off Always
Queue Never
Clear Queue Never
Note: Paired Control points will accept Pulse On/Trip and Pulse On/Close, but only single point will accept the Pulse Off control command.
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation Configurable to send one or the other
requested:
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific Binary input change with time
variation requested:
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Never
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses: Never
No other options are permitted
Default Counter Object/Variation: Configurable, Point-by-point list attached
Default object: 20
Default variation: 1
Counters Roll Over at: 32 bits
Sends multi-fragment responses: Yes
Sequential File Transfer Support:
Append File Mode No
Custom Status Code Strings No
Permissions Field Yes
File Events Assigned to Class No
File Events Send Immediately Yes
Multiple Blocks in a Fragment No
Max Number of Files Open 1
158 P345-AD-EN-1
6.4.8.2 DNP3 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE

The implementation table provides a list of objects, variations and control codes supported by the device:
Request Response
Object
(Library will parse) (Library will respond with)
Object Variation Function Codes (dec) Qualifier Codes Function Codes Qualifier Codes (hex)
Description (dec)
Number Number (hex)
1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
request default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
1 1 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default - see 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index - see note 2)
note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
1 2 Binary Input with Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index - see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
2 0 Binary Input Change - Any 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Variation 07, 08 (limited qty)
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
10 0 Binary Output Status - Any 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Variation 06 (no range, or all)
17, 27, 28 (index)
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 (select) 17, 28 (index) 129 response echo of request
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, noack)
20 0 Binary Counter - Any Variation 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
17, 27, 28 (index)
7 (freeze) 00, 01 (start-stop)
8 (freeze noack) 06 (no range, or all)
9 (freeze clear) 07, 08 (limited qty)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter with Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21 0 Frozen Counter - Any Variation 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
P345-AD-EN-1 159
Request Response
Object
Description (dec)
Number Number (hex)
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
Freeze 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index - see note 1)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
Freeze 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 17, 28 (index - see note 1)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
`22 0 Counter Change Event - Any 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
22 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
(default - see without Time 07, 08 (limited qty)
note 1)
22 2 16-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
without Time 07, 08 (limited qty)
22 5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
Time 07, 08 (limited qty)
22 6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
23 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
is used to request default 07, 08 (limited qty)
variation)
23 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
(default - see 07, 08 (limited qty)
note 1)
23 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
23 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
30 0 Analog Input - Any Variation 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
30 5 Short floating point 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
160 P345-AD-EN-1
Request Response
Object
Description (dec)
Number Number (hex)
32 0 Analog Change Event - Any 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
32 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
(default - see without Time 07, 08 (limited qty)
note 1)
32 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
without Time 07, 08 (limited qty)
32 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
32 5 Short floating point Analog 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
Change Event without Time 07, 08 (limited qty)
32 7 Short floating point Analog 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 response 17, 28 (index)
Change Event with Time 07, 08 (limited qty)
34 0 Analog Input Deadband (Variation 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
0 is used to request default 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
34 1 16 Bit Analog Input Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
34 2 32 Bit Analog Input Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
17, 27, 28 (index)
34 3 Short Floating Point Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
Deadband 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index - see note 2)
17, 27, 28 (index)
17, 27, 28 (index)
40 0 Analog Output Status (Variation 0 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
is used to request default 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
40 1 32-Bit Analog Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
40 2 16-Bit Analog Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
40 3 Short Floating Point Analog 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
Output Status 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index - see note 2)
17, 27, 28 (index)
41 1 32-Bit Analog Output Block 3 (select) 17, 28 (index) 129 response echo of request
4 (operate) 27 (index)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, noack)
41 2 16-Bit Analog Output Block 3 (select) 17, 28 (index) 129 response echo of request
4 (operate) 27 (index)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, noack)
P345-AD-EN-1 161
Request Response
Object
Description (dec)
Number Number (hex)
41 3 Short Floating Point Analog 3 (select) 17, 27, 28 (index) 129 response echo of request
Output Block 4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, noack)
1 1 (read) 07 (limited qty = 1) 129 response 07 (limited qty = 1)
50 (default - see Time and Date
note 1)
2 (write) 07 (limited qty = 1)
60 0 Not defined
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
70 0 File Event - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
70 2 File Authentication 29 (authenticate) 5b (free-format) 129 response 5B (free-format)
70 3 File Command 25 (open) 5b (free-format)
27 (delete)
70 4 File Command Status 26 (close) 5b (free-format) 129 response 5B (free-format)
30 (abort)
70 5 File Transfer 1 (read) 5b (free-format) 129 response 5B (free-format)
70 6 File Transfer Status 129 response 5B (free-format)
70 7 File Descriptor 28 (get file info) 5b (free-format) 129 response 5B (free-format)
80 1 Internal Indications 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop)
No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart)
No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)
Note:
A Default variation refers to the variation responded to when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
Note:
For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded to when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or
28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded to with qualifiers
00 or 01. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded to.
6.4.8.3 DNP3 INTERNAL INDICATIONS

The following table lists the DNP3.0 Internal Indications (IIN) and identifies those that are supported by the device.
162 P345-AD-EN-1
The IIN form an information element used to convey the internal states and diagnostic results of a device. This
information can be used by a receiving station to perform error recovery or other suitable functions. The IIN is a
two-octet field that follows the function code in all responses from the device. When a request cannot be
processed due to formatting errors or the requested data is not available, the IIN is always returned with the
appropriate bits set.
Bit Indication Description Supported
Octet 1
Set when a request is received with the destination address of the all stations
address (6553510). It is cleared after the next response (even if a response to a
0 All stations message received global request is required). Yes
This IIN is used to let the master station know that a "broadcast" message was
received by the relay.
Set when data that has been configured as Class 1 data is ready to be sent to
the master.
1 Class 1 data available Yes
The master station should request this class data from the relay when this bit
is set in a response.
the master.
the master.
The relay requires time synchronization from the master station (using the
Time and Date object).
4 Time-synchronization required Yes
This IIN is cleared once the time has been synchronized. It can also be cleared
by explicitly writing a 0 into this bit of the Internal Indication object.
Set when some or all of the relays digital output points (Object 10/12) are in the
Local state. That is, the relays control outputs are NOT accessible through the
5 Local DNP protocol. No
This IIN is clear when the relay is in the Remote state. That is, the relays control
outputs are fully accessible through the DNP protocol.
Set when an abnormal condition exists in the relay. This IIN is only used when
6 Device in trouble the state cannot be described by a combination of one or more of the other IIN No
bits.
Set when the device software application restarts. This IIN is cleared when the
7 Device restart master station explicitly writes a 0 into this bit of the Internal Indications Yes
object.
Octet 2
0 Function code not implemented The received function code is not implemented within the relay. Yes
The relay does not have the specified objects or there are no objects assigned
to the requested class.
1 Requested object(s) unknown Yes
This IIN should be used for debugging purposes and usually indicates a
mismatch in device profiles or configuration problems.
Parameters in the qualifier, range or data fields are not valid or out of range.
This is a 'catch-all' for application request formatting errors. It should only be
2 Out of range Yes
used for debugging purposes. This IIN usually indicates configuration
problems.
Event buffer(s), or other application buffers, have overflowed. The master
station should attempt to recover as much data as possible and indicate to the
3 Buffer overflow Yes
user that there may be lost data. The appropriate error recovery procedures
should be initiated by the user.
P345-AD-EN-1 163
Bit Indication Description Supported

The received request was understood but the requested operation is already
4 Already executing
executing.
Set to indicate that the current configuration in the relay is corrupt. The
5 Bad configuration Yes
master station may download another configuration to the relay.
6 Reserved Always returned as zero.
7 Reserved Always returned as zero.
6.4.8.4 DNP3 RESPONSE STATUS CODES

When the device processes Control Relay Output Block (Object 12) requests, it returns a set of status codes; one for
each point contained within the original request. The complete list of codes appears in the following table:
Code Number Identifier Name Description
0 Success The received request has been accepted, initiated, or queued.
The request has not been accepted because the ‘operate’ message was received after the
1 Timeout arm timer (Select Before Operate) timed out.
The arm timer was started when the select operation for the same point was received.
The request has not been accepted because no previous matching ‘select’ request exists. (An
2 No select ‘operate’ message was sent to activate an output that was not previously armed with a
matching ‘select’ message).
The request has not been accepted because there were formatting errors in the control
3 Format error
request (‘select’, ‘operate’, or ‘direct operate’).
The request has not been accepted because a control operation is not supported for this
4 Not supported
point.
The request has not been accepted because the control queue is full or the point is already
5 Already active
active.
6 Hardware error The request has not been accepted because of control hardware problems.
7 Local The request has not been accepted because local access is in progress.
8 Too many operations The request has not been accepted because too many operations have been requested.
9 Not authorized The request has not been accepted because of insufficient authorization.
127 Undefined The request not been accepted because of some other undefined reason.
Note:
Code numbers 10 through to 126 are reserved for future use.
6.4.9 DNP3 CONFIGURATION

communication protocol – in this case DNP3.0.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Protocol
DNP3.0
164 P345-AD-EN-1
4. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Address). This cell controls the DNP3.0 address of the IED. Up to 32 IEDs can
be connected to one spur, therefore it is necessary for each IED to have a unique address so that messages
from the master control station are accepted by only one IED. DNP3.0 uses a decimal number between 1
and 65519 for the Relay Address. It is important that no two IEDs have the same address.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Address
1
supported by the IED 1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps and 38400 bps. Make sure that
the baud rate selected on the IED is the same as that set on the master station.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Baud rate
9600 bits/s
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Parity
None
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 PhysicalLink
Copper
8. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Time Sync). This cell affects the time synchronisation request from the
master by the IED. It can be set to enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP3.0 master to
synchronise the time on the IED.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Time Sync
Enabled
6.4.9.1 DNP3 CONFIGURATOR

A PC support package for DNP3.0 is available as part of the supplied settings application software (MiCOM S1 Agile)
to allow configuration of the device's DNP3.0 response. The configuration data is uploaded from the device to the
PC in a block of compressed format data and downloaded in a similar manner after modification. The new DNP3.0
configuration takes effect after the download is complete. To restore the default configuration at any time, from
the CONFIGURATION column, select the Restore Defaults cell then select All Settings.
In MiCOM S1 Agile, the DNP3.0 data is shown in three main folders, one folder each for the point configuration,
integer scaling and default variation (data format). The point configuration also includes screens for binary inputs,
binary outputs, counters and analogue input configuration.
If the device supports DNP Over Ethernet, the configuration related settings are done in the folder DNP Over
Ethernet.
P345-AD-EN-1 165
6.5 IEC 61850

This section describes how the IEC 61850 standard is applied to GE products. It is not a description of the standard
itself. The level at which this section is written assumes that the reader is already familiar with the IEC 61850
standard.
IEC 61850 is the international standard for Ethernet-based communication in substations. It enables integration of
all protection, control, measurement and monitoring functions within a substation, and additionally provides the
means for interlocking and inter-tripping. It combines the convenience of Ethernet with the security that is so
essential in substations today.
There are two editions of most parts of the IEC 61850 standard; edition 1 and edition 2. The edition which this
product supports depends on the Software Version.
From Software Version 90 onwards, it is possible to select between edition 1 and edition 2. Switching between
edition 1 and edition 2 is described in the Selection of the IEC 61850 Edition section.
An additional section detailing the enhancements in edition 2 models is documented later in this chapter, if
applicable.
6.5.1 BENEFITS OF IEC 61850

The standard provides:
● Standardised models for IEDs and other equipment within the substation
● Standardised communication services (the methods used to access and exchange data)
● Standardised formats for configuration files
● Peer-to-peer communication
The standard adheres to the requirements laid out by the ISO OSI model and therefore provides complete vendor
interoperability and flexibility on the transmission types and protocols used. This includes mapping of data onto
Ethernet, which is becoming more and more widely used in substations, in favour of RS485. Using Ethernet in the
substation offers many advantages, most significantly including:
● Ethernet allows high-speed data rates (currently 100 Mbps, rather than tens of kbps or less used by most
serial protocols)
● Ethernet provides the possibility to have multiple clients
● Ethernet is an open standard in every-day use
● There is a wide range of Ethernet-compatible products that may be used to supplement the LAN installation
(hubs, bridges, switches)
6.5.2 IEC 61850 INTEROPERABILITY

A major benefit of IEC 61850 is interoperability. IEC 61850 standardizes the data model of substation IEDs, which
allows interoperability between products from multiple vendors.
An IEC 61850-compliant device may be interoperable, but this does not mean it is interchangeable. You cannot
simply replace a product from one vendor with that of another without reconfiguration. However the terminology
is pre-defined and anyone with prior knowledge of IEC 61850 should be able to integrate a new device very quickly
without having to map all of the new data. IEC 61850 brings improved substation communications and
interoperability to the end user, at a lower cost.
6.5.3 THE IEC 61850 DATA MODEL

The data model of any IEC 61850 IED can be viewed as a hierarchy of information, whose nomenclature and
categorization is defined and standardized in the IEC 61850 specification.
166 P345-AD-EN-1
Data Attributes
stVal q t PhA PhB PhC
Data Objects
Pos A
Logical Nodes : 1 to n
LN1: XCBR LN2: MMXU
Logical Device : IEDs 1 to n
Physical Device (network address)
V01008
Figure 59: Data model layers in IEC 61850
The levels of this hierarchy can be described as follows:
Data Frame format

Layer Description
Identifies the actual IED within a system. Typically the device’s name or IP address can be used (for
Physical Device
example Feeder_1 or 10.0.0.2.
Identifies groups of related Logical Nodes within the Physical Device. For the MiCOM IEDs, 5 Logical
Logical Device
Devices exist: Control, Measurements, Protection, Records, System.
Identifies the major functional areas within the IEC 61850 data model. Either 3 or 6 characters are
used as a prefix to define the functional group (wrapper) while the actual functionality is identified by
Wrapper/Logical Node Instance a 4 character Logical Node name suffixed by an instance number.
For example, XCBR1 (circuit breaker), MMXU1 (measurements), FrqPTOF2 (overfrequency protection,
stage 2).
This next layer is used to identify the type of data you will be presented with. For example, Pos
Data Object
(position) of Logical Node type XCBR.
This is the actual data (measurement value, status, description, etc.). For example, stVal (status value)
Data Attribute
indicating actual position of circuit breaker for Data Object type Pos of Logical Node type XCBR.
6.5.4 IEC 61850 IN MICOM IEDS

IEC 61850 is implemented by use of a separate Ethernet card. This Ethernet card manages the majority of the
IEC 61850 implementation and data transfer to avoid any impact on the performance of the protection functions.
To communicate with an IEC 61850 IED on Ethernet, it is necessary only to know its IP address. This can then be
configured into either:
● An IEC 61850 client (or master), for example a bay computer (MiCOM C264)
● An HMI
● An MMS browser, with which the full data model can be retrieved from the IED, without any prior knowledge
of the IED
P345-AD-EN-1 167
The IEC 61850 compatible interface standard provides capability for the following:
● Read access to measurements
● Refresh of all measurements at a standard rate.
● Generation of non-buffered and buffered reports on change of status or measurement
● SNTP time synchronization over an Ethernet link. (This is used to synchronize the IED's internal real time
clock.
● GOOSE peer-to-peer communication
● Disturbance record extraction by IEC 61850 MMS file transfer. The record is extracted as an ASCII format
COMTRADE file
● Controls (Direct and Select Before Operate)
Note:
Setting changes are not supported in the current IEC 61850 implementation. Currently these setting changes are carried out
using the settings application software.
6.5.5 IEC 61850 DATA MODEL IMPLEMENTATION

The data model naming adopted in the IEDs has been standardised for consistency. Therefore the Logical Nodes
are allocated to one of the five Logical Devices, as appropriate.
The data model is described in the Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS) document, which is
available as a separate document.
6.5.6 IEC 61850 COMMUNICATION SERVICES IMPLEMENTATION

The IEC 61850 communication services which are implemented in the IEDs are described in the Protocol
Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) document, which is available as a separate document.
6.5.7 IEC 61850 PEER-TO-PEER (GOOSE) COMMUNICATIONS

The implementation of IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) enables faster
communication between IEDs offering the possibility for a fast and reliable system-wide distribution of input and
output data values. The GOOSE model uses multicast services to deliver event information. Multicast messaging
means that messages are sent to selected devices on the network. The receiving devices can specifically accept
frames from certain devices and discard frames from the other devices. It is also known as a publisher-subscriber
system. When a device detects a change in one of its monitored status points it publishes a new message. Any
device that is interested in the information subscribes to the data it contains.
6.5.8 GOOSE MESSAGE VALIDATION

Whenever a new GOOSE message is received its validity is checked before the dataset is decoded and used to
update the Programmable Scheme Logic. As part of the validation process a check is made for state and sequence
number anomalies. If an anomaly is detected, the 'out-of-order' GOOSE message is discarded. When a message is
discarded the last valid message remains active until a new valid GOOSE message is received or its validity period
(TAL) expires.
Out-of-order GOOSE message indicators and reporting are provided to the subscriber via the IEC61850 LGOS
logical node.
6.5.9 MAPPING GOOSE MESSAGES TO VIRTUAL INPUTS

Each GOOSE signal contained in a subscribed GOOSE message can be mapped to any of the virtual inputs within
the PSL. The virtual inputs allow the mapping to internal logic functions for protection control, directly to output
contacts or LEDs for monitoring.
168 P345-AD-EN-1
An IED can subscribe to all GOOSE messages but only the following data types can be decoded and mapped to a
virtual input:
● BOOLEAN
● BSTR2
● INT16
● INT32
● INT8
● UINT16
● UINT32
● UINT8
6.5.9.1 IEC 61850 GOOSE CONFIGURATION

All GOOSE configuration is performed using the IEC 61850 Configurator tool available in the MiCOM S1 Agile
software application.
All GOOSE publishing configuration can be found under the GOOSE Publishing tab in the configuration editor
window. All GOOSE subscription configuration parameters are under the External Binding tab in the configuration
editor window.
Settings to enable GOOSE signalling and to apply Test Mode are available using the HMI.
6.5.10 ETHERNET FUNCTIONALITY

IEC 61850 Associations are unique and made between the client and server. If Ethernet connectivity is lost for any
reason, the associations are lost, and will need to be re-established by the client. The IED has a TCP_KEEPALIVE
function to monitor each association, and terminate any which are no longer active.
The IED allows the re-establishment of associations without disruption of its operation, even after its power has
been removed. As the IED acts as a server in this process, the client must request the association. Uncommitted
settings are cancelled when power is lost, and reports requested by connected clients are reset. The client must
re-enable these when it next creates the new association to the IED.
6.5.11 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATION

You cannot configure the device for IEC 61850 edition 1 using the HMI panel on the product. For this you must use
the IEC 61850 Configurator, which is part of the settings application software. If the device is compatible with
edition 2, however, you can configure it with the HMI. To configure IEC61850 edition 2 using the HMI, you must first
enable the IP From HMI setting, after which you can set the media (copper or fibre), IP address, subnet mask and
gateway address.
IEC 61850 allows IEDs to be directly configured from a configuration file. The IED’s system configuration
capabilities are determined from an IED Capability Description file (ICD), supplied with the product. By using ICD
files from the products to be installed, you can design, configure and test (using simulation tools), a substation’s
entire protection scheme before the products are installed into the substation.
To help with this process, the settings application software provides an IEC 61850 Configurator tool, which allows
the pre-configured IEC 61850 configuration file to be imported and transferred to the IED. As well as this, you can
manually create configuration files for all products, based on their original IED capability description (ICD file).
Other features include:
● The extraction of configuration data for viewing and editing.
● A sophisticated error checking sequence to validate the configuration data before sending to the IED.
Note:
Some configuration data is available in the IEC61850 CONFIG. column, allowing read-only access to basic configuration data.
P345-AD-EN-1 169
6.5.11.1 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATION BANKS

There are two configuration banks:
● Active Configuration Bank
● Inactive Configuration Bank
Any new configuration sent to the IED is automatically stored in the inactive configuration bank, therefore not
immediately affecting the current configuration.
Following an upgrade, the IEC 61850 Configurator tool can be used to transmit a command, which authorises
activation of the new configuration contained in the inactive configuration bank. This is done by switching the
active and inactive configuration banks. The capability of switching the configuration banks is also available using
the IEC61850 CONFIG. column of the HMI.
The SCL Name and Revision attributes of both configuration banks are available in the IEC61850 CONFIG. column
of the HMI.
6.5.11.2 IEC 61850 NETWORK CONNECTIVITY

Configuration of the IP parameters and SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) time synchronisation parameters is
performed by the IEC 61850 Configurator tool. If these parameters are not available using an SCL (Substation
Configuration Language) file, they must be configured manually.
Every IP address on the Local Area Network must be unique. Duplicate IP addresses result in conflict and must be
avoided. Most IEDs check for a conflict on every IP configuration change and at power up and they raise an alarm
if an IP conflict is detected.
The IED can be configured to accept data from other networks using the Gateway setting. If multiple networks are
used, the IP addresses must be unique across networks.
6.5.12 IEC 61850 EDITION 2

Many parts of the IEC 61850 standard have now been released as the second edition. This offers some significant
enhancements including:
● Improved interoperability
● Many new logical nodes
● Better defined testing; it is now possible to perform off-line testing and simulation of functions
Edition 2 implementation requires use of version 3.8 of the IEC 61850 configurator, which is installed with version
2.0.1 of MiCOM S1 Agile.
6.5.12.1 BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY
IEC61850 System - Backward compatibility

An Edition 1 IED can operate with an Edition 2 IEC 61850 system, provided that the Edition 1 IEDs do not subscribe
to GOOSE messages with data objects or data attributes which are only available in Edition 2.
The following figure explains this concept:
170 P345-AD-EN-1
Ed2
MMS
IED1 IED2 IED3

C
C C
L/ R
Ed1 Ed1 Ed2
GOOSE
BAY
Ed1 devices in Ed2 system:
 GOOSE OK
 MMS OK
 TOOLS (SCL files) OK V01056
Figure 60: Edition 2 system - backward compatibility
An Edition 2 IED cannot normally operate within an Edition 1 IEC 61850 system. An Edition 2 IED can work for
GOOSE messaging in a mixed system, providing the client is compatible with Edition 2.
Ed1
MMS
IED1 IED2 IED3

C
C C
L/ R
Ed1 Ed1 Ed2
GOOSE
BAY
Ed1 devices in Ed2 system:
 GOOSE OK
 MMS Not OK
 TOOLS (SCL files) Not OK V01057
Figure 61: Edition 1 system - forward compatibility issues
P345-AD-EN-1 171
6.5.12.2 EDITION-2 COMMON DATA CLASSES

The following common data classes (CDCs) are new to Edition 2 and therefore should not be used in GOOSE control
blocks in mixed Edition 1 and Edition 2 systems
● Histogram (HST)
● Visible string status (VSS)
● Object reference setting (ORG)
● Controllable enumerated status (ENC)
● Controllable analogue process value (APC)
● Binary controlled analogue process value (BAC)
● Enumerated status setting (ENG)
● Time setting group (TSG)
● Currency setting group (CUG)
● Visible string setting (VSG)
● Curve shape setting (CSG)
Of these, only ENS and ENC types are available from a MiCOM P40 IED when publishing GOOSE messages, so Data
Objects using these Common Data Classes should not be published in mixed Edition 1 and Edition 2 systems.
For compatibility between Edition 1 and Edition 2 IEDs, SCL files using SCL schema version 2.1 must be used. For a
purely Edition 2 system, use the schema version 3.1.
6.5.12.3 STANDBY PROTECTION REDUNDANCY

With digital substation architectures, measurements can be shared freely on the process bus across the
substation and between different devices without any additional wiring. This is because there are no longer any
electrical connections to instruments transformers that restrict the location of IEDs.
The new IEC 61850 Edition 2 test modes enable the introduction of standby protection IEDs at any location within
the substation, which has access to both station and process buses. In the case of failure, these devices can
temporarily replace the protection functions inside other IEDs.
MPx MP1 MP2 MP1 MP2
Standby
BAY(S) BAY1 BAY N
Station/Process Bus
Yard Yard
SC MU1 SC MU2 SC MU1 SC MU2
MU1 MU2 MU1 MU2

V01059
Figure 62: Example of Standby IED
172 P345-AD-EN-1
See the example below. If a failure occurs in the Bay 1 protection IED (MP2), we could disable this device and
activate a standby protection IED to replace its functionality.
MP2 MP1 MP2 (1) MP1 MP2
Standby
BAY(S) BAY1 BAY N
(5) (2)
Station/Process Bus
(4)
Yard Yard
Test
Device SC MU1 SC MU2 SC MU1 SC MU2
MU1 MU2 MU1 MU2

V01060
Figure 63: Standby IED Activation Process
The following sequence would occur under this scenario:

1. During the installation phase, a spare standby IED is installed in the substation. This can remain inactive,
until it is needed to replace functions in one of several bays. The device is connected to the process bus, but
does not have any subscriptions enabled.
2. If a failure occurs (in this example, bay 1), first isolate the faulty device by disabling its process bus and
station bus interfaces. You do this by turning off the attached network interfaces.
3. Retrieve the configuration that the faulty device normally uses, and load this into the standby redundant
IED.
4. Place the IED into the "Test Blocked" mode, as defined in IEC 61850-7-4 Edition Two. This allows test signals
to be injected into the network, which will check that the configuration is correct. GOOSE signals issued by
the device will be flagged as "test" so that subscribing switchgear controllers know not to trip during this
testing. In this way the protection can be tested all the way up to the switchgear control merging units
without having to operate primary circuit breakers, or by carrying out any secondary injection.
5. Take the standby IED out of "Test-Blocked" mode and activate it so that it now replaces the protection
functions that were disabled from the initial device failure.
The standby IED reduces downtime in the case of device failure, as protection functions can be restored quickly
before the faulted device is replaced.
P345-AD-EN-1 173
7 READ ONLY MODE

With IEC 61850 and Ethernet/Internet communication capabilities, security has become an important issue. For
this reason, all relevant GE IEDs have been adapted to comply with the latest cyber-security standards.
In addition to this, a facility is provided which allows you to enable or disable the communication interfaces. This
feature is available for products using Courier, IEC 60870-5-103, or IEC 61850.
7.1 IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL BLOCKING

If Read-Only Mode is enabled for RP1 or RP2 with IEC 60870-5-103, the following commands are blocked at the
interface:
● Write parameters (=change setting) (private ASDUs)
● General Commands (ASDU20), namely:
○ INF16 auto-recloser on/off
○ INF19 LED reset
○ Private INFs (for example: CB open/close, Control Inputs)
The following commands are still allowed:
● Poll Class 1 (Read spontaneous events)
● Poll Class 2 (Read measurands)
● GI sequence (ASDU7 'Start GI', Poll Class 1)
● Transmission of Disturbance Records sequence (ASDU24, ASDU25, Poll Class 1)
● Time Synchronisation (ASDU6)
● General Commands (ASDU20), namely:
○ INF23 activate characteristic 1
Note:
For IEC 60870-5-103, Read Only Mode function is different from the existing Command block feature.
7.2 COURIER PROTOCOL BLOCKING

If Read-Only Mode is enabled for RP1 or RP2 with Courier, the following commands are blocked at the interface:
● Write settings
● All controls, including:Reset Indication (Trip LED)
○ Operate Control Inputs
○ CB operations
○ Auto-reclose operations
○ Reset demands
○ Clear event/fault/maintenance/disturbance records
○ Test LEDs & contacts
174 P345-AD-EN-1

● Read settings, statuses, measurands
● Read records (event, fault, disturbance)
● Time Synchronisation
● Change active setting group
7.3 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL BLOCKING

If Read-Only Mode is enabled for the Ethernet interfacing with IEC 61850, the following commands are blocked at
the interface:
● All controls, including:
○ Enable/disable protection
○ Operate Control Inputs
○ CB operations (Close/Trip, Lock)
○ Reset LEDs
● Read statuses, measurands
● Generate reports
● Extract disturbance records
● Time synchronisation
● Change active setting group
7.4 READ-ONLY SETTINGS

The following settings are available for enabling or disabling Read Only Mode.
● RP1 Read Only
● RP2 Read Only (only for products that have RP2)
● NIC Read Only (where Ethernet is available)
7.5 READ-ONLY DDB SIGNALS

The remote read only mode is also available in the PSL using three dedicated DDB signals:
● RP1 Read Only
● RP2 Read Only (only for products that have RP2)
● NIC Read Only (where Ethernet is available)
Using the PSL, these signals can be activated by opto-inputs, Control Inputs and function keys if required.
P345-AD-EN-1 175
8 TIME SYNCHRONISATION
In modern protection schemes it is necessary to synchronise the IED's real time clock so that events from different
devices can be time stamped and placed in chronological order. This is achieved in various ways depending on the
chosen options and communication protocols.
● Using the IRIG-B input (if fitted)
● Using the SNTP time protocol (for Ethernet IEC 61850 versions)
● Using IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
● By using the time synchronisation functionality inherent in the data protocols
8.1 DEMODULATED IRIG-B

IRIG stands for Inter Range Instrumentation Group, which is a standards body responsible for standardising
different time code formats. There are several different formats starting with IRIG-A, followed by IRIG-B and so on.
The letter after the "IRIG" specifies the resolution of the time signal in pulses per second (PPS). IRIG-B, the one which
we use has a resolution of 100 PPS. IRIG-B is used when accurate time-stamping is required.
The following diagram shows a typical GPS time-synchronised substation application. The satellite RF signal is
picked up by a satellite dish and passed on to receiver. The receiver receives the signal and converts it into time
signal suitable for the substation network. IEDs in the substation use this signal to govern their internal clocks and
event recorders.
GPS satellite
GPS time signal
IRIG-B
Satellite dish Receiver IED IED IED
V01040
Figure 64: GPS Satellite timing signal
The IRIG-B time code signal is a sequence of one second time frames. Each frame is split up into ten 100 mS slots
as follows:
● Time-slot 1: Seconds
● Time-slot 2: Minutes
176 P345-AD-EN-1
● Time-slot 3: Hours
● Time-slot 4: Days
● Time-slot 5 and 6: Control functions
● Time-slots 7 to 10: Straight binary time of day
The first four time-slots define the time in BCD (Binary Coded Decimal). Time-slots 5 and 6 are used for control
functions, which control deletion commands and allow different data groupings within the synchronisation strings.
Time-slots 7-10 define the time in SBS (Straight Binary Second of day).
8.1.1 IRIG-B IMPLEMENTATION

Depending on the chosen hardware options, the product can be equipped with an IRIG-B input for time
synchronisation purposes. The IRIG-B interface is implemented either on a dedicated card, or together with other
communication functionality such as Ethernet. The IRIG-B connection is presented by a connector is a BNC
connector. IRIG-B signals are usually presented as an RF-modulated signal. There are two types of input to our
IRIG-B boards: demodulated or modulated. A board that accepts a demodulated input is used where the IRIG-B
signal has already been demodulated by another device before being fed to the IED. A board that accepts a
modulated input has an on-board demodulator.
To set the device to use IRIG-B, use the setting IRIG-B Sync cell in the DATE AND TIME column.
The IRIG-B status can be viewed in the IRIG-B Status cell in the DATE AND TIME column.
8.2 SNTP
SNTP is used to synchronise the clocks of computer systems over packet-switched, variable-latency data
networks, such as IP. SNTP can be used as the time synchronisation method for models using IEC 61850 over
Ethernet.
The device is synchronised by the main SNTP server. This is achieved by entering the IP address of the SNTP server
into the IED using the IEC 61850 Configurator software described in the settings application software manual. A
second server is also configured with a different IP address for backup purposes.
This function issues an alarm when there is a loss of time synchronisation on the SNTP server. This could be
because there is no response or no valid clock signal.
The HMI menu does not contain any configurable settings relating to SNTP, as the only way to configure it is using
the IEC 61850 Configurator. However it is possible to view some parameters in the COMMUNICATIONS column
under the sub-heading SNTP parameters. Here you can view the SNTP server addresses and the SNTP poll rate in
the cells SNTP Server 1, SNTP Server 2 and SNTP Poll rate respectively.
The SNTP time synchronisation status is displayed in the SNTP Status cell in the DATE AND TIME column.
8.3 IEEE 1588 PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL

The MiCOM P40 modular products support the IEEE C37.238 (Power Profile) of IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol
(PTP) as a slave-only clock. This can be used to replace or supplement IRIG-B and SNTP time synchronisation so
that the IED can be synchronised using Ethernet messages from the substation LAN without any additional
physical connections being required.
A dedicated DDB signal (PTP Failure) his provided to indicate failure of failure of PTP.
8.3.1 ACCURACY AND DELAY CALCULATION

A time synchronisation accuracy of within 5 ms is possible. Both peer-to-peer or end-to-end mode delay
measurement can be used.
In peer-to-peer mode, delays are measured between each link in the network and are compensated for. This
provides greater accuracy, but requires that every device between the Grand Master and Slaves supports the
peer-to-peer delay measurement.
P345-AD-EN-1 177
In end-to-end mode, delays are only measured between each Grand Master and Slave. The advantage of this
mode is that the requirements for the switches on the network are lower; they do not need to independently
calculate delays. The main disadvantage is that more inaccuracy is introduced, because the method assumes that
forward and reverse delays are always the same, which may not always be correct.
When using end-to-end mode, the IED can be connected in a ring or line topology using RSTP or Self Healing
Protocol without any additional Transparent Clocks. But because the IED is a slave-only device, additional
inaccuracy is introduced. The additional error will be less than 1ms for a network of eight devices.
Grand Master
L o c k e d
A la rm
PTP Aware Network
RSTP Network
<8 Hops, so <1ms
additional timing error
V01061
Figure 65: Timing error using ring or line topology
8.3.2 PTP DOMAINS

PTP traffic can be segregated into different domains using Boundary Clocks. These allow different PTP clocks to
share the same network while maintaining independent synchronisation within each grouped set.
8.4 TIME SYNCHRONISATION USING THE COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

All communication protocols have in-built time synchronisation mechanisms. If an external time synchronisation
mechanism such as IRIG-B, SNTP, or IEEE 1588 PTP is not used to synchronise the devices, the time synchronisation
mechanism within the relevant serial protocol is used. The real time is usually defined in the master station and
communicated to the relevant IEDs via one of the rear serial ports using the chosen protocol. It is also possible to
define the time locally using settings in the DATE AND TIME column.
The time synchronisation for each protocol is described in the relevant protocol description section.
178 P345-AD-EN-1
CHAPTER 8
CYBER-SECURITY
Chapter 8 - Cyber-Security P345
180 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Chapter 8 - Cyber-Security
1 OVERVIEW
In the past, substation networks were traditionally isolated and the protocols and data formats used to transfer
information between devices were often proprietary.
For these reasons, the substation environment was very secure against cyber-attacks. The terms used for this
inherent type of security are:
● Security by isolation (if the substation network is not connected to the outside world, it cannot be accessed
from the outside world).
● Security by obscurity (if the formats and protocols are proprietary, it is very difficult to interpret them).
The increasing sophistication of protection schemes, coupled with the advancement of technology and the desire
for vendor interoperability, has resulted in standardisation of networks and data interchange within substations.
Today, devices within substations use standardised protocols for communication. Furthermore, substations can be
interconnected with open networks, such as the internet or corporate-wide networks, which use standardised
protocols for communication. This introduces a major security risk making the grid vulnerable to cyber-attacks,
which could in turn lead to major electrical outages.
Clearly, there is now a need to secure communication and equipment within substation environments. This
chapter describes the security measures that have been put in place for our range of Intelligent Electronic Devices
(IEDs).
Note:
Cyber-security compatible devices do not enforce NERC compliance, they merely facilitate it. It is the responsibility of the user
to ensure that compliance is adhered to as and when necessary.

Overview 181
The Need for Cyber-Security 182
Standards 183
Cyber-Security Implementation 187
Roles and Permissions 188
Authentication 191
Security Event Management 202
P345-AD-EN-1 181
2 THE NEED FOR CYBER-SECURITY

Cyber-security provides protection against unauthorised disclosure, transfer, modification, or destruction of
information or information systems, whether accidental or intentional. To achieve this, there are several security
requirements:
● Confidentiality (preventing unauthorised access to information)
● Integrity (preventing unauthorised modification)
● Availability / Authentication (preventing the denial of service and assuring authorised access to information)
● Non-repudiation (preventing the denial of an action that took place)
● Traceability / Detection (monitoring and logging of activity to detect intrusion and analyse incidents)
The threats to cyber-security may be unintentional (e.g. natural disasters, human error), or intentional (e.g. cyber-
attacks by hackers).
Good cyber-security can be achieved with a range of measures, such as closing down vulnerability loopholes,
implementing adequate security processes and procedures and providing technology to help achieve this.
Examples of vulnerabilities are:
● Indiscretions by personnel (users keep passwords on their computer)
● Bad practice (users do not change default passwords, or everyone uses the same password to access all
substation equipment)
● Bypassing of controls (users turn off security measures)
● Inadequate technology (substation is not firewalled)
Examples of availability issues are:

● Equipment overload, resulting in reduced or no performance
● Expiry of a certificate preventing access to equipment
To help tackle these issues, standards organisations have produced various standards. Compliance with these
standards significantly reduces the threats associated with lack of cyber-security.
182 P345-AD-EN-1
3 STANDARDS
There are several standards, which apply to substation cyber-security. The standards currently applicable to GE
IEDs are NERC and IEEE1686.
Standard Country Description
NERC CIP (North American Electric Reliability
USA Framework for the protection of the grid critical Cyber Assets
Corporation)
BDEW (German Association of Energy and Water Requirements for Secure Control and Telecommunication
Germany
Industries) Systems
ICS oriented then Relevant for EPU completing existing standard
ANSI ISA 99 USA
and identifying new topics such as patch management
International Standard for substation IED cyber-security
IEEE 1686 International
capabilities
IEC 62351 International Power system data and Comm. protocol
ISO/IEC 27002 International Framework for the protection of the grid critical Cyber Assets
NIST SP800-53 (National Institute of Standards and
USA Complete framework for SCADA SP800-82and ICS cyber-security
Technology)
CPNI Guidelines (Centre for the Protection of National Clear and valuable good practices for Process Control and SCADA
UK
Infrastructure) security
3.1 NERC COMPLIANCE

The North American Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC) created a set of standards for the protection of critical
infrastructure. These are known as the CIP standards (Critical Infrastructure Protection). These were introduced to
ensure the protection of 'Critical Cyber Assets', which control or have an influence on the reliability of North
America’s electricity generation and distribution systems.
These standards have been compulsory in the USA for several years now. Compliance auditing started in June
2007, and utilities face extremely heavy fines for non-compliance.
NERC CIP standards

CIP standard Description
CIP-002-1 Critical Cyber Assets Define and document the Critical Assets and the Critical Cyber Assets
Define and document the Security Management Controls required to protect the
CIP-003-1 Security Management Controls
Critical Cyber Assets
Define and Document Personnel handling and training required protecting Critical
CIP-004-1 Personnel and Training
Cyber Assets
Define and document logical security perimeters where Critical Cyber Assets reside.
CIP-005-1 Electronic Security Define and document measures to control access points and monitor electronic
access
Define and document Physical Security Perimeters within which Critical Cyber Assets
CIP-006-1 Physical Security
reside
Define and document system test procedures, account and password management,
CIP-007-1 Systems Security Management security patch management, system vulnerability, system logging, change control
and configuration required for all Critical Cyber Assets
Define and document procedures necessary when Cyber-security Incidents relating
CIP-008-1 Incident Reporting and Response Planning
to Critical Cyber Assets are identified
CIP-009-1 Recovery Plans Define and document Recovery plans for Critical Cyber Assets
P345-AD-EN-1 183
3.1.1 CIP 002

CIP 002 concerns itself with the identification of:
● Critical assets, such as overhead lines and transformers
● Critical cyber assets, such as IEDs that use routable protocols to communicate outside or inside the
Electronic Security Perimeter; or are accessible by dial-up
Power utility responsibilities: GE's contribution:

We can help the power utilities to create this asset register automatically.
Create the list of the assets
We can provide audits to list the Cyber assets
3.1.2 CIP 003

CIP 003 requires the implementation of a cyber-security policy, with associated documentation, which
demonstrates the management’s commitment and ability to secure its Critical Cyber Assets.
The standard also requires change control practices whereby all entity or vendor-related changes to hardware
and software components are documented and maintained.

We can help the power utilities to have access control to its critical assets by
providing centralized Access control.
To create a Cyber-security Policy
We can help the customer with its change control by providing a section in the
documentation where it describes changes affecting the hardware and software.
3.1.3 CIP 004

CIP 004 requires that personnel with authorized cyber access or authorized physical access to Critical Cyber
Assets, (including contractors and service vendors), have an appropriate level of training.

To provide appropriate training of its personnel We can provide cyber-security training
3.1.4 CIP 005

CIP 005 requires the establishment of an Electronic Security Perimeter (ESP), which provides:
● The disabling of ports and services that are not required
● Permanent monitoring and access to logs (24x7x365)
● Vulnerability Assessments (yearly at a minimum)
● Documentation of Network Changes

To monitor access to the ESP
To disable all ports not used in the IED
To perform the vulnerability assessments
To monitor and record all access to the IED
To document network changes
3.1.5 CIP 006

CIP 006 states that Physical Security controls, providing perimeter monitoring and logging along with robust
access controls, must be implemented and documented. All cyber assets used for Physical Security are considered
critical and should be treated as such:
184 P345-AD-EN-1

Provide physical security controls and perimeter
monitoring.
GE cannot provide additional help with this aspect.
Ensure that people who have access to critical cyber
assets don’t have criminal records.
3.1.6 CIP 007

CIP 007 covers the following points:
● Test procedures
● Ports and services
● Security patch management
● Antivirus
● Account management
● Monitoring
● An annual vulnerability assessment should be performed

Test procedures, we can provide advice and help on testing.
Ports and services, our devices can disable unused ports and services
To provide an incident response team and have Security patch management, we can provide assistance
appropriate processes in place Antivirus, we can provide advise and assistance
Account management, we can provide advice and assistance
Monitoring, our equipment monitors and logs access
3.1.7 CIP 008

CIP 008 requires that an incident response plan be developed, including the definition of an incident response
team, their responsibilities and associated procedures.

To provide an incident response team and have
GE cannot provide additional help with this aspect.
appropriate processes in place.
3.1.8 CIP 009

CIP 009 states that a disaster recovery plan should be created and tested with annual drills.

To provide guidelines on recovery plans and backup/restore
To implement a recovery plan
documentation
3.2 IEEE 1686-2013

IEEE 1686-2013 is an IEEE Standard for substation IEDs' cyber-security capabilities. It proposes practical and
achievable mechanisms to achieve secure operations.
The following features described in this standard apply:
● Passwords are 8 characters long and can contain upper-case, lower-case, numeric and special characters.
● Passwords are never displayed or transmitted to a user.
P345-AD-EN-1 185
● IED functions and features are assigned to different password levels. The assignment is fixed.
● The audit trail is recorded, listing events in the order in which they occur, held in a circular buffer.
● Records contain all defined fields from the standard and record all defined function event types where the
function is supported.
● No password defeat mechanism exists. Instead a secure recovery password scheme is implemented.
● Unused ports (physical and logical) may be disabled.
186 P345-AD-EN-1
4 CYBER-SECURITY IMPLEMENTATION
General Electric IEDs have always been and will continue to be equipped with state-of-the-art security measures.
Due to the ever-evolving communication technology and new threats to security, this requirement is not static.
Hardware and software security measures are continuously being developed and implemented to mitigate the
associated threats and risks.
From Software Version 90 onwards, the MiCOM P40 Agile products provide enhanced security through the
following features:
● An Authentication, Authorization, Accounting (AAA) Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS)
client that is managed centrally, enables user attribution, provides accounting of all user activities, and uses
secure standards based on strong cryptography for authentication and credential protection. In other
words, this option uses a RADIUS.
● Server for user authentication. There is provision for both remote (RADIUS) and local (device) authentication.
● A Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) system that provides a permission model that allows access to the
device operations and configurations based on specific roles and individual user accounts configured on
the AAA server. That is, Administrator, Engineer, Operator, and Viewer roles are used.
● Security event reporting through both proprietary event logs and the Syslog protocol for supporting Security
Information Event Management (SIEM) systems for centralised cybersecurity monitoring.
● Encryption of passwords – stored within the IED, in network messages between the MiCOM S1 Agile
software and the IED, and in network messages between the RADIUS server and the IED (subject to the
RADIUS server configuration).
4.1 INITIAL SETUP

The requirements for initial setup of the IED for cyber-security and RBAC will depend on:
1. which interfaces, if any, the cyber-security is required,
2. the intended authentication method, as defined in the setting Auth. Method’ in SECURITY CONFIG column
(see the Authentication methods section).
When the authentication method is configured as Device Only, there are four pre-defined usernames, VIEWER,
OPERATOR, ENGINEER, and ADMINISTRATOR that align with the VIEWER, OPERATOR, ENGINEER and
ADMINISTRATOR roles (see the Device Users section).
When the authentication method is configured as ‘Server Only’ or ‘Server + Device’, users must be set up on the
Radius server (see the RADIUS users section). These users are separate from the pre-defined Device users. RADIUS
server information must be configured in the IED to connect to the RADIUS server(s) for Server authentication (see
the RADIUS server settings section). It is recommended that the Radius shared secret be changed from the default
(see the RADIUS client-server validation section).
Whatever the authentication method, it is strongly recommended that the password for the Administrator be
changed from the default. Changing the passwords for the other roles is optional.
P345-AD-EN-1 187
5 ROLES AND PERMISSIONS
5.1 ROLES
The P40 Agile products provide 4 specific roles to which individual user accounts can be configured:
● VIEWER (Level 0) Read some, Write minimal
● OPERATOR (Level 1) Read All, Write Few
● ENGINEER (Level 2) Read All, Write Some
● ADMINISTRATOR (Level 3) Read All, Write All
Only one role of one type is allowed to be logged in at a time. For example, one Operator can be logged in but not
a second Operator at the same time. This prevents subsets of settings from being changed at the same time.
Roles are mapped to Access Level definitions:
VIEWER - No password required - Read access to Security features, Model Number, Serial Number, S/W version,
Description, Plant reference, Security code (UI Only), Encryption key (UI Only), User Banner and security related cells.
This role will allow maximum concurrent access provided by P40. Viewer is the default role
OPERATOR – Operator password required - Read access to all data and settings. Write access to Primary/
Secondary selector, Operator password setting, Password reset cell and log extraction cells (record selector). This
role will not allow concurrent access.
ENGINEER – Engineer password required - Read access to all data and settings. Write access to Reset demands
and counters. This role will not allow concurrent access.
ADMINISTRATOR – Administrator password required - Read access to all data and settings. Write access to All
settings, PSL, IED Config, Security settings (port disabling etc). This role can enable the bypass mode and forcefully
logout any other role. This role will not allow concurrent access.
The IED defines the following roles with reference to the roles defined by IEC 62351-8.
P40 Roles IEC 62351- 8 Roles Access Level
VIEWER VIEWER Level 0
OPERATOR OPERATOR Level 1
ENGINEER ENGINEER Level 2
ADMINISTRATOR SECADM + SECAUD Level 3
By default, the IED is delivered with default factory roles account and passwords. These default passwords are
shown in the below table.
Role Default Password
ADMINISTRATOR ChangeMe1#
ENGINEER ChangeMe1#
OPERATOR ChangeMe1#
VIEWER NA
Note:
It is strongly recommended that the password for the Administrator be changed from the default. Changing the passwords
for the other roles is optional.
188 P345-AD-EN-1
Administrators have the following rights as well:

● Setting the Bypass mode
● Forcefully logging out any other role
● Setting Authentication Method
'Firmware lock' is not supported by the P40 Agile IED. Firmware upgrade is not managed by the main software. The
process involves using a dedicated firmware loading software tool. There is no access or control to this process via
the main product firmware.
5.2 PERMISSIONS
Authentication and authorization are two different processes. An authenticated user cannot perform any action on
the IED unless a privilege has been explicit granted to him/her to do so. This is the concept of “least privileges”
access.
Privileges must be granted to users through roles. A role is a collection of privileges, and roles are granted to users.
Each user is associated to only one role. The privilege/role matrix is stored on the IED. This is known as Role-Based-
Access Control (RBAC).
On successful user authentication, the IED will load the user’s role list. If the user’s role changes, the user must
logout and log back in to exercise his/her privileges.
Existing User level/permission mapping in P40 are:
Role Meaning Read Operation Write Operation
SYSTEM DATA column:
Description
Plant Reference
Model Number
Serial Number
S/W Ref.
Read Some
Access Level Password Entry
VIEWER Write
Security Feature LCD Contrast (UI only)
Minimal
SECURITY CONFIG column:
User Banner
Attempts Remain
Blk Time Remain
Fallback PW level
Security Code (UI only)
All data and settings are All items writeable at "Viewer".
Read All
OPERATOR readable. Select Event, Main and Fault (upload)
Write Few
Poll Measurements Extract Events (e.g. via MiCOM S1 Agile)
All items writeable at "Operator".
Setting Cells that change visibility (Visible/Invisible).
Setting Values (Primary/Secondary) selector
Read All All data and settings are
Commands:
ENGINEER Write readable.
Reset Indication
Some Poll Measurements
Reset Demand
Reset Statistics
Reset CB Data / counters
P345-AD-EN-1 189
Role Meaning Read Operation Write Operation

All items writeable at "Engineer".
Change all Setting cells
Operations:
Extract and download Setting file.
Extract and download PSL
Extract and download MCL (IEC 61850)
Extraction of Disturbance Recorder
Courier/Modbus Accept Event (auto event extraction, e.g.
via AE2R)
All data and settings are
Read All Commands:
ADMINISTRATOR readable.
Write All Change Active Group setting
Poll Measurements
Close / Open CB
Change Comms device address.
Set Date & Time
Switch MCL banks / Switch Conf. Bank in UI (IEC 61850)
Enable / Disable Device ports (in SECURITY CONFIG
column)
All password settings
Bypass Enable/disable
Change Authentication Method
The table below shows the predefined permissions assignment for the predefined Roles according to IEC 62351-8
File File File Setting
Role View Read Dataset Report Control Config. Security
Read Write Mngt Group
VIEWER x x
OPERATOR x x x x
ENGINEER x x x x x x x
ADMINISTRATOR x x x x x x x x x x x
The table below shows the predefined permissions description according to IEC 62351-8
Permission Description
Allows the subject/role to discover what objects are present within a Logical Device by presenting the type ID of those
VIEW
objects.
Allows the subject/role to obtain all or some of the values in addition to the type and ID of objects that are present within
READ
a Logical-Device
DATASET Allows the subject/role to have full management rights for both permanent and non-permanent DataSets
REPORTING Allows a subject/role to use buffered reporting as well as un-buffered reporting
FILEREAD Allows the subject/role to have read rights for file objects
FILEWRITE Allows the subject/role to have write rights for file objects. This right includes the FILEREAD right
FILEMNGT Allows the role to transfer files to the Logical-Device, as well as delete existing files on the Logical-Device
CONTROL Allows a subject to perform control operations
CONFIG Allows a subject to locally or remotely configure certain aspects of the server
SETTINGGROUP Allows a subject to remotely configure Settings Groups
SECURITY Allows a subject/role to perform security functions at both a Server/Service Access Point and Logical-Device basis
190 P345-AD-EN-1
6 AUTHENTICATION
6.1 AUTHENTICATION METHODS

The IED supports Bypass (no authentication), Device authentication and Server authentication.
Authentication
Description
Method
IED does not provide security, any user (Local/Remote) can login to the IED. IED does not validate user and
Bypass Auth.
password. In this case, there is no need to enter user-id and password to login.
Device Only IED allows role access using local authentication.
Server Only IED uses RADIUS server to validate access.
IED uses server authentication to validate user first. And it allows fallback to device authentication if the
Server + Device
RADIUS server(s) are unavailable.
If Bypass Auth. is enabled, the IED ignores the Auth. Method setting.
The Auth. Method setting offers the following options for user authentication:
• Server + Device (This is the default setting for IEC 61850+Courier; IEC 61850+103; DNP3OE - where
applicable)
• Device Only (This is the default setting for Courier/IEC 60870-5-103/Modbus/DNP3)
• Server Only
Only an ADMINISTRATOR role may change the Auth. Method setting. If Administrator changes it, the role remains
logged in. But only when the user log-out, their access-level is revoked.
If Authentication method is Server Only and RADIUS Server IP addresses are configured, no device user has
access to the IED (only the RADIUS users will have access). Only the RADIUS Administrator role will be able to
switch to "Server and Device auth". When the setting is “Server Only” but RADIUS Server IP are not configured (both
Primary & Secondary are 0.0.0.0), the IED will automatically fall back to Device authentication.
When Authentication method is Server Only, if the RADIUS server(s) are unavailable, the user should first take
actions to recover the RADIUS connection. If both RADIUS servers ultimately failed to recover, the user should
follow the password reset procedure to reset the Auth. Method setting to Device Only.
6.2 BYPASS
In Bypass Auth. mode, the IED does not provide security - any user can login. IED does not validate user and
password. The bypass security feature provides an easier access, with no authentication and encryption for
situations when this is considered safe. Only the Administrator can enable Bypass mode.
There are five modes for authentication bypass:
1. Disabled – no interfaces in Bypass Auth. mode (normal authentication is active)
2. Local & Remote
a. Front Panel;
b. Front Port
c. Rear Ports
d. Ethernet
P345-AD-EN-1 191
3. Local – will bypass authentication for

a. Front Panel;
b. Front Port
4. Remote – will bypass authentication for
a. Ethernet
b. Rear Ports
5. HMI-Only – will bypass authentication only for front panel
Bypass authentication for
Front panel Front Port Rear Port Ethernet
Bypass mode:
Disabled
Local & Remote X X X X
Local X X
Remote X X
HMI-Only X
The DDB signal Security Bypass is available to indicate that the IED is in Bypass Auth. mode.
6.3 LOGIN
A user can only login through the following methods:
● Front Panel User Interface
● Using MiCOM S1 Agile, connected to either the Front Port, Rear Port 1 or 2, or NIC (Ethernet) interface.
The interfaces/protocols implemented in P40 are listed in the following table.

The product supports both RBAC (with Server + Device authentication) and original Access Level. The Courier
Interfaces / HMI use the RBAC whilst other protocols such as Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 use the original
Access Level to authenticate.
The following table shows different product variants that supports different protocols on Rear ports and Network
port.
Front
Local Access Rear Port (1/2) NIC (Ethernet) Port Supported Auth. mechanism
Port
HMI Courier Courier Courier - Device
IEC 61850 + SNMP + Courier
HMI Courier Courier Courier Server and Device
tunnel
Modbus
Device
HMI Courier Courier (no server, device auth only, old -
Old Access level for Modbus
access levels)
IEC 60870-5-103
Device
Old Access level for 103
access levels)
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 61850 + SNMP + Courier Server and Device
HMI Courier Courier (no server, device auth only, old
tunnel Old Access level for 103
access levels)
DNP3
Device
Old Access level for DNP3
access levels)
Server and Device
HMI Courier Courier Courier DNP3 + SNMP + Courier tunnel
Old Access level for DNP3
192 P345-AD-EN-1
6.3.1 FRONT PANEL LOGIN

Front panel User Interface supports both Device authentication and Server authentication. The P40 gives the user
the option to enter a username in HMI panel.
The user can type their password in the password cell.
For Device authentication, the user must enter one of the pre-defined usernames VIEWER, OPERATOR, ENGINEER,
ADMINISTRATOR. The user can scroll through these names using either of the hotkeys. Users must then enter their
password.
For Server authentication, the user can enter any valid pre-defined Radius server username. Using the front panel
User Interface, the user can change the displayed character type (digit, uppercase letter, lowercase letter, special
character) by either of the hotkeys. For ease of typing, it is preferable to do Server authentication login using
MiCOM S1 Agile.
After successful log in, a confirmation message is displayed, showing the logged in username. For example:
LOGIN SUCCESS
OPERATOR
6.3.2 MICOM S1 LOGIN

When the user attempts to login, MiCOM S1 Agile will prompt the user with a login dialog box that contains a
username text entry field and a password text entry field. The username field is a combo-dropdown style text field
that includes the fixed usernames (Administrator, Engineer, Operator, Viewer) for Device authentication – the
user can pick one of these if they wish, or type any other pre-defined username for Radius authentication in the
textbox.
6.3.3 WARNING BANNER

After successful authentication and authorisation to access the IED, MiCOM S1 Agile will display a security warning
banner to the user.
If I Agree is selected, the integrated authentication and authorisation is completed. Selecting I Disagree causes
the program to close and the login user to logout.
6.3.4 LOGIN FAILED

When Device authentication fails, a failure message is displayed:
LOGIN FAILED
For front panel authentication, this is shown for 2 seconds on the LCD.
For S1 Agile authentication, this is a pop-up dialog that the user must click to acknowledge.
6.4 USER SESSIONS

Open sessions will be automatically closed by the IED after a configurable session timeout.
The inactivity timer configuration setting defines the period of time that the IED waits in idleness before a logged in
user is automatically logged out.
If there is any data change that does not commit to IED, the data change is discarded when user logged out. If
there is any access that does not finish, the access will fail when user logged out. Front panel will display the
default page when user reaches the defined inactivity time.
P345-AD-EN-1 193
If the keypad is inactive for configured UI inactivity timer, user logout message is displayed. And front panel user
interface reverts to the Viewer access level.
Currently in the P40, the inactivity timer for both front port and HMI is fixed to 15 minutes. Already, RP1
InactivTimer and RP2 InactivTimer settings control the inactivity timer for RP1 and RP2. There are two new
settings to support configurable inactivity timer for front port and front panel user interface:
● FP InactvTimer
● UI InactivTimer
Administrator, Operator and Engineer roles will accept only one session to the device at one time. Only Viewer
allows 4 concurrent sessions at one time.
Only one user session is allowed from all the access methods mentioned below:
● Front Panel Push buttons
● Front Port (serial) FP1
● Rear Port 1 (RP1)
● Rear Port 2 (RP2)
● Ethernet Port (NIC)
Minimum
Setting Name Description Min Max Default Units
Permissions
Number of failed authentications before the device blocks
0 (lockout
Attempts Limit subsequent authentication attempts for the lockout period. A 99 3 - Administrator
disabled)
value of 0 means Lockout is disabled.
The period of time in seconds a user is prevented from logging
Lockout Period 1 5940 5 sec Administrator
in, after being locked out.
FP Inactivity Timer is the time of idleness on Front Port before 0 (no
FP InactivTimer a logged in user is automatically logged out and revert the Inactivity 30 10 min Administrator
access level to the viewer role Timeout)
UI Inactivity Timer is the time of idleness on Front Panel 0 (no
UI InactivTimer before a logged in user is automatically logged out and revert Inactivity 30 10 min Administrator
the access level to the viewer role Timeout)
The recommended settings for Attempts Limit is 3 and Lockout Period is 5 sec to discourage brute force
attacks. If the Lockout period is too large, anybody can lockout Device users.
6.5 USER LOCKING POLICY

A local user locking policy is implemented for Device access:
● This user locking policy applies to both Device users.
● The account is unlocked at the first successful login after the Lockout Period
● By default, if the user consecutively fails to login 3 times, the user account will be locked for 3 minutes.
Each user account records how long it has been locked if the account is locked.
Each user account records how many times it has consecutively failed to login. User account failed times include
all interfaces login attempts. For example, if the Attempts Limit setting is 3 and the operator failed to login from
front panel 2 times, and they changed to login from the Courier interface, but failed again, then the Operator
would be locked out.
When the IED is powered on, these Attempts Limit counter resets to zero.
When the user account exceeds the Attempts Limit it is locked for Lockout period, at that time Attempt limit
resets to zero.
The locked user account will be unlocked automatically, after the configured “Lockout Period” is expired.
194 P345-AD-EN-1
All user accounts need to wait until the lockout period expires. No user can unlock the locked account.
If the locked account attempts to login the IED from the Front Panel, the following text is displayed (example):
OPERATOR
IS LOCKED
Usernames are specific to each user account, such as Engineer, Operator and Administrator for Device
authentication.
When supporting both RBAC enabled interfaces and non-RBAC interfaces (such as Modbus), the P40 handles
features such as user-locking feature as follows
● If an RBAC user exceeds the invalid password limit, that user gets locked for all the interfaces.
● On a non-RBAC interface, if an Access Level exceeds the invalid password limit, P40 only blocks that.
6.6 LOGOUT
Each user should Log out after reading or configuring the IED.
Both S1 Agile and the Front Panel provide a one-step logout.
The user can only log out from the front panel, if they logged in from the front panel. If the user logged in from S1
Agile, they have to logout from S1 Agile.
6.6.1 FRONT PANEL LOGOUT

Go up to the top of the menu tree. When you are at the Column Heading level and you press the Up button, you
may be prompted to log out with the following display:
ENTER TO LOGOUT
CLEAR TO CANCEL
If you confirm, the following message is displayed for 2 seconds:
LOGGED OUT <ROLE

NAME>
LOGGED OUT
ADMINISTRATOR
If you decide not to log out (i.e. you cancel), the following message is displayed for 2 seconds.
LOGOUT CANCELLED
ADMINISTRATOR
6.6.2 MICOM S1 LOGOUT

Right-click on the device name in the System Explorer panel in MiCOM S1 Agile and select Log Off.
In the Log Off confirmation dialog, click Yes.
6.7 DEVICE USERS

For device authentication, the user must enter one of the pre-defined usernames VIEWER, OPERATOR, ENGINEER,
or ADMINISTRATOR. This means that device users and roles are same in the P40, and therefore there can be only
one user for each role.
P345-AD-EN-1 195
6.8 PASSWORD POLICY

Cyber-security requires strong passwords and validation for NERC compliance.
The NERC password complexity policy requires an alpha-numeric password (for all accesses, front panel, and
network/local port) that meets the following mandatory requirements:
1. Passwords cannot contain the user's account name or parts of the user's full name that exceed two
consecutive characters.
2. Passwords must be at least eight characters in length, but not exceed 16 characters in length.
3. Passwords must contain characters from all four categories:
a. English uppercase characters (A through Z).
b. English lowercase characters (a through z).
c. Numeric (digits 0 through 9).
d. Special non-alphanumeric characters (such as @,!,#,{, but not limited to only those)
For Device authentication, the IED will enforce that configured passwords meet these requirements.
For Server authentication, the password complexity and user locking policy is defined in the external Radius server.
6.9 CHANGE PASSWORD

In the Device authentication mode, VIEWER does not have a password associated with it.
The password can be changed either from the front panel User Interface, or from MiCOM S1 Agile using the
Change/Set Password option in the Supervise Device dialog box.
Caution:
It is recommended that user passwords are changed periodically.
6.10 RADIUS
When the Auth. Method setting is configured as Server Only or Server + Device, a user must log in with a
username and password that has been predefined on the Radius server.
This log in can be performed from any interface, as described in the Login section. The IED will authenticate the
user to the active RADIUS server, over the Ethernet connection.
Groups User
Access Request
User login RADIUS
IED Client
Access
Accept
(User Role)
User RADIUS Server Active Directory
V01100
Figure 66: RADIUS server/client communication
6.10.1 RADIUS USERS

For Server authentication, RADIUS users and passwords are created in the server (in the Active Directory).
196 P345-AD-EN-1
The username must consist of uppercase letters (A to Z) and digits (0 to 9) only. No lowercase letters or special
characters are allowed.
Each RADIUS user must have a password that meets the password policy of the Active Directory (not the password
policy of the P40) and have one of the four roles assigned in the Active Directory.
The number of RADIUS users is not limited by the IED.
RADIUS password changes are done in the Active Directory (after password expiration).
6.10.2 RADIUS CLIENT

Two Radius servers are supported by the IED in the configuration for redundancy. The IED will try each in sequence
until one responds.
The IED will first try server 1 up to the configured number of retries, leaving a request timeout between each
request. If, after this point there is still no valid answer from server 1, the IED will switch to server 2 and repeat for
up to the configured number of retries.
If the number of retries for the second server is exceeded, the IED will give up entirely on Server authentication. If
Authentication Method is Server + Device, the IED will fallback to Device authentication. A RADIUS Server
unavailable security event is also logged under this condition.
The RADIUS implementation supports the following authentication protocols:
● EAP-TTLS-MSCHAP2
● PAP
● EAP-PEAP-MSCHAP2
● PAP EAP-TTLS-PAP (Default)
The RADIUS implementation queries the Role ID vendor attribute and establish the logged in user security context
with that role.
RADIUS Config. Value
Vendor ID 2910
Vendor Attribute 1
P40 Role Values
Administrator 3
Engineer 2
Operator 1
Viewer 0
6.10.3 RADIUS SERVER SETTINGS

The following RADIUS server information must be configured in the IED to connect to the RADIUS server(s) for
Server authentication.
Setting Minimum
Description Min Max Default Units
Name Permissions
IP address of Server 1. Default value
RADIUS
indicates no Primary Radius server is 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
Pri IP
configured, and so Radius is disabled.
IP address of Server 2. Default value
RADIUS
indicates no Secondary Radius server is 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
Sec IP
configured
RADIUS
Radius authentication port 1 65535 1812 - Administrator
Auth Port
P345-AD-EN-1 197
Setting Minimum
Description Min Max Default Units
Name Permissions
EAP-TTLS-MSCHAP2
RADIUS Authentication protocol to be used by PAP PAP EAP-TTLS-
- Administrator
Security Radius server. EAP-PEAP-MSCHAP2 PAP
PAP EAP-TTLS-PAP
RADIUS Timeout in seconds between re-
1 900 2 sec Administrator
Timeout transmission requests
RADIUS
Number of retries before giving up 1 99 10 - Administrator
Retries
RADIUS Shared Secret used in authentication. It is
1 character 16 characters ChangeMe1# - Administrator
Secret only displayed as asterisks.
The data cell RADIUS Status indicates the status of the currently-selected RADIUS server. This will display either
Disabled, Server OK, or Failed.
6.10.4 RADIUS ACCOUNTING

Radius accounting is not supported by the IED. The user can achieve accounting through syslog (see the SYSLOG
section).
6.10.5 RADIUS CLIENT-SERVER VALIDATION

Client-server validation is achieved using a shared secret. The IED must be configured with the RADIUS Secret
setting to match the shared secret configured in the RADIUS server. It is recommended (but not enforced) that this
setting meets the P40 password requirements.
Note:
It is recommended that the shared secret be changed from the default before using Radius authentication.
The IED does not support exchange of CA certificates. The RADIUS server may send a certificate but the IED will not
verify it.
6.11 RECOVERY
6.11.1 RESTORE TO LOCAL FACTORY DEFAULT

The Restore Defaults setting is available to facilitate NERC CIP compliance requirements for decommissioning
critical cyber devices. Only the Administrator role can change this setting.
The Restore Defaults setting under the CONFIGURATION column is used to restore a setting group to factory
default settings.
0 = No Operation
1 = All Settings
2 = Setting Group 1
3 = Setting Group 2
4 = Setting Group 3
5 = Setting Group 4
To restore the default values to the settings in any setting group, set the Restore Defaults setting to the relevant
Group number. Alternatively, it is possible to set the Restore Defaults setting to All Settings to restore the
default values to all the IEDs settings, not only one setting group.
198 P345-AD-EN-1
Note:
Restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may result in communication via the
rear port being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.
Data (events, DR, fault records, protection counters etc) is left untouched. When decommissioning critical cyber
IEDs, users may want to clear all data and events as well.
6.11.2 PASSWORD RESET PROCEDURE

If you mislay a devices password (if Administrator forgets their password), the passwords can be reset to default
using a recovery password. To obtain the recovery password you must contact the Contact Centre and supply the
Serial Number and the security code. The Contact Centre will use these items to generate a Recovery Password.
The security code is a 16-character string of uppercase characters. It is a read-only parameter. The device
generates its own security code randomly. A new code is generated under the following conditions:
● On power up
● Whenever settings are set back to default
● On expiry of validity timer (see below)
● When the recovery password is entered
This reset procedure can be only accomplished through front panel exclusively and cannot be done over any other
interface. As soon as the security code is displayed on the front panel User Interface, a validity timer is started. This
validity timer is set to 72 hours and is not configurable. This provides enough time for the Contact Centre to
manually generate and send a recovery password. The Service Level Agreement (SLA) for recovery password
generation is one working day, so 72 hours is sufficient time, even allowing for closure of the Contact Centre over
weekends and bank holidays.
The procedure is:
The security code is displayed on confirmation. The validity timer is then started. The security code can only be
read from the front panel.
This reset procedure can be only accomplished through front panel exclusively and cannot be done over the
Ethernet/serial port, but only when physically present in front of the IED. In the event of losing all passwords (if the
Administrator forgets their password) the user could reset the IED to default passwords, following the procedure
below:
1. User navigates to Security Code cell in SECURITY CONFIG column
2. To prevent accidental reading of the IED Security Code, the cell will initially display a warning message:
PRESS ENTER TO
READ SEC. CODE
3. Press Enter to read the Security Code.

4. User sends an email to the Contact Centre providing the full IED serial number and displayed Security Code,
using a recognisable corporate email account
5. Contact Centre emails the user with the Recovery Password. The recovery password is intended for recovery
only. It is not a replacement password that can be used continually. It can only be used once – for password
recovery.
6. User logs in with the username ADMINISTRATOR and the recovery password in to the Password setting in
SYSTEM DATA column.
P345-AD-EN-1 199
7. Then IED will prompt
RESET PASSWORD?
ENTER or CLEAR
8. Press Enter to continue the reset procedure

9. If the recovery password successfully validates, the default passwords are restored for each access level for
Device authentication.
10. Change Auth. Method setting to Server + Device if applicable.
Note:
Restoring passwords to defaults does not affect any other settings and does not provoke reboot of the IED. The protection and
control functions of the IED are always maintained.
6.11.3 ACCESS LEVEL DDBS

The current level of access for each interface is available for use in the Programming Scheme Logic (PSL) as these
DDB signals:
● HMI Access Lvl 1
● HMI Access Lvl 2
● FPort AccessLvl1
● FPort AccessLvl2
● RPrt1 AccessLvl1
Each pair of DDB signals indicates the access level as follows:

● Level 1 off, Level 2 off = 0
● Level 1 on, Level 2 off = 1
● Level 1 off, Level 2 on = 2
● Level 1 on, Level 2 on = 3
KEY:
HMI = Human Machine Interface
FPort = Front Port
RPrt = Rear Port
Lvl = Level
6.12 DISABLING PHYSICAL PORTS

It is possible to disable unused physical ports. A level 3 password is needed to perform this action.
To prevent accidental disabling of a port, a warning message is displayed according to whichever port is required
to be disabled. For example, if rear port 1 is to be disabled, the following message appears:
200 P345-AD-EN-1
REAR PORT 1 TO BE
DISABLED.CONFIRM
The following ports can be disabled, depending on the model.

● Front port (Front Port setting)
● Rear port 1 (Rear Port 1 setting)
● Rear port 2 (Rear Port 2 setting)
● Ethernet port (Ethernet Port setting)
Note:
It is not possible to disable a port from which the disabling port command originates.
We do not generally advise disabling the physical Ethernet port.
6.13 DISABLING LOGICAL PORTS

It is possible to disable unused logical ports. A level 3 password is needed to perform this action.
Note:
The port disabling setting cells are not provided in the settings file. It is only possible to do this using the HMI front panel.
The following protocols can be disabled:

● IEC 61850 (IEC 61850 setting)
● DNP3 Over Ethernet (DNP3 OE setting)--where available
● Courier Tunnelling (Courier Tunnel setting)
Note:
If any of these protocols are enabled or disabled, the Ethernet card will reboot.
P345-AD-EN-1 201
7 SECURITY EVENT MANAGEMENT

To implement NERC-compliant cyber-security, a range of security events are logged in the Security Event file.
7.1 SECURITY EVENTS: COURIER

Event Value Display
USER LOGGED IN
PASSWORD LEVEL UNLOCKED
ON {int} LEVEL {n}
USER LOGGED OUT
PASSWORD LEVEL RESET
ON {int} LEVEL {n}
P/WORD SET BLANK
PASSWORD SET BLANK
BY {int} LEVEL {p}
P/WORD NOT-NERC
PASSWORD SET NON-COMPLIANT
BY {int} LEVEL {p}
PASSWORD CHANGED
PASSWORD MODIFIED
BY {int} LEVEL {p}
PASSWORD BLOCKED
PASSWORD ENTRY BLOCKED
ON {int}
P/WORD UNBLOCKED
PASSWORD ENTRY UNBLOCKED
ON {int}
INV P/W ENTERED
INVALID PASSWORD ENTERED
ON <int}
P/WORD EXPIRED
PASSWORD EXPIRED
ON {int}
P/W ENT WHEN BLK
PASSWORD ENTERED WHILE BLOCKED
ON {int}
RCVY P/W ENTERED
RECOVERY PASSWORD ENTERED
ON {int}
IED SEC CODE RD
IED SECURITY CODE READ
ON {int}
IED SEC CODE EXP
IED SECURITY CODE TIMER EXPIRED
-
PORT DISABLED
PORT DISABLED
BY {int} PORT {prt}
PORT ENABLED
PORT ENABLED
BY {int} PORT {prt}
DEF. DISPLAY NOT NERC COMPLIANT DEF DSP NOT-NERC
PSL STNG D/LOAD
PSL SETTINGS DOWNLOADED
BY {int} GROUP {grp}
DNP STNG D/LOAD
DNP SETTINGS DOWNLOADED
BY {int}
TRACE DAT D/LOAD
TRACE DATA DOWNLOADED
BY {int}
IED CONFG D/LOAD
IEC 61850 CONFIG DOWNLOADED
BY {int}
USER CRV D/LOAD
USER CURVES DOWNLOADED
BY {int} GROUP {crv}
202 P345-AD-EN-1
Event Value Display

PSL CONFG D/LOAD
PSL CONFIG DOWNLOADED
SETTINGS D/LOAD
SETTINGS DOWNLOADED
PSL STNG UPLOAD
PSL SETTINGS UPLOADED
DNP STNG UPLOAD
DNP SETTINGS UPLOADED
BY {int}
TRACE DAT UPLOAD
TRACE DATA UPLOADED
BY {int}
IED CONFG UPLOAD
IEC 61850 CONFIG UPLOADED
BY {int}
USER CRV UPLOAD
USER CURVES UPLOADED
BY {int} GROUP {crv}
PSL CONFG UPLOAD
PSL CONFIG UPLOADED
SETTINGS UPLOAD
SETTINGS UPLOADED
EVENTS EXTRACTED
EVENTS HAVE BEEN EXTRACTED
BY {int} {nov} EVNTS
ACTIVE GRP CHNGE
ACTIVE GROUP CHANGED
C & S CHANGED
CS SETTINGS CHANGED
BY {int}
DR CHANGED
DR SETTINGS CHANGED
BY {int}
SETTINGS CHANGED
SETTING GROUP CHANGED
POWER ON
POWER ON
-
S/W DOWNLOADED
SOFTWARE_DOWNLOADED
-
where:
● int is the interface definition (UI, FP, RP1, RP2, TNL, TCP)
● prt is the port ID (FP, RP1, RP2, TNL, DNP3, IEC, ETHR)
● grp is the group number (1, 2, 3, 4)
● crv is the Curve group number (1, 2, 3, 4)
● n is the new access level (0, 1, 2, 3)
● p is the password level (1, 2, 3)
● nov is the number of events (1 – nnn)
Each new event has an incremented unique number, therefore missing events appear as gap in the sequence. The
unique identifier forms part of the event record that is read or uploaded from the IED.
Note:
It is no longer possible to clear Event, Fault, Maintenance, and Disturbance Records.
P345-AD-EN-1 203
7.2 SYSLOG
Security events are also logged to a remote syslog server.
All login and logout attempts from local and central authentication, whether successful or failed, are logged. The
contents of each successful or failed, login and logout security event include a specific username.
The security log cannot be cleaned by any of the available roles.
The contents of each login and/or logout security event include the relevant interface. The following interfaces are
supported:
Interface Abbr.
Front Port FP
Rear Port 1 RP1
Rear Port 2 RP2
Ethernet NET
Front Panel UI
The following events are available to be logged to the syslog server:
Event Categorisation Severity
Login - Authentication successful Informational (6)
Login - Authentication Failure Informational (6)
Logout Informational (6)
RADIUS Server Unavailable Alert (1)
Session timeout Informational (6)
Account Locked Notice (5)
User accessed while locked Notice (5)
ByPass Activate Notice (5)
ByPass Deactivate Notice (5)
Password Change Notice (5)
Recovery password is entered to reset the passwords Notice (5)
Settings / Configuration Changed Notice (5)
Settings / Configuration uploaded
Notice (5)
(to S1 Agile)
Event Records uploaded Notice (5)
Default settings restored Notice (5)
Notice (5)
Notice (5)
Active Setting Group Changed
Notice (5)
Notice (5)
Notice (5)
Default user curves restored
Notice (5)
Notice (5)
7.3 SYSLOG CLIENT

The IED supports security event reporting through the Syslog protocol for supporting Security Information Event
Management (SIEM) systems for centralized cyber security Monitoring over UDP protocol.
204 P345-AD-EN-1
The IED is a Syslog client that supports two Syslog servers. The following settings are available in the
COMMUNICATIONS column.
Min.
Setting Name Description Min Max Default Units
Permission
The IP address of the target Syslog
SysLog Pri IP 0.0.0.0 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
server (Primary)
The IP address of the target Syslog
SysLog Sec IP 0.0.0.0 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
server (Secondary)
The UDP port number of the target
SysLog Port 1 65535 514 - Administrator
Syslog server
7.4 SYSLOG FUNCTIONALITY

The P40 supports the RFC 5424 UDP protocol.
The table below shows the format of a Syslog event.
Header <PRIVAL>1 YYYY-MM-DDTHH:mm:ss.fffZ IEDName userlog - MSGID
PRIVAL 32 + [event severity]
32 is derived from the facility number 4 (meaning security/authorization messages)
Event severity is derived from the received message.
YYYY 4 Digit year; i.e. 2018
Derived from the received message timestamp.
MM 2 Digit month; 01 to 12 (for January to December).
DD 2 Digit day of month; 01 to 31 (depending upon the month)
HH 2 Digit hour of day; 00 to 23
mm 2 Digit count of minutes elapsed in the current hour; 00 to 59
ss 2 Digit count of seconds elapsed in the current minute; 00 to 59
fff 3 Digit fraction of seconds (millisecond resolution); 0 to 999
IP Addr IP Address assigned to the Ethernet Board.
MSGID Unique message type identity
Derived from the received message event type.
Data [timeQuality tzKnown=X]
(common) X Timezone quality attribute for event timestamp (in header)
0; indicating Local Time offset and DST settings are not enabled (i.e. timestamp is UTC)
P345-AD-EN-1 205
Data [gePlatformEvt channel=IFACE accessLevel=AL evtid=UUID extra=EDATA] DETAIL

(Platform IFACE Channel access type
event)
Copied from the received message interface name.
AL Access Level
Copied from the received message access level.
UUID Unique event identification
Copied from the received message unique id.
EDATA Extra event data – meaning of which is specific to the event type (see MSGID in header)
Copied from the received message extra info.
DETAIL Event details.
Derived from the received message event text and value.
Data [geUserInfo channel=IFACE loginId=USER] DETAIL
(Enhanced IFACE Channel access type
event)
Copied from the received message interface name.
USER Logged in username who generated the event
Copied from the received message user id.
DETAIL Event details.
Copied from the received message event text.
Formatted <38>1 2018-02-06T11:46:32.074Z Feeder1 userlog - 5120 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][gePlatformEvt channel=UI
Examples: accessLevel=3 evtid=4 extra=0] User Logged In on UI Level 3User Logged In on UI Level 3
<38>1 2018-02-06T11:46:32.074Z Feeder1 userlog - 9999 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][geUserInfo channel=UI
loginId=user1] Login - Authentication successful
Sample Syslog messages are shown below:
Event Access Method Syslog Message (As from Syslog Server)
04-17-2019 14:43:32 Auth.Info 192.168.1.30 1 1994-01-23T21:34:06.102Z
Authentication
UI 192.168.1.30 userlog - 9999 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][geUserInfo
Successful
channel=FP loginid=ADMINISTRATOR] Login - Authentication successful
04-19-201913:36:08Auth.Info192.168.1.301 1994-01-25T20:26:42.872Z 192.168.1.30
Authentication
Serial userlog - 9999 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][geUserInfo channel=RP1 loginid=ENGINEER] Login
Failure
- Authentication fail
Courier Tunnel 04-17-201915:29:20Auth.Info192.168.1.301 1994-01-23T22:19:58.168Z 192.168.1.30
Network Login
(device userlog - 9999 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][geUserInfo channel=NET loginid=ENGINEER]
Success
authentication) Login - Authentication successful
04-19-201913:52:08Auth.Info192.168.1.301 1994-01-25T20:42:42.782Z 192.168.1.30
Logout Serial userlog - 9999 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][geUserInfo channel=RP1
loginid=ADMINISTRATOR] Logout
04-18-201912:40:14Auth.Alert192.168.1.301 1994-01-24T19:30:55.839Z 192.168.1.30
Radius
FP userlog - 5163 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][gePlatformEvt channel=FP accessLevel=0
Unavailable
evtid=3715 extra=0] RADIUS UnAvailbl
04-18-201912:39:19Auth.Warning192.168.1.301 1994-01-24T19:30:00.573Z 192.168.1.30
Bypass
FP userlog - 9998 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][geUserInfo channel=FP loginid=ADMINISTRATOR]
Activated
ByPass Activated
04-18-201911:52:35Auth.Notice192.168.1.301 1994-01-24T18:43:16.537Z 192.168.1.30
Settings
Courier Tunnel userlog - 5149 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][gePlatformEvt channel=NET accessLevel=3
modified
evtid=3677 extra=0] Settings Upload By TNL
206 P345-AD-EN-1
CHAPTER 9
INSTALLATION
Chapter 9 - Installation P345
208 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Chapter 9 - Installation
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter provides information about installing the product.
Handling the Goods 210
Mounting the Device 211
Cables and Connectors 213
Case Dimensions 219
P345-AD-EN-1 209
2 HANDLING THE GOODS

Our products are of robust construction but require careful treatment before installation on site. This section
discusses the requirements for receiving and unpacking the goods, as well as associated considerations regarding
product care and personal safety.
Caution:
Before lifting or moving the equipment you should be familiar with the Safety
Information chapter of this manual.
2.1 RECEIPT OF THE GOODS

On receipt, ensure the correct product has been delivered. Unpack the product immediately to ensure there has
been no external damage in transit. If the product has been damaged, make a claim to the transport contractor
and notify us promptly.
For products not intended for immediate installation, repack them in their original delivery packaging.
2.2 UNPACKING THE GOODS

When unpacking and installing the product, take care not to damage any of the parts and make sure that
additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost. Do not discard any CDROMs or technical
documentation (where included). These should accompany the unit to its destination substation and put in a
dedicated place.
The site should be well lit to aid inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. This
particularly applies where installation is being carried out at the same time as construction work.
2.3 STORING THE GOODS

If the unit is not installed immediately, store it in a place free from dust and moisture in its original packaging. Keep
any dehumidifier bags included in the packing. The dehumidifier crystals lose their efficiency if the bag is exposed
to ambient conditions. Restore the crystals before replacing it in the carton. Ideally regeneration should be carried
out in a ventilating, circulating oven at about 115°C. Bags should be placed on flat racks and spaced to allow
circulation around them. The time taken for regeneration will depend on the size of the bag. If a ventilating,
circulating oven is not available, when using an ordinary oven, open the door on a regular basis to let out the
steam given off by the regenerating silica gel.
On subsequent unpacking, make sure that any dust on the carton does not fall inside. Avoid storing in locations of
high humidity. In locations of high humidity the packaging may become impregnated with moisture and the
dehumidifier crystals will lose their efficiency.
The device can be stored between –25º to +70ºC for unlimited periods or between -40°C to + 85°C for up to 96
hours (see technical specifications).
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energised state once a year,
for one hour continuously.
2.4 DISMANTLING THE GOODS

If you need to dismantle the device, always observe standard ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) precautions. The
minimum precautions to be followed are as follows:
● Use an antistatic wrist band earthed to a suitable earthing point.
● Avoid touching the electronic components and PCBs.
210 P345-AD-EN-1
3 MOUNTING THE DEVICE

The products are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel or rack assembly.
Individual products are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the dimensions for panel cut-outs and
hole centres.
The products are designed so the fixing holes in the mounting flanges are only accessible when the access covers
are open.
If you use a P991 or MMLG test block with the product, when viewed from the front, position the test block on the
right-hand side of the associated product. This minimises the wiring between the product and test block, and
allows the correct test block to be easily identified during commissioning and maintenance tests.
3.1 FLUSH PANEL MOUNTING

Panel-mounted devices are flush mounted into panels using M4 SEMS Taptite self-tapping screws with captive
3 mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit).
Caution:
Do not use conventional self-tapping screws, because they have larger heads and could
damage the faceplate.
Alternatively, you can use tapped holes if the panel has a minimum thickness of 2.5 mm.
For applications where the product needs to be semi-projection or projection mounted, a range of collars are
available.
If several products are mounted in a single cut-out in the panel, mechanically group them horizontally or vertically
into rigid assemblies before mounting in the panel.
Caution:
Do not fasten products with pop rivets because this makes them difficult to remove if
repair becomes necessary.
3.2 RACK MOUNTING

Panel-mounted variants can also be rack mounted using single-tier rack frames (our part number FX0021 001), as
shown in the figure below. These frames are designed with dimensions in accordance with IEC 60297 and are
supplied pre-assembled ready to use. On a standard 483 mm (19 inch) rack this enables combinations of case
widths up to a total equivalent of size 80TE to be mounted side by side.
The two horizontal rails of the rack frame have holes drilled at approximately 26 mm intervals. Attach the products
by their mounting flanges using M4 Taptite self-tapping screws with captive 3 mm thick washers (also known as a
SEMS unit).
Caution:
Risk of damage to the front cover molding. Do not use conventional self-tapping
screws, including those supplied for mounting MiDOS products because they have
slightly larger heads.
Once the tier is complete, the frames are fastened into the racks using mounting angles at each end of the tier.
P345-AD-EN-1 211
Figure 67: Rack mounting of products
Products can be mechanically grouped into single tier (4U) or multi-tier arrangements using the rack frame. This
enables schemes using products from different product ranges to be pre-wired together before mounting.
Use blanking plates to fill any empty spaces. The spaces may be used for installing future products or because the
total size is less than 80TE on any tier. Blanking plates can also be used to mount ancillary components. The part
numbers are as follows:
Case size summation Blanking plate part number

5TE GJ2028 001
10TE GJ2028 002
15TE GJ2028 003
20TE GJ2028 004
25TE GJ2028 005
30TE GJ2028 006
35TE GJ2028 007
40TE GJ2028 008
60TE GJ2028 012
80TE GJ2028 016
212 P345-AD-EN-1
4 CABLES AND CONNECTORS

This section describes the type of wiring and connections that should be used when installing the device. For pin-
out details please refer to the Hardware Design chapter or the wiring diagrams.
Caution:
Before carrying out any work on the equipment you should be familiar with the Safety
Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
4.1 TERMINAL BLOCKS

The device may use one or more of the terminal block types shown in the following diagram. The terminal blocks
are fastened to the rear panel with screws.
● Heavy duty (HD) terminal blocks for CT and VT circuits
● Medium duty (MD) terminal blocks for the power supply, relay outputs and rear communications port
● MiDOS terminal blocks for CT and VT circuits
● RTD/CLIO terminal block for connection to analogue transducers
Figure 68: Terminal block types
MiCOM products are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear mounted terminal
blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two ring terminals per terminal.
If required, M4 90° crimp ring terminals can be supplied in three different sizes depending on wire size. Each type is
available in bags of 100.
Part number Wire size Insulation color
ZB9124 901 0.25 - 1.65 mm2 (22 – 16 AWG) Red
ZB9124 900 1.04 - 2.63 mm2 (16 – 14 AWG) Blue
P345-AD-EN-1 213
Note:
IP2x shields and side cover panels may be fitted to provide IP20 ingress protection for MiCOM terminal blocks. The shields and
covers can be attached during installation or retrofitted to upgrade existing installations. The shields are supplied with four
language fitting instructions, publication number: IP2x-TM-4L-n (where n is the current issue number). For more information,
contact your local sales office or our worldwide Contact Centre.
4.2 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

These should be wired with 1.5 mm PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire terminated with M4 ring terminals.
The wire should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 V RMS.
Caution:
Protect the auxiliary power supply wiring with a maximum 16 A high rupture capacity
(HRC) type NIT or TIA fuse.
4.3 EARTH CONNNECTION

Every device must be connected to the cubicle earthing bar using the M4 earth terminal.
Use a wire size of at least 2.5 mm2 terminated with a ring terminal.
Due to the physical limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size you can use is 6.0 mm2 using ring
terminals that are not pre-insulated. If using pre insulated ring terminals, the maximum wire size is reduced to 2.63
mm2 per ring terminal. If you need a greater cross-sectional area, use two wires in parallel, each terminated in a
separate ring terminal.
Note:
To prevent any possibility of electrolytic action between brass or copper ground conductors and the rear panel of the product,
precautions should be taken to isolate them from one another. This could be achieved in several ways, including placing a
nickel-plated or insulating washer between the conductor and the product case, or using tinned ring terminals.
4.4 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Current transformers would generally be wired with 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire terminated
with M4 ring terminals.
Due to the physical limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size you can use is 6.0 mm2 using ring
terminals that are not pre-insulated. If using pre insulated ring terminals, the maximum wire size is reduced to 2.63
mm2 per ring terminal. If you need a greater cross-sectional area, use two wires in parallel, each terminated in a
separate ring terminal.
Caution:
Current transformer circuits must never be fused.
214 P345-AD-EN-1
Note:
If there are CTs present, spring-loaded shorting contacts ensure that the terminals into which the CTs connect are shorted
before the CT contacts are broken.
Note:
For 5A CT secondaries, we recommend using 2 x 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire.
4.5 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS

Voltage transformers should be wired with 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire terminated with M4
ring terminals.
4.6 WATCHDOG CONNECTIONS

These should be wired with 1 mm PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire terminated with M4 ring terminals.
4.7 EIA(RS)485 AND K-BUS CONNECTIONS

For connecting the EIA(RS485) / K-Bus ports, use 2-core screened cable with a maximum total length of 1000 m or
200 nF total cable capacitance.
To guarantee the performance specifications, you must ensure continuity of the screen, when daisy chaining the
connections.
Two-core screened twisted pair cable should be used. It is important to avoid circulating currents, which can cause
noise and interference, especially when the cable runs between buildings. For this reason, the screen should be
continuous and connected to ground at one end only, normally at the master connection point.
The K-Bus signal is a differential signal and there is no signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is
present in the bus cable then it must be ignored. At no stage should this be connected to the cable's screen or to
the product’s chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
A typical cable specification would be:
● Each core: 16/0.2 mm2 copper conductors, PVC insulated
● Nominal conductor area: 0.5 mm2 per core
● Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed
4.8 IRIG-B CONNECTION

The IRIG-B input and BNC connector have a characteristic impedance of 50 ohms. We recommend that
connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the product are made using coaxial cable of type RG59LSF with a
halogen free, fire retardant sheath.
4.9 OPTO-INPUT CONNECTIONS

These should be wired with 1 mm2 PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire terminated with M4 ring terminals.
Each opto-input has a selectable preset ½ cycle filter. This makes the input immune to noise induced on the wiring.
This can, however slow down the response. If you need to switch off the ½ cycle filter, either use double pole
switching on the input, or screened twisted cable on the input circuit.
P345-AD-EN-1 215
Caution:
Protect the opto-inputs and their wiring with a maximum 16 A high rupture capacity
(HRC) type NIT or TIA fuse.
4.10 OUTPUT RELAY CONNECTIONS

These should be wired with 1 mm PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire terminated with M4 ring terminals.
4.11 ETHERNET METALLIC CONNECTIONS

If the device has a metallic Ethernet connection, it can be connected to either a 10Base-T or a 100Base-TX
Ethernet hub. Due to noise sensitivity, we recommend this type of connection only for short distance connections,
ideally where the products and hubs are in the same cubicle. For increased noise immunity, CAT 6 (category 6) STP
(shielded twisted pair) cable and connectors can be used.
The connector for the Ethernet port is a shielded RJ-45. The pin-out is as follows:
Pin Signal name Signal definition
1 TXP Transmit (positive)
2 TXN Transmit (negative)
3 RXP Receive (positive)
4 - Not used
5 - Not used
6 RXN Receive (negative)
7 - Not used
8 - Not used
4.12 ETHERNET FIBRE CONNECTIONS

We recommend the use of fibre-optic connections for permanent connections in a substation environment. The
100 Mbps fibre optic port uses type ST connectors (one for Tx and one for Rx), compatible with 50/125 µm or
62.5/125 µm multimode fibres at 1300 nm wavelength.
Note:
For models equipped with redundant Ethernet connections the product must be partially dismantled to set the fourth octet of
the second IP address. This ideally, should be done before installation.
4.13 USB CONNECTION

The IED has a type B USB socket inside the bottom compartment. A standard USB printer cable (type A one end,
type B the other end) can be used to connect a local PC to the IED. This cable is the same as that used for
connecting a printer to a PC.
4.14 GPS FIBRE CONNECTION

Some products use a GPS 1 PPS timing signal. If applicable, this is connected to a fibre-optic port on the
coprocessor board in slot B. The fibre-optic port uses an ST type connector, compatible with fibre multimode
50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm – 850 nm.
216 P345-AD-EN-1
4.15 FIBRE COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS

The fibre optic port consists of one or two channels using ST type connectors (one for Tx and one for Rx). The type
of fibre used depends on the option selected.
850 nm and 1300 nm multimode systems use 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm multimode fibres. 1300 nm and 1550 nm
single mode systems use 9/125 µm single mode fibres.
4.16 RTD CONNECTIONS

Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) inputs use screw clamp connectors. The connection block is situated at the
rear of the IED. It can accept wire sizes from 0.1 mm2 to 1.5 mm2. The connections between the IED and the RTDs
must be made using a screened 3-core cable with a total resistance less than 10 Ω. The cable should have a
minimum voltage rating of 300 V RMS.
A 3-core cable should be used even for 2-wire RTD applications, as it allows for the cable’s resistance to be
removed from the overall resistance measurement. In such cases the third wire is connected to the second wire at
the point where the cable is joined to the RTD.
The screen of each cable must only be earthed (grounded) at one end, preferably at the IED end and must be
continuous. Multiple earthing (grounding) of the screen can cause circulating current to flow along the screen. This
induces noise and is also unsafe.
You should minimize the noise pick-up in the RTD cables by keeping them close to earthed (grounded) metal
casings and avoid areas of high electromagnetic and radio interference. The RTD cables should not be run
adjacent to or in the same conduit as other high voltage or current cables.
A typical cable specification would be:
● Each core: 7/0.2 mm copper conductors heat resistant PVC insulated
● Nominal conductor area: 0.22 mm2 per core
● Screen: Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat resistant PVC sheathed
The following extract may be useful in defining cable recommendations for the RTDs:
Noise pick up by cables can be categorized into three types:
● Resistive
● Capacitive
● Inductive
Resistive coupling requires an electrical connection to the noise source. Assuming the wire and cable insulation are
in good condition and the junctions are clean, this can be dismissed. Capacitive coupling requires sufficient
capacitance to the noise source. This is a function of the dielectric strength between the signal cable on the noise
source and the power of the noise source. Inductive coupling occurs when the signal cable is adjacent to a wire
carrying the noise or it is exposed to a radiated EMF.
Standard screened cable is normally used to protect against capacitively-coupled noise. However for this to be
effective, the screen should only be bonded to the system ground at one point. Otherwise a current could flow and
the noise would be coupled into the signal wires of the cable. There are different types of screening available, but
the most commonly used are aluminium foil wrap, or tin-copper braid. Foil screens are good for low to medium
frequencies and braid is good for high frequencies. High-fidelity screen cables provide both types.
Protection against inductive coupling requires careful cable routing and magnetic shielding. The latter can be
achieved with steel-armoured cable and steel cable trays. The cable armour must be grounded at both ends so
the EMF of the induced current cancels the field of the noise source and shields the cables conductors from it.
However, the system ground must be designed such that it does not bridge two isolated ground systems. This
could be hazardous and defeat the objectives of the original grounding design. The cable should be laid in the
cable trays as close as possible to the metal of the tray. Under no circumstance should any power cable be in or
near to the tray. Power cables should only cross the signal cables at 90 degrees and never be adjacent to them.
P345-AD-EN-1 217
Both the capacitive and inductive screens must be contiguous from the RTD probes to the IED terminals. The best
types of cable are those provided by the RTD manufacturers. These are usually three conductors, known as a triad,
which are screened with foil. Such triad cables are available in armoured forms as well as multi-triad armoured
forms.
4.17 CLIO CONNECTIONS

Current Loop Inputs and Outputs (CLIO) use screw clamp connectors. The connection block is situated at the rear
of the IED. It can accept wire sizes from 0.1 mm2 to 1.5 mm2. We recommend screened cable, and it should have a
minimum voltage rating of 300 V RMS.
218 P345-AD-EN-1
5 CASE DIMENSIONS
Not all products are available in all case sizes.
5.1 CASE DIMENSIONS 40TE

Sealing
155.40 8 off holes Dia. 3.4 strip
23.30
AB BA
168.00
177.0
159.00 (4U)
AB BA
10.35 181.30 483 (19” rack)

202.00
A = Clearance holes Flush mouting panel

Panel cut-out details
B = Mouting holes
200.00
Note: If mouting plate is required
use flush mounting cut out
dimensions
All dimensons in mm
240.00
Front view Incl. wiring
177.00
157.5
max.
C
Side view
206.00 25.00 E01411
Figure 69: 40TE case dimensions
P345-AD-EN-1 219
E01409
220 P345-AD-EN-1

74.95 116.55 142.45 12 OFF HOLES 3.40
FLUSH MOUNTING PANEL

CUT-OUT DETAIL
159.00 168.00
62.00 155.40 129.50

4.50
408.90
407.10
MOUNTING SCREW : M4 X 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD

FORMING SCREW.
TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 X 7 BRASS CHEESE HEAD SCREWS WITH

222.00 LOCK WASHERS PROVIDED.
240.00
Incl. wiring
157.5
177.00 max.
SIDE VIEW
413.2
25.00
FRONT VIEW
E01410
P345-AD-EN-1 221
222 P345-AD-EN-1
CHAPTER 10
COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
Chapter 10 - Commissioning Instructions P345
224 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Chapter 10 - Commissioning Instructions
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
General Guidelines 226
Commissioning Test Menu 227
Commissioning Equipment 230
Product Checks 232
Setting Checks 242
IEC 61850 Edition 2 Testing 244
Onload Checks 249
Final Checks 251
P345-AD-EN-1 225
2 GENERAL GUIDELINES
GE IEDs are self-checking devices and will raise an alarm in the unlikely event of a failure. This is why the
commissioning tests are less extensive than those for non-numeric electronic devices or electro-mechanical
relays.
To commission the devices, you (the commissioning engineer) do not need to test every function. You need only
verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and that the application-specific software settings have been
applied. You can check the settings by extracting them using the settings application software, or by means of the
front panel interface (HMI panel).
The menu language is user-selectable, so you can change it for commissioning purposes if required.
Note:
Remember to restore the language setting to the customer’s preferred language on completion.
Caution:
Before carrying out any work on the equipment you should be familiar with the
contents of the Safety Section or Safety Guide SFTY/4LM as well as the ratings on the
equipment’s rating label.
Warning:
With the exception of the CT shorting contacts check, do not disassemble the device
during commissioning.
226 P345-AD-EN-1
3 COMMISSIONING TEST MENU

The IED provides several test facilities under the COMMISSION TESTS menu heading. There are menu cells that
allow you to monitor the status of the opto-inputs, output relay contacts, internal Digital Data Bus (DDB) signals
and user-programmable LEDs. This section describes these commissioning test facilities.
3.1 OPTO I/P STATUS CELL (OPTO-INPUT STATUS)

This cell can be used to monitor the status of the opto-inputs while they are sequentially energised with a suitable
DC voltage. The cell is a binary string that displays the status of the opto-inputs where '1' means energised and '0'
means de-energised. If you move the cursor along the binary numbers, the corresponding label text is displayed
for each logic input.
3.2 RELAY O/P STATUS CELL (RELAY OUTPUT STATUS)

This cell can be used to monitor the status of the relay outputs. The cell is a binary string that displays the status of
the relay outputs where '1' means energised and '0' means de-energised. If you move the cursor along the binary
numbers, the corresponding label text is displayed for each relay output.
The cell indicates the status of the output relays when the IED is in service. You can check for relay damage by
comparing the status of the output contacts with their associated bits.
Note:
When the Test Mode cell is set to Contacts Blocked, the relay output status indicates which contacts would operate if
the IED was in-service. It does not show the actual status of the output relays, as they are blocked.
3.3 TEST MODE CELL

This cell allows you to perform secondary injection testing. It also lets you test the output contacts directly by
applying menu-controlled test signals.
To go into test mode, select the Test Mode option in the Test Mode cell. This takes the IED out of service causing
an alarm condition to be recorded and the Out of Service LED to illuminate. This also freezes any information
stored in the CB CONDITION column. In IEC 60870-5-103 versions, it changes the Cause of Transmission (COT) to
Test Mode.
In Test Mode, the output contacts are still active. To disable the output contacts you must select the Contacts
Blocked option.
Once testing is complete, return the device back into service by setting the Test Mode Cell back to Disabled.
Caution:
When the cell is in Test Mode, the Scheme Logic still drives the output relays, which
could result in tripping of circuit breakers. To avoid this, set the Test Mode cell to
Contacts Blocked.
Note:
Test mode and Contacts Blocked mode can also be selected by energising an opto-input mapped to the Test Mode
signal, and the Contact Block signal respectively.
P345-AD-EN-1 227
3.4 TEST PATTERN CELL

The Test Pattern cell is used to select the output relay contacts to be tested when the Contact Test cell is set to
Apply Test. The cell has a binary string with one bit for each user-configurable output contact, which can be
set to '1' to operate the output and '0' to not operate it.
3.5 CONTACT TEST CELL

When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued, the contacts set for operation change state. Once the test
has been applied, the command text on the LCD will change to No Operation and the contacts will remain in the
Test state until reset by issuing the Remove Test command. The command text on the LCD will show No
Operation after the Remove Test command has been issued.
Note:
When the Test Mode cell is set to Contacts Blocked the Relay O/P Status cell does not show the current status of the
output relays and therefore cannot be used to confirm operation of the output relays. Therefore it will be necessary to monitor
the state of each contact in turn.
3.6 TEST LEDS CELL

When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued, the user-programmable LEDs illuminate for approximately
2 seconds before switching off, and the command text on the LCD reverts to No Operation.
3.7 RED AND GREEN LED STATUS CELLS

These cells contain binary strings that indicate which of the user-programmable red and green LEDs are
illuminated when accessing from a remote location. A '1' indicates that a particular LED is illuminated.
Note:
When the status in both Red LED Status and Green LED Status cells is ‘1’, this indicates the LEDs illumination is yellow.
3.8 PSL VERIFICIATION
3.8.1 TEST PORT STATUS CELL

This cell displays the status of the DDB signals that have been allocated in the Monitor Bit cells. If you move the
cursor along the binary numbers, the corresponding DDB signal text string is displayed for each monitor bit.
By using this cell with suitable monitor bit settings, the state of the DDB signals can be displayed as various
operating conditions or sequences are applied to the IED. This allows you to test the Programmable Scheme Logic
(PSL).
3.8.2 MONITOR BIT 1 TO 8 CELLS

The eight Monitor Bit cells allows you to select eight DDB signals that can be observed in the Test Port Status cell or
downloaded via the front port.
Each Monitor Bit cell can be assigned to a particular DDB signal. You set it by entering the required DDB signal
number from the list of available DDB signals.
The pins of the monitor/download port used for monitor bits are as follows:
Monitor Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Monitor/Download Port Pin 11 12 15 13 20 21 23 24
228 P345-AD-EN-1
The signal ground is available on pins 18, 19, 22 and 25.
Caution:
The monitor/download port is not electrically isolated against induced voltages on
the communications channel. It should therefore only be used for local
communications.
P345-AD-EN-1 229
4 COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT
Specialist test equipment is required to commission this product. We recognise three classes of equipment for
commissioning :
● Recommended
● Essential
● Advisory
Recommended equipment constitutes equipment that is both necessary, and sufficient, to verify correct
performance of the principal protection functions.
Essential equipment represents the minimum necessary to check that the product includes the basic expected
protection functions and that they operate within limits.
Advisory equipment represents equipment that is needed to verify satisfactory operation of features that may be
unused, or supplementary, or which may, for example, be integral to a distributed control/automation scheme.
Operation of such features may, perhaps, be more appropriately verified as part of a customer defined
commissioning requirement, or as part of a system-level commissioning regime.
4.1 RECOMMENDED COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT

The minimum recommended equipment is a multifunctional three-phase AC current and voltage injection test set
featuring :
● Controlled three-phase AC current and voltage sources,
● Transient (dynamic) switching between pre-fault and post-fault conditions (to generate delta conditions),
● Dynamic impedance state sequencer (capable of sequencing through 4 impedance states),
● Integrated or separate variable DC supply (0 - 250 V)
● Integrated or separate AC and DC measurement capabilities (0-440V AC, 0-250V DC)
● Integrated and/or separate timer,
● Integrated and/or separate test switches.
In addition, you will need :

● A portable computer, installed with appropriate software to liaise with the equipment under test (EUT).
Typically this software will be proprietary to the product’s manufacturer (for example MiCOM S1 Agile).
● Suitable electrical test leads.
● Electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500 V
● Continuity tester
● Verified application-specific settings files
4.2 ESSENTIAL COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT

As an absolute minimum, the following equipment is required:
● AC current source coupled with AC voltage source
● Variable DC supply (0 - 250V)
● Multimeter capable of measuring AC and DC current and voltage (0-440V AC, 0-250V DC)
● Timer
● Test switches
● Suitable electrical test leads
● Continuity tester
230 P345-AD-EN-1
4.3 ADVISORY TEST EQUIPMENT

Advisory test equipment may be required for extended commissioning procedures:
● Current clamp meter
● Multi-finger test plug:
○ P992 for test block type P991
○ MMLB for test block type MMLG blocks
● Electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500 V
● KITZ K-Bus - EIA(RS)232 protocol converter for testing EIA(RS)485 K-Bus port
● EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 converter for testing EIA(RS)485 Courier/MODBUS/IEC60870-5-103/DNP3 port
● A portable printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC) and or writeable, detachable memory
device.
● Phase angle meter
● Phase rotation meter
● Fibre-optic power meter.
● Fibre optic test leads (minimum 2). 10m minimum length, multimode 50/125 µm or 62.5µm terminated with
BFOC (ST) 2.5 connectors for testing the fibre-optic RP1 port.
P345-AD-EN-1 231
5 PRODUCT CHECKS
These product checks are designed to ensure that the device has not been physically damaged prior to
commissioning, is functioning correctly and that all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the IED prior to commissioning, you should make a copy of
the settings. This will allow you to restore them at a later date if necessary. This can be done by:
● Obtaining a setting file from the customer.
● Extracting the settings from the IED itself, using a portable PC with appropriate setting software.
If the customer has changed the password that prevents unauthorised changes to some of the settings, either the
revised password should be provided, or the original password restored before testing.
Note:
If the password has been lost, a recovery password can be obtained from GE.
5.1 PRODUCT CHECKS WITH THE IED DE-ENERGISED
Warning:
The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply being
applied to the IED and, if applicable, with the trip circuit isolated.
The current and voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the IED for these checks. If a P991 test
block is provided, the required isolation can be achieved by inserting test plug type P992. This open circuits all
wiring routed through the test block.
Before inserting the test plug, you should check the scheme diagram to ensure that this will not cause damage or
a safety hazard (the test block may, for example, be associated with protection current transformer circuits). The
sockets in the test plug, which correspond to the current transformer secondary windings, must be linked before
the test plug is inserted into the test block.
Warning:
Never open-circuit the secondary circuit of a current transformer since the high
voltage produced may be lethal and could damage insulation.
If a test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the IED should be isolated by means of the panel
links or connecting blocks. The line current transformers should be short-circuited and disconnected from the IED
terminals. Where means of isolating the auxiliary supply and trip circuit (for example isolation links, fuses and MCB)
are provided, these should be used. If this is not possible, the wiring to these circuits must be disconnected and the
exposed ends suitably terminated to prevent them from being a safety hazard.
5.1.1 VISUAL INSPECTION
232 P345-AD-EN-1
Warning:
Check the rating information under the top access cover on the front of the IED.
Warning:
Check that the IED being tested is correct for the line or circuit.
Warning:
Record the circuit reference and system details.
Warning:
Check the CT secondary current rating and record the CT tap which is in use.
Carefully examine the IED to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
Ensure that the case earthing connections (bottom left-hand corner at the rear of the IED case) are used to
connect the IED to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor.
5.1.2 CURRENT TRANSFORMER SHORTING CONTACTS

Check the current transformer shorting contacts to ensure that they close when the heavy-duty terminal block is
disconnected from the current input board.
The heavy-duty terminal blocks are fastened to the rear panel using four crosshead screws. These are located two
at the top and two at the bottom.
Note:
Use a magnetic bladed screwdriver to minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.
Pull the terminal block away from the rear of the case and check with a continuity tester that all the shorting
switches being used are closed.
5.1.3 INSULATION
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if explicitly requested.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a DC
voltage not exceeding 500 V. Terminals of the same circuits should be temporarily connected together.
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100 MW at 500 V.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the IED.
5.1.4 EXTERNAL WIRING
Caution:
Check that the external wiring is correct according to the relevant IED and scheme
diagrams. Ensure that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
5.1.5 WATCHDOG CONTACTS

Using a continuity tester, check that the Watchdog contacts are in the following states:
P345-AD-EN-1 233
Terminals Contact state with product de-energised

11 - 12 on power supply board Closed
13 - 14 on power supply board Open
5.1.6 POWER SUPPLY

Depending on its nominal supply rating, the IED can be operated from either a DC only or an AC/DC auxiliary
supply. The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified below.
Without energising the IED measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range.
Nominal supply rating Nominal supply rating
DC operating range AC operating range
DC AC RMS
24 - 54 V N/A 19 to 65 V N/A
48 - 125 V 30 - 100 V 37 to 150 V 24 - 110 V
110 - 250 V 100 - 240 V 87 to 300 V 80 to 265 V
Note:
The IED can withstand an AC ripple of up to 12% of the upper rated voltage on the DC auxiliary supply.
Warning:
Do not energise the IED or interface unit using the battery charger with the battery
disconnected as this can irreparably damage the power supply circuitry.
Caution:
Energise the IED only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges.
If a test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug
to connect the auxiliary supply to the IED.
5.2 PRODUCT CHECKS WITH THE IED ENERGISED
Warning:
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the IED
for these checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
The following group of tests verifies that the IED hardware and software is functioning correctly and should be
carried out with the supply applied to the IED.
5.2.1 WATCHDOG CONTACTS

Using a continuity tester, check that the Watchdog contacts are in the following states when energised and
healthy.
Terminals Contact state with product energised
11 - 12 on power supply board Open
13 - 14 on power supply board Closed
234 P345-AD-EN-1
5.2.2 TEST LCD

The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is designed to operate in a wide range of substation ambient temperatures. For
this purpose, the IEDs have an LCD Contrast setting. The contrast is factory pre-set, but it may be necessary to
adjust the contrast to give the best in-service display.
To change the contrast, you can increment or decrement the LCD Contrast cell in the CONFIGURATION column.
Caution:
Before applying a contrast setting, make sure that it will not make the display so
light or dark such that menu text becomes unreadable. It is possible to restore the
visibility of a display by downloading a setting file, with the LCD Contrast set within
the typical range of 7 - 11.
5.2.3 DATE AND TIME

The date and time is stored in memory, which is backed up by a supercapacitor.
The method for setting the date and time depends on whether an IRIG-B signal is being used or not. The IRIG-B
signal will override the time, day and month settings, but not the initial year setting. For this reason, you must
ensure you set the correct year, even if the device is using IRIG-B to maintain the internal clock.
You set the Date and Time by one of the following methods:
● Using the front panel to set the Date and Time cells respectively
● By sending a courier command to the Date/Time cell (Courier reference 0801)
Note:
If the auxiliary supply fails, the time and date will be maintained by the supercapacitor. Therefore, when the auxiliary supply is
restored, you should not have to set the time and date again. To test this, remove the IRIG-B signal, and then remove the
auxiliary supply. Leave the device de-energised for approximately 30 seconds. On re energisation, the time should be correct.
When using IRIG-B to maintain the clock, the IED must first be connected to the satellite clock equipment (usually a
P594/RT430), which should be energised and functioning.
1. Set the IRIG-B Sync cell in the DATE AND TIME column to Enabled.
2. Ensure the IED is receiving the IRIG-B signal by checking that cell IRIG-B Status reads Active.
3. Once the IRIG-B signal is active, adjust the time offset of the universal co coordinated time (satellite clock
time) on the satellite clock equipment so that local time is displayed.
4. Check that the time, date and month are correct in the Date/Time cell. The IRIG-B signal does not contain
the current year so it will need to be set manually in this cell.
5. Reconnect the IRIG-B signal.
If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B signal, ensure that the IRIG-B Sync cell in the DATE AND
TIME column is set to Disabled.
1. Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using Date/Time cell or using the serial protocol.
5.2.4 TEST LEDS

On power-up, all LEDs should first flash yellow. Following this, the green "Healthy" LED should illuminate indicating
that the device is healthy.
The IED's non-volatile memory stores the states of the alarm, the trip, and the user-programmable LED indicators
(if configured to latch). These indicators may also illuminate when the auxiliary supply is applied.
P345-AD-EN-1 235
If any of these LEDs are ON then they should be reset before proceeding with further testing. If the LEDs
successfully reset (the LED goes off), no testing is needed for that LED because it is obviously operational.
5.2.5 TEST ALARM AND OUT-OF-SERVICE LEDS

The alarm and out of service LEDs can be tested using the COMMISSION TESTS menu column.
1. Set the Test Mode cell to Contacts Blocked.
2. Check that the out of service LED illuminates continuously and the alarm LED flashes.
It is not necessary to return the Test Mode cell to Disabled at this stage because the test mode will be required
for later tests.
5.2.6 TEST TRIP LED

The trip LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip. However, the trip LED will operate during the
setting checks performed later. Therefore no further testing of the trip LED is required at this stage.
5.2.7 TEST USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

To test these LEDs, set the Test LEDs cell to Apply Test. Check that all user-programmable LEDs illuminate.
5.2.8 TEST OPTO-INPUTS

This test checks that all the opto-inputs on the IED are functioning correctly.
The opto-inputs should be energised one at a time. For terminal numbers, please see the external connection
diagrams in the "Wiring Diagrams" chapter. Ensuring correct polarity, connect the supply voltage to the
appropriate terminals for the input being tested.
The status of each opto-input can be viewed using either the Opto I/P Status cell in the SYSTEM DATA column, or
the Opto I/P Status cell in the COMMISSION TESTS column.
A '1' indicates an energised input and a '0' indicates a de-energised input. When each opto-input is energised, one
of the characters on the bottom line of the display changes to indicate the new state of the input.
5.2.9 TEST OUTPUT RELAYS

This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly.
1. Ensure that the IED is still in test mode by viewing the Test Mode cell in the COMMISSION TESTS column.
Ensure that it is set to Contacts Blocked.
2. The output relays should be energised one at a time. To select output relay 1 for testing, set the Test Pattern
cell as appropriate.
3. Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1 as shown in the external
connection diagram.
4. To operate the output relay set the Contact Test cell to Apply Test.
5. Check the operation with the continuity tester.
6. Measure the resistance of the contacts in the closed state.
7. Reset the output relay by setting the Contact Test cell to Remove Test.
8. Repeat the test for the remaining output relays.
9. Return the IED to service by setting the Test Mode cell in the COMMISSION TESTS menu to Disabled.
5.2.10 RTD INPUTS

This test checks that all the RTD inputs are functioning correctly, if the RTD board is fitted.
236 P345-AD-EN-1
Please refer to the wiring diagrams for details of the terminal connections.
1. You should connect a 100 ohm resistor across each RTD in turn. The resistor needs to have a very small
tolerance (0.1%). You must connect the RTD common return terminal to the correct RTD input, otherwise the
device will report an RTD error.
2. Check that the corresponding temperature displayed in the MEASUREMENTS 3 column of the menu is 0°C
+/-2°C. This range takes into account the 0.1% resistor tolerance and device accuracy of +/-1°C. If a resistor
of lower accuracy is used during testing, the acceptable setting range needs to be increased.
5.2.11 CURRENT LOOP OUTPUTS

This test checks that all the current loop outputs are functioning correctly, if the board is fitted.
Please refer to the wiring diagrams for details of the terminal connections. Note that for the current loop outputs,
the physical connection of the 1 mA output is different from that of the other types.
1. Enable the current loop output to be tested.
2. Note the current loop output type (CLO Type) for the application.
3. Note the current loop output parameter (CLO Parameter)
4. Note the current loop output minimum and maximum settings (CLO Minimum and CLO Maximum)
5. Apply the appropriate analog input quantity to match the CLO Parameter at a value equal to (CLO
maximum + CLO minimum)/2. The current loop output should be at 50% of its maximum rated output.
6. Using a precision resistive current shunt and a high-resolution voltmeter, check that the current loop output
is at 50% of its maximum rated output according to the range as follows:
0.5 mA (0 to 1 mA CLO)
5 mA (0 to 10 mA CLO)
10 mA (0 to 20, 4 to 20 mA CLO)
7. The accuracy should be within +/-0.5% of full scale + meter accuracy.
5.2.12 CURRENT LOOP INPUTS

This test checks that all the current loop inputs are functioning correctly, if the board is fitted.
Please refer to the wiring diagrams for details of the terminal connections. Note that for the current loop inputs,
the physical connection of the 1 mA input is different from that of the other types.
You can use an accurate DC current source to apply various current levels to the current loop inputs. One
approach to this is to use a current loop output as a DC current sources. If you stimulate the current loop output by
applying an appropriate signal to the input to which it has been assigned with the CLO Parameter setting, you will
get an appropriate DC signal if the output is enabled.
1. Enable the current loop input to be tested.
2. Note the CLIx minimum and maximum settings and the CLIx Input type for the application.
3. Apply a DC current to the current loop input at 50% of the CLI input maximum range, 0.5 mA (0 to 1 mA CLI),
5 mA (0 to 10 mA CLI) or 10 mA (0 to 20, 4 to 20 mA CLI).
4. Check the accuracy of the current loop input using the CLIO Input 1/2/3/4 cells in the MEASUREMENTS 3
column. The display should show (CLIx maximum + CLIx minimum)/2 +/-1% full scale accuracy.
5.2.13 TEST SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORT RP1

You need only perform this test if the IED is to be accessed from a remote location with a permanent serial
connection to the communications port. The scope of this test does not extend to verifying operation with
connected equipment beyond any supplied protocol converter. It verifies operation of the rear communication port
(and if applicable the protocol converter) and varies according to the protocol fitted.
P345-AD-EN-1 237
5.2.13.1 CHECK PHYSICAL CONNECTIVITY

The rear communication port RP1 is presented on terminals 16, 17 and 18 of the power supply terminal block.
Screened twisted pair cable is used to make a connection to the port. The cable screen should be connected to pin
16 and pins 17 and 18 are for the communication signal:
Figure 72: RP1 physical connection
For K-Bus applications, pins 17 and 18 are not polarity sensitive and it does not matter which way round the wires
are connected. EIA(RS)485 is polarity sensitive, so you must ensure the wires are connected the correct way round
(pin 18 is positive, pin 17 is negative).
If K-Bus is being used, a Kitz protocol converter (KITZ101, KITZ102 OR KITZ201) will have been installed to convert
the K-Bus signals into RS232. Likewise, if RS485 is being used, an RS485-RS232 converter will have been installed.
In the case where a protocol converter is being used, a laptop PC running appropriate software (such as MiCOM S1
Agile) can be connected to the incoming side of the protocol converter. An example for K-bus to RS232 conversion
is shown below. RS485 to RS232 would follow the same principle, only using a RS485-RS232 converter. Most
modern laptops have USB ports, so it is likely you will also require a RS232 to USB converter too.
238 P345-AD-EN-1
C C C
IED IED IED
RS232 K-Bus
Computer RS232 -USB converter KITZ protocol converter

V01071
Figure 73: Remote communication using K-bus
Fibre Connection
Some models have an optional fibre optic communications port fitted (on a separate communications board). The
communications port to be used is selected by setting the Physical Link cell in the COMMUNICATIONS column, the
values being Copper or K-Bus for the RS485/K-bus port and Fibre Optic for the fibre optic port.
5.2.13.2 CHECK LOGICAL CONNECTIVITY

The logical connectivity depends on the chosen data protocol, but the principles of testing remain the same for all
protocol variants:
1. Ensure that the communications baud rate and parity settings in the application software are set the same
as those on the protocol converter.
2. For Courier models, ensure that you have set the correct RP1 address
3. Check that communications can be established with this IED using the portable PC/Master Station.
5.2.14 TEST SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORT RP2

RP2 is an optional second serial port board providing additional serial connectivity. It provides two 9-pin D-type
serial port connectors SK4 and SK5. Both ports are configured as DTE (Date Terminal Equipment) ports. That means
they can be connected to communications equipment such as a modem with a straight-through cable.
SK4 can be configured as an EIA(RS232), EIA(RS485), or K-Bus connection for Courier protocol only, whilst SK5 is
fixed to EIA(RS)232 for InterMiCOM signalling only.
It is not the intention of this test to verify the operation of the complete communication link between the IED and
the remote location, just the IED's rear communication port and, if applicable, the protocol converter.
The only checks that need to be made are as follows:
1. Set the RP2 Port Config cell in the COMMUNICATIONS column to the required physical protocol; (K-Bus,
EIA(RS)485, or EIA(RS)232.
2. Set the IED's Courier address to the correct value (it must be between 1 and 254).
P345-AD-EN-1 239
5.2.15 TEST ETHERNET COMMUNICATION

For products that employ Ethernet communications, we recommend that testing be limited to a visual check that
the correct ports are fitted and that there is no sign of physical damage.
If there is no board fitted or the board is faulty, a NIC link alarm will be raised (providing this option has been set in
the NIC Link Report cell in the COMMUNICATIONS column).
5.3 SECONDARY INJECTION TESTS

Secondary injection testing is carried out to verify the integrity of the VT and CT readings. All devices leave the
factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50 Hz. If operation at 60 Hz is required, you must set this in the
Frequency cell in the SYSTEM DATA column.
The PMU must be installed and connected to a 1pps fibre optic synchronising signal and a demodulated IRIG-B
signal, provided by a device such as a P594 or a REASON RT430.
Connect the current and voltage outputs of the test set to the appropriate terminals of the first voltage and current
channel and apply nominal voltage and current with the current lagging the voltage by 90 degrees.
5.3.1 TEST CURRENT INPUTS

This test verifies that the current measurement inputs are configured correctly.
1. Using secondary injection test equipment such as an Omicron, apply and measure nominal rated current to
each CT in turn.
2. Check its magnitude using a multi-meter or test set readout. Check this value against the value displayed
on the HMI panel (usually in MEASUREMENTS 1 column).
3. Record the displayed value. The measured current values will either be in primary or secondary Amperes. If
the Local Values cell in the MEASURE’T SETUP column is set to Primary, the values displayed should be
equal to the applied current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer ratio (set in the CT AND VT
RATIOS column). If the Local Values cell is set to Secondary, the value displayed should be equal to the
applied current.
Note:
If a PC connected to the IED using the rear communications port is being used to display the measured current, the process
will be similar. However, the setting of the Remote Values cell in the MEASURE’T SETUP column will determine whether the
displayed values are in primary or secondary Amperes.
The measurement accuracy of the IED is +/- 1%. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy
of the test equipment being used.
240 P345-AD-EN-1
5.3.2 TEST VOLTAGE INPUTS

This test verifies that the voltage measurement inputs are configured correctly.
1. Using secondary injection test equipment, apply and measure the rated voltage to each voltage
transformer input in turn.
2. Check its magnitude using a multimeter or test set readout. Check this value against the value displayed on
the HMI panel (usually in MEASUREMENTS 1 column).
3. Record the value displayed. The measured voltage values will either be in primary or secondary Volts. If the
Local Values cell in the MEASURE’T SETUP column is set to Primary, the values displayed should be equal
to the applied voltage multiplied by the corresponding voltage transformer ratio (set in the CT AND VT
RATIOS column). If the Local Values cell is set to Secondary, the value displayed should be equal to the
applied voltage.
Note:
If a PC connected to the IED using the rear communications port is being used to display the measured current, the process
will be similar. However, the setting of the Remote Values cell in the MEASURE’T SETUP column will determine whether the
displayed values are in primary or secondary Amperes.
The measurement accuracy of the IED is +/- 1%. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy
of the test equipment being used.
P345-AD-EN-1 241
6 SETTING CHECKS
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific settings (both the IED’s function and programmable
scheme logic settings) have been correctly applied.
Note:
If applicable, the trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental operation of the associated
circuit breaker.
6.1 APPLY APPLICATION-SPECIFIC SETTINGS

There are two different methods of applying the settings to the IED
● Transferring settings to the IED from a pre-prepared setting file using MiCOM S1 Agile
● Enter the settings manually using the IED’s front panel HMI
6.1.1 TRANSFERRING SETTINGS FROM A SETTINGS FILE

This is the preferred method for transferring function settings. It is much faster and there is a lower margin for
error.
1. Connect a PC running the Settings Application Software to the IED's front port, or a rear Ethernet port.
Alternatively connect to the rear Courier communications port, using a KITZ protocol converter if necessary.
2. Power on the IED
3. Enter the IP address of the device if it is Ethernet enabled
4. Right-click the appropriate device name in the System Explorer pane and select Send
5. In the Send to dialog select the setting files and click Send
Note:
The device name may not already exist in the system shown in System Explorer. In this case, perform a Quick Connect to the
IED, then manually add the settings file to the device name in the system. Refer to the Settings Application Software help for
details of how to do this.
6.1.2 ENTERING SETTINGS USING THE HMI

1. Starting at the default display, press the Down cursor key to show the first column heading.
2. Use the horizontal cursor keys to select the required column heading.
3. Use the vertical cursor keys to view the setting data in the column.
4. To return to the column header, either press the Up cursor key for a second or so, or press the Cancel key
once. It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading level.
5. To return to the default display, press the Up cursor key or the Cancel key from any of the column headings.
If you use the auto-repeat function of the Up cursor key, you cannot go straight to the default display from
one of the column cells because the auto-repeat stops at the column heading.
6. To change the value of a setting, go to the relevant cell in the menu, then press the Enter key to change the
cell value. A flashing cursor on the LCD shows that the value can be changed. You may be prompted for a
password first.
7. To change the setting value, press the vertical cursor keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary value or a
text string, select the required bit or character to be changed using the left and right cursor keys.
242 P345-AD-EN-1
8. Press the Enter key to confirm the new setting value or the Clear key to discard it. The new setting is
automatically discarded if it is not confirmed within 15 seconds.
9. For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be confirmed before
they are used. When all required changes have been entered, return to the column heading level and press
the down cursor key. Before returning to the default display, the following prompt appears.
Update settings?
ENTER or CLEAR
10. Press the Enter key to accept the new settings or press the Clear key to discard the new settings.
Note:
If the menu time-out occurs before the setting changes have been confirmed, the setting values are also discarded.
Control and support settings are updated immediately after they are entered, without the Update settings prompt.
It is not possible to change the PSL using the IED’s front panel HMI.
Caution:
Where the installation needs application-specific PSL, the relevant .psl files, must be
transferred to the IED, for each and every setting group that will be used. If you do
not do this, the factory default PSL will still be resident. This may have severe
operational and safety consequences.
Note:
To see the complete set of protection tests in the Setting Checks section refer to manual P34x/EN M/Ia8, software version 38
& 72.
P345-AD-EN-1 243
7 IEC 61850 EDITION 2 TESTING
7.1 USING IEC 61850 EDITION 2 TEST MODES

In a conventional substation, functionality typically resides in a single device. It is usually easy to physically isolate
these functions, as the hardwired connects can simply be removed. Within a digital substation architecture
however, functions may be distributed across many devices. This makes isolation of these functions difficult,
because there are no physical wires that can be disconnected on a Ethernet network. Logical isolation of the
various functions is therefore necessary.
With devices that support IEC 61850 Edition 2, it is possible to use a test mode to conduct online testing, which
helps with the situation. The advantages of this are as follows:
● The device can be placed into a test mode, which can disable the relay outputs when testing the device
with test input signals.
● Specific protection and control functions can be logically isolated.
● GOOSE messages can be tagged so that receiving devices can recognise they are test signals.
● An IED receiving simulated GOOSE or Sampled Value messages from test devices can differentiate these
from normal process messages, and be configured to respond appropriately.
7.1.1 IED TEST MODE BEHAVIOUR

Test modes define how the device responds to test messages, and whether the relay outputs are activated or not.
You can select the mode of operation by:
● Using the front panel HMI, with the setting IED Test Mode under the COMMISSION TESTS column.
● Using an IEC 61850 control service to System/LLN0.Mod
● Using an opto-input via PSL with the signal Block Contacts
The following table summarises the IED behaviour under the different modes:
IED Test Mode Setting Result
Disabled ● Normal IED behaviour
● Protection remains enabled
● Output from the device is still active
Test ● IEC 61850 message output has the 'quality' parameter set to 'test'
● The device only responds to IEC61850 MMS messages from the client with the
'test' flag set
● Protection remains enabled
● Output from the device is disabled
Contacts Blocked ● IEC 61850 message output has quality set to ‘test’
● The device only responds to IEC 61850 MMS messages from the client with the
'test' flag set
Setting the Test or Contacts Blocked mode puts the whole IED into test mode. The IEC 61850 data object Beh in all
Logical Nodes (except LPHD and any protection Logical Nodes that have Beh = 5 (off) due to the function being
disabled) will be set to 3 (test) or 4 (test/blocked) as applicable.
7.1.2 SAMPLED VALUE TEST MODE BEHAVIOUR

The SV Test Mode defines how the device responds to test sampled value messages. You can select the mode of
operation by using the front panel HMI, with the setting SV Test Mode under the IEC 61850-9.2LE column.
The following table summarises the behaviour for sampled values under the different modes:
244 P345-AD-EN-1
SV Test Mode Setting Result

● Normal IED behaviour
● All sampled value data frames received with an IEC 61850 Test quality bit set
Disabled are treated as invalid
● The IED will display the measurement values for sampled values with the
Simulated flag set but the protection elements within the IED will be blocked
● All sampled value data frames received are treated as good, no matter if they
Enabled
have an IEC 61850-9-2 Simulated flag set or not
7.2 SIMULATED INPUT BEHAVIOUR

Simulated GOOSE messages and sampled value streams can be used during testing.
The Subscriber Sim setting in the COMMISSION TESTS column controls whether a device listens to simulated
signals or to real ones. An IEC 61850 control service to System/LPHD.Sim can also be used to change this value.
The device may be presented with both real signals and test signals. An internal state machine is used to control
how the device switches between signals:
● The IED will continue subscribing to the ‘real’ GOOSE1 (in green) until it receives the first simulated GOOSE 1
(in red). This will initiate subscription changeover.
● After changeover to this new state, the IED will continue to subscribe to the simulated GOOSE 1 message (in
red). Even if this simulated GOOSE 1 message disappears, the real GOOSE 1 message (in green) will still not
be processed. This means all Virtual Inputs derived from the GOOSE 1 message will go to their default state.
● The only way to bring the IED out of this state is to set the Subscriber Sim setting back to False. The IED will
then immediately stop processing the simulated messages and start processing real messages again.
● During above steps, IED1 will continuously process the real GOOSE 2 and GOOSE 3 messages as normal
because it has not received any simulated messages for these that would initiate a changeover.
The process is represented in the following figure:
LPHD1
Sim stVal=true Beh stVal=on

Simulated GOOSE 1 messages
Simulation bit goes TRUE
Real GOOSE 1 messages

Simulation bit was FALSE
Incoming data
processed
Reception buffer
V01058
Figure 74: Simulated input behaviour
7.3 TESTING EXAMPLES

These examples show how you test the IED with and without simulated values. Depending on the IED Test Mode, it
may respond by operating plant (for example by tripping the circuit breaker) or it may not operate plant.
P345-AD-EN-1 245
7.3.1 TEST PROCEDURE FOR REAL VALUES

This procedure is for testing with real values without operating plant.
1. Set device into 'Contacts Blocked' Mode
Select COMMISSION TESTS ® IED Test Mode ® Contacts Blocked
2. Confirm new behaviour has been enabled
View COMMISSION TESTS ® IED Mod/Beh, and check that it shows Test-blocked
3. Set device into Simulation Listening Mode
Select COMMISSION TESTS ® Subscriber Sim = Disabled
4. If using sampled values set the sampled values test mode
Select IEC 61850-9.2LE ® SV Test Mode ® Disabled
5. Inject real signals using a test device connected to the merging units. The device will continue to listen to
‘real’ GOOSE messages and ignore simulated messages received.
6. Verify function based on test signal outputs
Binary outputs (e.g. CB trips) will not operate. All transmitted GOOSE and MMS data items will be tagged with
the 'quality' parameter set to 'test', so that the receiver understands that they have been issued by a device
under test and can respond accordingly. This is summarised in the following diagram
Fully digital bay Hardwired

CB control
Station/Process Bus
q = test No output
Yard Yard
SC MU1 Switchgear
MU1 MU1
Test Test
Device Device
V01062
Figure 75: Test example 1
7.3.2 TEST PROCEDURE FOR SIMULATED VALUES - NO PLANT

This procedure is for testing with simulated values without operating plant.
Select COMMISSION TESTS ® IED Test Mode ® Contacts Blocked
View COMMISSION TESTS ® IED Mod/Beh, and check that it shows test-blocked
246 P345-AD-EN-1

Select COMMISSION TESTS ® Subscriber Sim = Enabled
Select IEC 61850-9.2LE ® SV Test Mode ® Enabled
5. Inject simulated signals using a test device connected to the Ethernet network. The device will continue to
listen to ‘real’ GOOSE messages until a simulated message is received. Once the simulated messages are
received, the corresponding ‘real’ messages are ignored until the device is taken out of test mode. Each
message is treated separately, but sampled values are considered as a single message.
6. Verify function based on test signal outputs
Binary outputs (e.g. CB trips) will not operate. All transmitted GOOSE and MMS data items will be tagged with
the 'quality' parameter set to 'test', so that the receiver understands that they have been issued by a device
under test and can respond accordingly. This is summarised in the following diagram

CB control
Station/Process Bus
Simulated q = test No output
values
Yard Yard
Test
Device SC MU1 Switchgear
MU1 MU1
V01063
7.3.3 TEST PROCEDURE FOR SIMULATED VALUES - WITH PLANT

This procedure is for testing with simulated values with operating plant.
Select COMMISSION TESTS ® IED Test Mode ® Test
View COMMISSION TESTS ® IED Mod/Beh, and check that it shows Test
Select COMMISSION TESTS ® Subscriber Sim = Enabled
P345-AD-EN-1 247

Select IEC 61850-9.2LE ® SV Test Mode ® Enabled
5. Inject simulated signals using a test device connected to the Ethernet network.
The device will continue to listen to ‘real’ GOOSE messages until a simulated message is received. Once the
simulated messages are received, the corresponding ‘real’ messages are ignored until the device is taken
out of IED test mode. Each message is treated separately, but sampled values are considered as a single
message.
6. Verify function based on test signal outputs.
Binary outputs (e.g. CB trips) will operate as normal. All transmitted GOOSE and MMS data items will be
tagged with the 'quality' parameter set to 'test', so that the receiver understands that they have been issued
by a device under test and can respond accordingly. This is summarised in the following diagram:

CB control
Station/Process Bus
Simulated q = test Trip output
values
Yard Yard
Test
Device SC MU1 Switchgear
MU1 MU1
V01064
7.3.4 CONTACT TEST

The Apply Test command in this cell is used to change the state of the contacts set for operation.
If the device has been put into 'Contact Blocked' mode using an input signal (via the Block Contacts DDB signal)
then the Apply Test command will not execute. This is to prevent a device that has been blocked by an external
process having its contacts operated by a local operator using the HMI.
If the Block Contacts DDB is not set and the Apply Test command in this cell is issued, contacts change state and
the command text on the LCD changes to No Operation. The contacts remain in the Test state until reset by
issuing the Remove Test command. The command text on the LCD shows No Operation after the Remove Test
command has been issued.
Note:
When the IED Test Mode cell is set to Contacts Blocked, the Relay O/P Status cell does not show the current status of the
output relays so cannot be used to confirm operation of the output relays. Therefore it is necessary to monitor the state of
each contact in turn.
248 P345-AD-EN-1
8 ONLOAD CHECKS
Warning:
Onload checks are potentially very dangerous and may only be carried out by
qualified and authorised personnel.
Onload checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the energisation of the plant, and the
other devices in the group have already been commissioned.
Remove all test leads and temporary shorting links, then replace any external wiring that has been removed to
allow testing.
Warning:
If any external wiring has been disconnected for the commissioning process, replace
it in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
8.1 CONFIRM CURRENT CONNECTIONS

1. Measure the current transformer secondary values for each input either by:
a. reading from the device's HMI panel (providing it has first been verified by a secondary injection test)
b. using a current clamp meter
2. Check that the current transformer polarities are correct by measuring the phase angle between the
current and voltage, either against a phase meter already installed on site and known to be correct or by
determining the direction of power flow by contacting the system control centre.
3. Ensure the current flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is negligible.
If the Local Values cell is set to Secondary, the values displayed should be equal to the applied secondary
voltage. The values should be within 1% of the applied secondary voltages. However, an additional allowance must
be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
If the Local Values cell is set to Primary, the values displayed should be equal to the applied secondary voltage
multiplied the corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the CT & VT RATIOS column. The values should be
within 1% of the expected values, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
8.2 CONFIRM VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS

1. Using a multimeter, measure the voltage transformer secondary voltages to ensure they are correctly rated.
2. Check that the system phase rotation is correct using a phase rotation meter.
3. Compare the values of the secondary phase voltages with the measured voltage magnitude values, which
can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu column.
Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 Column Corresponding VT ratio in CT/VT RATIOS column

VAB MAGNITUDE
VBC MAGNITUDE
VCA MAGNITUDE
Main VT Primary / Main VT Sec'y
VAN MAGNITUDE
VBN MAGNITUDE
VCN MAGNITUDE
C/S Voltage Mag CS VT Primary / CS VT Secondary
P345-AD-EN-1 249
If the Local Values cell is set to Secondary, the values displayed should be equal to the applied secondary
voltage. The values should be within 1% of the applied secondary voltages. However, an additional allowance must
be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
If the Local Values cell is set to Primary, the values displayed should be equal to the applied secondary voltage
multiplied the corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the CT & VT RATIOS column. The values should be
within 1% of the expected values, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
250 P345-AD-EN-1
9 FINAL CHECKS
1. Remove all test leads and temporary shorting leads.
2. If you have had to disconnect any of the external wiring in order to perform the wiring verification tests,
replace all wiring, fuses and links in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
3. The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required application-specific settings to ensure
that they are correct, and have not been mistakenly altered during testing.
4. Ensure that all protection elements required have been set to Enabled in the CONFIGURATION column.
5. Ensure that the IED has been restored to service by checking that the Test Mode cell in the COMMISSION
TESTS column is set to Disabled.
6. If the IED is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit breaker
maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters can be reset using the Reset All Values
cell. If the required access level is not active, the device will prompt for a password to be entered so that the
setting change can be made.
7. If the menu language has been changed to allow accurate testing it should be restored to the customer’s
preferred language.
8. If a P991/MMLG test block is installed, remove the P992/MMLB test plug and replace the cover so that the
protection is put into service.
9. Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records, alarms and LEDs and communications
statistics have been reset.
Note:
Remember to restore the language setting to the customer’s preferred language on completion.
P345-AD-EN-1 251
252 P345-AD-EN-1
CHAPTER 11
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Chapter 11 - Maintenance and Troubleshooting P345
254 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Chapter 11 - Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
The Maintenance and Troubleshooting chapter provides details of how to maintain and troubleshoot products
based on the Px4x and P40Agile platforms. Always follow the warning signs in this chapter. Failure to do so may
result injury or defective equipment.
Caution:
contents of the Safety Section or the Safety Guide SFTY/4LM and the ratings on the
The troubleshooting part of the chapter allows an error condition on the IED to be identified so that appropriate
corrective action can be taken.
If the device develops a fault, it is usually possible to identify which module needs replacing. It is not possible to
perform an on-site repair to a faulty module.
If you return a faulty unit or module to the manufacturer or one of their approved service centres, you should
include a completed copy of the Repair or Modification Return Authorization (RMA) form.
Maintenance 256
Troubleshooting 264
Repair and Modification Procedure 268
P345-AD-EN-1 255
2 MAINTENANCE
2.1 MAINTENANCE CHECKS

In view of the critical nature of the application, GE products should be checked at regular intervals to confirm they
are operating correctly. GE products are designed for a life in excess of 20 years.
The devices are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of protection devices. Most
problems will result in an alarm, indicating that remedial action should be taken. However, some periodic tests
should be carried out to ensure that they are functioning correctly and that the external wiring is intact. It is the
responsibility of the customer to define the interval between maintenance periods. If your organisation has a
Preventative Maintenance Policy, the recommended product checks should be included in the regular program.
Maintenance periods depend on many factors, such as:
● The operating environment
● The accessibility of the site
● The amount of available manpower
● The importance of the installation in the power system
● The consequences of failure
Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location, these are predominantly restricted
to checking that the unit is measuring the applied currents and voltages accurately, and checking the circuit
breaker maintenance counters. For this reason, maintenance checks should also be performed locally at the
substation.
Caution:
contents of the Safety Section or the Safety Guide SFTY/4LM and the ratings on the
2.1.1 ALARMS
First check the alarm status LED to see if any alarm conditions exist. If so, press the Read key repeatedly to step
through the alarms.
After dealing with any problems, clear the alarms. This will clear the relevant LEDs.
2.1.2 OPTO-ISOLATORS
Check the opto-inputs by repeating the commissioning test detailed in the Commissioning chapter.
2.1.3 OUTPUT RELAYS

Check the output relays by repeating the commissioning test detailed in the Commissioning chapter.
2.1.4 MEASUREMENT ACCURACY

If the power system is energised, the measured values can be compared with known system values to check that
they are in the expected range. If they are within a set range, this indicates that the A/D conversion and the
calculations are being performed correctly. Suitable test methods can be found in Commissioning chapter.
Alternatively, the measured values can be checked against known values injected into the device using the test
block, (if fitted) or injected directly into the device's terminals. Suitable test methods can be found in the
Commissioning chapter. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.
256 P345-AD-EN-1
2.2 REPLACING THE DEVICE

If your product should develop a fault while in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the watchdog
contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. In the case of a fault, you can replace either the
complete device or just the faulty PCB, identified by the in-built diagnostic software.
If possible you should replace the complete device, as this reduces the chance of damage due to electrostatic
discharge and also eliminates the risk of fitting an incompatible replacement PCB. However, we understand it may
be difficult to remove an installed product and you may be forced to replace the faulty PCB on-site. The case and
rear terminal blocks are designed to allow removal of the complete device, without disconnecting the scheme
wiring.
Caution:
Replacing PCBs requires the correct on-site environment (clean and dry) as well as
suitably trained personnel.
Caution:
If the repair is not performed by an approved service centre, the warranty will be
invalidated.
Caution:
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, you should be familiar with the
contents of the Safety Information section of this guide or the Safety Guide SFTY/4LM,
as well as the ratings on the equipment’s rating label. This should ensure that no
damage is caused by incorrect handling of the electronic components.
Warning:
Before working at the rear of the device, isolate all voltage and current supplying it.
Note:
The current transformer inputs are equipped with integral shorting switches which will close for safety reasons, when the
terminal block is removed.
To replace the complete device:

1. Carefully disconnect the cables not connected to the terminal blocks (e.g. IRIG-B, fibre optic cables, earth),
as appropriate, from the rear of the device.
2. Remove the terminal block screws using a magnetic screwdriver to minimise the risk of losing the screws or
leaving them in the terminal block.
3. Without exerting excessive force or damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal blocks away from their
internal connectors.
4. Remove the terminal block screws that fasten the device to the panel and rack. These are the screws with
the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the access covers are fitted and open.
5. Withdraw the device from the panel and rack. Take care, as the device will be heavy due to the internal
transformers.
6. To reinstall the device, follow the above instructions in reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is
relocated in the correct position and the chassis ground, IRIG-B and fibre optic connections are replaced.
The terminal blocks are labelled alphabetically with ‘A’ on the left hand side when viewed from the rear.
Once the device has been reinstalled, it should be re-commissioned as set out in the Commissioning chapter.
P345-AD-EN-1 257
Caution:
If the top and bottom access covers have been removed, some more screws with
smaller diameter heads are made accessible. Do NOT remove these screws, as they
secure the front panel to the device.
Note:
There are four possible types of terminal block: RTD/CLIO input, heavy duty, medium duty, and MiDOS. The terminal blocks are
fastened to the rear panel with slotted or cross-head screws depending on the type of terminal block. Not all terminal block
types are present on all products.
Figure 78: Possible terminal block types
2.3 REPAIRING THE DEVICE

If your product should develop a fault while in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the watchdog
contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. In the case of a fault, either the complete unit or
just the faulty PCB, identified by the in-built diagnostic software, should be replaced.
Replacement of printed circuit boards and other internal components must be undertaken by approved Service
Centres. Failure to obtain the authorization of after-sales engineers prior to commencing work may invalidate the
product warranty.
We recommend that you entrust any repairs to Automation Support teams, which are available world-wide.
2.4 REMOVING THE FRONT PANEL
Warning:
Before removing the front panel to replace a PCB, you must first remove the auxiliary
power supply and wait 5 seconds for the internal capacitors to discharge. You should
also isolate voltage and current transformer connections and trip circuit.
258 P345-AD-EN-1
Caution:
Before removing the front panel, you should be familiar with the contents of the Safety
Information section of this guide or the Safety Guide SFTY/4LM, as well as the ratings
on the equipment’s rating label.
To remove the front panel:

1. Open the top and bottom access covers. You must open the hinged access covers by more than 90° before
they can be removed.
2. If fitted, remove the transparent secondary front cover.
3. Apply outward pressure to the middle of the access covers to bow them and disengage the hinge lug, so the
access cover can be removed. The screws that fasten the front panel to the case are now accessible.
4. Undo and remove the screws. The 40TE case has four cross-head screws fastening the front panel to the
case, one in each corner, in recessed holes. The 60TE/80TE cases have an additional two screws, one
midway along each of the top and bottom edges of the front plate.
5. When the screws have been removed, pull the complete front panel forward to separate it from the metal
case. The front panel is connected to the rest of the circuitry by a 64-way ribbon cable.
6. The ribbon cable is fastened to the front panel using an IDC connector; a socket on the cable and a plug
with locking latches on the front panel. Gently push the two locking latches outwards which eject the
connector socket slightly. Remove the socket from the plug to disconnect the front panel.
Caution:
Do not remove the screws with the larger diameter heads which are accessible when
the access covers are fitted and open. These screws hold the relay in its mounting
(panel or cubicle).
Caution:
The internal circuitry is now exposed and is not protected against electrostatic
discharge and dust ingress. Therefore ESD precautions and clean working conditions
must be maintained at all times.
2.5 REPLACING PCBS

1. To replace any of the PCBs, first remove the front panel.
2. Once the front panel has been removed, the PCBs are accessible. The numbers above the case outline
identify the guide slot reference for each printed circuit board. Each printed circuit board has a label stating
the corresponding guide slot number to ensure correct relocation after removal. To serve as a reminder of
the slot numbering there is a label on the rear of the front panel metallic screen.
3. Remove the 64-way ribbon cable from the PCB that needs replacing
4. Remove the PCB in accordance with the board-specific instructions detailed later in this section.
Note:
To ensure compatibility, always replace a faulty PCB with one of an identical part number.
2.5.1 REPLACING THE MAIN PROCESSOR BOARD

The main processor board is situated in the front panel. This board contains application-specific settings in its non-
volatile memory. You may wish to take a backup copy of these settings. This could save time in the re-
commissioning process.
P345-AD-EN-1 259
To replace the main processor board:

1. Remove front panel.
2. Place the front panel with the user interface face down and remove the six screws from the metallic screen,
as shown in the figure below. Remove the metal plate.
3. Remove the screws that hold the main processor board in position.
4. Carefully disconnect the ribbon cable. Take care as this could easily be damaged by excessive twisting.
5. Replace the main processor board
6. Reassemble the front panel using the reverse procedure. Make sure the ribbon cable is reconnected to the
main processor board and that all eight screws are refitted.
7. Refit the front panel.
8. Refit and close the access covers then press the hinge assistance T-pieces so they click back into the front
panel moulding.
9. Once the unit has been reassembled, carry out the standard commissioning procedure as defined in the
Commissioning chapter.
Note:
After replacing the main processor board, all the settings required for the application need to be re-entered. This may be done
either manually or by downloading a settings file.
V01601
Figure 79: Front panel assembly
2.5.2 REPLACEMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS BOARDS

Most products will have at least one communications board of some sort fitted. There are several different boards
available offering various functionality, depending on the application. Some products may even be fitted with two
boards of different types.
To replace a faulty communications board:
2. Disconnect all connections at the rear.
3. The board is secured in the relay case by two screws, one at the top and another at the bottom. Remove
these screws carefully as they are not captive in the rear panel.
4. Gently pull the communications board forward and out of the case.
5. Before fitting the replacement PCB check that the number on the round label next to the front edge of the
PCB matches the slot number into which it will be fitted. If the slot number is missing or incorrect, write the
correct slot number on the label.
260 P345-AD-EN-1
6. Fit the replacement PCB carefully into the correct slot. Make sure it is pushed fully back and that the
securing screws are refitted.
7. Reconnect all connections at the rear.
panel moulding.
10. Once the unit has been reassembled, commission it according to the Commissioning chapter.
2.5.3 REPLACEMENT OF THE INPUT MODULE

Depending on the product, the input module consists of two or three boards fastened together and is contained
within a metal housing. One board contains the transformers and one contains the analogue to digital conversion
and processing electronics. Some devices have an additional auxiliary transformer contained on a third board.
To replace an input module:
2. The module is secured in the case by two screws on its right-hand side, accessible from the front, as shown
below. Move these screws carefully as they are not captive in the front plate of the module.
3. On the right-hand side of the module there is a small metal tab which brings out a handle (on some
modules there is also a tab on the left). Grasp the handle(s) and pull the module firmly forward, away from
the rear terminal blocks. A reasonable amount of force is needed due to the friction between the contacts of
the terminal blocks.
4. Remove the module from the case. The module may be heavy, because it contains the input voltage and
current transformers.
5. Slot in the replacement module and push it fully back onto the rear terminal blocks. To check that the
module is fully inserted, make sure the v-shaped cut-out in the bottom plate of the case is fully visible.
6. Refit the securing screws.
panel moulding.
Caution:
With non-mounted IEDs, the case needs to be held firmly while the module is
withdrawn. Withdraw the input module with care as it suddenly comes loose once the
friction of the terminal blocks is overcome.
Note:
If individual boards within the input module are replaced, recalibration will be necessary. We therefore recommend
replacement of the complete module to avoid on-site recalibration.
2.5.4 REPLACEMENT OF THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD
Caution:
Before removing the front panel, you should be familiar with the contents of the Safety
Information section of this guide or the Safety Guide SFTY/4LM, as well as the ratings
on the equipment’s rating label.
P345-AD-EN-1 261
The power supply board is fastened to an output relay board with push fit nylon pillars. This doubled-up board is
secured on the extreme left hand side, looking from the front of the unit.
2. Pull the power supply module forward, away from the rear terminal blocks and out of the case. A
reasonable amount of force is needed due to the friction between the contacts of the terminal blocks.
3. Separate the boards by pulling them apart carefully. The power supply board is the one with two large
electrolytic capacitors.
4. Before reassembling the module, check that the number on the round label next to the front edge of the
PCB matches the slot number into which it will be fitted. If the slot number is missing or incorrect, write the
correct slot number on the label
5. Reassemble the module with a replacement PCB. Push the inter-board connectors firmly together. Fit the
four push fit nylon pillars securely in their respective holes in each PCB.
6. Slot the power supply module back into the housing. Push it fully back onto the rear terminal blocks.
panel moulding.
2.5.5 REPLACEMENT OF THE I/O BOARDS

There are several different types of I/O boards, which can be used, depending on the product and application.
Some boards have opto-inputs, some have relay outputs and others have a mixture of both.
2. Gently pull the board forward and out of the case
3. If replacing the I/O board, make sure the setting of the link above IDC connector on the replacement board
is the same as the one being replaced.
4. Before fitting the replacement board check the number on the round label next to the front edge of the
board matches the slot number into which it will be fitted. If the slot number is missing or incorrect, write
the correct slot number on the label.
5. Carefully slide the replacement board into the appropriate slot, ensuring that it is pushed fully back onto the
rear terminal blocks.
7. Refit and close the access covers then press at the hinge assistance T-pieces so they click back into the
front panel moulding.
2.6 RECALIBRATION
Recalibration is not needed when a PCB is replaced, unless it is one of the boards in the input module. If any of the
boards in the input module is replaced, the unit must be recalibrated.
Although recalibration is needed when a board inside the input module is replaced, it is not needed if the input
module is replaced in its entirety.
Although it is possible to carry out recalibration on site, this requires special test equipment and software. We
therefore recommend that the work be carried out by the manufacturer, or entrusted to an approved service
centre.
2.7 SUPERCAPACITOR DISCHARGED

The supercapacitor maintains charge for two weeks with the IED de-energised. When first energising the IED after
this time there may be a Battery Alarm due to the supercapacitor voltage dropping below a pre-defined threshold.
262 P345-AD-EN-1
The battery alarm will clear after approximately 30 minutes of IED being energised, and once cleared there will be
enough charge in the supercapacitor to backup status data.
Note:
Events, disturbance and maintenance records will be lost if the supercapacitor is fully discharged.
2.8 CLEANING
Warning:
Before cleaning the device, ensure that all AC and DC supplies and transformer
connections are isolated, to prevent any chance of an electric shock while cleaning.
Only clean the equipment with a lint-free cloth dampened with clean water. Do not use detergents, solvents or
abrasive cleaners as they may damage the product's surfaces and leave a conductive residue.
P345-AD-EN-1 263
3 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE

The device includes several self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its hardware and software while in
service. If there is a problem with the hardware or software, it should be able to detect and report the problem, and
attempt to resolve the problem by performing a reboot. In this case, the device would be out of service for a short
time, during which the ‘Healthy’ LED on the front of the device is switched OFF and the watchdog contact at the
rear is ON. If the restart fails to resolve the problem, the unit takes itself permanently out of service; the ‘Healthy’
LED stays OFF and watchdog contact stays ON.
If a problem is detected by the self-monitoring functions, the device attempts to store a maintenance record to
allow the nature of the problem to be communicated to the user.
The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic check which is performed on boot-
up, and secondly a continuous self-checking operation, which checks the operation of the critical functions whilst
it is in service.
3.2 POWER-UP ERRORS

If the IED does not appear to power up, use the following to determine whether the fault is in the external wiring,
auxiliary fuse, IED power supply module or IED front panel.
Test Check Action
Measure the auxiliary voltage on terminals 1 and 2.
Verify the voltage level and polarity against the rating If the auxiliary voltage is correct, go to test 2. Otherwise check the wiring
1
label on the front. and fuses in the auxiliary supply.
Terminal 1 is –dc, 2 is +dc
If the LEDs and LCD backlight switch on, or the contact closes and no error
Check the LEDs and LCD backlight switch on at code is displayed, the error is probably on the main processor board in the
2 power-up. Also check the N/O (normally open) front panel.
watchdog contact for closing. If the LEDs and LCD backlight do not switch on and the contact does not
close, go to test 3.
If there is no field voltage, the fault is probably in the IED power supply
3 Check the output (nominally 48 V DC)
module.
3.3 ERROR MESSAGE OR CODE ON POWER-UP

The IED performs a self-test during power-up. If it detects an error, a message appears on the LCD and the power-
up sequence stops. If the error occurs when the IED application software is running, a maintenance record is
created and the device reboots.
Test Check Action
If the IED locks up and displays an error code permanently, go to test 2.
Is an error message or code permanently displayed
1 If the IED prompts for user input, go to test 4.
during power up?
If the IED reboots automatically, go to test 5.
Record whether the same error code is displayed when the IED is
Record displayed error, and then remove and re-apply rebooted. If no error code is displayed, contact the local service centre
2
IED auxiliary supply. stating the error code and IED information. If the same code is
displayed, go to test 3.
264 P345-AD-EN-1
Test Check Action

Error Code Identification
The following text messages (in English) are displayed if a
These messages indicate that a problem has been detected on the IED’s
fundamental problem is detected, preventing the system
main processor board in the front panel.
from booting:
Bus Fail – address lines
3 SRAM Fail – data lines
FLASH Fail format error
FLASH Fail checksum
Code Verify Fail
The following hex error codes relate to errors detected in
specific IED modules:
3.1 0c140005/0c0d0000 Input Module (including opto-isolated inputs)
3.2 0c140006/0c0e0000 Output IED Cards
Other error codes relate to hardware or software problems on the main
3.3 The last four digits provide details on the actual error. processor board. Contact General Electric with details of the problem
for a full analysis.
The IED displays a message for corrupt settings and The power-up tests have detected corrupted IED settings. Restore the
4 prompts for the default values to be restored for the default settings to allow the power-up to complete, and then reapply
affected settings. the application-specific settings.
Error 0x0E080000, programmable scheme logic error due to excessive
execution time. If the IED powers up successfully, check the
The IED resets when the power-up is complete. A record
5 programmable logic for feedback paths.
error code is displayed
Other error codes relate to software errors on the main processor
board.
3.4 OUT OF SERVICE LED ON AT POWER-UP
Test Check Action

Using the IED menu, confirm the Commission Test or Test If the setting is Enabled, disable the test mode and make sure the Out of
1
Mode setting is Enabled. If it is not Enabled, go to test 2. Service LED is OFF.
Check for the H/W Verify Fail maintenance record. This indicates a
discrepancy between the IED model number and the hardware. Examine
Select the VIEW RECORDS column then view the last
2 the Maint Data; cell. This indicates the causes of the failure using bit
maintenance record from the menu.
fields:
Bit Meaning
The application type field in the model number does not
0
match the software ID
The application field in the model number does not match
1
the software ID
The variant 1 field in the model number does not match the
2
software ID
The variant 2 field in the model number does not match the
3
software ID
The protocol field in the model number does not match the
4
software ID
The language field in the model number does not match the
5
software ID
The VT type field in the model number is incorrect (110 V VTs
6
fitted)
The VT type field in the model number is incorrect (440 V VTs
7
fitted)
P345-AD-EN-1 265
Test Check Action

The VT type field in the model number is incorrect (no VTs
8
fitted)
3.5 ERROR CODE DURING OPERATION

The IED performs continuous self-checking. If the IED detects an error it displays an error message, logs a
maintenance record and after a short delay resets itself. A permanent problem (for example due to a hardware
fault) is usually detected in the power-up sequence. In this case the IED displays an error code and halts. If the
problem was transient, the IED reboots correctly and continues operation. By examining the maintenance record
logged, the nature of the detected fault can be determined.
3.6 MAL-OPERATION DURING TESTING
3.6.1 FAILURE OF OUTPUT CONTACTS

An apparent failure of the relay output contacts can be caused by the configuration. Perform the following tests to
identify the real cause of the failure. The self-tests verify that the coils of the output relay contacts have been
energized. An error is displayed if there is a fault in the output relay board.
Test Check Action
If this LED is ON, the relay may be in test mode or the protection has
1 Is the Out of Service LED ON?
been disabled due to a hardware verify error.
Examine the Contact status in the Commissioning If the relevant bits of the contact status are operated, go to test 4; if not,
2
section of the menu. go to test 3.
If the protection element does not operate, check the test is correctly
Examine the fault record or use the test port to check the applied.
3
protection element is operating correctly. If the protection element operates, check the programmable logic to
make sure the protection element is correctly mapped to the contacts.
Using the Commissioning or Test mode function, apply a If the output relay operates, the problem must be in the external wiring
test pattern to the relevant relay output contacts. to the relay. If the output relay does not operate the output relay
4 Consult the correct external connection diagram and use contacts may have failed (the self-tests verify that the relay coil is being
a continuity tester at the rear of the relay to check the energized). Ensure the closed resistance is not too high for the continuity
relay output contacts operate. tester to detect.
3.6.2 FAILURE OF OPTO-INPUTS

The opto-isolated inputs are mapped onto the IED's internal DDB signals using the programmable scheme logic. If
an input is not recognised by the scheme logic, use the Opto I/P Status cell in the COMMISSION TESTS column to
check whether the problem is in the opto-input itself, or the mapping of its signal to the scheme logic functions.
If the device does not correctly read the opto-input state, test the applied signal. Verify the connections to the
opto-input using the wiring diagram and the nominal voltage settings in the OPTO CONFIG column. To do this:
1. Select the nominal voltage for all opto-inputs by selecting one of the five standard ratings in the Global
Nominal V cell.
2. Select Custom to set each opto-input individually to a nominal voltage.
3. Using a voltmeter, check that the voltage on its input terminals is greater than the minimum pick-up level
(See the Technical Specifications chapter for opto pick-up levels).
If the signal is correctly applied, this indicates failure of an opto-input, which may be situated on standalone opto-
input board, or on an opto-input board that is part of the input module. Separate opto-input boards can simply be
replaced. If, however, the faulty opto-input board is part of the input module, the complete input module should be
replaced. This is because the analogue input module cannot be individually replaced without dismantling the
module and recalibration of the IED.
266 P345-AD-EN-1
3.6.3 INCORRECT ANALOGUE SIGNALS

If the measured analogue quantities do not seem correct, use the measurement function to determine the type of
problem. The measurements can be configured in primary or secondary terms.
1. Compare the displayed measured values with the actual magnitudes at the terminals.
2. Check the correct terminals are used.
3. Check the CT and VT ratios set are correct.
4. Check the phase displacement to confirm the inputs are correctly connected.
3.7 PSL EDITOR TROUBLESHOOTING

A failure to open a connection could be due to one or more of the following:
● The IED address is not valid (this address is always 1 for the front port)
● Password in not valid
● Communication set-up (COM port, Baud rate, or Framing) is not correct
● Transaction values are not suitable for the IED or the type of connection
● The connection cable is not wired correctly or broken
● The option switches on any protocol converter used may be incorrectly set
3.7.1 DIAGRAM RECONSTRUCTION

Although a scheme can be extracted from an IED, a facility is provided to recover a scheme if the original file is
unobtainable.
A recovered scheme is logically correct but much of the original graphical information is lost. Many signals are
drawn in a vertical line down the left side of the canvas. Links are drawn orthogonally using the shortest path from
A to B. Any annotation added to the original diagram such as titles and notes are lost.
Sometimes a gate type does not appear as expected. For example, a single-input AND gate in the original scheme
appears as an OR gate when uploaded. Programmable gates with an inputs-to-trigger value of 1 also appear as
OR gates
3.7.2 PSL VERSION CHECK

The PSL is saved with a version reference, time stamp and CRC check (Cyclic Redundancy Check). This gives a
visual check whether the default PSL is in place or whether a new application has been downloaded.
P345-AD-EN-1 267
4 REPAIR AND MODIFICATION PROCEDURE

Please follow these steps to return an Automation product to us:
1. Get the Repair and Modification Return Authorization (RMA) form
An electronic version of the RMA form is available from the following:
[email protected]
2. Fill in the RMA form
Fill in only the white part of the form.
Please ensure that all fields marked (M) are completed such as:
○ Equipment model
○ Model No. and Serial No.
○ Description of failure or modification required (please be specific)
○ Value for customs (in case the product requires export)
○ Delivery and invoice addresses
○ Contact details
3. Send the RMA form to your local contact
For a list of local service contacts worldwide, email us at:
[email protected]
4. The local service contact provides the shipping information
Your local service contact provides you with all the information needed to ship the product:
○ Pricing details
○ RMA number
○ Repair centre address
If required, an acceptance of the quote must be delivered before going to the next stage.
5. Send the product to the repair centre
○ Address the shipment to the repair centre specified by your local contact
○ Make sure all items are packaged in an anti-static bag and foam protection
○ Make sure a copy of the import invoice is attached with the returned unit
○ Make sure a copy of the RMA form is attached with the returned unit
○ E-mail or fax a copy of the import invoice and airway bill document to your local contact.
268 P345-AD-EN-1
CHAPTER 12
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 12 - Technical Specifications P345
270 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Chapter 12 - Technical Specifications
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the technical specifications of the product.
Interfaces 272
Performance of Generator Differential Protection and Monitoring Functions 275
Performance of Current Protection Functions 279
Performance of Voltage Protection Functions 281
Performance of Frequency Protection Functions 282
Power Protection Functions 284
Performance of Monitoring and Control Functions 286
Measurements and Recording 287
Regulatory Compliance 289
Mechanical Specifications 290
Ratings 291
Power Supply 292
Input / Output Connections 294
Environmental Conditions 296
Type Tests 297
Electromagnetic Compatibility 298
P345-AD-EN-1 271
2 INTERFACES
2.1 FRONT USB PORT
Front USB port

Use For local connection to laptop for configuration purposes and firmware downloads
Connector USB type B
Isolation Isolation to ELV level
Constraints Maximum cable length 5 m
2.2 REAR SERIAL PORT 1
Rear serial port 1 (RP1)

Use For SCADA communications (multi-drop)
Standard EIA(RS)485, K-bus
Connector General purpose block, M4 screws (2 wire)
Cable Screened twisted pair (STP)
Supported Protocols * Courier, IEC-60870-5-103, DNP3.0, MODBUS
Isolation Isolation to SELV level
* Not all models support all protocols - see ordering options
2.3 FIBRE REAR SERIAL PORT 1
Optional fibre rear serial port (RP1)

Main Use Serial SCADA communications over fibre
Connector IEC 874-10 BFOC 2.5 –(ST®) (1 each for Tx and Rx)
Fibre type Multimode 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm
Supported Protocols Courier, IEC870-5-103, DNP 3.0, MODBUS
Wavelength 850 nm
2.4 REAR SERIAL PORT 2
Optional rear serial port (RP2)

Use For SCADA communications (multi-drop)
Standard EIA(RS)485, K-bus, EIA(RS)232
Designation SK4
Connector 9 pin D-type female connector
Cable Screened twisted pair (STP)
Supported Protocols Courier
Constraints Maximum cable length 1000 m for RS485 and K-bus, 15 m for RS232
272 P345-AD-EN-1
2.5 IRIG-B (DEMODULATED)
IRIG-B Interface (Demodulated)

Use External clock synchronisation signal
Standard IRIG 200-98 format B00X
Connector BNC
Cable type 50 ohm coaxial
Input signal TTL level
Input impedance 10 k ohm at dc
Accuracy +/- 1 ms
2.6 IRIG-B (MODULATED)
IRIG-B Interface (Modulated)

Use External clock synchronisation signal
Standard IRIG 200-98 format B12X
Connector BNC
Cable type 50 ohm coaxial
Input signal peak to peak, 200 mV to 20 mV
Input impedance 6 k ohm at 1000 Hz
Accuracy +/- 1 ms
2.7 REAR ETHERNET PORT COPPER
Rear Ethernet port using CAT 5/6/7 wiring

Main Use Substation Ethernet communications
Standard IEEE 802.3 10BaseT/100BaseTX
Connector RJ45
Cable type Screened twisted pair (STP)
Isolation 1.5 kV
Supported Protocols IEC 61850
2.8 REAR ETHERNET PORT FIBRE
Rear Ethernet port using fibre-optic cabling

Main Use Substation Ethernet communications
Connector IEC 874-10 BFOC 2.5 –(ST®) (1 each for Tx and Rx)
Standard IEEE 802.3 100 BaseFX
Fibre type Multimode 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm
Supported Protocols IEC 61850
P345-AD-EN-1 273
Rear Ethernet port using fibre-optic cabling

PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol)
HSR (High-availability Seamless Redundancy)
Optional Redundancy Protocols Supported
RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
Failover
Wavelength 1300 nm
2.8.1 100 BASE FX RECEIVER CHARACTERISTICS
Parameter Sym Min. Typ. Max. Unit

Input Optical Power Minimum at
PIN Min. (W) -33.5 –31 dBm avg.
Window Edge
Input Optical Power Minimum at
PIN Min. (C) -34.5 -31.8 Bm avg.
Eye Center
Input Optical Power Maximum PIN Max. -14 -11.8 dBm avg.
Conditions: TA = 0°C to 70°C
2.8.2 100 BASE FX TRANSMITTER CHARACTERISTICS
Parameter Sym Min. Typ. Max. Unit

Output Optical Power BOL 62.5/125 µm -19
PO -16.8 -14 dBm avg.
NA = 0.275 Fibre EOL -20
Output Optical Power BOL 50/125 µm -22.5
PO -20.3 -14 dBm avg.
NA = 0.20 Fibre EOL -23.5
10 %
Optical Extinction Ratio
-10 dB
Output Optical Power at Logic "0" State PO -45 dBm avg.
Conditions: TA = 0°C to 70°C
274 P345-AD-EN-1
3 PERFORMANCE OF GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND

MONITORING FUNCTIONS
3.1 GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
Accuracy
Pick-up Formula +/-5%
Drop-off 0.95 x setting +/-5%
Operating time < 30 ms (currents applied at 4x pickup level or higher)
Repeatability < 7.5%
Disengagement time < 40 ms
3.2 TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
Accuracy
Low set pick-up Formula +/-5%
Low set drop-off 0.95 x formula +/- 5%
Low set pick-up and drop-off repeatability < 1%
High set pick-up and drop-off repeatability < 2%
Low set operate time < 33 ms (currents applied at 3x pickup level or higher)
High set operate time < 25 ms
+/-2% or 33 ms, whichever is greater (currents applied at 3x pickup
Low set DT operate time
level or higher
Low set operate time repeatability < 2 ms
High set operate time repeatability < 2 ms
Low set disengagement time < 40 ms
High set reset time < 40 ms
2nd harmonic blocking pick-up Setting +/-5%
2nd harmonic blocking drop-off 0.95 x setting +/-5%
2nd harmonic Pick-up and drop-off repeatability < 2%
5th harmonic blocking pick-up Setting +/-5%
5th harmonic blocking drop-off 0.95 x setting +/-5%
5th harmonic Pick-up and drop-off repeatability < 2%
3.3 CIRCUITRY FAULT ALARM

Drop-off 0.95 x formula +/-5%
Pick-up and drop-off repeatability < 1%
Instantaneous operating time < 33 ms (currents applied at 3x pickup level)
+/-2% or 33 ms, whichever is greater (currents applied at 3x pickup
DT Operate
level or higher)
P345-AD-EN-1 275
Operate time repeatability < 3 ms

3.4 THROUGH FAULT MONITORING
Overcurrent pick-up Setting +/-5%

Overcurrent drop-off 0.95 x setting +/-5%
Heating pickup (I2t) Setting +/-2% or 5 A2s, whichever greater
Pick-up repeatability < 5%
Operating time repeatability < 50 ms
3.5 THERMAL OVERLOAD
Accuracy
Setting accuracy +/-5%
Reset 95% of thermal setting +/-5%
Thermal alarm pick-up +/-5% (calculated time)
Thermal overload pick-up +/-5% (calculated time)
Cooling time accuracy +/-5%
3.6 TRANSFORMER THERMAL
Accuracy
+/-5% (Expected pick-up time is the time required to reach the
Hotspot> pick-up
temperature setting)
Hotspot> DT +/-5% or 200 ms, whichever greater
+/-5% (Expected pick-up time is the time required to reach the
Top Oil> pick-up
temperature setting)
Top Oil> DT +/-5% or 200 ms, whichever greater
Pick-up repeatability < 2.5%
Time repeatability < 20 ms
3.7 LOSS OF LIFE
Accuracy
FAA> pick-up Formula +/-5%
Loss of Life> pick-up Expected pick-up current +/-5%
FAA> DT +/-5% or 200 ms, whichever greater
276 P345-AD-EN-1
3.8 FIELD FAILURE
Accuracy
+/-5% or 0.5 Ω of Mho shape (Xb1<=10 & |Xa1|/Xb1<=16) or
Mho characteristic pick-up
+/-5% or 0.5 Ω of Mho shape (Xb1>10 & |Xa1|/Xb1<=8)
105% x pick-up +/-5% or 0.5 Ω of Mho shape (Xb1 <=10 & |Xa1|/
Xb1<=16) or
Mho characteristic drop-off
105% x pick-up +/-5% or 0.5 Ω of Mho shape (Xb1 >10
& |Xa1|/Xb1<=8)
Setting angle +/-1°(offset = 0 Ω & VA>=20 V) or
Directional line pick-up
+/-5% x pick-up shape (offset =0 Ω)
Setting angle +/-1°(offset = 0 Ω & VA>=20 V) or
Directional line drop-off
+/-5% x drop-off shape (offset =0 Ω)
Alarm linear characteristic line pick-up +/-10%
Alarm linear characteristic drop-off 105% x setting +/-10%
Operating time +/-2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
3.9 NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE THERMAL
Accuracy
Drop-off 0.95 x pick-up +/-5%
Repeatability < 5%
3.10 VOLT/HZ
Accuracy
Pick-up Setting +/-2%
Drop-off 98% or pick up +/-2%
Repeatability (operating threshold) < 1%
IDMT operating time < +/-5% or 60 ms, whichever is greater
Definite time +/-2% or 30 ms, whichever is greater
Repeatability (operating times) < 10 ms
V/HZ measurement +/-1%
3.11 UNINTENTIONAL ENERGIZATION AT STANDSTILL (DEAD MACHINE)
Accuracy
I> pick-up Setting +/-5%
V< pick-up Setting +/-5%
I> drop-off 95% x setting +/-5%
P345-AD-EN-1 277
Accuracy
V< drop-off 105% x setting +/-5%
Repeatability +/-2.5% or 10 ms, whichever is greater
3.12 RESISTIVE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS
Accuracy
Pick-up Setting +/-1°C
Drop-off Setting -1°C
Operating time +/-2% or < 3 s
3.13 POLE SIPPING
Lens characteristic pick-up Setting +/-5%

Blinder pick-up +/-1°
Reactance line pick-up +/-5%
Lens DO characteristic lens angle Adjusted by -5°, (ZA+ZB) +5%
Lens DO drop-off +/-5%
Blinder DO characteristic Blinder displaced by (ZA+ZB)/2 x tan 87.5°
Blinder DO drop-off +/-1°
T1, T2 and reset timer +/-2% or 10 ms, whichever is greater
3.14 LOW IMPEDANCE RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT
Pick-up Setting formula +/-5%

Drop-off 0.9 x formula +/-5%
Operate time < 50 ms
3.15 HIGH IMPEDANCE RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT

Operate time < 30 ms
278 P345-AD-EN-1
4 PERFORMANCE OF CURRENT PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
4.1 TRANSIENT OVERREACH AND OVERSHOOT
Accuracy
Additional tolerance due to increasing X/R ratios +/-5% over the X/R ratio of 1 to 90
Overshoot of overcurrent elements < 40 ms
Disengagement time < 30 ms (65 ms SEF)
4.2 VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
Accuracy
VCO threshold pick-up Setting +/-5%
Overcurrent pick-up Formula +/-5%
VCO threshold drop-off 1.05 x setting +/-5%
Overcurrent drop-off 0.95 x formula +/-5%
Operating time < 50 ms
Operation (IDMT) +/- 5% or 40 ms, whichever is greater
DT operate +/- 5% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
tReset +/- 5% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
4.3 NON DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT
2-Stage Accuracy
Drop-off 0.95 x setting +/-5%
IDMT trip level elements 1.05 x setting +/-5%
IDMT characteristic shape +/-5% or 40 ms, whichever is greater
IEEE reset +/-5% or 40 ms, whichever is greater
DT operation +/-2% or 60 ms, whichever is greater
DT reset +/-5%
Repeatability 2.5%
4.4 ROTOR EARTH FAULT
Accuracy
Setting +/- 10% (1 k to 5 kΩ)
Pick-up
Setting +/- 5% (5 k to 80 kΩ)
1.05 x setting formula +/-10% (1 k to 5 kΩ)
Drop-off
1.02 x setting formula +/-5% (5 k to 80 kΩ)
Repeatability < 1%
DT operation for double-ended
+/-2% or 2.5/fs, whichever is greater
connection
P345-AD-EN-1 279
Accuracy
Disengagement time < 2.5/fs
DT operation for single ended Field voltage 0 to 600 V DC
connection +/-2% or 2.5/fs, whichever is greater
< 2.5 f/s
Disengagement time Field voltage 601 to 1200 V DC
+/- 2% or 3.5/fs, whichever is greater
Disengagement time < 3.5f/s
Note:
fs = injection frequency, 0.25/0.5/1 HZ
4.5 100% STATOR EARTH FAULT (3RD HARMONIC)
Accuracy
VN3H</VN3H> pick-up Setting +/-5%
V/P/Q/S<Inh Setting +/-0.5%
VN3H< drop-off 105% x pick-up +/-5%
VN3H< drop-off 95% x pick-up +/-5%
V/P/Q/S<Inh drop-off 95% x pick-up +/-0.5%
Operating time +/-0.5% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
Disengagement/reset time < 50 ms
4.6 100% STATOR EARTH FAULT (LOW FREQUENCY INJECTION)
Accuracy
Setting +/-5%
R<1/R<2 pick-up
(for R ≤ 300 Ω), ±7.5% (for R> 300 Ω) or 2 Ω whichever is greater
I>1/V<1/I<1 pick-up Setting +/- 5%
105% x setting +/- 5%
R<1/R<2 drop-off
(for R ≤ 300 Ω), ±7.5% (for R> 300 Ω)
V<1/I<1 drop-off 105% x setting +/-5%
I>1 drop-off 95% x setting +/-5%
Repeatability < 1%
R<1/R<2/I>1/V<1/I<1 operating time without
+/-2% 220 ms, whichever is greater
bandpass filter
R<1/R<2/I>1/V<1/I<1 disengagement time < 120 ms
Repeatability < 100 ms
R<1/R<2/I>1/V<1/I<1 operating time with bandpass filter +/-2% or 1.3 s, whichever is greater
R<1/R<2/I>1/V<1/I<1 disengagement time < 700 ms
280 P345-AD-EN-1
5 PERFORMANCE OF VOLTAGE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
5.1 UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION
Pick-up (IDMT and DT) Setting +/-5%

Drop-off (IDMT and DT) 1.02 x Setting +/-5%
Operate (IDMT and DT) +/-2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
Reset < 75 ms
Repeatability < 1%
5.2 OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

Operate (IDMT and DT) +/-2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
Reset < 75 ms
Repeatability < 1%
5.3 RESIDUAL OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

IDMT operate +/-5%, 55 ms or 1 cycle, whichever is greater
DT operate +/-2%, 55 ms or 1 cycle, whichever is greater
DT reset +/-5% or 35 ms, whichever is greater
5.4 NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

Drop-off 0.95 x Setting +/-5%
DT operate +/-2% or 65 ms, whichever is greater
Operating time instant < 60 ms
Operating time accelerated < 45 ms
Operating threshold repeatability < 1%
P345-AD-EN-1 281
6 PERFORMANCE OF FREQUENCY PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
6.1 OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION
Pick-up Setting +/-10 mHz

Drop-off Setting -25 mHz +/-10 mHz
+/-2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater (excluding frequency
DT operate
tracking time delay)
6.2 UNDERFREQUENCY PROTECTION

Drop-off Setting +25 mHz +/-10 mHz
+/- 2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater (excluding frequency
DT Operate
tracking time delay)
6.3 RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY PROTECTION (DV/DT)
Accuracy
Setting +/-5 mHz or +/-15%, whichever is greater
Fixed window pick-up
(df/dt < 1.5 Hz/s)
Repeatability <5%
Accuracy
Setting +/-10 mHz or +/-10%, whichever is greater
Rolling window pick-up
(df/dt < 1.5 Hz/s)
Repeatability <5%
High and Low Freq

Pick-up Setting +/-2% or +/-80 mHz, whichever is greater
Delay Time
Fixed window dead time Setting +/-2% or +/- (100+20*X*Y) ms
Rolling window dead time Setting +/-2% or +/- (150+20*X*Y) ms
Note:
X = average cycles, Y = Iterations
282 P345-AD-EN-1
6.4 GENERATOR ABNORMAL FREQUENCY
Accuracy
Lower threshold drop-off Setting -25 mHz +/-10 mHz
Upper threshold drop-off Setting +25 mHz +/-10 mHz
Accumulation time +/-2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
Dead time +/-2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
P345-AD-EN-1 283
7 POWER PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
7.1 THREE-PHASE POWER PROTECTION
Accuracy
Over active pick-up Setting +/-5% (Angle <=80° & Setting >=0.6 W)
Over active drop-off 95% x Setting +/-5% (Angle <=80° & Setting >=0.6W)
Accuracy
Over reactive pick-up Setting +/-5% (Angle >= 10°)
Over reactive drop-off 95% x Setting +/-5% (Angle >= 10°)
Accuracy
Setting +/-10% (60°<Angle <=80°) or
Under active pick-up
Setting +/-5% (Angle <=60°)
105% x Setting +/-10% (60°<Angle <=80°) or
Under active drop-off
105% x Setting +/-5% (Angle <=60°)
Accuracy
Setting +/-10% (10°<Angle <=15°) or
Under reactive pick-up
Setting +/-5% (Angle >=15°)
105% x Setting +/-10% (10°<Angle <=15°) or
Under reactive drop-off
105% x Setting +/-5% (Angle >=15°)
tReset +/-5%
Instantaneous operating time < 50 ms
7.2 NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE OVERPOWER
Accuracy
Drop-off 0.95 x Setting +/-5%
7.3 SENSITIVE POWER
Accuracy (1 Phase)
Over active pick-up Setting +/-5% (Angle <=75°)
Over reactive pick-up Setting +/-5% (Angle >=10°)
Setting +/-10% (Angle 75°, Setting < 10 W) or
Under active pick-up
Setting +/-5% (Angle 75°, Setting < 10 W)
284 P345-AD-EN-1
Accuracy (1 Phase)
Under reactive pick-up Setting +/-5% (Angle >=15°)
Over active drop-off 95% x Setting +/-5% (Angle <=75°)
Over reactive drop-off 95% x Setting +/-5% (Angle >=10°)
105% x Setting +/-10% (Angle <=75°, Setting < 10 W) or
Under active drop-off
105% x Setting +/-5% (Angle <=75°, Setting < 10 W)
Under reactive drop-off 105% x Setting +/-5% (Angle >=15°)
Accuracy (2 Phase)
Over active pick-up Setting +/-5% (Angle <=80°)
Over reactive pick-up Setting +/-5% (Angle >=10°)
Under active pick-up Setting +/-5% (Angle <= 80°)
Under reactive pick-up Setting +/-5% (Angle >=10°)
Over active drop-off 95% x Setting +/-5% (Angle <=80°)
Over reactive drop-off 95% x Setting +/-5% (Angle >=10°)
Under active drop-off 105% x Setting +/-5% (Angle <=80°)
Under reactive drop-off 105% x Setting +/-5% (Angle >=10°)
Under reactive operating time Setting +/-2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
Under reactive disengagement time < 50 ms
Under reactive tRESET +/-5%
Under reactive instantaneous operating
< 50 ms
time
P345-AD-EN-1 285
8 PERFORMANCE OF MONITORING AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS
8.1 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION
Fast block operation < 25 ms

Fast block reset < 30 ms
Time delay Setting +/-2% or 20 ms, whichever is greater
8.2 STANDARD CURRENT TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION
IN> Pick-up Setting +/- 5%

VN< Pick-up Setting +/- 5%
IN> Drop-off 0.9 x setting +/- 5%
VN< Drop-off 1.05 x setting +/-5% or 1 V, whichever is greater
Time delay operation Setting +/-2% or 20 ms, whichever is greater
CTS block operation < 1 cycle
CTS reset < 35 ms
8.3 DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION
CTS I1 pick-up ratio Setting +/-5%

CTS I2/I1>1 pick-up ratio 0.95 x Setting +/-5%
CTS I2/I1>2 pick-up ratio Setting +/-5%
CTS I1 drop-off ratio 0.95 x Setting +/-5%
CTS I2/I1>1 drop-off ratio Setting +/-5%
CTS I2/I1>2 drop-off ratio 0.95 x Setting +/-5%
Time delay operation Setting +/-2% or 33 ms, whichever is greater
CTS terminal block operation < 33 ms
CTS differential block operation < 33 ms
CTS disengagement time < 40 ms
8.4 PSL TIMERS
Output conditioner timer Setting +/- 2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater

Dwell conditioner timer Setting +/- 2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
Pulse conditioner timer Setting +/- 2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
286 P345-AD-EN-1
9 MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING
9.1 GENERAL
General Measurement Accuracy

General measurement accuracy Typically +/- 1%, but +/-0.5% between 0.2 - 2 In/Vn
Phase 0° to 360° +/- 5.0%
Current (0.05 to 3 In) +/- 1.0% of reading, or 4mA (1A input), or 20mA (5A input)
Voltage (0.05 to 2 Vn) +/- 5.0% of reading
Frequency (5 to 70 Hz) +/- 0.025 Hz
Power (W) (0.2 to 2 Vn and 0.05 to 3 In) +/- 5.0% of reading at unity power factor
Reactive power (Vars) (0.2 to 2 Vn and 0.05 to 3 In) +/- 5.0% of reading at zero power factor
Apparent power (VA) (0.2 to 2 Vn and 0.05 to 3 In) +/- 5.0% of reading
Energy (Wh) (0.2 to 2 Vn and 0.2 to 3 In) +/- 5.0% of reading at zero power factor
Energy (Varh) (0.2 to 2 Vn and 0.2 to 3) In +/- 5.0% of reading at zero power factor
9.2 DISTURBANCE RECORDS
Disturbance Records Measurement Accuracy

Minimum record duration 0.1 s
Maximum record duration 10.5 s
Minimum number of records at 10.5 seconds 8
Magnitude and relative phases accuracy +/- 5% of applied quantities
Duration accuracy +/- 2%
Trigger position accuracy +/- 2% (minimum Trigger 100 ms)
9.3 EVENT, FAULT AND MAINTENANCE RECORDS
Event, Fault & Maintenance Records

Record location Supercapacitor-backed memory
Viewing method Front panel display or Settings Application Software
Extraction method Extracted via the front USB port
Number of Event records Up to 512 time tagged event records (newest overwrites oldest)
Number of Fault Records Up to 20
Number of Maintenance Records Up to 10
Event time stamp resolution 1 ms
9.4 CURRENT LOOP INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CLIO
Current loop input accuracy +/-1% of full scale
Current loop input drop-off under threshold Setting +/-1% of full scale
Current loop input drop-off over threshold Setting +/-1% of full scale
Current loop input sampling interval 50 ms
P345-AD-EN-1 287
CLIO
Current loop input DT operate time +/-2% setting or 150 ms, whichever is greater
Current loop input instantaneous operate time < 250 ms
Current loop output conversion interval 50 mS
< 1.07 s (1 s refresh rate)
Current loop output latency
< 70 ms (0.5 cycle refresh rate)
Current loop output accuracy +/-5% of full scale
Repeatability < 5%
< 4 kohms (0-1 mA)
Current loop input load resistance
< 300 ohms (0-10 mA / 0-20mA / 4-20mA)
Isolation between input channels and case/earth/other
2 kV RMS for 1 minute
circuits
10 V (0-1 mA / 0-10 mA)
Current loop output compliance voltage
8.8V (0-20 mA / 4-20 mA)
288 P345-AD-EN-1
10 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE
Compliance with the European Commission Directive on EMC and LVD is demonstrated using a technical file.
10.1 EMC COMPLIANCE: 2014/30/EU

The product specific Declaration of Conformity (DoC) lists the relevant harmonised standard(s) or conformity
assessment used to demonstrate compliance with the EMC directive.
10.2 LVD COMPLIANCE: 2014/35/EU

The product specific Declaration of Conformity (DoC) lists the relevant harmonized standard(s) or conformity
assessment used to demonstrate compliance with the LVD directive.
Safety related information, such as the installation I overvoltage category, pollution degree and operating
temperature ranges are specified in the Technical Data section of the relevant product documentation and/or on
the product labelling.
Unless otherwise stated in the Technical Data section of the relevant product documentation, the equipment is
intended for indoor use only. Where the equipment is required for use in an outdoor location, it must be mounted
in a specific cabinet or housing to provide the equipment with the appropriate level of protection from the
expected outdoor environment.
10.3 R&TTE COMPLIANCE: 2014/53/EU

Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) directive 2014/53/EU.
Conformity is demonstrated by compliance to both the EMC directive and the Low Voltage directive, to zero volts.
10.4 UL/CUL COMPLIANCE

If marked with this logo, the product is compliant with the requirements of the Canadian and USA Underwriters
Laboratories.
The relevant UL file number and ID is shown on the equipment.
P345-AD-EN-1 289
11 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
11.1 PHYSICAL PARAMETERS
40TE
Case Types* 60TE
80TE
Weight (40TE case) 7 kg – 8 kg (depending on chosen options)
Weight (60TE case) 9 kg – 12 kg (depending on chosen options)
Weight (80TE case) 13 kg - 16 kg (depending on chosen options)
Dimensions in mm (w x h x l) (40TE case) W: 206.0 mm H: 177.0 mm D: 243.1 mm
Dimensions in mm (w x h x l) (60TE case) W: 309.6 mm H: 177.0 mm D: 243.1 mm
Dimensions in mm (w x h x l) (80TE case) W 413.2 mm H 177.0 mm D 243.1 mm
Mounting Panel, rack, or retrofit
Note:
*Case size is product dependent.
11.2 ENCLOSURE PROTECTION
Against dust and dripping water (front face) IP52 as per IEC 60529:1989/A2:2013
Protection against dust (whole case) IP50 as per IEC 60529:1989/A2:2013
Protection for sides of the case (safety) IP30 as per IEC 60529:1989/A2:2013
Protection for rear of the case (safety) IP10 as per IEC 60529:1989/A2:2013
11.3 MECHANICAL ROBUSTNESS
Vibration test per EN 60255-21-1:1998 Response: class 2, Endurance: class 2

Shock response: class 2, Shock withstand: class 1, Bump withstand:
Shock and bump immunity per EN 60255-21-2:1988
class 1
Seismic test per EN 60255-21-3: 1993 Class 2
11.4 TRANSIT PACKAGING PERFORMANCE
Primary packaging carton protection ISTA 1C

Vibration tests 3 orientations, 7 Hz, amplitude 5.3 mm, acceleration 1.05g
10 drops from 610 mm height on multiple carton faces, edges and
Drop tests
corners
290 P345-AD-EN-1
12 RATINGS
12.1 AC MEASURING INPUTS
AC Measuring Inputs
Nominal frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz (settable)
Operating range 5 to 70 Hz
Phase rotation ABC or ACB
12.2 CURRENT TRANSFORMER INPUTS

AC Current Inputs
Nominal current (In) 1A or 5A dual rated*
< 0.04 VA at In, <40 MΩ (0-30 In)In = 1A
Nominal burden per phase
< 0.01 VA at In, <8 MΩ (0-30 In)In = 5A
4In (continuous operation)
Thermal withstand 30In (for 10 s)
100In (for 1 s)
Linearity (standard CT) Linear up to 16In (non-offset)
Linearity (sensitive CT) Linear up to 2In (non-offset)
Note:
* A single input is used for both 1A and 5A applications. 1 A or 5 A operation is determined by means of software in the
product’s database.
Note:
These specifications are applicable to all CTs.
12.3 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS
AC Voltage Inputs
100 V to 120 V
Nominal voltage
380 V to 480 V
Nominal burden per phase < 0.02 VA at Vn
2 x Vn (continuous operation)
Thermal withstand
2.6 x Vn (for 10 seconds)
Linear up to 200 V (100/120 V supply)
Linearity
Linear up to 800 V (380/400 V supply)
P345-AD-EN-1 291
13 POWER SUPPLY
13.1 AUXILIARY SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Cortec option (DC only)

24 to 48 V DC
Cortec option (rated for AC or DC operation)
48 to 110 V DC
Nominal operating range
40 to 100 V AC rms
110 to 250 V DC
100 to 240 V AC rms
Cortec option (DC only)
19 to 65 V DC
37 to 150 V DC
Maximum operating range
32 to 110 V AC rms
87 to 300 V DC
80 to 265 V AC rms
Frequency range for AC supply 45 to 65 Hz
Ripple <15% for a DC supply (compliant with IEC 60255-26:2013)
Power up time < 11 seconds
13.2 NOMINAL BURDEN
Quiescent burden 11 W or 22 VA
2nd rear communications port 1.25 W or 2.5 VA
Each relay output burden 0.13 W or 0.25 VA per output relay
Each opto-input burden (24 – 27 V) 0.065 W or 0.13 VA max
13.3 POWER SUPPLY INTERRUPTION
Standard IEC 60255-26:2013 (DC and AC)

20 ms at 24 V (half and full load)
24-48V DC SUPPLY
100% interruption without de-energising
292 P345-AD-EN-1
20 ms at 37V (half and full load)

48-110V DC SUPPLY
100 ms at 72 V (half load)
100 ms at 85 V (full load)
110-250V DC SUPPLY
40-100V AC SUPPLY 50 ms at 32 V (half load)
100% voltage dip without de-energising 10 ms at 32 V (full load)
100-240V AC SUPPLY
50 ms at 80 V (full and half load)
100% voltage dip without de-energising
Note:
Maximum loading = all inputs/outputs energised.
Note:
Quiescent or 1/2 loading = 1/2 of all inputs/outputs energised.
13.4 SUPERCAPACITOR
Discharge time >14 days
P345-AD-EN-1 293
14 INPUT / OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
14.1 ISOLATED DIGITAL INPUTS
Opto-isolated digital inputs (opto-inputs)

Compliance ESI 48-4
Rated nominal voltage 24 to 250 V dc
Operating range 19 to 265 V dc
Withstand 300 V dc
Recognition time with half-cycle ac
< 2 ms
immunity filter removed
Recognition time with filter on < 12 ms
14.1.1 NOMINAL PICKUP AND RESET THRESHOLDS
Nominal battery
Logic levels: 60-80% DO/PU Logic Levels: 50-70% DO/PU Logic Levels: 58-75% DO/PU
voltage
24/27 V Logic 0 < 16.2V, Logic 1 > 19.2V Logic 0 <12V, Logic 1 > 16.8V Logic 0 <15.7V, Logic 1 > 18V
30/34 Logic 0 < 20.4V, Logic 1 > 24V Logic 0 < 15V, Logic 1 > 21V Logic 0 < 19.7V, Logic 1 > 22.5V
48/54 Logic 0 < 32.4V, Logic 1 > 38.4V Logic 0 < 24V, Logic 1 > 33.6V Logic 0 < 31.3V, Logic 1 > 36V
110/125 Logic 0 < 75V, Logic 1 > 88V Logic 0 < 55.V, Logic 1 > 77V Logic 0 < 72.5V, Logic 1 > 82.5V
220/250 Logic 0 < 150V, Logic 1 > 176V Logic 0 < 110V, Logic 1 > 154V Logic 0 < 145V, Logic 1 > 165V
Note:
Filter is required to make the opto-inputs immune to induced AC voltages.
14.2 STANDARD OUTPUT CONTACTS
Compliance In accordance with IEC 60255-1:2009

Use General purpose relay outputs for signalling, tripping and alarming
Rated voltage 300 V
Maximum continuous current 10 A
30 A for 3 s
Short duration withstand carry
250 A for 30 ms
Make and break, dc resistive 50 W
Make and break, dc inductive 62.5 W (L/R = 50 ms)
Make and break, ac resistive 2500 VA resistive (cos phi = unity)
Make and break, ac inductive 2500 VA inductive (cos phi = 0.7)
Make and carry, dc resistive 30 A for 3 s, 10000 operations (subject to a maximum load of 7500W))
4 A for 1.5 s, 10000 operations (subject to the above limit for make and break, dc
Make, carry and break, dc resistive
resistive load)
0.5 A for 1 s, 10000 operations (subject to the above limit for make and break, dc
Make, carry and break, dc inductive
inductive load)
Make, carry and break ac resistive 30 A for 200 ms, 2000 operations (subject to the above limits)
294 P345-AD-EN-1
Make, carry and break ac inductive 10 A for 1.5 s, 10000 operations (subject to the above limits)
Loaded contact 10000 operations min.
Unloaded contact 100000 operations min.
Operate time < 5 ms
Reset time < 10 ms
14.3 HIGH BREAK OUTPUT CONTACTS
Compliance In accordance with IEC 60255-1:2009

Use For applications requiring high rupture capacity
Rated voltage 300 V
Maximum continuous current 10 A DC
30 A DC for 3 s
Short duration withstand carry
250 A for 30 ms
Make and break, dc resistive 7500 W
Make and break, dc inductive 2500 W (L/R = 50 ms)
Make and carry, dc resistive 30 A for 3 s, 10000 operations (subject to the above limits)
30 A for 3 s, 5000 operations (subject to the above limit for make and break, dc
resistive load)
Make, carry and break, dc resistive
30 A for 200 ms, 10000 operations (subject to the above limit for make and break,
dc resistive load)
10 A for 40 ms, 10000 operations (subject to the above limit for make and break,
dc inductive load)
Make, carry and break, dc inductive
10 A for 20 ms (250V, 4 shots per second, subject to the above limit for make and
break, dc inductive load)
Loaded contact 10,000 operations minimum.
Unloaded contact 100,000 operations minimum.
Operate time < 0.2 ms
Reset time < 8 ms
MOV Protection Maximum voltage 330 V DC
14.4 WATCHDOG CONTACTS
Use Non-programmable contacts for relay healthy/relay fail indication

Breaking capacity, dc resistive 30 W
Breaking capacity, dc inductive 15 W (L/R = 40 ms)
Breaking capacity, ac inductive 375 VA inductive (cos phi = 0.7)
P345-AD-EN-1 295
15 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
15.1 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE
Compliance IEC 60255-27: 2013

Test Method IEC 60068-2-1:2007 and IEC 60068-2-2 2007
Operating temperature range -25°C to +55°C (continuous)
Storage and transit temperature range -25°C to +70°C (continuous)
15.2 TEMPERATURE ENDURANCE TEST
Temperature Endurance Test

Test Method IEC 60068-2-1: 2007 and 60068-2-2: 2007
-40°C (96 hours)
Operating temperature range
+70°C (96 hours)
-40°C (96 hours)
Storage and transit temperature range
+70°C (96 hours)
15.3 AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE
Compliance IEC 60068-2-78: 2013 and IEC 60068-2-30: 2005

Durability 56 days at 93% relative humidity and +40°C
Damp heat cyclic six (12 + 12) hour cycles, 93% RH, +25 to +55°C
15.4 CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENTS
Compliance IEC 60068-2-42: 2003, IEC 60068-2-43: 2003

Industrial corrosive environment/poor environmental 21 days exposure to elevated concentrations (25ppm) of SO2 at
control, Sulphur Dioxide 75% relative humidity and +25°C
Industrial corrosive environment/poor environmental 21 days exposure to elevated concentrations (10ppm) of H2S at
control, Hydrogen Sulphide 75% relative humidity and +25°C
Salt mist IEC 60068-2-52: 1996 KB severity 3
296 P345-AD-EN-1
16 TYPE TESTS
16.1 INSULATION

Insulation resistance > 100 M ohm at 500 V DC (Using only electronic/brushless insulation tester)
16.2 CREEPAGE DISTANCES AND CLEARANCES

Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category lll
Impulse test voltage (not RJ45) 5 kV
Impulse test voltage (RJ45) 1 kV
16.3 HIGH VOLTAGE (DIELECTRIC) WITHSTAND
IEC Compliance IEC 60255-27: 2013

Between all independent circuits 2 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Between independent circuits and protective earth conductor terminal 2 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Between all case terminals and the case earth 2 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Across open watchdog contacts 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Across open contacts of changeover output relays 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Between all RJ45 contacts and protective earth 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Between all screw-type EIA(RS)485 contacts and protective earth 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute
ANSI/IEEE Compliance ANSI/IEEE C37.90-2005
Across open contacts of normally open output relays 1.5 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Across open contacts of normally open changeover output relays 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Across open watchdog contacts 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute
16.4 IMPULSE VOLTAGE WITHSTAND TEST

Between all independent circuits Front time: 1.2 µs, Time to half-value: 50 µs, Peak value: 5 kV, 0.5 J
Between terminals of all independent circuits Front time: 1.2 µs, Time to half-value: 50 µs, Peak value: 5 kV, 0.5 J
Between all independent circuits and protective
Front time: 1.2 µs, Time to half-value: 50 µs, Peak value: 5 kV, 0.5 J
earth conductor terminal
Note:
Exceptions are communications ports and normally-open output contacts, where applicable.
P345-AD-EN-1 297
17 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
17.1 1 MHZ BURST HIGH FREQUENCY DISTURBANCE TEST
Compliance IEC 60255-22-1: 2008, Class III, IEC 60255-26:2013

Common-mode test voltage (level 3) 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage (level 3) 1.0 kV
17.2 DAMPED OSCILLATORY TEST
EN61000-4-18: 2011: Level 3, 100 kHz and 1 MHz. Level 4: 3 MHz,

Compliance
10 MHz and 30 MHz, IEC 60255-26:2013
Differential mode test voltage 1.0 kV
17.3 IMMUNITY TO ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
Compliance IEC 60255-26:2013, IEC 61000-4-2:2009

Class 4 Condition 15 kV discharge in air to user interface, display, and exposed metalwork
Class 3 Condition 8 kV discharge in air to all communication ports
17.4 ELECTRICAL FAST TRANSIENT OR BURST REQUIREMENTS

Applied to communication inputs Amplitude: 2 kV, burst frequency 5 kHz and 100 KHz (level 4)
Applied to power supply and all other inputs
Amplitude: 4 kV, burst frequency 5 kHz and 100 KHz (level 4)
except for communication inputs
17.5 SURGE WITHSTAND CAPABILITY
Compliance IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1: 2002

4 kV fast transient and 2.5 kV oscillatory applied common mode and differential
Condition 1
mode to opto inputs, output relays, CTs, VTs, power supply
4 kV fast transient and 2.5 kV oscillatory applied common mode to communications,
Condition 2
IRIG-B
298 P345-AD-EN-1
17.6 SURGE IMMUNITY TEST
Compliance IEC 60255-26:2013, IEC 61000-4-5:2014+AMD1:2017

Pulse duration Time to half-value: 1.2/50 µs
Between all groups and protective earth conductor terminal Amplitude 4 kV
Between terminals of each group (excluding communications ports,
Amplitude 2 kV
where applicable)
17.7 IMMUNITY TO RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY
Compliance IEC 60255-26:2013, IEC 61000-4-3:2006 + A2:2010

Frequency band 80 MHz to 3.0 GHz
Spot tests at 80, 160, 380, 450, 900, 1850, 2150 MHz
Test field strength 10 V/m
Test using AM 1 kHz @ 80%
Compliance IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2: 2004
Frequency band 80 MHz to 1 GHz
Spot tests at 80, 160, 380, 450 MHz
Waveform 1 kHz @ 80% am and pulse modulated
Field strength 35 V/m
17.8 RADIATED IMMUNITY FROM DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
Compliance IEC 61000-4-3:2006 + A2:2010

Frequency bands 800 to 960 MHz, 1.4 to 2.0 GHz
Test using AM 1 kHz / 80%
17.9 RADIATED IMMUNITY FROM DIGITAL RADIO TELEPHONES
Compliance IEC 60255-26:2013, IEC 61000-4-3:2006 + A2:2010

Frequency bands 900 MHz and 1.89 GHz
17.10 IMMUNITY TO CONDUCTED DISTURBANCES INDUCED BY RADIO FREQUENCY

FIELDS
Compliance IEC 60255-26:2013, IEC 61000-4-6:2013 Level 3

Frequency bands 150 kHz to 80 MHz
P345-AD-EN-1 299
Test disturbance voltage 10 V rms

Test using AM 1 kHz @ 80%
Spot tests 27 MHz and 68 MHz
17.11 MAGNETIC FIELD IMMUNITY
IEC 61000-4-8:2009 Level 5

Compliance IEC 61000-4-9:2016 Level 5
IEC 61000-4-10:2016 Level 5
IEC 61000-4-8 test 100 A/m applied continuously, 1000 A/m applied for 3 s
IEC 61000-4-9 test 1000 A/m applied in all planes
100 A/m applied in all planes at 100 kHz/1 MHz with a burst duration of 2
IEC 61000-4-10 test
seconds
17.12 CONDUCTED EMISSIONS
Compliance IEC 60255-26:2013, EN 55016-2-1:2014

Power supply test 1 0.15 - 0.5 MHz, 79 dBµV (quasi peak) 66 dBµV (average)
Power supply test 2 0.5 – 30 MHz, 73 dBµV (quasi peak) 60 dBµV (average)
RJ45 test 1 (where applicable) 0.15 - 0.5 MHz, 97 dBµV (quasi peak) 84 dBµV (average)
RJ45 test 2 (where applicable) 0.5 – 30 MHz, 87 dBµV (quasi peak) 74 dBµV (average)
17.13 RADIATED EMISSIONS
Compliance IEC 60255-26:2013

Test 1 30 – 230 MHz, 40 dBµV/m at 10 m measurement distance
Test 2 230 – 1 GHz, 47 dBµV/m at 10 m measurement distance
Test 3 1 – 2 GHz, 76 dBµV/m at 10 m measurement distance
17.14 POWER FREQUENCY

Opto-inputs (Compliance is achieved using the opto-input 300 V common-mode (Class A)
filter) 150 V differential mode (Class A)
Note:
Compliance is achieved using the opto-input filter.
300 P345-AD-EN-1
APPENDIX A
ORDERING OPTIONS
Appendix A - Ordering Options P345
302 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Appendix A - Ordering Options
Variants Order No. Order No.

Generator Protection Relay P345 **
Design Suffix
As K plus increased main processor memory (XCPU3) M
Extended Phase 2 CPU K
Vx Auxiliary Rating
24 - 54Vdc 7
48 - 125Vdc (40 - 100Vac) 8
110 - 250Vdc, 100 - 240Vac 9
In/Vn Rating
In = 1/5A, Vn = 100 - 120Vac 1
In = 1/5A, Vn = 380 - 480Vac 2
Hardware Options Protocol Compatibility Design Suffix Compatibility

Standard - None 1, 2, 3 & 4 K/M 1
IRIG-B Only (modulated) 1, 2, 3 & 4 K/M 2
Fibre Optic Converter Only (withdrawn) 1, 2, 3 & 4 K/M 3
IRIG-B (modulated) & Fibre Optic Converter 1, 2, 3 & 4 K/M 4
Ethernet (100Mbit/s) 6, 8 K/M 6
2nd Rear Comms 1, 2, 3 & 4 K/M 7
IRIG-B (modulated) & 2nd Rear Comms 1, 2, 3 & 4 K/M 8
Ethernet (100Mbit/s) plus IRIG-B (modulated) 6, 8 K/M A
Ethernet (100Mbit/s) plus IRIG-B (un-modulated) 6, 8 K/M B
IRIG-B (un-modulated) 1, 2, 3 & 4 K/M C
Redundant Ethernet Self-Healing Ring, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + IRIG-B (modulated) 6, 8 K/M * G
Redundant Ethernet Self-Healing Ring, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + IRIG-B (un-modulated) 6, 8 K/M * H
Redundant Ethernet RSTP, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + IRIG-B (modulated) 6, 8 K/M * J
Redundant Ethernet RSTP, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + IRIG-B (un-modulated) 6, 8 K/M * K
Redundant Ethernet Dual Homing Star, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + IRIG-B (modulated) 6, 8 K/M * L
Redundant Ethernet Dual-Homing Star, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + IRIG-B (un-modulated) 6, 8 K/M * M
Redundant Ethernet PRP/HSR, 2 fibre ports + Modulated IRIG-B 6, 8 K/M ** N
Redundant Ethernet PRP/HSR, 2 fibre ports + Unmodulated IRIG-B 6, 8 K/M ** P
Redundant Ethernet PRP/HSR/RSTP/Failover, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + Modulated/Un-Modulated IRIG-B 6, 8 M R
Redundant Ethernet PRP/HSR/RSTP/Failover, 2 copper ports RJ45 + Modulated/Un-Modulated IRIG-B 6, 8 M S
Redundant Ethernet PRP/HSR/RSTP/Failover, 1 copper port RJ45 + 1 multi-mode fibre port + Modulated/Un-Modulated IRIG-B 6, 8 M T
* Options are only available with software version 35 and later

** Options are only available with software version 36 and later
Product Specific Option

Size 16 Case, No Option (24 Opto Inputs + 24 Relay Outputs) A
Size 16 Case, 24 Opto Inputs + 24 Relay Outputs + RTD B
Size 16 Case, 24 Opto Inputs + 24 Relay Outputs + CLIO C
Size 16 Case, 32 Opto Inputs + 24 Relay Outputs D
Size 16 Case, 24 Opto Inputs + 32 Relay Outputs E
Size 16 Case, 24 Opto Inputs + 24 Relay Outputs + RTD + CLIO F
Size 16 Case, 32 Opto Inputs + 24 Relay Outputs + RTD G
Size 16 Case, 24 Opto Inputs + 32 Relay Outputs + RTD H
Size 16 Case, 32 Opto Inputs + 16 Relay Outputs + RTD + CLIO J
Size 16 Case, 16 Opto Inputs + 32 Relay Outputs + RTD + CLIO K
Size 16 Case, 24 Opto Inputs + 16 Relay Outputs + 4 High Break Outputs L
Size 16 Case, 24 Opto Inputs + 16 Relay Outputs + 4 High Break Outputs + RTD M
Size 16 Case, 24 Opto Inputs + 16 Relay Outputs + 4 High Break Outputs + CLIO N
Size 16 Case, 24 Opto Inputs + 16 Relay Outputs + 4 High Break Outputs + RTD + CLIO P
Size 16 Case, 16 Opto Inputs + 16 Relay Outputs + 8 High Break Outputs Q
Size 16 Case, 16 Opto Inputs + 16 Relay Outputs + 8 High Break Outputs + RTD R
Size 16 Case, 16 Opto Inputs + 16 Relay Outputs + 8 High Break Outputs + CLIO S
Size 16 Case, 16 Opto Inputs + 16 Relay Outputs + 8 High Break Outputs + RTD + CLIO T
Protocol / Communications Options Hardware Compatibility Design Suffix Compatibility

K-Bus 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, C K/M 1
Modbus 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, C K/M 2
IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW) 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, C K/M 3
DNP3.0 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, C K/M 4
6, A & B K/M
IEC61850 + Courier (via rear RS485 port) G, H, J, K, L, M * K/M 6
N, P ** K/M
6, A, B, G, H, J, K, L, M,
DNP3.0 Over Ethernet with Courier rear port K-Bus/RS485 protocol M only 8
N, P ***
* Options are only available with software version 35 and later

** Options are only available with software version 36 and later
*** Options are only available with software version 38 and later
Mounting Option
Flush/Panel Mounting with Harsh Env.Coating, White Front Panel M
19" Rack Mounting with Harsh Env. Coating, White Front Panel N
Panel Mounting, with harsh environment coating P
Rack Mounting, with harsh environment coating Q
Flush/Panel Mounting with Harsh Env. Coating, with USB Port, Black and Silver Front Panel S
19" Rack Mounting with Harsh Env. Coating, with USB Port, Black and Silver Front Panel T
Multilingual Language Option

English, French, German, Spanish 0
English, French, German, Russian 5
Chinese, English or French via HMI, with English or French only via Communications port C
Software Issue **
Customisation
Default 0
Customer A
Note: The following items are obsolete so they need to be ordered separately
Item PCS Material/Ordering code
20 Hz Generator P345:20HZ-GEN-*
Bandpass Filter P345:BP-FILTER-*
400/5A Tripping CT P345:CT
Generator and Filter mounting Surface-mounting S
Flush-mounting F
Rail-mounting R
P345-AD-EN-1 A1
Appendix A - Ordering Options P345
A2 P345-AD-EN-1
APPENDIX B
SETTINGS AND SIGNALS

Appendix B - Settings and Signals P345
304 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Appendix B - Settings and Signals
MENU TEXT COL.ROW DEFAULT SETTING AVAILABLE OPTIONS

DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM DATA 00.00
From 0 to 3 in steps of 1
Language 00.01 English
[Indexed String]
Password 00.02 AAAA
[ASCII Password(8 chars)]
This setting defines the plain text password.
Sys Fn Links 00.03
[Binary Flag (8 bits); Indexed Strings]
This setting allows the fixed function trip LED to be self resetting (set to 1 to extinguish the LED after a period of healthy restoration of load
current). Only bit 0 is used.
Description 00.04 MiCOM P34*
[ASCII Text(16 chars)]
* = 1 for Model 1, 2 for Model 2, 3 for Model 3, 4 for Model 4, 5 for Model 5, 6 for Model 6, 7 for Model 7, 8 for Model 8
Plant Reference 00.05 MiCOM
In this cell, you can enter and edit a 16 character plant description.
Model Number
Model Number 00.06 Model Number
This cell displays the IED model number. This cannot be edited.
Serial Number
Serial Number 00.08 Serial Number
This cell displays the IED serial number. This cannot be edited
50 or 60
Frequency 00.09 50
[Unsigned Integer(8 bits)]
This cell sets the mains frequency to either 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Comms Level
Comms Level 00.0A 2
This cell displays the Courier communications conformance level
Relay Address 00.0B 1
Plant Status
Plant Status 00.0C
[Binary Flag(16 bits)]
This cell displays the circuit breaker plant status. The first two bits are used. One to indicate the 52A state and one to indicate the 52B state.
Control Status
Control Status 00.0D
[Binary Flag(16 bits)]
Active Group
Active Group 00.0E
CB Trip/Close 00.10 No Operation

Visible to LCD+Front Port
CB Trip/Close 00.10 No Operation
Visible to Rear Port
Software Ref. 1
Software Ref. 1 00.11
Software Ref 2
Software Ref 2 00.12
Ethernet Card Software Reference, if fitted.
Opto I/P Status
Opto I/P Status 00.20
[Binary Flag; Indexed String]
The original register 30007 is available for opto inputs #1 to #16
Relay O/P Status
Relay O/P Status 00.21
Alarm Status 1 00.22 Alarm Status 1
P345-AD-EN-1 B1

DESCRIPTION
Opto I/P Status

Opto I/P Status 00.30
The original register 30007 is available for opto inputs #1 to #16
Relay O/P Status
Relay O/P Status 00.40
Alarm Status 1
Alarm Status 1 00.50
Alarm Status 2
Alarm Status 3
[Binary Flag(32 bits); Indexed String]
Access Level
Access Level 00.D0
Password Level 1 00.D2 AAAA
Security Feature
Security Feature 00.DF
[Unsigned Integer (16-bits)]
This setting displays the level of cyber security implemented, 1 = phase 1.
Username 00.E0
There are three Authentication methods suppored by P40 Authentication framework.
• Legacy Device Authentication
• Device Authentication (RBAC)
• Server Authentication (RBAC)
Respectively, acceptable username are,
• Empty
• Enumaratrion including ADMINISTRATOR, ENGINEER, OPERATOR and VIEWER
• Usernames are restricted to a maximum of 16 characters. Only uppercase A to Z and numbers 0 to 9 are permissible username
characters.
Password 00.E1
[Encrypted Password (8 chars)]
This cell allows you to enter the encrypted password. It is not visible via the user interfaced.
Password Level 1 00.E2 AAAA
This setting allows you to change the encrypted password level 1. This is not visible via the user interface.
VIEW RECORDS 01.00
Previous Modbus addresses in the event and fault records are retained for backward compatibility.
Menu Cell Ref
Menu Cell Ref 01.02 (From Record)
[Cell Reference]
Indicates type of event. Previous Modbus address - 3x00107; See Event sheet
Time & Date 01.03 (From Record) Time & Date
B2 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
[IEC870 Time & Date]
Previous Modbus address - 3x00103 to 3x00106
Event Text
Event Text 01.04
[Ascii String (32 chars)]
See Event sheet
Event Value
Event Value 01.05
[Unsigned Int / Binary Flag (32 bits)]
Previous addresses - 3x00108 to 3x00109 binary flag for contact, opto, alarm & protection events. Unsigned integers for maintenance records.
Details see Event sheet.
Select Fault 01.06
[Unsigned Integer (16 bits)]
Allows Fault Record to be selected
Faulted Phase
Faulted Phase 01.40
[Binary Flag (8 Bits)]
Previous Modbus address 3x00113. For fault record use only.
Start Elements1
Start Elements1 01.42
Previous Modbus address 3x00114 to 3x00115. For fault record use only.
Start Elements2
Start Elements3
For fault record use only.
Start Elements4
Trip Elements1
Trip Elements1 01.49
Trip Elements2
Trip Elements2 01.4A
Trip Elements3
Trip Elements3 01.4B
Trip Elements4
Trip Elements4 01.4C
Fault Alarms
Fault Alarms 01.50
Fault Alarms 2
Fault Alarms 2 01.51
Fault Time
Fault Time 01.55 (From Record)
Active Group
Active Group 01.57
[Unsigned Integer]
System Frequency
System Frequency 01.59
[Courier Number (frequency)]
Fault Duration
Fault Duration 01.5B
[Courier Number (time)]
Previous Modbus addresses 3x00130 to 3x00131. For fault record use only.
CB Operate Time
CB Operate Time 01.5E
P345-AD-EN-1 B3

DESCRIPTION
Relay Trip Time
Relay Trip Time 01.60
IA
IA-1
IA IA-1 IA-1 RMS 01.62
IA-1 RMS
[Courier Number (current)]
IB
IB-1
IB IB-1 IB-1 RMS 01.63
IB-1 RMS
IC
IC-1
IC IC-1 IC-1 RMS 01.64
IC-1 RMS
VAB
VAB 01.65
[Courier Number (voltage)]
VBC
VBC 01.66
VCA
VCA 01.67
VAN
VAN VA-1 RMS 01.68 VA-1 RMS
VBN
VBN VB-1 RMS 01.69 VB-1 RMS
VCN
VCN VC-1 RMS 01.6A VC-1 RMS
IA-2
IA-2 IA-2 RMS 01.70 IA-2 RMS
IB-2
IB-2 IB-2 RMS 01.71 IB-2 RMS
IC-2
IC-2 IC-2 RMS 01.72 IC-2 RMS
IA Differential
IA Differential 01.80
IB Differential
IB Differential 01.81
IC Differential
IC Differential 01.82
B4 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
IA Diff PU
IA Diff PU 01.83
IB Diff PU
IB Diff PU 01.84
IC Diff PU
IC Diff PU 01.85
IA Diff 2H
IA Diff 2H 01.86
IB Diff 2H
IB Diff 2H 01.87
IC Diff 2H
IC Diff 2H 01.88
IA Diff 5H
IA Diff 5H 01.89
IB Diff 5H
IB Diff 5H 01.8A
IC Diff 5H
IC Diff 5H 01.8B
VN Measured
VN Measured VN1
01.90 VN1 Measured
Measured
VN2 Measured
VN2 Measured 01.92
VN Derived
VN Derived VN-1
01.94 VN-1 Derived RMS
Derived RMS
IN Measured
IN Measured IN
01.96 IN Derived
Derived
I Sensitive1
I Sensitive1 01.99
I Sensitive2
I Sensitive2 01.9A
IREF Diff
IREF Diff 01.9C
IREF Bias
IREF Bias 01.9D
I2
I2 01.A0
V2 01.A2 V2
P345-AD-EN-1 B5

DESCRIPTION
3 Phase Watts
3 Phase Watts 01.A6
[Courier Number (Power)]
3 Phase VArs
3 Phase VArs 01.A8
[Courier Number (VAr)]
3Ph Power Factor
3Ph Power Factor 01.AA
[Courier Number (Decimal)]
Sen Watts
Sen Watts 01.AB
Single phase for non P345 and single phase or Wattmetric depending on Setting [4721] for P345
Sen VArs
Sen VArs 01.AC
Sen Power Factor
Sen Power Factor 01.AD
RTD 1
RTD 1 01.B0
[Courier Number (Temperature)]
Previous Modbus address 3x00184. For fault record use only. Courier text = RTD Label setting
RTD 2
RTD 2 01.B1
RTD 3
RTD 3 01.B2
RTD 4
RTD 4 01.B3
RTD 5
RTD 5 01.B4
RTD 6
RTD 6 01.B5
RTD 7
RTD 7 01.B6
RTD 8
RTD 8 01.B7
RTD 9
RTD 9 01.B8
RTD 10
RTD 10 01.B9
df/dt
df/dt 01.C2
[Courier Number (Hz/s)]
CLIO Input 1
CLIO Input 1 01.C6
CLIO Input 2
CLIO Input 2 01.C7
B6 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
CLIO Input 3
CLIO Input 3 01.C8
CLIO Input 4
CLIO Input 4 01.C9
64S V Magnitude
64S V Magnitude 01.CA
64S I Magnitude
64S I Magnitude 01.CB
64S R primary
64S R primary 01.CC
[Courier Number (resistance)]
64R CL Input
64R CL Input 01.CD
64R R Fault
64R R Fault 01.CE
IA Peak Mag
IA Peak Mag IA-1 Peak 01.E4 IA-1 Peak
[Courier Number (Current)]
IA Peak Magnitude
IB Peak Mag
IB Peak Mag IB-1 Peak 01.E5 IB-1 Peak
IB Peak Magnitude
IC Peak Mag
IC Peak Mag IC-1 Peak 01.E6 IC-1 Peak
IC Peak Magnitude
I2t Phase A-1
I2t Phase A-1 01.E7
[Courier Number (I2t)]
I2t Phase A
I2t Phase B-1
I2t Phase B-1 01.E8
I2t Phase B
I2t Phase C-1
I2t Phase C-1 01.E9
I2t Phase C
IA-2 Peak Mag
IA-2 Peak Mag IA-2
01.EA IA-2 Peak
Peak
IA Peak Magnitude
IB-2 Peak Mag
IB-2 Peak Mag IB-2
01.EB IB-2 Peak
Peak
IB Peak Magnitude
IC-2 Peak Mag
IC-2 Peak Mag IC-2
01.EC IC-2 Peak
Peak
IC Peak Magnitude
I2t Phase A-2
I2t Phase A-2 01.ED
I2t Phase A
I2t Phase B-2
I2t Phase B-2 01.EE
I2t Phase B
P345-AD-EN-1 B7

DESCRIPTION
I2t Phase C-2
I2t Phase C-2 01.EF
I2t Phase C
Manual override to select a From 0 to 9 in steps of 1
Select Maint 01.F0
fault record. [Unsigned Integer (16 bits)]
Allows Self Test Report to be selected
Maint Text
Maint Text 01.F1
[Ascii Text (32 chars)]
Maint Type
Maint Type 01.F2
[Unsigned integer (32 bits)]
Maint Data
Maint Data 01.F3
Evt Iface Source

Evt Iface Source 01.FA
[Integer byte field]
Cyber Security event states
Evt Access Level
Evt Access Level 01.FB
Evt Extra Info
Evt Extra Info 01.FC
Evt Unique Id
Evt Unique Id 01.FE
[Unsigned integer]
Reset Indication 01.FF No
MEASUREMENTS 1 02.00
IA Magnitude
IA Magnitude IA-1
02.01 IA-1 Magnitude
Magnitude
IA Phase Angle
IA Phase Angle IA-1
02.02 IA-1 Phase Angle
Phase Angle
[Courier Number (angle)]
IB Magnitude
IB Magnitude IB-1
02.03 IB-1 Magnitude
Magnitude
IB Phase Angle
IB Phase Angle IB-1
02.04 IB-1 Phase Angle
Phase Angle
IC Magnitude
IC Magnitude IC-1
02.05 IC-1 Magnitude
Magnitude
IC Phase Angle
IC Phase Angle IC-1
02.06 IC-1 Phase Angle
Phase Angle
IN Measured Mag
IN Measured Mag 02.07
IN Measured Ang
IN Measured Ang 02.08
B8 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
IN Derived Mag
IN Derived Mag IN-1
02.09 IN-1 Derived Mag
Derived Mag
Isen1 Magnitude
Isen1 Magnitude 02.0B
Isen1 Angle
Isen1 Angle 02.0C
I1 Magnitude
I1 Magnitude 02.0D
I2 Magnitude
I2 Magnitude 02.0E
I0 Magnitude
I0 Magnitude 02.0F
IA RMS
IA RMS IA-1 RMS 02.10 IA-1 RMS
IB RMS
IB RMS IB-1 RMS 02.11 IB-1 RMS
IC RMS
IC RMS IC-1 RMS 02.12 IC-1 RMS
IN-2 Derived Mag

IN-2 Derived Mag 02.13
VAB Magnitude
VAB Magnitude 02.14
VAB Phase Angle

VAB Phase Angle 02.15
VBC Magnitude
VBC Magnitude 02.16
VBC Phase Angle

VBC Phase Angle 02.17
VCA Magnitude
VCA Magnitude 02.18
VCA Phase Angle

VCA Phase Angle 02.19
VAN Magnitude
VAN Magnitude 02.1A
VAN Phase Angle

VAN Phase Angle 02.1B
P345-AD-EN-1 B9

DESCRIPTION
VBN Magnitude
VBN Magnitude 02.1C
VBN Phase Angle

VBN Phase Angle 02.1D
VCN Magnitude
VCN Magnitude 02.1E
VCN Phase Angle

VCN Phase Angle 02.1F
VN Measured Mag
VN Measured Mag VN1
02.20 VN1 Measured Mag
Measured Mag
VN Measured Ang
VN Measured Ang VN1
02.21 VN1 Measured Ang
Measured Ang
VN Derived Mag
VN Derived Mag 02.22
VN Derived Ang
VN Derived Ang 02.23
V1 Magnitude
V1 Magnitude 02.24
V2 Magnitude
V2 Magnitude 02.25
V0 Magnitude
V0 Magnitude 02.26
VAN RMS
VAN RMS 02.27
VBN RMS
VBN RMS 02.28
VCN RMS
VCN RMS 02.29
Isen2 Magnitude
Isen2 Magnitude 02.2A
Isen2 Angle
Isen2 Angle 02.2B
Frequency
Frequency 02.2D
I1 Magnitude
I1 Magnitude 02.40
I1 Phase Angle
I1 Phase Angle 02.41
B10 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
I2 Magnitude
I2 Magnitude 02.42
I2 Phase Angle
I0 Magnitude
I0 Magnitude 02.44
I0 Phase Angle
V1 Magnitude
V1 Magnitude 02.46
V1 Phase Angle
V1 Phase Angle 02.47
V2 Magnitude
V2 Magnitude 02.48
V2 Phase Angle
V2 Phase Angle 02.49
V0 Magnitude
V0 Magnitude 02.4A
V0 Phase Angle
V0 Phase Angle 02.4B
VN2 Measured Mag

VN2 Measured Mag 02.50
VN2 Measured Ang

VN2 Measured Ang 02.51
C/S Voltage Mag

C/S Voltage Mag 02.70
C/S Voltage Ang

C/S Voltage Ang 02.71
CS Gen-Bus Mag
CS Gen-Bus Mag 02.72
Visible if System Checks enabled
CS Gen-Bus Angle
CS Gen-Bus Angle 02.73
Slip Frequency
Slip Frequency 02.74
CS Frequency
CS Frequency 02.75
A Phase Watts
A Phase Watts 03.01
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30391 and 30392 available with improved G125 floating point data type
P345-AD-EN-1 B11

DESCRIPTION
B Phase Watts
B Phase Watts 03.02
C Phase Watts
C Phase Watts 03.03
A Phase VArs
A Phase VArs 03.04
B Phase VArs
B Phase VArs 03.05
C Phase VArs
C Phase VArs 03.06
A Phase VA
A Phase VA 03.07
[Courier Number (VA)]
B Phase VA
B Phase VA 03.08
C Phase VA
C Phase VA 03.09
3 Phase Watts
3 Phase Watts 03.0A
3 Phase VArs
3 Phase VArs 03.0B
3 Phase VA
3 Phase VA 03.0C
NPS Power S2
NPS Power S2 03.0D
3Ph Power Factor
3Ph Power Factor 03.0E
[Courier Number (decimal)]
APh Power Factor

APh Power Factor 03.0F
BPh Power Factor

BPh Power Factor 03.10
CPh Power Factor

CPh Power Factor 03.11
3Ph WHours Fwd

3Ph WHours Fwd 03.12
[Courier Number (Wh)]
3Ph WHours Rev
3Ph WHours Rev 03.13
[Courier Number (Wh)]
3Ph VArHours Fwd
3Ph VArHours Fwd 03.14
[Courier Number (VArh)]
3Ph VArHours Rev
3Ph VArHours Rev 03.15
[Courier Number (VArh)]
B12 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
3Ph W Fix Demand
3Ph W Fix Demand 03.16
3Ph VArs Fix Dem
3Ph VArs Fix Dem 03.17
[Courier Number (Vars)]
IA Fixed Demand
IA Fixed Demand 03.18
IB Fixed Demand
IB Fixed Demand 03.19
IC Fixed Demand
IC Fixed Demand 03.1A
3 Ph W Roll Dem
3 Ph W Roll Dem 03.1B
3Ph VArs RollDem
3Ph VArs RollDem 03.1C
IA Roll Demand
IA Roll Demand 03.1D
IB Roll Demand
IB Roll Demand 03.1E
IC Roll Demand
IC Roll Demand 03.1F
3Ph W Peak Dem

3Ph W Peak Dem 03.20
3Ph VAr Peak Dem
3Ph VAr Peak Dem 03.21
IA Peak Demand
IA Peak Demand 03.22
IB Peak Demand
IB Peak Demand 03.23
IC Peak Demand
IC Peak Demand 03.24
Reset Demand 03.25 No
NPS Power S2 CT2

NPS Power S2 CT2 03.26
IA-2 Magnitude
IA-2 Magnitude 04.01
IA-2 Phase Angle

IA-2 Phase Angle 04.02
[Courier Number (Angle)]
P345-AD-EN-1 B13

DESCRIPTION
IB-2 Magnitude
IB-2 Magnitude 04.03
IB-2 Phase Angle

IB-2 Phase Angle 04.04
IC-2 Magnitude
IC-2 Magnitude 04.05
IC-2 Phase Angle

IC-2 Phase Angle 04.06
IA Differential
IA Differential 04.07
IB Differential
IB Differential 04.08
IC Differential
IC Differential 04.09
IA Bias
IA Bias 04.0A
IB Bias
IB Bias 04.0B
IC Bias
IC Bias 04.0C
IREF Diff
IREF Diff 04.0D
IREF Bias
IREF Bias 04.0E
VN 3rd Harmonic
VN 3rd Harmonic 04.0F
[Courier Number (Voltage)]
NPS Thermal
NPS Thermal 04.10
[Courier Number (Percentage)]
Reset NPSThermal 04.11 No
RTD 1
RTD 1 04.12
Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD 2
RTD 2 04.13
RTD 3
RTD 3 04.14
RTD 4
RTD 4 04.15
RTD 5
RTD 5 04.16
B14 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
RTD 6
RTD 6 04.17
RTD 7
RTD 7 04.18
RTD 8
RTD 8 04.19
RTD 9
RTD 9 04.1A
RTD 10
RTD 10 04.1B
RTD Open Cct
RTD Open Cct 04.1C
[Binary Flag (10 bits); Indexed String]
RTD Short Cct

RTD Short Cct 04.1D
RTD Data Error

RTD Data Error 04.1E
Reset RTD Flags 04.1F No
Sen Watts
Sen Watts 04.20
Sen Vars
Sen Vars 04.21
[Courier Number (Var)]
Sen Power Factor
Sen Power Factor 04.22
Thermal Overload
Thermal Overload 04.23
Reset ThermalO/L 04.24 No
CLIO Input 1
CLIO Input 1 04.25
Courier Text = CLIO label setting
CLIO Input 2
CLIO Input 2 04.26
CLIO Input 3
CLIO Input 3 04.27
CLIO Input 4
CLIO Input 4 04.28
F Band1 Time (s)
F Band1 Time (s) 04.30
Turbine Abnormal Frequency (TAF). Band 1 Accumulated Time
Reset Freq Band1 04.32 No
Reset TAF Band 1 Time
F Band2 Time (s)
P345-AD-EN-1 B15

DESCRIPTION
F Band3 Time (s)
Reset Freq Band3 04.3A No
F Band4 Time (s)
F Band4 Time (s) 04.3C
Reset Freq Band4 04.3E No
F Band5 Time (s)
F Band6 Time (s)
df/dt
df/dt 04.48
[Courier Number (Hz/sec)]
dep on df/dt setting in configuration collumn
Volts/Hz
Volts/Hz 04.50
[Courier Number (Volts/Hz)]
Vab/Frequency
64S V Magnitude
64S V Magnitude 04.52
Low frequency injection St EF Voltage magnitude measured at the relay terminal
64S I Magnitude
64S I Magnitude 04.54
Low frequency injection St EF Current magnitude measured at the relay terminal
64S I Angle
64S I Angle 04.55
St EF current angle measurement, affected by Comp Angle setting when St EF is enabled. I64S phase angle relative to V64S vector.
64S R secondary
64S R secondary 04.57
St EF secondary resistance measurement at the relay terminal, affected by Series R and Parallel G settings
64S R primary
64S R primary 04.58
St EF primary resistance, converted from secondary resistance using the R Factor setting
64R CL Input
64R CL Input 04.71
64R R Fault
64R R Fault 04.72
IA Diff PU
IA Diff PU 04.91
IB Diff PU
IB Diff PU 04.92
IC Diff PU
IC Diff PU 04.93
B16 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
IA Bias PU
IA Bias PU 04.94
IB Bias PU
IB Bias PU 04.95
IC Bias PU
IC Bias PU 04.96
IA Diff 2H
IA Diff 2H 04.97
IB Diff 2H
IB Diff 2H 04.98
IC Diff 2H
IC Diff 2H 04.99
IA Diff 5H
IA Diff 5H 04.9A
IB Diff 5H
IB Diff 5H 04.9B
IC Diff 5H
IC Diff 5H 04.9C
CT2 I1 Mag
CT2 I1 Mag 04.9D
CT2 I1 Angle
CT2 I1 Angle 04.9E
CT2 I2 Mag
CT2 I2 Mag 04.9F
CT2 I2 Angle
CT2 I2 Angle 04.A0
CT2 I0 Mag
CT2 I0 Mag 04.A1
CT2 I0 Angle
CT2 I0 Angle 04.A2
CT1 I2/I1
CT1 I2/I1 04.A3
[Courier Number (Ratio)]
CT2 I2/I1
CT2 I2/I1 04.A4
[Courier Number (Ratio)]
ZA Mag
ZA Mag 04.A5
ZA=VA/IA
Hot Spot T
Hot Spot T 05.01
[Courier Number (°C)]
P345-AD-EN-1 B17

DESCRIPTION
Top Oil T
Top Oil T 05.02 No
Reset Xthermal 05.03 No
Ambient T
Ambient T 05.04
TOL Pretrip left

TOL Pretrip left 05.05
LOL status
LOL status 05.06
Reset LOL 05.07 No
Rate of LOL
Rate of LOL 05.08 No
LOL Ageing Fact

LOL Ageing Fact 05.09
Lres at Design T
Lres at Design T 05.0A No
FAA,m
FAA,m 05.0B
Lres at FAA,m
Lres at FAA,m 05.0C No
Counter 1
Counter 1 05.60
Counter 2
Counter 2 05.61
Counter 3
Counter 3 05.62
Counter 4
Counter 4 05.63
Counter 5
Counter 5 05.64
Counter 6
Counter 6 05.65
Counter 7
Counter 7 05.66
Counter 8
Counter 8 05.67
Counter 9
Counter 9 05.68
Counter 10 05.69 Counter 10
B18 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Counter 11
Counter 11 05.6A
Counter 12
Counter 12 05.6B
Counter 13
Counter 13 05.6C
Counter 14
Counter 14 05.6D
Counter 15
Counter 15 05.6E
Counter 16
Counter 16 05.6F
Reset Counter1 05.80
Reset Counter11 05.8A
Reset Counter12 05.8B
Reset Counter13 05.8C
Reset Counter14 05.8D
Reset Counter15 05.8E
Reset Counter16 05.8F
CB CONDITION 06.00
CB Operations
CB Operations 06.01
[Unsigned Integer]
Total IA Broken 06.02 Total IA Broken
P345-AD-EN-1 B19

DESCRIPTION
Total IB Broken
Total IB Broken 06.03
Total IC Broken
Total IC Broken 06.04
CB Operate Time
CB Operate Time 06.05
CB Close Time
CB Close Time 06.06
Reset CB Data 06.07 No
CB CONTROL 07.00
CB Control by 07.01 Disabled
[Indexed String]
From 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.01

Close Pulse Time 07.02 0.5
[Courier Number (time-seconds)]

Trip Pulse Time 07.03 0.5

Man Close Delay 07.05 10
Manual Close Delay
CB Healthy Time 07.06 5

Sys Check Time 07.07 5
Lockout Reset 07.08 No
0 or 1
Reset Lockout by 07.09 CB Close
[Indexed String]

Man Close RstDly 07.0A 1
Manual Close Reset Delay
CB Status Input 07.11 None
[Indexed String]
DATE AND TIME 08.00
Date/Time 08.01
Battery Status
Battery Status 08.06
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Battery Alarm 08.07 Enabled
[Indexed String]
Primary Source 08.08 PTP
[Indexed String]
B20 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Sets the primary time synchronisation source
Secondary Source 08.09 None
[Indexed String]
Sets the secondary time synchronisation source
Domain Number 08.0F 0
[Integers]
Assigns the PTP domain number. A domain is grouping of PTP clocks that synchronise to each other on a network.
This provides a way of implementing independent synchronisation of PTP clocks on a shared network
Act. Time Source
Act. Time Source 08.10
[Indexed String]
Displays the active time synchronisation source being used.
‘Free Running’ means the IED is not synchronised with any normal time-server, including IRIG-B, PTP or SNTP. The IED relies solely on its internal
clock.
IRIG-B Status
IRIG-B Status 08.11
[Indexed String]
Displays the status of IRIG-B
PTP Status
PTP Status 08.12
[Indexed String]
IEC61850 or DNP3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Displays the status of PTP time synchronisation
No Master Found = No PTP master can be found, the IED has not received a valid ‘Announce’ message.
Illegal Master = Master clock is not valid, typically this will occur when the clock is not using the correct epoch
Valid Master = At least valid one master clock is available
SNTP Status
SNTP Status 08.13
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
IRIG-B Type 08.1F UTC
[Indexed String]
Determines if IRIG-B Type is UTC or Local.
LocalTime Enable 08.20 Disabled
[Indexed String]
From -720 to 720 in steps of 15

LocalTime Offset 08.21 0
[Courier Number (Time Minutes)]
0 or 1
DST Enable 08.22 Disabled
[Indexed String]
30 or 60
DST Offset 08.23 60
DST Start 08.24 Last
[Indexed String]
DST Start Day 08.25 Sunday
[Indexed String]
DST Start Month 08.26 March
[Indexed String]

DST Start Mins 08.27 60
DST End 08.28 Last
[Indexed String]
DST End Day 08.29 Sunday
[Indexed String]
P345-AD-EN-1 B21

DESCRIPTION
DST End Month 08.2A October
[Indexed String]

DST End Mins 08.2B 60
0 or 1
RP1 Time Zone 08.30 Local
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
RP2 Time Zone 08.31 Local
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
DNPOE Time Zone 08.32 Local
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Tunnel Time Zone 08.33 Local
[Indexed String]
CONFIGURATION 09.00
Restore Defaults 09.01 No Operation
0 or 1
Setting Group 09.02 Select via Menu
[Indexed String]
Active Settings 09.03 Group 1
[Indexed String]
Save Changes 09.04 No Operation
Copy From 09.05 Group 1
[Indexed String]
Copy To 09.06 No Operation
0 or 1
Setting Group 1 09.07 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Setting Group 2 09.08 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Setting Group 3 09.09 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Setting Group 4 09.0A Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
System Config 09.0B Visible
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Power 09.0C Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Field Failure 09.0D Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
NPS Thermal 09.0E Enabled
[Indexed String]
B22 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
System Backup 09.0F Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Overcurrent 09.10 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Thermal Overload 09.11 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Differential 09.12 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Earth Fault 09.13 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Rotor EF 09.14 Enabled
[Indexed String]
Disabled From 0 to 2 in steps of 1

SEF/REF/SPower 09.15
SEF/REF [Indexed String]
0 or 1
Residual O/V NVD 09.16 Enabled
[Indexed String]
Residual Overvoltage
Disabled 0 or 1
100% Stator EF 09.17
Enabled [Indexed String]
0 or 1
V/Hz 09.18 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
df/dt 09.19 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Dead Machine 09.1B Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Volt Protection 09.1D Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Freq Protection 09.1E Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
RTD Inputs 09.1F Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
CB Fail 09.20 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Supervision 09.21 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Pole Slipping 09.24 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Input Labels 09.25 Visible
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Output Labels 09.26 Visible
[Indexed String]
P345-AD-EN-1 B23

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
RTD Labels 09.27 Visible
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
CT & VT Ratios 09.28 Visible
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Record Control 09.29 Visible
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Disturb Recorder 09.2A Visible
[Indexed String]
Disturbance recorder
0 or 1
Measure't Setup 09.2B Visible
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Comms Settings 09.2C Visible
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Commission Tests 09.2D Visible
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Setting Values 09.2E Primary
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Control Inputs 09.2F Visible
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
CLIO inputs 09.30 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
CLIO outputs 09.31 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
System Checks 09.33 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Ctrl I/P Config 09.35 Visible
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Ctrl I/P Labels 09.36 Visible
[Indexed String]
From 0/0 to 3/1 in steps of 1/1

Direct Access 09.39 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Function Key 09.50 Visible
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
RP1 Read Only 09.FB Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
RP2 Read Only 09.FC Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
NIC Read Only 09.FD Disabled
[Indexed String]
LCD Contrast 09.FF 11 From 0 to 31 in steps of 1
B24 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
CT AND VT RATIOS 0A.00

Values for multipliers used else where
Main VT Primary 0A.12 110
Label V1=Main VT Rating/110
From 80*V1 to 140*V1 in steps of 1*V1
Main VT Sec'y 0A.13 110
Label M1=[0A12]/[0A13]
C/S VT Primary 0A.16 110
Label Vcs=C/S VT Rating/110
C/S VT Sec'y 0A.17 110
Label Mcs=[0A16]/[0A17]
VN VT Primary/VN1 VT From 100 to 1000000 in steps of 1
0A.22 110
Primary [Courier Number (Voltage)]
Neutral Displacement VT Primary. Label V3=Neutral Disp VT Rating/110
VN VT Secondary/VN1 From 80*V3 to 140*V3 in steps of 1*V3
0A.23 110
VT Secondary [Courier Number (Voltage)]
Neutral Displacement VT Secondary. Label M3=[0A22]/[0A23]
VN2 VT Primary 0A.27 110
Second NVD VT. Label V2=VN2 VT Rating/110
VN2 VT Secondary 0A.28 110
Second NVD VT. Label M2=[0A27]/[0A28]
Ph CT Polarity\Ph CT1 0 or 1
0A.31 Standard
Polarity [Indexed String]
Polarity of phase CT group (3 phase)
Phase CT
Primary\Phase CT1 0A.32 300
Primary
I1=Phase CT1 secondary rating
Phase CT Sec'y\Phase 1 or 5
0A.33 1
CT1 Sec'y [Courier Number (Current)]
Label M4=[0A32]/[0A33]
0 or 1
Ph CT2 Polarity 0A.36 Standard
[Indexed String]
Polarity of phase CT2 group (3 phase)
Phase CT2 Prim'y 0A.37 300
I4=Phase CT2 secondary rating
1 or 5
Phase CT2 Sec'y 0A.38 1
Label M7=[0A37]/[0A38]
0 or 1
E/F CT Polarity 0A.51 Standard
[Indexed String]
Polarity of E/F (IN1) CT
E/F CT Primary 0A.52 1
Label I2=E/F CT secondary rating
1 or 5
E/F CT Secondary 0A.53 1
Label M5=[0A52]/[0A53]
0 or 1
Isen CT Polarity 0A.61 Standard
[Indexed String]
Polarity of SEF (Isen) CT
P345-AD-EN-1 B25

DESCRIPTION
Isen CT Primary 0A.62 1
Label I3=SEF CT secondary rating
1 or 5
Isen CT Sec'y 0A.63 1
Label M6=[0A62]/[0A63]
RECORD CONTROL 0B.00
0 or 1
Alarm Event 0B.04 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Relay O/P Event 0B.05 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Opto Input Event 0B.06 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
General Event 0B.07 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Fault Rec Event 0B.08 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Maint Rec Event 0B.09 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Protection Event 0B.0A Enabled
[Indexed String]
From 0xFFFFFFFF to 32 in steps of 1

DDB 31 - 0 0B.40 0xFFFFFFFF
[Binary Flag (32 bits)]









B26 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
DDB 351 - 320 0B.4A 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 383 - 352 0B.4B 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 415 - 384 0B.4C 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 447 - 416 0B.4D 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 479 - 448 0B.4E 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 511 - 480 0B.4F 0xFFFFFFFF











DDB 863 - 832 0B.5A 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 895 - 864 0B.5B 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 927 - 896 0B.5C 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 959 - 928 0B.5D 0xFFFFFFFF
P345-AD-EN-1 B27

DESCRIPTION

DDB 991 - 960 0B.5E 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 1023 - 992 0B.5F 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 1055-1024 0B.60 0xFFFFFFFF


DDB 1119-1088 0B.62 0x7FFFFFFF








DDB 1375-1344 0B.6A 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 1407-1376 0B.6B 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 1439-1408 0B.6C 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 1471-1440 0B.6D 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 1503-1472 0B.6E 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 1535-1504 0B.6F 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 1599-1568 0B.71 0xFFFFFFFF From 0xFFFFFFFF to 32 in steps of 1
B28 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION









DDB 1887-1856 0B.7A 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 1919-1888 0B.7B 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 1951-1920 0B.7C 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 1983-1952 0B.7D 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 2015-1984 0B.7E 0xFFFFFFFF

DDB 2047-2016 0B.7F 0xFFFFFFFF
DISTURB RECORDER 0C.00

DISTURBANCE RECORDER
From 0.1 to 10.5 in steps of 0.01
Duration 0C.52 1.5
From 0 to 100 in steps of 0.1

Trigger Position 0C.54 33.3
Trigger Mode 0C.56 Single
From 0 to ** in steps of 1
Analog Channel 1 0C.58 VAN
[Indexed String]
** Max = 7 for P341, 8 for P342; 11 for P343, 12 for P344, 14 for P345
Analog Channel 2 0C.59 VBN
[Indexed String]
P345-AD-EN-1 B29

DESCRIPTION
Analog Channel 3 0C.5A VCN
[Indexed String]
Analog Channel 4 0C.5B VN1
[Indexed String]
Analog Channel 5 0C.5C IA (IA-1)
[Indexed String]
Analog Channel 6 0C.5D IB (IB-1)
[Indexed String]
Analog Channel 7 0C.5E IC (IC-1)
[Indexed String]
Analog Channel 8 0C.5F I Sensitive
[Indexed String]
Analog Channel 9 0C.60 IN
[Indexed String]
AnalogChannel 10 0C.61 IA-2
[Indexed String]
AnalogChannel 11 0C.62 IB-2
[Indexed String]
AnalogChannel 12 0C.63 IC-2
[Indexed String]
AnalogChannel 13 0C.64 VN2
[Indexed String]
AnalogChannel 14 0C.65 V64S
[Indexed String]
AnalogChannel 15 0C.66 I64S
[Indexed String]
AnalogChannel 16 0C.67 Not used
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
AnalogChannel 19 0C.6A Not used
[Indexed String]
AnalogChannel 20 0C.6B Not used
[Indexed String]
From 0 to DDB Size in steps of 1

Digital Input 1 0C.80 Output R1
[Indexed String]
Input 1 Trigger 0C.81 No Trigger From 0 to 2 in steps of 1
B30 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]
Input 2 Trigger 0C.83 No Trigger
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]
Input 3 Trigger 0C.85 Trigger L/H
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]

Digital Input 6 0C.8A Output R6
[Indexed String]
Input 6 Trigger 0C.8B No Trigger
[Indexed String]

Digital Input 7 0C.8C Output R7
[Indexed String]
Input 7 Trigger 0C.8D No Trigger
[Indexed String]
Input L1 From 0 to DDB Size in steps of 1

Digital Input 8 0C.8E
Output R8 [Indexed String]
Input 8 Trigger 0C.8F No Trigger
[Indexed String]

Digital Input 9 0C.90
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]

P345-AD-EN-1 B31

DESCRIPTION
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]

Digital Input 14 0C.9A
Input 14 Trigger 0C.9B No Trigger
[Indexed String]

Digital Input 15 0C.9C
Input L1 [Indexed String]
Input 15 Trigger 0C.9D No Trigger
[Indexed String]
Unused From 0 to DDB Size in steps of 1

Digital Input 16 0C.9E
Input 16 Trigger 0C.9F No Trigger
[Indexed String]

Digital Input 17 0C.A0
Input 17 Trigger 0C.A1 No Trigger
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]

B32 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
[Indexed String]

Digital Input 22 0C.AA
Input 22 Trigger 0C.AB No Trigger
[Indexed String]

Digital Input 23 0C.AC
Input 23 Trigger 0C.AD No Trigger
[Indexed String]

Digital Input 24 0C.AE
Input 24 Trigger 0C.AF No Trigger
[Indexed String]

Digital Input 25 0C.B0
Input 25 Trigger 0C.B1 No Trigger
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]

Digital Input 30 0C.BA
Input 30 Trigger 0C.BB No Trigger
[Indexed String]
Digital Input 31 0C.BC Unused From 0 to DDB Size in steps of 1
P345-AD-EN-1 B33

DESCRIPTION
Function Key 10 [Indexed String]
No Trigger From 0 to 2 in steps of 1

Input 31 Trigger 0C.BD
Trigger L/H [Indexed String]

Digital Input 32 0C.BE Unused
[Indexed String]
Input 32 Trigger 0C.BF No Trigger
[Indexed String]
MEASURE'T SETUP 0D.00

MEASUREMENT SETTINGS
Default Display
Default Display 0D.01 Description
[Indexed String]
This cell is used to show the default display option
0 or 1
Local Values 0D.02 Primary
[Indexed String]
Local Measurement Values
0 or 1
Remote Values 0D.03 Primary
[Indexed String]
Remote Measurement Values
Measurement Ref 0D.04 VA
[Indexed String]
Measurement Phase Reference
Measurement Mode 0D.05 0
[Unsigned Integer]
Fix Dem Period 0D.06 15
Fixed Demand Interval
Roll Sub Period 0D.07 1
Rolling demand sub period
Num Sub Periods 0D.08 15
[Unsigned Integer]
Number of rolling sub-periods
0 or 1
Remote 2 Values 0D.0B Primary
[Indexed String]
Remote 2 Measurement Values. Visible when Model no. Hardware option (Field 7) = 7 or 8
COMMUNICATIONS 0E.00
RP1 Protocol
RP1 Protocol 0E.01
[Indexed String]

RP1 Address 0E.02 1
Rear Port 1 Courier Protocol device address
RP1 Address 0E.02 1
Rear Port 1 Modbus Protocol device address
RP1 Address 0E.02 1
Rear Port 1 IEC60870-5-103 Protocol device address
RP1 Address 0E.02 1
Rear Port 1 DNP 3.0 Protocol device address
RP1 InactivTimer 0E.03 15
B34 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Rear Port 1 Courier Protocol inactivity timer
Rear Port 1 Modbus Protocol inactivity timer
Rear Port 1 IEC60870-5-103 Protocol inactivity timer
RP1 Baud Rate 0E.04 19200 bits/s
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 1 Modbus Protcol serial bit/baud rate
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 1 IEC60870-5-103 Protcol serial bit/baud rate
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 1 DNP 3.0 Protcol serial bit/baud rate
RP1 Parity 0E.05 None
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 1 Modbus Protocol parity
RP1 Parity 0E.05 None
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 1 DNP 3.0 Protocol parity
RP1 Meas Period 0E.06 15
[Courier Number (Time)]
Rear Port 1 IEC60870-5-103 Protocol measurment period
0 or 1
RP1 PhysicalLink 0E.07 Copper
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 1 Physical link selector. Available when Fibre Optic Comms card is specified by model number
0 or 1
RP1 Time Sync 0E.08 Disabled
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 1 DNP 3.0 Protocol time sync configuration. NB Not available when IRIG-B option fitted and enabled.
0 or 1
Modbus IEC Time 0E.09 Standard
[Indexed String]
Controls the format of the time-date G12 data type. Modbus Only.
RP1 CS103Blcking 0E.0A Disabled
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 1 IEC60870-5-103 Protocol blocking configuration
RP1 Card Status
RP1 Card Status 0E.0B
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 1 Courier Protocol Status
0 or 1
RP1 Port Config 0E.0C K-Bus
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 1 Courier Protocol copper port configuration; K-Bus or EIA485
0 or 1
RP1 Comms Mode 0E.0D IEC60870 FT1.2
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 1 Courier Protocol EIA485 mode
RP1 Baud Rate 0E.0E 19200 bits/s
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 1 Courier Protocol EIA485 bit/baud rate
DNP Need Time 0E.11 10

DNP App Fragment 0E.12 2048
[Unsigned Integer]

DNP App Timeout 0E.13 2
DNP SBO Timeout 0E.14 10 From 1 to 10 in steps of 1
P345-AD-EN-1 B35

DESCRIPTION

DNP Link Timeout 0E.15 0
0 or 1
Class 0 Poll 0E.16 Running Counters
[Indexed String]
Used for DNP3 serial only.
When set the cell to “Running Counters”, the IED will only report the static counters (object 20) in class 0 responses. Otherwise if set to “Frozen
Counters”, the IED will only report the frozen counters (object 21) in class 0 responses.
NIC Protocol
NIC Protocol 0E.1F IEC61850
[Indexed String]
NIC MAC Address

NIC MAC Address 0E.22 Ethernet MAC Addr
[ASCII Text (17 chars)]
NIC Tunl Timeout 0E.64 5.00 min
[Courier Number (time-minutes)]
NIC Link Report 0E.6A Alarm
REAR PORT2 (RP2) 0E.80

Visible when Rear Port 2 fitted.
RP2 Protocol
RP2 Protocol 0E.81 Courier
Rear Port 2 Protocol - "Courier"
RP2 Card Status
RP2 Card Status 0E.84
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 2 Courier Protocol Status
RP2 Port Config 0E.88 EIA232 (RS232)
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 2 Courier Protocol port configuration; K-Bus or EIA485
0 or 1
RP2 Comms Mode 0E.8A IEC60870 FT1.2
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 2 Courier Protocol EIA485 mode
RP2 Address 0E.90 255
Rear Port 2 Courier Protocol device address
Rear Port 2 Courier Protocol inactivity timer
[Indexed String]
Rear Port 2 Courier Protocol EIA485 bit/baud rate
NIC Protocol
NIC Protocol 0E.A0 DNP3
[Indexed String]
IP address
IP address 0E.A1 0.0.0.0
Subnet mask
Subnet mask 0E.A2 0.0.0.0
NIC MAC Address

NIC MAC Address 0E.A3 Ethernet MAC Addr
Gateway
Gateway 0E.A4 0.0.0.0
[ASCII Text]
B36 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
DNP Time Sync 0E.A5 Disabled
[Indexed String]
Meas Scaling 0E.A6 Normalised
[Indexed String]
NIC Tunl Timeout 0E.A7 5 mins
NIC Link Report 0E.A8 Alarm
[Indexed String]
SNTP PARAMETERS 0E.AA
SNTP Server 1
SNTP Server 1 0E.AB 0.0.0.0
SNTP Server 2
SNTP Server 2 0E.AC 0.0.0.0
[Indexed String]
SNTP Poll Rate

SNTP Poll Rate 0E.AD 64 s
DNP Need Time 0E.B1 10
The duration of time waited before requesting another time sync from the master
DNP App Fragment 0E.B2 2048
[Unsigned Integer]
The maximum message length (application fragment size) transmitted by the relay
DNP App Timeout 0E.B3 2
Duration of time waited, after sending a message fragment and awaiting a confirmation from the master
DNP SBO Timeout 0E.B4 10
Duration of time waited, after receiving a select command and awaiting an operate confirmation from the master
0 or 1
Class 0 Poll 0E.B5 Running Counters
[Indexed String]
Used for DNP3 over Ethernet only.
When set the cell to “Running Counters”, the IED will only report the static counters (object 20) in class 0 responses. Otherwise if set to “Frozen
Counters”, the IED will only report the frozen counters (object 21) in class 0 responses.
SYSLOG 0E.BA
From 0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255 in steps of 1

SysLog Pri IP 0E.BB 0.0.0.0
[IP Parameters]
External Security Log Server 1 configured to monitor security logging message on the network.
Setting this cell to 0.0.0.0 disables sending security logging message to Security Log Server 1.
SysLog Sec IP 0E.BC 0.0.0.0
[IP Parameters]
External Security Log Server 2 configured to monitor security logging message on the network.
Setting this cell to 0.0.0.0 disables sending security logging message to Security Log Server 2
SysLog Port 0E.BD 514
The destination UDP/IP port sent to both Primary and Secondary Syslog servers.
SysLog Status
SysLog Status 0E.BE Disabled
[Indexed String]
SNMP PARAMETERS 0E.C0

SNMP specific parameters heading.
P345-AD-EN-1 B37

DESCRIPTION
SNMP Version 0E.C1 V2C and V3
[Indexed String]
Selection for the main processor SNMP version interface. Selecting ‘None’ disables this SNMP interface.
Trap Dest. IP1 0E.C2 0.0.0.0
Trap destination 1 IP for the main processor SNMP version interface. This is set to the SNMP manager IP address.
Setting this cell to 0.0.0.0 disables this Trap interface
Trap Dest. IP2 0E.C3 0.0.0.0
Trap destination 2 IP for the main processor SNMP version interface. This is set to the SNMP manager IP address.
Setting this cell to 0.0.0.0 disables this Trap interface
SNMPv3 Security 0E.C4
SNMP v3 specific parameters heading.
User Name 0E.C5 ReadOnlyUserName
[ASCII Text]
SNMP v3 user name. Can be edited to a custom value of up to 16 characters.
Security Level 0E.C6 AuthNoPriv
[Indexed String]
Sets the SNMP v3 security level.
There levels of security are defined by the SNMP standard:

0 - Without authentication and without privacy (noAuthNoPriv)
1 - With authentication but without privacy (AuthNoPriv)
2 - With authentication and with privacy (AuthPriv)
Authentication is used to check the identity of users, Privacy allows for encryption of SNMP messages.
Both Authentication and Privacy are optional, however if Privacy is used, then the security model used by the IED MUST protect the SNMP
message from disclosure, i.e., it MUST encrypt/decrypt the messages.
0 or 1
Auth Protocol 0E.C7 HMAC-MD5-96
[Indexed String]
SNMP v3 Authentication Protocol. Sets the hash-based message authentication code function used for the authentication of messages.
MD5 – Is a Message Digest implementation

SHA – Is a Secure Hash Algorithm implementation
SHA is considered cryptographically stronger that MD5, but takes a longer time to compute. Both implementations are considered secure. The
SNMP Manager and the IED must use the same Authentication Protocol.
Auth Password 0E.C8 AAAAAAAA
[ASCII Password (8)]
SNMP v3 authentication password. Can be edited to a custom value with a fixed length of 8 characters.
Encrypt Protocol 0E.C9 CBC-DES
[Indexed String]
SNMP v3 encryption protocol. Cannot be changed.
Encrypt Password 0E.CA BBBBBBBB
SNMP v3 encryption password used for privacy. Can be edited to a custom value with a fixed length of 8 characters.
SNMPv2c Security 0E.D1
SNMP v2c specific parameters heading.
Community Name 0E.D2 CCCCCCCC
SNMP v2c community name, used for authentication between the SNMP manager and the IED. Can be edited to a custom value of 1-8
characters.
The community name setting must be the same in both the SNMP Manager and the IED.
COMMISSION TESTS 0F.00
Opto I/P Status

Opto I/P Status 0F.01
The original register 30007 is available for Opto Inputs #1 to #16.
B38 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Relay O/P Status
Relay O/P Status 0F.02
Test Port Status

Test Port Status 0F.03
[Binary Flag(8 bits); Indexed String]

Monitor Bit 1 0F.05 64
[Unsigned Integer]

[Unsigned Integer]

[Unsigned Integer]

[Unsigned Integer]

[Unsigned Integer]

Monitor Bit 6 0F.0A 69
[Unsigned Integer]

Monitor Bit 7 0F.0B 70
[Unsigned Integer]

Monitor Bit 8 0F.0C 71
[Unsigned Integer]
IED Test Mode 0F.0D Disabled
[Indexed String]
The IED Test Mode menu cell is used to allow online testing to be performed on the IED without operation of the trip contacts. It also enables a
facility to directly test the output contacts by applying menu controlled test signals.
This setting influences the processing of GOOSE and control service frames with an IEC61850 Test mode flag.
To select test mode the IED Test Mode menu cell should be set to ‘Test’, which takes the IED out of service. It also causes an alarm condition to
be recorded and the yellow ‘Out of Service’ LED to illuminate. In IEC 60870-5-103 builds changes the Cause of Transmission, COT, to Test Mode.
In IED Test Mode, only GOOSE messages and control service commands with a quality flat set to "test" will be processed as valid .
To enable testing of output contacts the IED Test Mode cell should be set to Contacts Blocked. This blocks the protection from operating the
contacts and enables the test pattern and contact test functions which can be used to manually operate the output contacts. This mode also
blocks maintenance, counters and freezes any information stored in the Circuit Breaker Condition column. Also in IEC 60870-5-103 builds
changes the Cause of Transmission, COT, to Test Mode. In Contacts Blocked Mode, only GOOSE messages and control service commands with a
quality flat set to "test" will be processed as valid.
Once testing is complete the cell must be set back to ‘Disabled’ to restore the IED back to service
The following IEC 61850 Mode definitions apply for the different settings:
0 = Disabled Mod = 1 (On)
1 = Test Mod = 3 (Test)
2 = Contacts Blocked Mod = 4 (Test/blocked)
Note: The cell ‘Test Mode’ used in software prior to IEC 61850 edition 2 has been renamed as ‘IED Test Mode’
Test Pattern 0F.0E 0
[Binary Flag (32bits)]
This cell is used to select the output relay contacts that will be tested when the ‘Contact Test’ cell is set to ‘Apply Test’.
Contact Test 0F.0F No Operation
When the ‘Apply Test’ command in this cell is issued the contacts set for operation (set to ‘1’) in the ‘Test Pattern’ cell change state. After the
test has been applied the command text on the LCD will change to ‘No Operation’ and the contacts will remain in the Test State until reset
P345-AD-EN-1 B39

DESCRIPTION
issuing the ‘Remove Test’ command. The command text on the LCD will again revert to ‘No Operation’ after the ‘Remove Test’ command has
been issued.
Note: When the ‘Test Mode’ cell is set to ‘Enabled’ the ‘Relay O/P Status’ cell does not show the current status of the output relays and hence
can not be used to confirm operation of the output relays. Therefore it will be necessary to monitor the state of each contact in turn.
Test LEDs 0F.10 No Operation
Red LED Status

Red LED Status 0F.15
Green LED Status

Green LED Status 0F.16
IED Mod/Beh
IED Mod/Beh 0F.1E
[Indexed String]
Indicates the current Mod/Beh status of whole IED
0 or 1
Subscriber Sim 0F.1F Disabled
[Indexed String]
Used to enable/disable the 'subscriber simulation' feature, for Sampled Values and GOOSE subscriptions
DDB 31 - 0
DDB 31 - 0 0F.20
[Binary Flag(32)]
See DDB definition table.
DDB 63 - 32
DDB 63 - 32 0F.21
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 95 - 64
DDB 95 - 64 0F.22
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 127 - 96
DDB 127 - 96 0F.23
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 159 - 128

DDB 159 - 128 0F.24
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 191 - 160

DDB 191 - 160 0F.25
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 223 - 192

DDB 223 - 192 0F.26
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 255 - 224

DDB 255 - 224 0F.27
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 287 - 256

DDB 287 - 256 0F.28
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 319 - 288

DDB 319 - 288 0F.29
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 351 - 320

DDB 351 - 320 0F.2A
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 383 - 352

DDB 383 - 352 0F.2B
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 415 - 384

DDB 415 - 384 0F.2C
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 447 - 416

DDB 447 - 416 0F.2D
[Binary Flag(32)]
B40 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
DDB 479 - 448

DDB 479 - 448 0F.2E
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 511 - 480

DDB 511 - 480 0F.2F
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 543 - 512

DDB 543 - 512 0F.30
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 575 - 544

DDB 575 - 544 0F.31
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 607 - 576

DDB 607 - 576 0F.32
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 639 - 608

DDB 639 - 608 0F.33
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 671 - 640

DDB 671 - 640 0F.34
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 703 - 672

DDB 703 - 672 0F.35
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 735 - 704

DDB 735 - 704 0F.36
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 767 - 736

DDB 767 - 736 0F.37
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 799 - 768

DDB 799 - 768 0F.38
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 831 - 800

DDB 831 - 800 0F.39
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 863 - 832

DDB 863 - 832 0F.3A
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 895 - 864

DDB 895 - 864 0F.3B
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 927 - 896

DDB 927 - 896 0F.3C
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 959 - 928

DDB 959 - 928 0F.3D
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 991 - 960

DDB 991 - 960 0F.3E
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1023 - 992

DDB 1023 - 992 0F.3F
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1055-1024
DDB 1055-1024 0F.40
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1087-1056 0F.41 DDB 1087-1056
P345-AD-EN-1 B41

DESCRIPTION
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1119-1088
DDB 1119-1088 0F.42
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1151-1120
DDB 1151-1120 0F.43
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1183-1152
DDB 1183-1152 0F.44
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1215-1184
DDB 1215-1184 0F.45
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1247-1216
DDB 1247-1216 0F.46
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1279-1248
DDB 1279-1248 0F.47
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1311-1280
DDB 1311-1280 0F.48
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1343-1312
DDB 1343-1312 0F.49
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1375-1344
DDB 1375-1344 0F.4A
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1407-1376
DDB 1407-1376 0F.4B
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1439-1408
DDB 1439-1408 0F.4C
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1471-1440
DDB 1471-1440 0F.4D
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1503-1472
DDB 1503-1472 0F.4E
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1535-1504
DDB 1535-1504 0F.4F
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1567-1536
DDB 1567-1536 0F.50
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1599-1568
DDB 1599-1568 0F.51
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1631-1600
DDB 1631-1600 0F.52
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1663-1632
DDB 1663-1632 0F.53
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1695-1664
DDB 1695-1664 0F.54
[Binary Flag(32)]
B42 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
DDB 1727-1696
DDB 1727-1696 0F.55
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1759-1728
DDB 1759-1728 0F.56
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1791-1760
DDB 1791-1760 0F.57
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1823-1792
DDB 1823-1792 0F.58
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1855-1824
DDB 1855-1824 0F.59
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1887-1856
DDB 1887-1856 0F.5A
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1919-1888
DDB 1919-1888 0F.5B
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1951-1920
DDB 1951-1920 0F.5C
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 1983-1952
DDB 1983-1952 0F.5D
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 2015-1984
DDB 2015-1984 0F.5E
[Binary Flag(32)]
DDB 2047-2016
DDB 2047-2016 0F.5F
[Binary Flag(32)]
CB MONITOR SETUP 10.00

Broken I^ 10.01 2
Broken Current Index ( CT1 I-RMS for P348 only and it will use IA-1, IB-1, IC-1 for P341-P346)
0 or 1
I^ Maintenance 10.02 Alarm Disabled
[Indexed String]
Broken Current to cause maintenance alarm ( CT1 I-RMS for P348 only and it will use IA-1, IB-1, IC-1 for P341-P346)
I^ Maintenance 10.03 1000
IX Maintenance Alarm ( CT1 I-RMS for P348 only and it will use IA-1, IB-1, IC-1 for P341-P346)
0 or 1
I^ Lockout 10.04 Alarm Disabled
[Indexed String]
Broken Current to cause lockout alarm ( CT1 I-RMS for P348 only and it will use IA-1, IB-1, IC-1 for P341-P346)
I^ Lockout 10.05 2000
IX Maintenance Lockout ( CT1 I-RMS for P348 only and it will use IA-1, IB-1, IC-1 for P341-P346)
0 or 1
No. CB Ops Maint 10.06 Alarm Disabled
[Indexed String]
Circuit Breaker Trips to cause maintenance alarm
No. CB Ops Maint 10.07 10
[Unsigned Integer]
Number of Circuit Breaker Trips for maintenance alarm
0 or 1
No. CB Ops Lock 10.08 Alarm Disabled
[Indexed String]
Circuit Breaker Trips to cause lockout alarm
P345-AD-EN-1 B43

DESCRIPTION
No. CB Ops Lock 10.09 20
[Unsigned Integer]
Number of Circuit Breaker Trips for lockout alarm
0 or 1
CB Time Maint 10.0A Alarm Disabled
[Indexed String]
Circuit Breaker Operating Time to cause maintenance alarm
CB Time Maint 10.0B 0.1
Circuit Breaker Operating time for maintenance alarm
0 or 1
CB Time Lockout 10.0C Alarm Disabled
[Indexed String]
Circuit Breaker Operating Time to cause lockout alarm
CB Time Lockout 10.0D 0.2
Circuit Breaker Operating time for lockout alarm
0 or 1
Fault Freq Lock 10.0E Alarm Disabled
[Indexed String]
Excessive fault frequency
Fault Freq Count 10.0F 10
[Unsigned Integer]
Excessive Fault Frequency Counter
Fault Freq Time 10.10 3600
Excessive Fault Frequency Time
OPTO CONFIG 11.00
Visible for Model Number design suffix 'B' and beyond
Global Nominal V 11.01 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Select Custom to select individual Opto . Threshold Voltages
Opto Input 1 11.02 48/54V
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 9 11.0A 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 10 11.0B 48/54V
[Indexed String]
B44 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Opto Input 11 11.0C 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 12 11.0D 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 13 11.0E 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 14 11.0F 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 15 11.10 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 16 11.11 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 17 11.12 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 18 11.13 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 19 11.14 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 20 11.15 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 21 11.16 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 22 11.17 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 23 11.18 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 24 11.19 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 25 11.1A 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 26 11.1B 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 27 11.1C 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 28 11.1D 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 29 11.1E 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 30 11.1F 48/54V
[Indexed String]
P345-AD-EN-1 B45

DESCRIPTION
Opto Input 31 11.20 48/54V
[Indexed String]
Opto Input 32 11.21 48/54V
[Indexed String]
From 0x00000000 to 0xFFFFFFFF in steps of 1

Opto Filter Ctrl 11.50 0xFFFFFFFF
Opto filter configuration
0 or 1
Characteristic 11.80 Standard 60%-80%
[Indexed String]
Opto input pickup & drop-off threshold. Applicable to design suffix "J" or better.
CONTROL INPUTS 12.00
Ctrl I/P Status 12.01
Control Input 1 12.02 No Operation
Control Input 9 12.0A No Operation
Control Input 10 12.0B No Operation
Control Input 11 12.0C No Operation
Control Input 12 12.0D No Operation
Control Input 13 12.0E No Operation
Control Input 14 12.0F No Operation
B46 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Control Input 25 12.1A No Operation
Control Input 26 12.1B No Operation
Control Input 27 12.1C No Operation
Control Input 28 12.1D No Operation
Control Input 29 12.1E No Operation
Control Input 30 12.1F No Operation
CTRL I/P CONFIG 13.00

Hotkey Enabled 13.01 0xFFFFFFFF
Hotkey Menu - Control Input availability
0 or 1
Control Input 1 13.10 Latched
[Indexed String]
Individual Control Input Type
Ctrl Command 1 13.11 SET/RESET
[Indexed String]
Individual Control Input Command Text
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Control Input 4 13.1C Latched
[Indexed String]
Ctrl Command 4 13.1D SET/RESET
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
Control Input 6 13.24 Latched 0 or 1
P345-AD-EN-1 B47

DESCRIPTION
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
B48 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
P345-AD-EN-1 B49

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
FUNCTION KEYS 17.00
Fn Key Status
Fn Key Status 17.01 0
Fn Key 1 17.02 Unlocked
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Fn Key 1 Mode 17.03 Toggled
[Indexed String]

Fn Key 1 Label 17.04 Function Key 1
[Indexed String]
B50 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
Fn Key 2 Mode 17.06 Normal
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]

Fn Key 3 Label 17.0A Function Key 3
Fn Key 4 17.0B Unlocked
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Fn Key 4 Mode 17.0C Toggled
[Indexed String]

Fn Key 4 Label 17.0D Function Key 4
Fn Key 5 17.0E Unlocked
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Fn Key 5 Mode 17.0F Toggled
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Fn Key 6 Mode 17.12 Toggled
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
Fn Key 8 Label 17.19 Function Key 8 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1
P345-AD-EN-1 B51

DESCRIPTION
Fn Key 9 17.1A Unlocked
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Fn Key 9 Mode 17.1B Normal
[Indexed String]

Fn Key 9 Label 17.1C Function Key 9
Fn Key 10 17.1D Unlocked
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Fn Key 10 Mode 17.1E Normal
[Indexed String]

Fn Key 10 Label 17.1F Function Key 10
IEC61850 CONFIG 19.00
Switch Conf.Bank 19.05 No Action
Restore MCL 19.0A No Action
Active Conf.Name
Active Conf.Name 19.10 Not Available
[Courier Number]
Active Conf.Rev
Active Conf.Rev 19.11 Not Available
[ASCII Text]
Active Conf.Ed
Active Conf.Ed 19.12 Not Available
[ASCII Text]
IEC61850 Active Configuration Edition
Inact.Conf.Name
Inact.Conf.Name 19.20 Not Available
[ASCII Text]
Inact.Conf.Rev
Inact.Conf.Rev 19.21 Not Available
[ASCII Text]
Inact.Conf.Ed
Inact.Conf.Ed 19.22 Not Available
[ASCII Text]
IEC61850 Inactive Configuration Edition
0 or 1
IP From HMI 19.2F Disabled
[Indexed String]
When set to Enabled the IP Address, Subnet Mask & Gateway may be configured via the HMI. When set to Disabled these parameters may only
be set using the .MCL file.
This setting allows for an Ethernet connection to be established with the relay without needing to first send a .MCL file via the serial port. Once a
connection has been established the correct .MCL can be sent via Ethernet and this setting can be changed back to “Disabled”.
Note: You can enable this feature when you use the IED for the first time. However, the IED will at this point not have an active MCL file and any
data model extracted from IEC 61850 may not be correct. Therefore, to prevent any issues you should send a correct MCL file to the IED after a
connection is first established.
IP PARAMETERS 19.30
IEC61850 versions only.
IP Address
IP Address 19.31 0.0.0.0
[ASCII Text]
B52 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
IEC61850 versions only. Displays the unique network IP address that identifies the IED.
Subnet Address
Subnet Address 19.32 0.0.0.0
[ASCII Text]
IEC61850 versions only. Displays the sub-network the IED is connected to.
Gateway
Gateway 19.33 0.0.0.0
[ASCII Text]
IEC61850 versions only. Displays the IP address of the gateway (proxy) that the IED is connected to, if any.
0 or 1
Media 19.34 1xFibre Optic
[Indexed String]
IEC 61850 versions only. Displays the communication media of the Ethernet port that is currently in use.
IP address
IP address 19.38 0.0.0.0
[ASCII text]
IEC 61850 versions only. When IP From HMI is enabled this is used to set the unique network IP address that identifies the unit.
Subnet mask
Subnet mask 19.39 0.0.0.0
[ASCII text]
IEC 61850 versions only. When IP From HMI is enabled this is used to set the sub-network mask.
Gateway
Gateway 19.3A 0.0.0.0
[ASCII text]
IEC61850 versions only. Set the IP address of the gateway (proxy) the relay is connected to via HMI if any.
0 or 1
Media 19.3B 1xFibre Optic
[Indexed String]
IEC 61850 versions only. Sets the communication media of the Ethernet port. For products with dual redundant fibre select the
1xCopper/2xFibre setting
SNTP PARAMETERS 19.40
SNTP Server 1
SNTP Server 1 19.41 0.0.0.0
[ASCII Text]
SNTP Server 2
SNTP Server 2 19.42 0.0.0.0
[ASCII Text]
IEC 61850 SCL 19.50
IED Name
IED Name 19.51 Not Available
[ASCII Text]
IEC 61850 GOOSE 19.60
From 0xFF to 32 in steps of 1

GoEna 19.70 0x00
From 0xFF to 32 in steps of 1

Test Mode 19.71 0x00
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Ignore Test Flag 19.73 No
[Indexed String]
SECURITY CONFIG 25.00

This Column contains settings for Cyber Security configuration
ACCESS ONLY FOR From 32 to 234 in steps of 1
User Banner 25.01
AUTHORISED USERS [ASCII Text]
With this setting, you can enter text for the NERC compliant banner.
Attempts Limit 25.02 3
This setting defines the maximum number of failed password attempts before action is taken.
Blocking Timer 25.04 60
This setting defines the time duration for which the user is blocked, after exceeding the maximum attempts limit.
Front Port 25.05 Enabled 0 or 1
P345-AD-EN-1 B53

DESCRIPTION
[Indexed String]
This setting enables or disables the physical Front Port.
0 or 1
Rear Port 1 25.06 Enabled
[Indexed String]
This setting enables or disables the primary physical rear port (RP1).
0 or 1
Rear Port 2 25.07 Enabled
[Indexed String]
This setting enables or disables the secondary physical rear port (RP2).
0 or 1
Ethernet Port 25.08 Enabled
[Indexed String]
This setting enables or disables the physical Ethernet Port
0 or 1
Courier Tunnel 25.09 Enabled
[Indexed String]
This setting enables or disables the logical tunnelled Courier port
0 or 1
IEC61850 25.0A Enabled
[Indexed String]
This setting enables or disables the logical IEC61850 port.
0 or 1
DNP3 OE 25.0B Enabled
[Indexed String]
This setting enables or disables the logical DNP3 over Ethernet port.
Force Logout 25.0C No Operation
The user in role of ADMINISTRATOR can force logout all the active sessions or on dedicated interface.
Attempts Remain
Attempts Remain 25.11
This cell displays the number of password attempts remaining
Blk Time Remain
Blk Time Remain 25.12
This cell displays the remaining blocking time.
LOCAL SESSIONS 25.1A
FP InactivTimer 25.1B 10
A configurable period of time when a user is automatically logged out on Front Port if they remain inactive for. Once log out, resetting of the
entered access-level back to 0.
Setting the inactivity timer settings to 0 disables session management and the automatic-logout feature is disabled (i.e. a logged in user
remains logged in forever; or until the user manually logs out)
UI InactivTimer 25.1C 10
A configurable period of time when a user is automatically logged out on UI if they remain inactive for. Once log out, resetting of the entered
access-level back to 0.
Setting the inactivity timer settings to 0 disables session management and the automatic-logout feature is disabled (i.e. a logged in user
remains logged in forever; or until the user manually logs out)
RBAC 25.30
Auth. Method 25.31 Server + Device
[Indexed string]
Configure the active Authentication method
RADIUS Pri IP 25.32 0.0.0.0
[IP Parameters]
RADIUS Server 1 configured to provide Server Authentication service.
Setting this cell to 0.0.0.0 disables RADUIS Server 1
RADIUS Sec IP 25.33 0.0.0.0
[IP Parameters]
RADIUS Server 2 configured to provide Server Authentication service.
Setting this cell to 0.0.0.0 disables RADUIS Server 2
RADIUS Auth Port 25.34 1812
The destination TCP/IP port sent to both Primary and Secondary RADUIS servers.
RADIUS Security 25.35 PAP EAP-TTLS-PAP
[Indexed string]
B54 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Option for choosing authentication scheme used by RADIUS server.
EAP-TTLS-MSCHAP2 - EAP Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) is an IETF open standard that uses the TLS protocol. Using TLS, a secure channel is
then established between Relay and Radius server.
The Microsoft version of Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol Version 2 (MS-CHAPv2) is a password based authentication method that
utilises the user account credentials (username and password) stored in Active Directory Domain Services to authenticate.
EAP-TTLS-MSCHAP2 represents the MSCHAPv2 method transferred over EAP-TTLS channel.
PAP - Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) is a password-based authentication protocol. PAP is considered a weak authentication scheme.
Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) is a protocol that encapsulates the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) within an
encrypted and authenticated TLS tunnel.
EAP-PEAP-MSCHAP2 - represents the EAP-MSCHAPv2 method encapsulated by PEAP.
PAP EAP-TTLS-PAP - represents the PAP protocol transferred over EAP-TTLS channel.
RADIUS Timeout 25.36 2
RADIUS Retries 25.37 10
Define the times Relay will retry to request authentication from Radius server if no response.
RADIUS Secret 25.38 ChangeMe1#
The shared secret is used by Radius server to verify the identity of IED.
Bypass Auth. 25.40 Disabled
[Indexed string]
Allow a user, when logged in as an administrator, to bypass the authentication requirements for specific interfaces.
RADIUS Status
RADIUS Status 25.FE Disabled
[Indexed string]
Reporting the status of Radius server.
Security Code
Security Code 25.FF
[ASCII Text]
This cell displays the 16-character security code required when requesting a recovery password. UI only cell.
CTRL I/P LABELS 29.00

Control Input 1 29.01 Control Input 1
Text description for the Control Input.
P345-AD-EN-1 B55

DESCRIPTION
Control Input 10 29.0A Control Input 10
Control Input 11 29.0B Control Input 11
Control Input 12 29.0C Control Input 12
Control Input 13 29.0D Control Input 13
Control Input 14 29.0E Control Input 14
Control Input 15 29.0F Control Input 15
Control Input 26 29.1A Control Input 26
Control Input 27 29.1B Control Input 27
Control Input 28 29.1C Control Input 28
B56 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Control Input 29 29.1D Control Input 29
Control Input 30 29.1E Control Input 30
Control Input 31 29.1F Control Input 31
GROUP 1: SYSTEM
30.00
CONFIG
0 or 1
Winding Config 30.01 Generator
[Indexed String]

Ref Power S 30.02 100000000
HV Connection 30.11 Y-Wye
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
HV Grounding 30.12 Grounded
[Indexed String]

HV Nominal 30.13 220000

% Reactance 30.20 0.1
LV Vector Group 30.31 0
[Unsigned Integer]
LV Connection 30.32 Y-Wye
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
LV Grounding 30.33 Grounded
[Indexed String]

LV Nominal 30.34 11000
Match Factor HV
Match Factor HV 30.40
Match Factor LV
Match Factor LV 30.41
0 or 1
Phase Sequence 30.42 Standard ABC
[Indexed String]
VT Reversal 30.43 No Swap
[Indexed String]
CT Reversal\CT1 30.44 No Swap From 0 to 3 in steps of 1
P345-AD-EN-1 B57

DESCRIPTION
Reversal [Indexed String]
CT2 Reversal 30.45 No Swap
[Indexed String]
C/S Input 30.50 A-N
[Indexed String]
I*=Phase CT secondary rating
C/S V Ratio Corr 30.51 1
C/S VT Vect Grp 30.52 0
0 or 1
Main VT Location 30.53 Gen
[Indexed String]
Neutral Displacement VT Primary
From 0x0000 to 0xFFFF in steps of 1
CounterSourcePSL 30.9F 0xFFFF

Counter 1 30.A0 65535
Counter 1 Setting
Counter 2 30.A1 65535
Counter 2 Setting
Counter 3 30.A2 65535
Counter 3 Setting
Counter 4 30.A3 65535
Counter 4 Setting
Counter 5 30.A4 65535
Counter 5 Setting
Counter 6 30.A5 65535
Counter 6 Setting
Counter 7 30.A6 65535
Counter 7 Setting
Counter 8 30.A7 65535
Counter 8 Setting
Counter 9 30.A8 65535
Counter 9 Setting
Counter 10 30.A9 65535
Counter 10 Setting
Counter 11 30.AA 65535
Counter 11 Setting
Counter 12 30.AB 65535
Counter 12 Setting
Counter 13 30.AC 65535
Counter 13 Setting
B58 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Counter 14 30.AD 65535
Counter 14 Setting
Counter 15 30.AE 65535
Counter 15 Setting
Counter 16 30.AF 65535
Counter 16 Setting
Counter 1 Label 30.C0 Counter 1










Counter 11 Label 30.CA Counter 11

Counter 12 Label 30.CB Counter 12

Counter 13 Label 30.CC Counter 13

Counter 14 Label 30.CD Counter 14

Counter 15 Label 30.CE Counter 15

Counter 16 Label 30.CF Counter 16

Timer 1 30.E0 0
P345-AD-EN-1 B59

DESCRIPTION
Timer1 Setting
Timer 2 30.E1 0
Timer2 Setting
Timer 3 30.E2 0
Timer3 Setting
Timer 4 30.E3 0
Timer4 Setting
Timer 5 30.E4 0
Timer5 Setting
Timer 6 30.E5 0
Timer6 Setting
Timer 7 30.E6 0
Timer7 Setting
Timer 8 30.E7 0
Timer8 Setting
Timer 9 30.E8 0
Timer9 Setting
Timer 10 30.E9 0
Timer10 Setting
Timer 11 30.EA 0
Timer11 Setting
Timer 12 30.EB 0
Timer12 Setting
Timer 13 30.EC 0
Timer13 Setting
Timer 14 30.ED 0
Timer14 Setting
Timer 15 30.EE 0
Timer15 Setting
Timer 16 30.EF 0
Timer16 Setting
GROUP 1: POWER 31.00
From -5 to 5 in steps of 0.1

Comp Angle 31.01 0
Power1 Function 31.04 Over
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Power1 Dirn 31.05 Forward
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Power1 Mode 31.06 Active
[Indexed String]
B60 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
From 0.4*V1*I1 to 300*V1*I1 in steps of 0.1*V1*I1

Power1 3Ph Watts 31.08 0.5

Power1 3Ph VArs 31.0A 0.5

Power1 TimeDelay 31.0B 5

Power1 DO Timer 31.0C 0
0 or 1
P1 Poledead Inh 31.0D Enabled
[Indexed String]
Power2 Function 31.14 Over
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]




0 or 1
[Indexed String]
Power3 Function 31.24 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]



Power3 DO Timer 31.2C 0 From 0 to 100 in steps of 0.01
P345-AD-EN-1 B61

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
Power4 Function 31.34 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]




0 or 1
[Indexed String]
NPS OVERPOWER 31.60
0 or 1
S2> CT Source 31.61 IA-1 IB-1 IC-1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
S2>1 Status 31.62 Disabled
[Indexed String]
From 0.1*V1*I1/0.1*V1*I4 to 30*V1*I1/30*V1*I4 in steps of

S2>1 Setting 31.64 0.5 0.01*V1*I1/0.01*V1*I4

S2>1 Time Delay 31.68 0.1
GROUP 1: FIELD
32.00
FAILURE
0 or 1
FFail Alm Status 32.01 Disabled
[Indexed String]
FFail Alm Angle 32.02 15

FFail Alm Delay 32.03 5
0 or 1
FFail1 Status 32.04 Enabled
[Indexed String]
B62 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
From -250*V1/I1 to 250*V1/I1 in steps of 0.5*V1/I1
FFail1 Xa1 32.05 20
[Courier Number (Impedance)]
From 0.5*V1/I1 to 500*V1/I1 in steps of 0.5*V1/I1

FFail1 Xb1 32.06 220

FFail1 TimeDelay 32.07 5

FFail1 DO Timer 32.08 0
0 or 1
FFail2 Status 32.09 Disabled
[Indexed String]
From -250 to 250*V1/I1 in steps of 0.5*V1/I1

FFail2 Xa2 32.0A 20

FFail2 Xb2 32.0B 110

FFail2 TimeDelay 32.0C 0

FFail2 DO Timer 32.0D 0
0 or 1
FFail Dirn Line 32.20 Disabled
[Indexed String]
From -250*V1/I1 to 250*V1/I1 in steps of 0.5/I1

Line Offset 32.21 0

Line Angle 32.22 0
GROUP 1: NPS
33.00
THERMAL
0 or 1
I2therm>1 Alarm 33.01 Enabled
[Indexed String]
From 0.03*I1 to 0.5*I1 in steps of 0.01*I1

I2therm>1 Set 33.02 0.05

I2therm>1 Delay 33.03 20
0 or 1
I2therm>2 Trip 33.04 Enabled
[Indexed String]

I2therm>2 Set 33.05 0.1

I2therm>2 kSet 33.06 15

I2therm>2 kRESET 33.07 15
P345-AD-EN-1 B63

DESCRIPTION

I2therm>2 tMAX 33.08 1000

I2therm>2 tMIN 33.09 0.25
GROUP 1: SYSTEM
34.00
BACKUP
V Dep OC Func 34.01 Volt controlled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Vector Rotation 34.02 None
[Indexed String]
V Dep OC Char 34.20 IEC S Inverse
[Indexed String]
From 0.8*I1 to 4*I1 in steps of 0.01*I1

V Dep OC I> Set 34.23 1

V Dep OC T Dial 34.25 1
0 or 1
V Dep OC Reset 34.26 DT
[Indexed String]

V Dep OC Delay 34.27 1

V Dep OC TMS 34.28 1

V Dep OC K (RI) 34.29 1
V Dep OC Usr Rst 34.2A DT
[Indexed String]
Visible if the Default curves are selected
V Dep OC tRESET 34.2B 0
Visible if operating characteritic is selected as DT or IEC/Uk curves or reset characteritic is selected as DT
V Dep OC V<1 Set 34.2D 80

V Dep OC V<2 Set 34.2E 60

V Dep OC k Set 34.2F 0.25
0 or 1
Z< Function 34.30 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Vector Rotation 34.31 None
[Indexed String]
Z<1 Status 34.34 Enabled 0 or 1
B64 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
[Indexed String]
From 2*V1/I1 to 500*V1/I1 in steps of 0.5*V1/I1

Z<1 Setting 34.36 70

Z<1 Time Delay 34.38 5

Z<1 tRESET 34.3A 0
0 or 1
Z<2 Status 34.44 Disabled
[Indexed String]
From 2*V1/I1 to 500*V1/I1 in steps of 0.5*V1/I1

Z<2 Setting 34.46 70

Z<2 Time Delay 34.48 5

Z<2 tRESET 34.4A 0
GROUP 1:
35.00
OVERCURRENT
PHASE O/C PHASE O/C

35.20
PEAK
0 or 1
I> CT Source 35.21 IA-1 IB-1 IC-1
[Indexed String]
IEC S Inverse
From 0////0 to 16////1 in steps of 1////1
I>1 Function\I>1 Status 35.23
[Indexed String]
Enabled
I>1 Direction 35.24 Non-Directional
[Indexed String]

I>1 Current Set 35.27 1

I>1 Time Delay 35.29 1

I>1 TMS 35.2A 1

I>1 Time Dial 35.2B 1

I>1 k (RI) 35.2C 1
0 or 1
I>1 Reset Char 35.2E DT
[Indexed String]
P345-AD-EN-1 B65

DESCRIPTION
I>1 Usr Rst Char 35.2F DT
[Indexed String]
I>1 tRESET 35.30 0
From 0 to 16///1 in steps of 1
I>2 Function\I>2 Status 35.32 Disabled
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]



I>2 TMS 35.39 1

I>2 Time Dial 35.3A 1

I>2 k (RI) 35.3B 1
0 or 1
I>2 Reset Char 35.3C DT
[Indexed String]
I>2 Usr Rst Char 35.3D DT
[Indexed String]
I>2 tRESET 35.3E 0
0 or 1
I>3 Status 35.40 Disabled
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
From 0.08*I1 to 32*I1/10*I1/32*I1 in steps of 0.01*I1

From 0 to 200/100 in steps of 0.01

0 or 1
I>4 Status 35.47 Disabled
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
From 0.08*I1 to 32*I1/10*I1/32*I1 in steps of 0.01*I1

I>4 Current Set 35.4A 10
From 0 to 200/100 in steps of 0.01

I>4 Time Delay 35.4B 0
B66 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION

I> Char Angle 35.4E 30
I> Function Link 35.4F 15
[Binary Flag]
NPS OVERCURRENT 35.50
0 or 1
I2> CT Source 35.51 IA-1 IB-1 IC-1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
I2>1 Status 35.52 Disabled
[Indexed String]
I2>1 Direction 35.54 Non-Directional
[Indexed String]

I2>1 Current Set 35.56 0.2

I2>1 Time Delay 35.58 10
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]


0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]


0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]


P345-AD-EN-1 B67

DESCRIPTION
I2> VTS Block 35.90 15
[Binary Flag]

I2> Char Angle 35.94 -60
From 0.5*V1 to 25*V1 in steps of 0.5*V1

I2> V2pol Set 35.98 5
GROUP 1: THERMAL
36.00
OVERLOAD
GEN THERMAL 36.40
0 or 1
Thermal 36.50 Enabled
[Indexed String]

Thermal I> 36.55 1.2

Thermal Alarm 36.5A 90

T-heating 36.5F 1

T-cooling 36.64 1
M Factor 36.69 0
XFORMER THERMAL 36.70
0 or 1
Thermal 36.71 Enabled
[Indexed String]
Mn't Winding 36.72 HV Current
[Indexed String]
Ambient T 36.73 AVERAGE
[Indexed String]
Amb CLI Type 36.74 4-20mA
[Indexed String]

Amb CLI Min 36.75 0

Amb CLI Max 36.76 100

Average Amb T 36.77 25
Top Oil T 36.78 CALCULATED
[Indexed String]
B68 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Top Oil CLI Typ 36.79 4-20mA
[Indexed String]

Top Oil CLI Min 36.7A 0

Top Oil CLI Max 36.7B 100

IB 36.7C 1
[Courier Number (Per Unit)]

Rated NoLoadLoss 36.7D 3

Hot Spot overtop 36.7E 25

Top Oil overamb 36.7F 55
Cooling Mode 36.80 Natural
[Indexed String]
Cooling Status 36.81 Natural
NATURAL COOL 36.82

Winding exp m 36.83 0.8

Oil exp n 36.84 0.8
FORCED AIR COOL 36.85


Oil exp n 36.87 0.8
FORCED OIL COOL 36.88


Oil exp n 36.8A 0.8
FORCED AIR & OIL 36.8B

Winding exp m 36.8C 0.8

Oil exp n 36.8D 0.8
Hot spot rise co 36.8E 1 From 0.01 to 20 in steps of 0.01
P345-AD-EN-1 B69

DESCRIPTION

Top oil rise co 36.8F 120
0 or 1
TOL Status 36.90 Enabled
[Indexed String]

Hot Spot>1 Set 36.91 110

tHot Spot>1 Set 36.92 10





Top Oil>1 Set 36.97 70

tTop Oil>1 Set 36.98 10

Top Oil>2 Set 36.99 80

tTop Oil>2 Set 36.9A 10

Top Oil>3 Set 36.9B 90

tTop Oil>3 Set 36.9C 10

tPre-trip Set 36.9D 5
0 or 1
LOL Status 36.A0 Enabled
[Indexed String]

Life Hours at HS 36.A1 180000

Design HS temp 36.A2 110

Constant B Set 36.A3 15000
B70 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
FAA> Set 36.A4 2

tFAA> Set 36.A5 10

LOL>1 Set 36.A6 160000

tLOL> Set 36.A7 10

Reset Life Hours 36.B0 0
GROUP 1:
37.00
DIFFERENTIAL
Was in database column 30, moved in version 32 s/w
GEN DIFF 37.01
Gen Diff Func 37.02 Percentage Bias
[Indexed String]
From 0.05*I1/0.05*I4 to 0.5*I1/0.5*I4 in steps of 0.01*I1/0.01*I4

Gen Diff Is1 37.03 0.1
Gen Diff k1 37.04 0
From 1*I1 to 5*I1 in steps of 0.1*I1

Gen Diff Is2 37.05 1.2

Gen Diff k2 37.06 150

Interturn Is_A 37.10 0.1

Interturn Is_B 37.14 0.1

Interturn Is_C 37.18 0.1

Interturn Delay 37.1C 0.1
XFORMER DIFF 37.30
0 or 1
Xform Diff Func 37.31 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Set Mode 37.32 Simple
[Indexed String]
From 0.05*PU to 2.5*PU in steps of 0.01*PU

Xform Is1 37.33 0.2
Xform K1 37.34 30 From 0 to 150 in steps of 1
P345-AD-EN-1 B71

DESCRIPTION
From 0.1*PU to 10*PU in steps of 0.1*I1

Xform Is2 37.35 1

Xform K2 37.36 80

Xform tDIFF 37.37 0
From 0.1*PU to 2.5*PU in steps of 0.01*PU

Xform Is-CTS 37.40 1.5
0 or 1
Xform HS1 Status 37.41 Enabled
[Indexed String]
From 2.5*PU to 16*PU in steps of 0.1*PU

Xform Is-HS1 37.42 10
0 or 1
Xform HS2 Status 37.43 Enabled
[Indexed String]

Xform Is-HS2 37.44 16
0 or 1
Zero seq filt HV 37.50 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Zero seq filt LV 37.51 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
2nd harm blocked 37.52 Enabled
[Indexed String]
Xform Ih(2)%> 37.53 20
0 or 1
Cross blocking 37.54 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
5th harm blocked 37.55 Disabled
[Indexed String]

Xform Ih(5)%> 37.56 35
0 or 1
Circuitry Fail 37.60 Enabled
[Indexed String]

Is-cctfail 37.61 0.1
From 0 to 0.5 in steps of 0.01

K-cctfail 37.62 0.1

CctFail Delay 37.63 5
B72 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
GROUP 1: EARTH FAULT 38.00
Derived IN Input
IN Input 38.01
Measured [Indexed String]
IN>1 Function 38.25 IEC S Inverse
[Indexed String]
0.2 From 0.08*I1/0.02*I2 to 4.0*I1/4.0*I2 in steps of 0.01*I1/0.01*I2

IN>1 Current 38.29
0.1 [Courier Number (Current)]

IN>1 IDG Is 38.2A 1.5

IN>1 Time Delay 38.2C 1

IN>1 TMS 38.2D 1

IN>1 Time Dial 38.2E 1

IN>1 k (RI) 38.2F 1

IN>1 IDG Time 38.30 1.2
0 or 1
IN>1 Reset Char 38.32 DT
[Indexed String]
IN>1 Usr RstChr 38.33 DT
[Indexed String]
IN>1 tRESET 38.34 0
Disabled From 0/0 to 16/////1 in steps of 1/1
IN>2 Function 38.36
Disabled [Indexed String]
From 0.08*I1/0.02*I2 to 4.0*I1/10.0*I2 in steps of

0.2
IN>2 Current 38.3A 0.01*I1/0.01*I2
0.45
1 From 0 to 200 in steps of 0.01

IN>2 Time Delay 38.3D
0 [Courier Number (time-seconds)]
GROUP 1: ROTOR EF 39.00
Injection Freq 39.02 0.25 Hz
[Indexed String]
CL I/P Select 39.04 CL1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
64R R<1 Alarm 39.08 Enabled
[Indexed String]
P345-AD-EN-1 B73

DESCRIPTION
64R R<1 Alm Set 39.0C 40000
[Courier Number (Resistance)]

64R R<1 Alm Dly 39.10 10
0 or 1
64R R<2 Trip 39.14 Enabled
[Indexed String]

64R R<2 Trip Set 39.18 5000

64R R<2 Trip Dly 39.1C 1

R Compensation 39.20 0
GROUP 1: SEF/REF
3A.00
PROT'N

SEF/REF Options 3A.01 SEF
[Indexed String]
From 0/0 to 15/////1 in steps of 1/1

ISEF>1 Function 3A.2A DT
[Indexed String]
ISEF>1 Direction 3A.2B Non-Directional
[Indexed String]

ISEF>1 Current 3A.2E 0.05

ISEF>1 Delay 3A.31 1

ISEF> Func Link 3A.57 15
[Binary Flags]
ISEF DIRECTIONAL 3A.58

ISEF> Char Angle 3A.59 90
[Courier Number(Angle)]
0 or 1
ISEF>VNpol Input 3A.5A Measured
[Indexed String]

ISEF> VNpol Set 3A.5B 5
WATTMETRIC SEF 3A.5D
From 0.0*V1*I3/0.0*V3*I3 to 20*V1*I3/20*V3*I3 in steps of

PN> Setting 3A.5E 9 0.05*V1*I3/0.05*V3*I3
RESTRICTED E/F 3A.60
IREF> CT Source 3A.61 IA-1 IB-1 IC-1 0 or 1
B74 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
[Indexed String]
IREF> k1 3A.62 0

IREF> k2 3A.63 150

IREF> Is1 3A.64 0.2

IREF> Is2 3A.65 1

IREF> Is 3A.66 0.2
0 or 1
VN>1 Status 3B.10 Enabled
[Indexed String]
Derived VN>1 Input

VN>1 Input 3B.12
VN1 [Indexed String]
VN>1 Input is always the derived VN
VN>1 Function 3B.14 DT
[Indexed String]
From 1*V1/1*V3 to 80*V1/80*V3 in steps of 1*V1/1*V3

VN>1 Voltage Set 3B.16 5

VN>1 Time Delay 3B.18 5

VN>1 TMS 3B.1A 1

VN>1 tReset 3B.1C 0
0 or 1
VN>2 Status 3B.20 Disabled
[Indexed String]
Derived VN>2 Input

VN>2 Input 3B.22
VN1 [Indexed String]
VN>2 Input is always the derived VN
[Indexed String]
From 1*V1/1*V3 to 80*V1/80*V3 in steps of 1*V1/1*V3



VN>2 TMS 3B.2A 1

VN>2 tReset 3B.2C 0
P345-AD-EN-1 B75

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
VN>3 Input
VN>3 Input 3B.32 VN1
[Indexed String]
VN>3 Input is always the measured VN1
[Indexed String]



VN>3 TMS 3B.3A 1

VN>3 tReset 3B.3C 0
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
VN>4 Input
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]



VN>4 TMS 3B.4A 1

VN>4 tReset 3B.4C 0
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
VN>5 Input
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]



VN>5 TMS 3B.5A 1
B76 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION

VN>5 tReset 3B.5C 0
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
VN>6 Input
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]



VN>6 TMS 3B.6A 1

VN>6 tReset 3B.6C 0
GROUP 1: 100% STATOR

3C.00
EF
VN 3rd
Harmonic\100%St EF 3C.01 VN3H< Enabled
[Indexed String]
Status

100% St EF VN3H< 3C.02 1

VN3H< Delay 3C.03 5

V< Inhibit set 3C.04 80
0 or 1
P< Inhibit 3C.05 Disabled
[Indexed String]
From 4*V1*I1 to 200*V1*I1 in steps of 0.5*V1*I1

P< Inhibit set 3C.06 4
0 or 1
Q< Inhibit 3C.07 Disabled
[Indexed String]

Q< Inhibit set 3C.08 4
0 or 1
S< Inhibit 3C.09 Disabled
[Indexed String]

S< Inhibit set 3C.0A 4
P345-AD-EN-1 B77

DESCRIPTION
100% St EF VN3H> 3C.0B 20

VN3H> Delay 3C.0C 5
0 or 1
64S LF Injection 3C.10 Enabled
[Indexed String]
Available to P345 only
64S R Factor 3C.14 10
Scaling factor for primary resistance across earthing transformer. Affects the stator resistance settings and measurements only.
0 or 1
64S R<1 Alarm 3C.1C Enabled
[Indexed String]

64S R<1 Alm Set 3C.20 100

64S R<1 Alm Dly 3C.24 1
0 or 1
64S R<2 Trip 3C.28 Enabled
[Indexed String]

64S R<2 Trip Set 3C.2C 20

64S R<2 Trip Dly 3C.30 1

64S Angle Comp 3C.34 0

64S Series R 3C.38 0

64S Parallel G 3C.3C 0
[Courie Number (Conductance)]
0 or 1
64S Overcurrent 3C.40 Enabled
[Indexed String]

64S I>1 Trip Set 3C.44 0.5

64S I>1 Trip Dly 3C.48 1
0 or 1
64S Supervision 3C.4C Disabled
[Indexed String]

64S V< Set 3C.50 1

64S I< Set 3C.54 0.01

64S Superv'n Dly 3C.58 1
B78 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
GROUP 1: VOLTS/HZ 3D.00
0 or 1
V/Hz Alm Status 3D.01 Enabled
[Indexed String]
From 1.5*V1 to 3.5*V1 in steps of 0.01*V1

V/Hz Alarm Set 3D.02 2.31

V/Hz Alarm Delay 3D.03 10
0 or 1
V/Hz>1 Status 3D.10 Enabled
[Indexed String]
V/Hz>1 Trip Func 3D.13 DT
[Indexed String]

V/Hz>1 Trip Set 3D.16 2.42

V/Hz>1 Trip TMS 3D.19 1

V/Hz>1 Delay 3D.1A 60
V/Hz>1 Reset Chr 3D.1B DT
[Indexed String]

V/Hz>1 tRESET 3D.1C 0
0 or 1
[Indexed String]


0 or 1
[Indexed String]


0 or 1
[Indexed String]


P345-AD-EN-1 B79

DESCRIPTION
Rolling Window 0 or 1
Operating Mode 3E.10
Fixed Window [Indexed String]
df/dt Avg Cycles 3E.11 3
[Courier Number(Decimal)]
df/dt Iterations 3E.12 2
[Courier Number(Decimal)]
0 or 1
df/dt>1 Status 3E.20 Enabled
[Indexed String]

df/dt>1 Setting 3E.21 0.2
df/dt>1 Dir'n 3E.22 Both
[Indexed String]

df/dt>1 Time 3E.23 0.5
0 or 1
df/dt>1 f L/H 3E.24 Enabled
[Indexed String]

df/dt>1 f Low 3E.25 49.5
[Courier Number (Frequency)]

df/dt>1 f High 3E.26 50.5
0 or 1
[Indexed String]

df/dt>2 Dir'n 3E.32 Positive
[Indexed String]

0 or 1
[Indexed String]

[Indexed String]

0 or 1
[Indexed String]
df/dt>4 Setting 3E.51 0.2 From 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.01
B80 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
[Indexed String]

GROUP 1: DEAD
40.00
MACHINE
0 or 1
Dead Mach Status 40.01 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
DM CT Source 40.02 IA-1 IB-1 IC-1
[Indexed String]
From 0.08*I1/0.08*I4 to 4*I1/4*I4 in steps of 0.01*I1/0.01*I4

Dead Mach I> 40.03 0.1

Dead Mach V< 40.04 80

Dead Mach tPU 40.05 5

Dead Mach tDO 40.06 0.5
GROUP 1: VOLT
42.00
PROTECTION
UNDER VOLTAGE 42.01
0 or 1
V< Measur't Mode 42.02 Phase-Neutral
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
V< Operate Mode 42.03 Any Phase
[Indexed String]
V<1 Function 42.04 DT
[Indexed String]

V<1 Voltage Set 42.05 50

V<1 Time Delay 42.06 10

V<1 TMS 42.07 1
0 or 1
V<1 Poledead Inh 42.08 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
V<2 Status 42.09 Disabled
[Indexed String]
V<2 Voltage Set 42.0A 38 From 10*V1 to 120*V1 in steps of 1*V1
P345-AD-EN-1 B81

DESCRIPTION

V<2 Time Delay 42.0B 5
0 or 1
V<2 Poledead Inh 42.0C Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
V<3 Status 42.10 Disabled
[Indexed String]

V<3 Voltage Set 42.12 38

V<3 Time Delay 42.14 5
0 or 1
V<3 Poledead Inh 42.16 Enabled
[Indexed String]
OVERVOLTAGE 42.20
0 or 1
V> Measur't Mode 42.21 Phase-Phase
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
V> Operate Mode 42.22 Any Phase
[Indexed String]
V>1 Function\V>1 DT From 0 to 6/1 in steps of 1

42.24
Status Enabled [Indexed String]
130 From 60*V1/10*V1 to 185*V1 in steps of 1*V1

V>1 Voltage Set 42.25
110 [Courier Number (Voltage)]
10 From 0 to 100 in steps of 0.01

V>1 Time Delay 42.26
1 [Courier Number (Time)]

V>1 TMS 42.27 1
0 or 1
V>2 Status 42.30 Disabled
[Indexed String]
150 From 60*V1/10*V1 to 185*V1 in steps of 1*V1

V>2 Voltage Set 42.31
110 [Courier Number (Voltage)]
0.5 From 0 to 100 in steps of 0.01

V>2 Time Delay 42.32
1 [Courier Number (Time)]
NPS OVERVOLTAGE 42.60
0 or 1
V2>1 Status 42.61 Disabled
[Indexed String]

V2>1 Voltage Set 42.62 15

V2>1 Time Delay 42.63 1
B82 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
GROUP 1: FREQ
43.00
PROTECTION
UNDER FREQUENCY 43.01
0 or 1
F<1 Status 43.02 Enabled
[Indexed String]

F<1 Setting 43.03 49.5

F<1 Time Delay 43.04 4
0 or 1
F<2 Status 43.05 Disabled
[Indexed String]

F<2 Setting 43.06 49

F<2 Time Delay 43.07 3
0 or 1
F<3 Status 43.08 Disabled
[Indexed String]

F<3 Setting 43.09 48.5

F<3 Time Delay 43.0A 2
0 or 1
F<4 Status 43.0B Disabled
[Indexed String]

F<4 Setting 43.0C 48

F<4 Time Delay 43.0D 1
F< Function Link 43.0E 0
OVER FREQUENCY 43.0F
0 or 1
F>1 Status 43.10 Enabled
[Indexed String]
50.5 From 45/0.1 to 68/70 in steps of 0.01/0.1

F>1 Setting 43.11
5 [Courier Number (Frequency)]

F>1 Time Delay 43.12 2
0 or 1
F>2 Status 43.13 Disabled
[Indexed String]
P345-AD-EN-1 B83

DESCRIPTION
51 From 45/0.1 to 68/70 in steps of 0.01/0.1
F>2 Setting 43.14
5 [Courier Number (Frequency)]

F>2 Time Delay 43.15 1
TURBINE F PROT 43.20

Turbine Abnormal Frequency Protection
0 or 1
Turbine F Status 43.22 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Band 1 Status 43.24 Enabled
[Indexed String]

Band 1 Freq Low 43.26 46.5

Band 1 Freq High 43.28 47

Band 1 Duration 43.2A 1
Band 1 Accumulated Time Threshold
Band 1 Dead Time 43.2C 0.2
0 or 1
[Indexed String]

Band 2 Freq Low 43.36 47

Band 2 Freq High 43.38 47.5

Band 2 Duration 43.3A 2.5
0 or 1
[Indexed String]



0 or 1
[Indexed String]
B84 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION


0 or 1
[Indexed String]



0 or 1
[Indexed String]



GROUP 1: RTD
44.00
PROTECTION

Select RTD 44.01 0
[Binary Flags(10 bits)Indexed String]

RTD 1 Alarm Set 44.02 80

RTD 1 Alarm Dly 44.03 10

RTD 1 Trip Set 44.04 85

RTD 1 Trip Dly 44.05 1
P345-AD-EN-1 B85

DESCRIPTION





RTD 3 Alarm Set 44.0A 80

RTD 3 Alarm Dly 44.0B 10

RTD 3 Trip Set 44.0C 85

RTD 3 Trip Dly 44.0D 1

RTD 4 Alarm Set 44.0E 80

RTD 4 Alarm Dly 44.0F 10









RTD 6 Trip Dly 44.19 1 From 0 to 100 in steps of 1
B86 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION

RTD 7 Alarm Set 44.1A 80

RTD 7 Alarm Dly 44.1B 10

RTD 7 Trip Set 44.1C 85

RTD 7 Trip Dly 44.1D 1

RTD 8 Alarm Set 44.1E 80

RTD 8 Alarm Dly 44.1F 10










GROUP 1: CB FAIL & I< 45.00
BREAKER FAIL 45.01
0 or 1
CB Fail 1 Status 45.02 Enabled
[Indexed String]

CB Fail 1 Timer 45.03 0.2
P345-AD-EN-1 B87

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
CB Fail 2 Status 45.04 Disabled
[Indexed String]

CB Fail 2 Timer 45.05 0.4
CBF Non I Reset 45.06 CB Open & I<
[Indexed String]
CBF Ext Reset 45.07 CB Open & I<
[Indexed String]
UNDER CURRENT 45.08
From 0.02*I1/0.02*I4 to 3.2*I1/3.2*I4 in steps of 0.01*I1/0.01*I4

I< Current Set 45.09 0.1

IN< Current Set 45.0A 0.1

ISEF< Current 45.0B 0.02
0 or 1
I< CT Source 45.15 IA-1 IB-1 IC-1
[Indexed String]
GROUP 1: SUPERVISION 46.00
VT SUPERVISION 46.01
0 or 1
VTS Status 46.02 Blocking
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
VTS Reset Mode 46.03 Manual
[Indexed String]

VTS Time Delay 46.04 5

VTS I> Inhibit 46.05 10

VTS I2> Inhibit 46.06 0.05
CT SUPERVISION 46.07
0 or 1
CTS1 Status 46.08 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
CTS1 VN Input 46.09 Derived
[Indexed String]
From 0.5*V1/0.5*V3 to 22*V1/22*V3 in steps of 0.5*V1/0.5*V3

CTS1 VN< Inhibit 46.0A 5

CTS1 IN> Set 46.0B 0.2
B88 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
CTS1 Time Delay 46.0C 5
0 or 1
CTS2 Status 46.20 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
CTS2 VN Input 46.24 Derived
[Indexed String]
From 0.5*V1/0.5*V3 to 22*V1/22*V3 in steps of 0.5*V1/0.5*V3

CTS2 VN< Inhibit 46.28 5

CTS2 IN> Set 46.2C 0.2
5 From 0 to 10 in steps of 1
CTS2 Time Delay 46.30
2 [Courier Number (time-seconds)]
0 or 1
Diff CTS Status 46.31 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Diff CTS Mode 46.32 Restrain
[Indexed String]

CTS Time Delay 46.33 2

CTS I1 46.34 10

CTS I2/I1>1 46.35 5

CTS I2/I1>2 46.36 30
THROUGH FAULT 46.50
0 or 1
Through Fault 46.51 Enabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Monitored Input 46.52 HV
[Indexed String]
From 0.08*In to 16*In in steps of 0.01

TF I> Trigger 46.53 1

TF I2t> Alarm 46.54 800(In * In *t)
GROUP 1: SENSITIVE
47.00
POWER

Comp Angle 47.20 0
P> CT Source 47.21 Single
P345-AD-EN-1 B89

DESCRIPTION
P> Phase Select 47.22 A
[Indexed String]
Sen Power1 Func 47.24 Over
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Sen Power1 Dirn 47.26 Forward
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
Sen Power1 Mode 47.28 Active
[Indexed String]

SPower1 1Ph Watt 47.2C 0.5*V1*I3

SPower1 1Ph VArs 47.2D 0.5*V1*I3

SPower1 3Ph Watt 47.2E 0.5*V1*I3

SPower1 3Ph Vars 47.2F 0.5*V1*I3

Sen Power1 Delay 47.34 5

Power1 DO Timer 47.38 0
0 or 1
P1 Poledead Inh 47.3C Enabled
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]




SPower2 3Ph VArs 47.4F 0.5*V1*I3


B90 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]






0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]





Power4 DO Timer 47.98 0 From 0 to 100 in steps of 0.01
P345-AD-EN-1 B91

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
GROUP 1: POLE
49.00
SLIPPING
0 or 1
PSlip Function 49.01 Enabled
[Indexed String]
Z Based PoleSlip 49.02
Pole Slip Mode 49.03 Generating
[Indexed String]

PSlip Za Forward 49.04 100*V1/I1

PSlip Zb Reverse 49.05 150*V1/I1

Lens Angle 49.06 120

PSlip Timer T1 49.07 0.015

PSlip Timer T2 49.08 0.015
Blinder Angle 49.09 75

PSlip Zc 49.0A 50*V1/I1
Zone1 Slip Count 49.0B 1
[Unsigned Integer]
Zone2 Slip Count 49.0C 2
[Unsigned Integer]

PSlip Reset Time 49.0D 30
GROUP 1: INPUT
4A.00
LABELS

Opto Input 1 4A.01 L1 Setting Group

Opto Input 2 4A.02 L2 Setting Group
L3 Block IN>3&4 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1

Opto Input 3 4A.03
L3 Block IN>2 [ASCII Text (16 chars)]
Opto Input 4 4A.04 L4 Block I>3&4 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1
B92 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
L4 Block I>2 [ASCII Text (16 chars)]

Opto Input 5 4A.05 L5 Reset

Opto Input 6 4A.06 L6 Ext Prot Trip

Opto Input 7 4A.07 L7 52a

Opto Input 8 4A.08 L8 52b

Opto Input 9 4A.09 L9 Not Used

Opto Input 10 4A.0A L10 Not Used

Opto Input 11 4A.0B L11 Not Used

Opto Input 12 4A.0C L12 Not Used

Opto Input 13 4A.0D L13 Not Used

Opto Input 14 4A.0E L14 Not Used

Opto Input 15 4A.0F L15 Not Used








P345-AD-EN-1 B93

DESCRIPTION


Opto Input 26 4A.1A L26 Not Used

Opto Input 27 4A.1B L27 Not Used

Opto Input 28 4A.1C L28 Not Used

Opto Input 29 4A.1D L29 Not Used

Opto Input 30 4A.1E L30 Not Used

Opto Input 31 4A.1F L31 Not Used

GROUP 1: OUTPUT
4B.00
LABELS
R1 IN>1 Start From 32 to 163 in steps of 1

Relay 1 4B.01
R1 Trip CB [ASCII Text (16 chars)]
R2 I>1 Start From 32 to 163 in steps of 1

Relay 2 4B.02
R2 Trip PrimeMov [ASCII Text (16 chars)]

Relay 3 4B.03 R3 Any Trip

Relay 4 4B.04 R4 General Alarm

Relay 5 4B.05 R5 CB Fail
R6 Control Close From 32 to 163 in steps of 1

Relay 6 4B.06
R6 E/F Trip [ASCII Text (16 chars)]
R7 Control Trip
Relay 7 4B.07 R7 V or F Trip
R7 Volt Trip
R8 Not Used From 32 to 163 in steps of 1

Relay 8 4B.08
R8 Freq Trip [ASCII Text (16 chars)]

Relay 9 4B.09
R9 Diff Trip [ASCII Text (16 chars)]
Relay 10 4B.0A R10 Not Used From 32 to 163 in steps of 1
B94 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
R10 SysBack Trip [ASCII Text (16 chars)]

Relay 11 4B.0B
R11 NPS Trip [ASCII Text (16 chars)]

Relay 12 4B.0C
R12 Ffail Trip [ASCII Text (16 chars)]

Relay 13 4B.0D
R13 Power Trip [ASCII Text (16 chars)]

Relay 14 4B.0E
R14 V/Hz Trip [ASCII Text (16 chars)]

Relay 15 4B.0F R15 Not Used

Relay 16 4B.10 R16 Not Used










Relay 26 4B.1A R26 Not Used

Relay 27 4B.1B R27 Not Used

Relay 28 4B.1C R28 Not Used

Relay 29 4B.1D R29 Not Used
P345-AD-EN-1 B95

DESCRIPTION
Relay 30 4B.1E R30 Not Used

Relay 31 4B.1F R31 Not Used

GROUP 1: RTD LABELS 4C.00

RTD 1 4C.01 RTD 1

RTD 2 4C.02 RTD 2

RTD 3 4C.03 RTD 3

RTD 4 4C.04 RTD 4

RTD 5 4C.05 RTD 5

RTD 6 4C.06 RTD 6

RTD 7 4C.07 RTD 7

RTD 8 4C.08 RTD 8

RTD 9 4C.09 RTD 9

RTD 10 4C.0A RTD 10
GROUP 1: CLIO
4D.00
PROTECTION
0 or 1
CLIO Input 1 4D.02 Enabled
[Indexed String]
CLI1 Input Type 4D.04 4-20mA
[Indexed String]

CLI1 Input Label 4D.06 CLIO Input 1

CLI1 Minimum 4D.08 0

CLI1 Maximum 4D.0A 100
B96 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
CLI1 Alarm 4D.0C Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
CLI1 Alarm Fn 4D.0E Over
[Indexed String]
From CLI1 Minimum to CLI1 Maximum in steps of 0.1

CLI1 Alarm Set 4D.10 50

CLI1 Alarm Delay 4D.12 1
0 or 1
CLI1 Trip 4D.14 Disabled
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
CLI1 Trip Fn 4D.16 Over
[Indexed String]

CLI1 Trip Set 4D.18 60

CLI1 Trip Delay 4D.1A 0
0 or 1
CLI1 I< Alarm 4D.1C Disabled
[Indexed String]

CLI1 I< Alm Set 4D.1E 0.0035
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]



0 or 1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]


0 or 1
[Indexed String]
P345-AD-EN-1 B97

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
[Indexed String]


0 or 1
[Indexed String]

0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]



0 or 1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]


0 or 1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]


0 or 1
[Indexed String]
CLI3 I< Alm Set 4D.5E 0.0035 From 0 to 0.004 in steps of 0.0001
B98 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
[Indexed String]
[Indexed String]



0 or 1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]


0 or 1
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
[Indexed String]


0 or 1
[Indexed String]

0 or 1
CLIO Output 1 4D.A0 Disabled
[Indexed String]
CLO1 Output Type 4D.A2 4-20mA
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
CLO1 Set Values 4D.A4 Primary
[Indexed String]
IA Magnitude From 0 to See G155 in steps of 1

CLO1 Parameter 4D.A6
IA-1 RMS [Indexed String]
P345-AD-EN-1 B99

DESCRIPTION
CLO1 Minimum 4D.A8 See G155 table
CLO1 Maximum 4D.AA See G155 table
0 or 1
CLIO Output 2 4D.B0 Disabled
[Indexed String]
CLO2 Output Type 4D.B2 4-20mA
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
CLO2 Set Values 4D.B4 Primary
[Indexed String]
IB Magnitude From 0 to See G155 in steps of 1

CLO2 Parameter 4D.B6
IB-1 RMS [Indexed String]
CLO2 Minimum 4D.B8 See G155 table
CLO2 Maximum 4D.BA See G155 table
0 or 1
CLIO Output 3 4D.C0 Disabled
[Indexed String]
CLO3 Output Type 4D.C2 4-20mA
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
CLO3 Set Values 4D.C4 Primary
[Indexed String]
IC Magnitude From 0 to See G155 in steps of 1

CLO3 Parameter 4D.C6
IC-1 RMS [Indexed String]
CLO3 Minimum 4D.C8 See G155 table
CLO3 Maximum 4D.CA See G155 table
0 or 1
CLIO Output 4 4D.D0 Disabled
[Indexed String]
CLO4 Output Type 4D.D2 4-20mA
[Indexed String]
0 or 1
CLO4 Set Values 4D.D4 Primary
[Indexed String]
IN Measured Mag
From 0 to See G155 in steps of 1
CLO4 Parameter 4D.D6 IN Derived Mag
[Indexed String]
VA-1 RMS
CLO4 Minimum 4D.D8 See G155 table
CLO4 Maximum 4D.DA See G155 table
VOLTAGE MONITORS 4E.01
From 1*V1 to 132*V1 in steps of 0.5*V1

Live Voltage 4E.02 32
Dead Voltage 4E.03 13 From 1*V1 to 132*V1 in steps of 0.5*V1
B100 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION

Gen UnderVoltage 4E.04 54

Gen Over Voltage 4E.05 130

Bus UnderVoltage 4E.06 54

Bus Over Voltage 4E.07 130

CS Diff Voltage 4E.08 6.5
CS Voltage Block 4E.09 V<
[Indexed String]

Gen Under Freq 4E.0A 49.5

Gen Over Freq 4E.0B 50.5
CHECK SYNC 4E.10
0 or 1
CS1 Status 4E.11 Enabled
[Indexed String]

CS1 Phase Angle 4E.12 20
CS1 Slip Control 4E.13 Frequency only
[Indexed String]

CS1 Slip Freq 4E.14 0.05

CS1 Slip Timer 4E.15 1
0 or 1
CS2 Status 4E.16 Disabled
[Indexed String]

CS2 Phase Angle 4E.17 20
CS2 Slip Control 4E.18 Frequency only
[Indexed String]

CS2 Slip Freq 4E.19 0.05

CS2 Slip Timer 4E.1A 1
SYSTEM SPLIT 4E.20
P345-AD-EN-1 B101

DESCRIPTION
0 or 1
SS Status 4E.21 Enabled
[Indexed String]

SS Phase Angle 4E.22 120
0 or 1
SS Under V Block 4E.23 Enabled
[Indexed String]

SS UnderVoltage 4E.24 54

SS Timer 4E.25 1

CB Close Time 4E.30 0.05

Select Record B0.01
[Unsigned Integer(2)]
Faulted Phase
Faulted Phase B0.40
Start Elements1
Start Elements1 B0.42
[Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String]
Start Elements2
Start Elements3
Start Elements4
Trip Elements1
Trip Elements1 B0.49
Trip Elements2
Trip Elements2 B0.4A
Trip Elements3
Trip Elements3 B0.4B
Trip Elements4
Trip Elements4 B0.4C
Fault Alarms
Fault Alarms B0.50
Fault Alarms 2
Fault Alarms 2 B0.51
Fault Time
Fault Time B0.55
Active Group B0.57 Active Group
B102 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
[Unsigned Integer]
System Frequency
System Frequency B0.59
Fault Duration
Fault Duration B0.5B
CB Operate Time
CB Operate Time B0.5E
Relay Trip Time

Relay Trip Time B0.60
IA-1
IA-1 IA-1 RMS B0.62 IA-1 RMS
IB-1
IB-1 IB-1 RMS B0.63 IB-1 RMS
IC-1
IC-1 IC-1 RMS B0.64 IC-1 RMS
VAB
VAB B0.65
VBC
VBC B0.66
VCA
VCA B0.67
VAN
VAN VA-1 RMS B0.68 VA-1 RMS
VBN
VBN VB-1 RMS B0.69 VB-1 RMS
VCN
VCN VC-1 RMS B0.6A VC-1 RMS
IA-2
IA-2 IA-2 RMS B0.70 IA-2 RMS
IB-2
IB-2 IB-2 RMS B0.71 IB-2 RMS
IC-2
IC-2 IC-2 RMS B0.72 IC-2 RMS
IA Differential B0.80 IA Differential
P345-AD-EN-1 B103

DESCRIPTION
IB Differential
IB Differential B0.81
IC Differential
IC Differential B0.82
IA Diff PU
IA Diff PU B0.83
IB Diff PU
IB Diff PU B0.84
IC Diff PU
IC Diff PU B0.85
IA Diff 2H
IA Diff 2H B0.86
IB Diff 2H
IB Diff 2H B0.87
IC Diff 2H
IC Diff 2H B0.88
IA Diff 5H
IA Diff 5H B0.89
IB Diff 5H
IB Diff 5H B0.8A
IC Diff 5H
IC Diff 5H B0.8B
VN1 Measured
VN1 Measured B0.90
VN2 Measured
VN2 Measured B0.92
VN Derived
VN Derived VN-1
B0.94 VN-1 Derived RMS
Derived RMS
IN Measured
IN Measured B0.96
I Sensitive1
I Sensitive1 B0.99
I Sensitive2
I Sensitive2 B0.9A
IREF Diff
IREF Diff B0.9C
IREF Bias
IREF Bias B0.9D
B104 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
I2
I2 B0.A0
V2
V2 B0.A2
3 Phase Watts
3 Phase Watts B0.A6
3 Phase VArs
3 Phase VArs B0.A8
3Ph Power Factor

3Ph Power Factor B0.AA
Sen Watts
Sen Watts B0.AB
Sen VArs
Sen VArs B0.AC
Sen Power Factor

Sen Power Factor B0.AD
RTD 1
RTD 1 B0.B0
RTD 2
RTD 2 B0.B1
RTD 3
RTD 3 B0.B2
RTD 4
RTD 4 B0.B3
RTD 5
RTD 5 B0.B4
RTD 6
RTD 6 B0.B5
RTD 7
RTD 7 B0.B6
RTD 8
RTD 8 B0.B7
RTD 9
RTD 9 B0.B8
RTD 10
RTD 10 B0.B9
CLIO Input 1
CLIO Input 1 B0.C6
CLIO Input 2 B0.C7 CLIO Input 2
P345-AD-EN-1 B105

DESCRIPTION
CLIO Input 3
CLIO Input 3 B0.C8
CLIO Input 4
CLIO Input 4 B0.C9
64S V Magnitude
64S V Magnitude B0.CA
64S I Magnitude
64S I Magnitude B0.CB
64S R primary
64S R primary B0.CC
64R CL Input
64R CL Input B0.CD
64R R Fault
64R R Fault B0.CE
IA Peak Mag
IA Peak Mag IA-1 Peak B0.E4 IA-1 Peak
IA(CT1) Peak Magnitude
IB Peak Mag
IB Peak Mag IB-1 Peak B0.E5 IB-1 Peak
IB(CT1) Peak Magnitude
IC Peak Mag
IC Peak Mag IC-1 Peak B0.E6 IC-1 Peak
IC(CT1) Peak Magnitude
I2t Phase A
I2t Phase A B0.E7
I2t(CT1) Phase A
I2t Phase B
I2t Phase B B0.E8
I2t(CT1) Phase B
I2t Phase C
I2t Phase C B0.E9
I2t(CT1) Phase C
IA-2 Peak Mag
IA-2 Peak Mag IA-2
B0.EA IA-2 Peak
Peak
IA(CT2) Peak Magnitude
IB-2 Peak Mag
IB-2 Peak Mag IB-2
B0.EB IB-2 Peak
Peak
IB(CT2) Peak Magnitude
IC-2 Peak Mag
IC-2 Peak Mag IC-2
B0.EC IC-2 Peak
Peak
IC(CT2) Peak Magnitude
I2t Phase A-2
I2t Phase A-2 B0.ED
I2t(CT2) Phase A
I2t Phase B-2 B0.EE I2t Phase B-2
B106 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
I2t(CT2) Phase B
I2t Phase C-2
I2t Phase C-2 B0.EF
I2t(CT2) Phase C
Select Record B1.01
[UINT16]
Time and Date

Time and Date B1.02
[IEC Date and Time]
Maint Text
Maint Text B1.03
[ASCII Text]
Maint Type
Maint Type B1.04
[UINT32]
Maint Data
Maint Data B1.05
[UINT32]
0 or 1
Domain B2.04 PSL Settings
[Indexed String]
Sub-Domain B2.08 Group 1
[Indexed String]

Version B2.0C 256
[Unsigned Integer (2 Bytes)]
Start B2.10
Length B2.14
Data Transfer
B2.18
Reference
Transfer Mode B2.1C 6
[Unsigned Integer Indexed Strings]
Data Transfer B2.20
Recorder Source
Recorder Source B3.02 Samples
[Indexed String]
Reserved for future use B3.03-1F

Select Record B4.01 0
[Unsigned Integer]
Trigger Time
Trigger Time B4.02
Active Channels
Active Channels B4.03
[Binary Flag]
Channel Types
Channel Types B4.04
[Binary Flag]
Channel Offsets B4.05 Channel Offsets
P345-AD-EN-1 B107

DESCRIPTION
Channel Scaling
Channel Scaling B4.06
Channel SkewVal
Channel SkewVal B4.07
[Integer]
Channel MinVal
Channel MinVal B4.08
[Integer]
Channel MaxVal
Channel MaxVal B4.09
[Integer]
Format
Format B4.0A
[Unsigned Integer]
Record format: 0 = uncompressed, 1 = compressed
Upload
Upload B4.0B
[Unsigned Integer]
Channel P Ratio
Channel P Ratio B4.0C
Channel S Ratio
Channel S Ratio B4.0D
Channel P or S
Channel P or S B4.0E
[Unsigned Integer]
No. Of Samples
No. Of Samples B4.10
[Unsigned Integer]
Trig Position
Trig Position B4.11
[Unsigned Integer]
Time Base
Time Base B4.12
Sample Timer
Sample Timer B4.14
[Unsigned Integer]
Dist. Channel 1
Dist. Channel 1 B4.20
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 2
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 3
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 4
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 5
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 6
[Integer]
B108 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Dist. Channel 7
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 8
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 9
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 10
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 11
Dist. Channel 11 B4.2A
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 12
Dist. Channel 12 B4.2B
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 13
Dist. Channel 13 B4.2C
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 14
Dist. Channel 14 B4.2D
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 15
Dist. Channel 15 B4.2E
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 16
Dist. Channel 16 B4.2F
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 17
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 18
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 19
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 20
[Integer]
Dist. Channel 31
Dist. Channel 31 B4.3E
[Binary Flag]
Dist. Channel 32
Dist. Channel 32 B4.3F
[Binary Flag]
Calibration Coefficients
B5.
(Hidden) (Note No Text)
Cal Soft Version B5.01
Cal Date and Time B5.02
Channel Types B5.03
Cal Coeffs B5.04
P345-AD-EN-1 B109

DESCRIPTION
Comms Diagnostics
B6.00
(Hidden)
Bus Comms Err Count

B6.01
Front
Bus Message Count

B6.02
Front
Protocol Err Count

B6.03
Front
Reset front count B6.05
Bus Comms Err Count

B6.06
Rear
Protocol Err Count Rear B6.07
Busy Count Rear B6.09
Reset Rear Count B6.0A
Grp 1 PSL Ref

Grp 1 PSL Ref B7.01
[ASCII Text (32 Chars)]
Date/Time
Date/Time B7.02
[IEC 870 Date & Time]
Grp 1 PSL ID
Grp 1 PSL ID B7.03
Grp 2 PSL Ref

Grp 2 PSL Ref B7.11
Date/Time
Date/Time B7.12
Grp 2 PSL ID
Grp 2 PSL ID B7.13
Grp 3 PSL Ref

Grp 3 PSL Ref B7.21
Date/Time
Date/Time B7.22
Grp 3 PSL ID
Grp 3 PSL ID B7.23
Grp 4 PSL Ref

Grp 4 PSL Ref B7.31
Date/Time
Date/Time B7.32
Grp 4 PSL ID
Grp 4 PSL ID B7.33
B110 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Curve 1 Name
Curve 1 Name B8.01
Date & Time

Date & Time B8.02
Curve 1 ID
Curve 1 ID B8.03
0 or 1
UserCurve 1 Type B8.04 Operate 1.0
[Indexed String]
Curve 2 Name
Curve 2 Name B8.11
Date & Time

Date & Time B8.12
Curve 2 ID
Curve 2 ID B8.13
0 or 1
UserCurve 2 Type B8.14 Operate 1.0
[Indexed String]
Curve 3 Name
Curve 3 Name B8.21
Date & Time

Date & Time B8.22
Curve 3 ID
Curve 3 ID B8.23
0 or 1
UserCurve 3 Type B8.24 Reset 1.1
[Indexed String]
Curve 4 Name
Curve 4 Name B8.31
Date & Time

Date & Time B8.32
Curve 4 ID
Curve 4 ID B8.33
0 or 1
UserCurve 4 Type B8.34 Reset 1.1
[Indexed String]
COMMS SYS DATA BF.00
Dist Record Cntrl Ref

Dist Record Cntrl Ref BF.01 B300
[Menu Cell(2)]
Dist Record Extract Ref

Dist Record Extract Ref BF.02 B400
[Menu Cell(2)]
Setting Transfer BF.03
Reset Demand BF.04
P345-AD-EN-1 B111

DESCRIPTION
Block Xfer Ref

Block Xfer Ref BF.06 B200
[Menu Cell(2)]
Encryption Key
Encryption Key BF.10
Connected i/face
Connected i/face BF.11
[Unsigned Integer]
DIAGNOSTICS (hidden) E0.00
0 or 1
Enable Column E0.01 0 (No)
[Indexed String]
CPU Load-Instant
CPU Load-Instant E0.11
CPU Load-Average
CPU Load-Average E0.12
CPU Load-Min
CPU Load-Min E0.13
CPU Load-Max
CPU Load-Max E0.14
0 or 1
CPU Load Reset E0.1F 0 (No)
[Indexed String]

DDB to set: E0.21

DDB to reset: E0.22

DDB to pulse: E0.23
0 or 1
Name Unfitted IO E0.26 0 (No)
[Indexed String]
From 0 to 2^32-1 in steps of 1

UINT32 - 1 E0.31

UINT32 - 2 E0.32

UINT32 - 3 E0.33

UINT32 - 4 E0.34

UINT32 - 5 E0.35
INT32 - 1
INT32 - 1 E0.41
[Signed Integer (32 bits)]
B112 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
INT32 - 2
INT32 - 2 E0.42
INT32 - 3
INT32 - 3 E0.43
INT32 - 4
INT32 - 4 E0.44
INT32 - 5
INT32 - 5 E0.45
BIN32 - 1
BIN32 - 1 E0.51
BIN32 - 2
BIN32 - 2 E0.52
BIN32 - 3
BIN32 - 3 E0.53
BIN32 - 4
BIN32 - 4 E0.54
BIN32 - 5
BIN32 - 5 E0.55
FLT32 - 1
FLT32 - 1 E0.61
[Courier Number (meters)]
FLT32 - 2
FLT32 - 2 E0.62
FLT32 - 3
FLT32 - 3 E0.63
FLT32 - 4
FLT32 - 4 E0.64
FLT32 - 5
FLT32 - 5 E0.65
ETHERNET STATUS F0.00
Ethernet Status From 0 to 239 in steps of 1

F0.01
Selector [Unsigned Integer]
Ethernet Status Ethernet Status Number

F0.03
Number [Unsigned Integer]
Ethernet Fatal Error

Ethernet Fatal Error F0.04
[Unsigned Integer]
P345-AD-EN-1 B113
ORDINAL SIGNAL NAME ELEMENT NAME

DESCRIPTION
0 Relay 1 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_1
Output Relay 1
Output Relay 2
Output Relay 3
Output Relay 4
Output Relay 5
Output Relay 6
Output Relay 7
Output Relay 8
Output Relay 9
Output Relay 10
Output Relay 11
Output Relay 12
Output Relay 13
Output Relay 14
Output Relay 15
Output Relay 16
Output Relay 17
Output Relay 18
Output Relay 19
Output Relay 20
Output Relay 21
Output Relay 22
Output Relay 23
Output Relay 24
Output Relay 25
Output Relay 26
Output Relay 27
Output Relay 28
Output Relay 29
B114 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Output Relay 30
Output Relay 31
Output Relay 32
32 Opto 1 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_1
Opto Isolator Input 1
P345-AD-EN-1 B115

DESCRIPTION
64 Relay Cond 1 DDB_OUTPUT_CON_1
Relay Conditioner 1
Relay Conditioner 2
Relay Conditioner 3
Relay Conditioner 4
Relay Conditioner 5
Relay Conditioner 6
Relay Conditioner 7
Relay Conditioner 8
Relay Conditioner 9
Relay Conditioner 10
B116 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
96 LED1 Red DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_1_RED
Tri-LED - 1 - Red
97 LED1 Grn DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_1_GRN
Tri-LED - 1 - Green
Tri-LED - 2 - Red
Tri-LED - 2 - Green
Tri-LED - 3 - Red
Tri-LED - 3 - Green
Tri-LED - 4 - Red
Tri-LED - 4 - Green
Tri-LED - 5 - Red
Tri-LED - 5 - Green
Tri-LED - 6 - Red
Tri-LED - 6 - Green
Tri-LED - 7 - Red
Tri-LED - 7 - Green
Tri-LED - 8 - Red
Tri-LED - 8 - Green
112 FnKey LED1 Red DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_9_RED
Tri-LED - 9 - Red
113 FnKey LED1 Grn DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_9_GRN
Tri-LED - 9 - Green
Tri-LED - 10 - Red
Tri-LED - 10 - Green
P345-AD-EN-1 B117

DESCRIPTION
Tri-LED - 11 - Red
Tri-LED - 12 - Red
Tri-LED - 13 - Red
Tri-LED - 14 - Red
Tri-LED - 15 - Red
Tri-LED - 16 - Red
Tri-LED - 17 - Red
Tri-LED - 18 - Red
160 LED1 Con R DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_1
Tri-LED Conditioner - 1 - Red
161 LED1 Con G DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_1
Tri-LED Conditioner- 1 - Green
Tri-LED Conditioner - 2 - Green
B118 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
176 FnKey LED1 ConR DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_9
177 FnKey LED1 ConG DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_9
240 InterMiCOM in 1 DDB_INTERIN_1
InterMiCOM Input bit 1
P345-AD-EN-1 B119

DESCRIPTION
248 InterMiCOM out 1 DDB_INTEROUT_1
InterMiCOM Output bit 1
256 Function Key 1 DDB_FN_KEY_1
Function Key 1
Function Key 2
Function Key 3
Function Key 4
Function Key 5
Function Key 6
Function Key 7
Function Key 8
Function Key 9
Function Key 10
288 Timer out 1 DDB_TIMEROUT_1
Auxiliary Timer out 1
B120 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
320 Timer in 1 DDB_TIMERIN_1
Auxiliary Timer in 1
352 Prot'n Disabled DDB_PROTECTION_DISABLED
Protection disabled - typically out of service due to test mode
353 F out of Range DDB_FREQ_ALARM
Frequency Out of Range
354 SG-DDB Invalid DDB_ILLEGAL_OPTO_SETTINGS_GROUP
Setting Group selection by DDB inputs invalid
355 Prot'n Disabled DDB_OOS_ALARM
Test Mode Enabled
356 VT Fail Alarm DDB_VTS_INDICATION
VTS VT Fail Alarm
357 CT-1 Fail Alarm DDB_CTS_INDICATION
CTS-1 CT-1 Fail Alarm
P345-AD-EN-1 B121

DESCRIPTION
358 CB Fail Alarm DDB_BREAKER_FAIL_ALARM
Breaker Fail Any Trip
359 I^ Maint Alarm DDB_BROKEN_CURRENT_ALARM
Broken Current Maintenance Alarm
360 I^ Lockout Alarm DDB_BROKEN_CURRENT_LOCKOUT
Broken Current Lockout Alarm
361 CB Ops Maint DDB_MAINTENANCE_ALARM
Number of CB Operations Maintenance Alarm
362 CB Ops Lockout DDB_MAINTENANCE_LOCKOUT
Number of CB Operations Maintenance Lockout
363 CB Op Time Maint DDB_EXCESSIVE_OP_TIME_ALARM
Excessive CB Operation Time Maintenance Alarm
364 CB Op Time Lock DDB_EXCESSIVE_OP_TIME_LOCKOUT
Excessive CB Operation Time Lockout Alarm
365 Fault Freq Lock DDB_EFF_LOCKOUT
Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm
366 CB Status Alarm DDB_CB_STATUS_ALARM
CB Status Alarm
367 Man CB Trip Fail DDB_CB_FAILED_TO_TRIP
CB Failed to Trip
368 Man CB Cls Fail DDB_CB_FAILED_TO_CLOSE
CB Failed to Close
369 Man CB Unhealthy DDB_CONTROL_CB_UNHEALTHY
Control CB Unhealthy
370 NPS Thermal Alm DDB_NPS_ALARM
Negative Phase Sequence thermal Alarm
371 Gen Thermal Alm DDB_GEN_THERMAL_ALARM
Thermal Overload Alarm
372 V/Hz Alarm DDB_VPERHZ_ALARM
Volts Per Hz Alarm
373 Field Fail Alarm DDB_FIELDF_ALARM
Field Failure Alarm
374 RTD Thermal Alm DDB_RTD_ALARM
RTD Thermal Alarm
375 RTD Open Cct DDB_RTD_OPEN_CCT
RTD Open Circuit Failure
376 RTD short Cct DDB_RTD_SHORT_CCT
RTD Short Circuit Failure
377 RTD Data Error DDB_RTD_DATA_ERROR
RTD Data Inconsistency Error
378 RTD Board Fail DDB_RTD_BOARD_FAILURE
RTD Board Failure
379 Freq Prot Alm DDB_FREQ_PROT_ALM
Frequency Protection Alarm
380 Voltage Prot Alm DDB_VOLTAGE_PROT_ALM
Voltage Protection Alarm
381 CT-2 Fail Alarm DDB_CTS_2_INDICATION
CTS-2 CT-2 Fail Alarm
382 64S R<1 Alarm DDB_STEFI_UR_1_TRIP
64S 100% St EF Under Resistance Stage 1 Alarm
383 64S Fail Alarm DDB_STEFI_FAIL_ALARM
64S Injection Fail Alarm
384 CL Card I/P Fail DDB_CLIO_CARD_INPUT_FAIL
CLIO Input Board Failure
385 CL Card O/P Fail DDB_CLIO_CARD_OUTPUT_FAIL
CLIO Output Board Failure
386 CL Input 1 Alarm DDB_CL_INPUT_1_ALARM
Current Loop Input 1 Alarm
B122 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
390 CLI1 I< Fail Alm DDB_CLI_1_UNDERCURRENT_ALARM
Current Loop Input 1 Undercurrent Fail Alarm
394 64R R<1 Alarm DDB_64R_UR_1_TRIP
64R Rotor EF Under Resistance Stage 1 Alarm
395 64R CL I/P Fail DDB_64R_CLIO_INPUT_FAIL
64R Rotor EF Current Loop Input Fail
396 CT Mismatch Alm DDB_CT_PARA_MISMATCH_ALARM
CT parameter mismatch alarm
397 Loss of Life Alm DDB_LOL_ALARM
Loss of Life Alarm
398 FAA Alarm DDB_FAA_ALARM
Aging Acceleration Factor Alarm
399 Thru Fault Alm DDB_THROUGH_FAULT_ALARM
Through Fault Alarm
400 Circuit Flt Alm DDB_CIRCUITRY_FLT_ALM
Circuitry Fault Alarm
401 XThermPretrp Alm DDB_TOL_PRETRIP_ALARM
Tol Pretrip Alm
402 Diff CTS Alarm DDB_DIFF_CTS_INDICATION
Differential CTS Alarm
403 Man No Checksync DDB_CONTROL_NO_CHECK_SYNC
Manual close CB but do not satisfy CS condition
404 System Split Alm DDB_SYSTEM_SPLIT_ALARM
System Split Alarm
405 Pslip Angle Alm DDB_PSLIP_ANG_ALARM
Pole Slipping Alarm(internal phase angle)
406 Pslip Power Alm DDB_PSLIP_POW_ALARM
Pole Slipping Alarm(Sensitive Power)
407 MR User Alarm 9 DDB_USER_ALARM_9
User Definable Alarm 9 (Manual Reset)
412 SR User Alarm 4 DDB_USER_ALARM_4
User Definable Alarm 4 (Self Reset)
P345-AD-EN-1 B123

DESCRIPTION
416 Battery Fail DDB_BATTERY_FAIL_ALARM
Battery Fail alarm indication
418 Rear Comm 2 Fail DDB_INTERMICOM_FAIL_ALARM
InterMiCOM Second rear comm card failure indication
419 GOOSE IED Absent DDB_GOOSE_MISSING_IED_ALARM
Enrolled GOOSE IED absent alarm indication
420 NIC Not Fitted DDB_ECARD_NOT_FITTED_ALARM
Network Interface Card not fitted/failed alarm
421 NIC No Response DDB_NIC_NOT_RESPONDING_ALARM
Network Interface Card not responding alarm
422 NIC Fatal Error DDB_NIC_FATAL_ERROR_ALARM
Network Interface Card fatal error alarm indication
423 NIC Soft. Reload DDB_NIC_SOFTWARE_RELOAD_ALARM
Network Interface Card software reload alarm
424 Bad TCP/IP Cfg. DDB_INVALID_TCP_IP_CONFIG_ALARM
Bad TCP/IP Configuration Alarm
425 Bad OSI Config. DDB_INVALID_OSI_CONFIG_ALARM
Bad OSI Configuration Alarm
426 NIC Link Fail DDB_NIC_LINK_FAIL_ALARM
Network Interface Card link fail alarm indication
427 NIC SW Mis-Match DDB_SW_MISMATCH_ALARM
Main card/NIC software mismatch alarm indication
428 IP Addr Conflict DDB_IP_ADDRESS_CONFLICT_ALARM
IP address conflict alarm indication
429 IM Loopback DDB_INTERIN_LOOPBACK_ALARM
InterMiCOM Loop-back alarm indication
430 IM Message Fail DDB_INTERIN_MSG_FAIL_ALARM
InterMiCOM Message Fail alarm indication
431 IM Data CD Fail DDB_INTERIN_DCD_FAIL_ALARM
InterMiCOM DCD Fail alarm indication
432 IM Channel Fail DDB_INTERIN_CHAN_FAIL_ALARM
InterMiCOM Channel Fail alarm indication
433 Backup Setting DDB_BACKUP_DATA_IN_USE
Setting Fail Indication during the setting changing process.
434 Reserved DDB_DNPEV_BAD_SETTINGS_ALARM
Bad DNP Settings
435 Backup Usr Curve DDB_BACKUP_USR_CRV_ALARM
Backup Curve
436 SNTP Failure DDB_SNTP_FAIL_ALARM
SNTP sync fail alarm
437 NIC MemAllocFail DDB_NIC_MEM_ALLOC_FAIL_ALARM
MMS libraries memory allocation fails
438 PTP Sync Fail DDB_PTP_FAIL_ALARM
Indicates PTP sync failed
512 Gen Diff Block DDB_GENDIFF_BLOCK
Block Generator Differential protection
513 Xform Diff Block DDB_BLK_XFORMER_DIFF
Block Xformer Differential protection
514 Inhibit Diff CTS DDB_DIFF_INHIBIT_CTS
differential CTS
515 Intlock CB OPN DDB_INTERLOCK_CB1_OPN_ENABLED
CB open enabled (interlock)
516 Intlock CB CLS DDB_INTERLOCK_CB1_CLS_ENABLED
CB close enabled (interlock)
517 P/Word Block UI DDB_PASSWORD_BLK_UI
This DDB indicates the Pass Word is blocked on the UI
518 P/Word Block FP DDB_PASSWORD_BLK_FP
This DDB indicates the Pass Word is blocked on the Front Port
B124 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
519 P/Word Block RP1 DDB_PASSWORD_BLK_RP1
This DDB indicates the Pass Word is blocked on the first rear port
520 P/Word Block RP2 DDB_PASSWORD_BLK_RP2
This DDB indicates the Pass Word is blocked on the second rear port
521 Security Bypass DDB_PASSWORD_BYPASS
Cyber Security Bypass is Enabled
544 IN>1 Timer Blk DDB_EF1_1_TIMER_BLOCK
Block Earth Fault Stage 1 time delay
545 IN>2 Timer Blk DDB_EF1_2_TIMER_BLOCK
Block Earth Fault Stage 2 time delay
548 ISEF>1 Timer Blk DDB_SEF_1_TIMER_BLOCK
Block SEF Stage 1 time delay
552 64S I>1 Inhibit DDB_STEFI_OC_1_INHIBIT
Inhibit 64S Overcurrent Protection
553 64S R<1 Inhibit DDB_STEFI_UR_1_INHIBIT
Inhibit 64S Under Impedance Stage 1
554 64S R<2 Inhibit DDB_STEFI_UR_2_INHIBIT
Inhibit 64S Under Impedance Stage 2
555 64S Filter On DDB_STEFI_FILTER_ON
Enable the 64S band pass filter permanently
556 64R R<1 Inhibit DDB_64R_UR_1_INHIBIT
Inhibit 64R Under Impedance Stage 1
557 64R R<2 Inhibit DDB_64R_UR_2_INHIBIT
Inhibit 64R Under Impedance Stage 2
576 I>1 Timer Block DDB_POC_1_TIMER_BLOCK
Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 1 time delay
582 I2> Inhibit DDB_NPSOC_INHIBIT
Inhibit NPS Overcurrent protection
583 I2>1 Timer Block DDB_NPSOC_1_TIMER_BLOCK
Block NPS Overcurrent Stage 1 Timer
591 V<3 Timer Block DDB_PUV_3_TIMER_BLOCK
Block Phase Under Voltage Stage 3 time delay
592 VN>1 Timer Blk DDB_RESOV_1_TIMER_BLOCK
Block Residual Over Voltage Stage 1 time delay
593 VN>2 Timer Blk DDB_RESOV_2_TIMER_BLOCK
Block Residual Over Voltage Stage 2 time delay
594 VN>3 Timer Block DDB_RESOV_3_TIMER_BLOCK
Block Residual Over Voltage Stage 3 Timer
598 V>1 Timer Block DDB_POV_1_TIMER_BLOCK
Block Phase Over Voltage Stage 1 time delay
P345-AD-EN-1 B125

DESCRIPTION
599 V>2 Timer Block DDB_POV_2_TIMER_BLOCK
Block Phase Over Voltage Stage 2 time delay
600 V2>1 Accelerate DDB_NPSOV_1_ACCELERATE
Accelerate NPS Over Voltage Stage 1 Start
608 VDepOC Timer Blk DDB_VOLT_DEP_OC_TIMER_BLOCK
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent time delay
609 UnderZ Timer Blk DDB_UNDERZ_TIMER_BLOCK
Under Impedance time delay
624 Stop Freq Track DDB_FREQ_STOP_TRACK
Stop / Halt Frequency Tracking
625 V/Hz>1 Inhibit DDB_VPERHZ_TRIP1_INH
Inhibit Volts per Hz Stage 1
626 F<1 Timer Block DDB_UFREQ_1_TIMER_BLOCK
Block Under Frequency Stage 1 Timer
630 F>1 Timer Block DDB_OFREQ_1_TIMER_BLOCK
Block Over Frequency Stage 1 Timer
631 F>2 Timer Block DDB_OFREQ_2_TIMER_BLOCK
Block Over Frequency Stage 2 Timer
632 Turbine F Inh DDB_TAF1_INHIBIT
Inhibit Turbine Abnormal Frequency Protection
633 df/dt> Inhibit DDB_DFDT_INHIBIT
df/dt> Inhibit
634 df/dt>1 Tmr Blk DDB_DFDT_1_TIMER_BLOCK
df/dt>1 Tmr Blk
df/dt>2 Tmr Blk
df/dt>3 Tmr Blk
df/dt>4 Tmr Blk
640 Reset I2 Thermal DDB_RESET_NPS_THERMAL
Reset NPS Thermal State
641 Reset GenThermal DDB_RESET_GEN_THERMAL
Reset Thermal Overload State
649 Reset XThermal DDB_RESET_XTHERMAL
Reset Xformer Thermal Overload State
650 Forced Air Cool DDB_XTHERMAL_AIRCOOL
Select forced air cooling
651 Forced Oil Cool DDB_XTHERMAL_OILCOOL
Select forced oil cooling
652 TFR De-energised DDB_TFR_DE_ENERGISED
Xformer De-energised Status
653 Field Fail1 Inh DDB_FIELDF_1_INHIBIT
Inhibit FIELDF Stage 1
654 Field Fail2 Inh DDB_FIELDF_2_INHIBIT
Inhibit FIELDF Stage 2
655 FFail Alarm Inh DDB_FIELDF_ALARM_INHIBIT
Inhibit FIELDF Alarm
B126 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
656 CL Input 1 Blk DDB_CL_INPUT_1_BLOCK
Block Current Loop Input 1 protection
660 SPower1 Inhibit DDB_SPOWER_1_INHIBIT
Block Sensitive Power 1 protection
664 V<1 Inhibit DDB_PUV_1_INHIBIT
Block Phase UnderVoltage 1 protection
667 Power1 Inhibit DDB_POWER_1_INHIBIT
Block Power 1 protection
672 Fault REC TRIG DDB_FAULT_RECORDER_START
Fault Record Trigger Input
674 Any Trip DDB_ANY_TRIP
Any Trip
675 SG Select x1 DDB_SG_SELECTOR_X1
Setting Group Selector x1 (bit 0)
676 SG Select 1x DDB_SG_SELECTOR_1X
Setting Group Selector 1x (bit 1)
677 Test Mode DDB_TEST_MODE
Initiate Test Mode
678 Init Trip CB DDB_LOGIC_INPUT_TRIP
Logic Input Trip CB
679 Init Close CB DDB_LOGIC_INPUT_CLOSE
Logic Input Close CB
680 Ext. Trip 3ph DDB_EXTERNAL_TRIP_3PH
External Trip 3ph
681 CB Aux 3ph(52-A) DDB_CB_THREE_PHASE_52A
52-A (3 phase)
682 CB Aux 3ph(52-B) DDB_CB_THREE_PHASE_52B
52-B (3 phase)
683 CB Healthy DDB_CB_HEALTHY
CB Healthy
684 MCB/VTS DDB_VTS_MCB_OPTO
MCB/VTS opto
685 Monitor Blocked DDB_CS103_BLOCK
IEC60870-5-103 Monitor Blocking
686 Command Blocked DDB_CS103_CMD_BLOCK
IEC60870-5-103 Command Blocking
P345-AD-EN-1 B127

DESCRIPTION
687 Time Synch DDB_TIME_SYNCH
Time synchronise to nearest minute on 0-1 change
688 Reset Close Dly DDB_RESET_CB_CLOSE_DELAY
Reset Manual CB Close Time Delay
689 Reset Relays/LED DDB_RESET_RELAYS_LEDS
Reset Latched Relays & LED’s
690 Reset Lockout DDB_RESET_LOCKOUT
Reset Lockout Opto Input
691 Reset All Values DDB_RESET_ALL_VALUES
Reset CB Maintenance Values
692 RP1 Read Only DDB_RP1_READ_ONLY
Remote Read Only 1 DDB
693 RP2 Read Only DDB_RP2_READ_ONLY
Remote Read Only 2 DDB
694 NIC Read Only DDB_NIC_READ_ONLY
Remote Read Only NIC DDB
695 103 MonitorBlock DDB_MONITOR_BLOCKING
Monitor Block
696 103 CommandBlock DDB_COMMAND_BLOCKING
Command Block
697 Not Used 1 DDB_USER_ALARM_16
In the previous version, these DDBs are exist and have related DNP3 address number.However in 36 version these DDBs are not used. If
these DDBs are removed in 36 version, then most of the address numbers in 'DNP3 Object01' will be changed.

So in order to keep the communication application of version 36 compatible with the previous version,
702 Not Used 6 DDB_DFDT_TRIP
703 Not Used 7 DDB_DFDT_START
726 Block Contacts DDB_CONTACTS_BLOCKED_IP

DDB to block output contacts, same as setting Commissioning Column -> Test Mode -> Contacts Blocked
727 Contacts Blocked DDB_CONTACTS_BLOCKED_OP
Indicates contacts blocked mode enabled. Can be mapped in PSL and sent via InterMiCOM/IM64 to block contacts at the remote end.
728 Monitor Bit 1 DDB_MONITOR_PORT_1
Monitor Port 1
Monitor Port 2
Monitor Port 3
Monitor Port 4
Monitor Port 5
Monitor Port 6
Monitor Port 7
Monitor Port 8
736 Gen Diff Trip DDB_GENDIFF_3PH_TRIP
Generator Differential Trip 3ph
737 Gen Diff Trip A DDB_GENDIFF_PH_A_TRIP
B128 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Generator Differential Trip A
738 Gen Diff Trip B DDB_GENDIFF_PH_B_TRIP
Generator Differential Trip B
739 Gen Diff Trip C DDB_GENDIFF_PH_C_TRIP
Generator Differential Trip C
740 Xform Dif Trp DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_3PH_TRIP
Xformer Differential Trip 3ph
741 Xform Dif Trip A DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_PH_A_TRIP
Xformer Differential Trip A
742 Xform Dif Trip B DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_PH_B_TRIP
Xformer Differential Trip B
743 Xform Dif Trip C DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_PH_C_TRIP
Xformer Differential Trip C
744 Xform Bias Trp A DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_BIAS_TRIP_A
Xformer Differential Low Set Trip A
745 Xform Bias Trp B DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_BIAS_TRIP_B
Xformer Differential Low Set Trip B
746 Xform Bias Trp C DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_BIAS_TRIP_C
Xformer Differential Low Set Trip C
747 Xform HS1 Trip A DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_HS1_TRIP_A
Xformer Differential HS1 Trip A
748 Xform HS1 Trip B DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_HS1_TRIP_B
Xformer Differential HS1Trip B
749 Xform HS1 Trip C DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_HS1_TRIP_C
Xformer Differential HS1Trip C
750 Xform HS2 Trip A DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_HS2_TRIP_A
Xformer Differential HS2 Trip A
751 Xform HS2 Trip B DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_HS2_TRIP_B
Xformer Differential HS2Trip B
752 Xform HS2 Trip C DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_HS2_TRIP_C
Xformer Differential HS2Trip C
753 PSlip Angle Trip DDB_PSLIP_ANG_TRIP
Pole Slipping Trip(internal phase angle)
754 PSlip Power Trip DDB_PSLIP_POW_TRIP
Pole Slipping Trip(Sensitive Power)
755 FFail1 Cnt Trip DDB_CNT_FFAIL_1_TRIP
Counter Based Filed Failure1 Trip
756 FFail2 Cnt Trip DDB_CNT_FFAIL_2_TRIP
757 PSlip Angle In DDB_PSLIP_ANG_TRIP_INPUT
Pole Slipping Trip(internal phase angle)
758 PSlip Power In DDB_PSLIP_POW_TRIP_INPUT
Pole Slipping Trip(Sensitive Power)
759 FFail1 Cnt In DDB_CNT_FFAIL_1_TRIP_INPUT
760 FFail2 Cnt In DDB_CNT_FFAIL_2_TRIP_INPUT
761 PSlip Ang Alm In DDB_PSLIP_ANG_ALARM_INPUT
Pole Slipping Alarm(internal phase angle)
762 PSlip Pow Alm In DDB_PSLIP_POW_ALARM_INPUT
Pole Slipping Alarm(Sensitive Power)
768 IN>1 Trip DDB_EF1_1_TRIP
1st Stage EF Trip
769 IN>2 Trip DDB_EF1_2_TRIP
2nd Stage EF Trip
772 IREF> Trip DDB_REF_TRIP
REF Trip
773 ISEF>1 Trip DDB_SEF_1_TRIP
P345-AD-EN-1 B129

DESCRIPTION
1st Stage SEF Trip
777 100%StEF3H Trip DDB_V3H_TRIP
100% Stator Earth Fault (3rd harmonic) Trip
778 64S I>1 Trip DDB_STEFI_OC_1_TRIP
64S 100% Stator Earth Fault Overcurrent Trip
779 64S R<2 Trip DDB_STEFI_UR_2_TRIP
64S 100% St EF Under Resistance Stage 2 Trip
780 64R R<2 Trip DDB_64R_UR_2_TRIP
64R Rotor Earth Fault Under Resistance Stage 2 Trip
800 I>1 Trip DDB_POC_1_3PH_TRIP
1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph
801 I>1 Trip A DDB_POC_1_PH_A_TRIP
1st Stage O/C Trip A
802 I>1 Trip B DDB_POC_1_PH_B_TRIP
1st Stage O/C Trip B
803 I>1 Trip C DDB_POC_1_PH_C_TRIP
1st Stage O/C Trip C
2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph
2nd Stage O/C Trip A
2nd Stage O/C Trip B
2nd Stage O/C Trip C
3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph
3rd Stage O/C Trip A
3rd Stage O/C Trip B
3rd Stage O/C Trip C
4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph
4th Stage O/C Trip A
4th Stage O/C Trip B
4th Stage O/C Trip C
824 I2>1 Trip DDB_NPSOC_1_TRIP
NPS Overcurrent Stage 1 Trip
828 Bfail1 Trip 3ph DDB_CBF1_TRIP_3PH
tBF1 Trip 3ph
829 Bfail2 Trip 3ph DDB_CBF2_TRIP_3PH
tBF2 Trip 3ph
832 VN>1 Trip DDB_RESOV_1_TRIP
1st Stage Residual O/V Trip
2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip
B130 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Residual O/V Stage 3 Trip
838 V>1 Trip DDB_POV_1_3PH_TRIP
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph
839 V>1 Trip A/AB DDB_POV_1_PH_A_TRIP
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB
840 V>1 Trip B/BC DDB_POV_1_PH_B_TRIP
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC
841 V>1 Trip C/CA DDB_POV_1_PH_C_TRIP
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA
842 V>2 Trip DDB_POV_2_3PH_TRIP
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph
843 V>2 Trip A/AB DDB_POV_2_PH_A_TRIP
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB
844 V>2 Trip B/BC DDB_POV_2_PH_B_TRIP
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC
845 V>2 Trip C/CA DDB_POV_2_PH_C_TRIP
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA
846 V2>1 Trip DDB_NPSOV_1_TRIP
NPS Over Voltage Stage 1 Trip
847 V<1 Trip DDB_PUV_1_3PH_TRIP
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph
848 V<1 Trip A/AB DDB_PUV_1_PH_A_TRIP
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB
849 V<1 Trip B/BC DDB_PUV_1_PH_B_TRIP
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC
850 V<1 Trip C/CA DDB_PUV_1_PH_C_TRIP
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA
864 Field Fail1 Trip DDB_FIELDF_1_TRIP
Field Failure Stage 1 Trip
865 Field Fail2 Trip DDB_FIELDF_2_TRIP
Field Failure Stage 2 Trip
866 PSlipz Z1 Trip DDB_POLESLZ_ZONE1_TRIP
Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Trip
867 PSlipz Z2 Trip DDB_POLESLZ_ZONE2_TRIP
Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Trip
868 V Dep OC Trip DDB_VOLT_DEP_OC_3PH_TRIP
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip 3ph
869 V Dep OC Trip A DDB_VOLT_DEP_OC_PH_A_TRIP
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip A
870 V Dep OC Trip B DDB_VOLT_DEP_OC_PH_B_TRIP
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip B
871 V Dep OC Trip C DDB_VOLT_DEP_OC_PH_C_TRIP
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip C
872 Z<1 Trip DDB_UNDERZ_1_3PH_TRIP
P345-AD-EN-1 B131

DESCRIPTION
Under Impedance 3Phase Stage 1 Trip
873 Z<1 Trip A DDB_UNDERZ_1_PH_A_TRIP
Under Impedance Phase A Stage 1 Trip
874 Z<1 Trip B DDB_UNDERZ_1_PH_B_TRIP
Under Impedance Phase B Stage 1 Trip
875 Z<1 Trip C DDB_UNDERZ_1_PH_C_TRIP
Under Impedance Phase C Stage 1 Trip
876 Z<2 Trip DDB_UNDERZ_2_3PH_TRIP
Under Impedance 3Phase Stage 2 Trip
877 Z<2 Trip A DDB_UNDERZ_2_PH_A_TRIP
Under Impedance Phase A Stage 2 Trip
878 Z<2 Trip B DDB_UNDERZ_2_PH_B_TRIP
Under Impedance Phase B Stage 2 Trip
879 Z<2 Trip C DDB_UNDERZ_2_PH_C_TRIP
Under Impedance Phase C Stage 2 Trip
880 DeadMachine Trip DDB_DEADMACH_TRIP
Dead Machine Protection Trip
881 S2>1 Trip DDB_PWRNPS_1_TRIP
NPS Overpower Stage 1 trip
882 Power1 Trip DDB_POWER_1_TRIP
Power Stage 1 Trip
Power Stage 2 Trip
884 SPower1 Trip DDB_SPOWER_1_TRIP
Sensitive Power Stage 1 Trip
Power Stage 3 Trip
Power Stage 4 Trip
3rd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph
3rd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB
3rd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC
3rd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA
912 V/Hz>1 Trip DDB_VPERHZ_TRIP
1st Stage Volts per Hz Trip
913 V/Hz>2 Trip DDB_VPERHZ_TRIP2
Volts per Hz Stage 2 Trip
916 F<1 Trip DDB_UFREQ_1_TRIP
Under Frequency Stage 1 Trip
B132 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
920 F>1 Trip DDB_OFREQ_1_TRIP
Over Frequency Stage 1 Trip
921 F>2 Trip DDB_OFREQ_2_TRIP
Over Frequency Stage 2 Trip
922 Freq Band1 Trip DDB_TAF1_TRIP1
Turbine Abnormal Frequency Band 1 Trip
928 df/dt>1 Trip DDB_DFDT_1_TRIP
df/dt>1 Trip
df/dt>2 Trip
df/dt>3 Trip
df/dt>4 Trip
936 df/dt>1 Under F DDB_DFDT_1_UF
Rate Of Change Of Frequency Stage 1 Under Frequency
937 df/dt>1 Over F DDB_DFDT_1_OF
Rate Of Change Of Frequency Stage 1 Over Frequency
944 NPS Thermal Trip DDB_NPS_TRIP
Negative Phase Sequence Thermal Trip
945 Gen Thermal Trip DDB_GEN_THERMAL_TRIP
Thermal Overload Trip
946 Hot Spot>1 Trip DDB_XFORMER_HOT_SPOT_1_TRIP
Hot Spot>1 Trip
Hot Spot>2 Trip
Hot Spot>3 Trip
949 Top Oil>1 Trip DDB_XFORMER_TOP_OIL_1_TRIP
Top Oil>1 Trip
Top Oil>2 Trip
Top Oil>3 Trip
976 RTD 1 Trip DDB_RTD_1_TRIP
RTD 1 Trip
RTD 2 Trip
RTD 3 Trip
RTD 4 Trip
RTD 5 Trip
RTD 6 Trip
P345-AD-EN-1 B133

DESCRIPTION
RTD 7 Trip
RTD 8 Trip
RTD 9 Trip
RTD 10 Trip
986 Any RTD Trip DDB_ANY_RTD_TRIP
Any RTD Trip
987 CL Input 1 Trip DDB_CL_INPUT_1_TRIP
Current Loop Input 1 Trip
992 Any Start DDB_ANY_START
Any Start
993 Xform Bias StrtA DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_BIAS_STARTA
Xformer Differential Start A
994 Xform Bias StrtB DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_BIAS_STARTB
Xformer Differential Start B
995 Xform Bias StrtC DDB_XFORMER_DIFF_BIAS_STARTC
Xformer Differential Start C
1008 IN>1 Start DDB_EF1_1_START
1st Stage EF Start
1009 IN>2 Start DDB_EF1_2_START
2nd Stage EF Start
1012 ISEF>1 Start DDB_SEF_1_START
1st Stage SEF Start
1016 100%StEF3H Start DDB_V3H_START
100% Stator Earth Fault (3rd harmonic) Start
1017 64S I< Start DDB_STEFI_FAIL_I_START
64S 100% Stator Earth Fault Undercurrent Start
1018 64S V< Start DDB_STEFI_FAIL_V_START
64S 100% Stator Earth Fault Undervoltage Start
1019 64S I>1 Start DDB_STEFI_OC_1_START
64S 100% Stator Earth Fault Overcurrent Start
1020 64S Start R<1Alm DDB_STEFI_UR_1_START
64S 100% St EF Under Resistance Stg 1 Alm Start
1021 64S R<2 Start DDB_STEFI_UR_2_START
64S 100% St EF Under Resistance Stg 2 Trip Start
1022 64R Start R<1Alm DDB_64R_UR_1_START
64R Rotor EF Under Resistance Stg 1 Alm Start
1023 64R R<2 Start DDB_64R_UR_2_START
64R Rotor EF Under Resistance Stg 2 Trip Start
1040 I>1 Start DDB_POC_1_3PH_START
1st Stage O/C Start 3ph
1041 I>1 Start A DDB_POC_1_PH_A_START
1st Stage O/C Start A
1042 I>1 Start B DDB_POC_1_PH_B_START
1st Stage O/C Start B
1043 I>1 Start C DDB_POC_1_PH_C_START
1st Stage O/C Start C
2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph
B134 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
2nd Stage O/C Start A
2nd Stage O/C Start B
2nd Stage O/C Start C
3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph
3rd Stage O/C Start A
3rd Stage O/C Start B
3rd Stage O/C Start C
4th Stage O/C Start 3ph
4th Stage O/C Start A
4th Stage O/C Start B
4th Stage O/C Start C
1064 I2>1 Start DDB_NPSOC_1_START
NPS Overcurrent Stage 1 Start
1068 IA< Start DDB_PHASE_A_UNDERCURRENT
Fast under current: Phase A
1069 IB< Start DDB_PHASE_B_UNDERCURRENT
Fast under current: Phase B
1070 IC< Start DDB_PHASE_C_UNDERCURRENT
Fast under current: Phase C
1071 ISEF< Start DDB_SEF_UNDERCURRENT
ISEF< Operate
1072 IN< Start DDB_EF_UNDERCURRENT
IN< Operate
1075 TF OC Start DDB_THROUGH_FAULT_OC_START
Through fault START
1077 TF Recorder trig DDB_THROUGH_FAULT_RECORDER
Through fault TRIGGER
1088 VN>1 Start DDB_RESOV_1_START
1st Stage Residual O/V Start
2nd Stage Residual O/V Start
Residual O/V Stage 3 Start
1094 V>1 Start DDB_POV_1_3PH_START
1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph
1095 V>1 Start A/AB DDB_POV_1_PH_A_START
P345-AD-EN-1 B135

DESCRIPTION
1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB
1096 V>1 Start B/BC DDB_POV_1_PH_B_START
1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC
1097 V>1 Start C/CA DDB_POV_1_PH_C_START
1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA
1098 V>2 Start DDB_POV_2_3PH_START
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph
1099 V>2 Start A/AB DDB_POV_2_PH_A_START
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB
1100 V>2 Start B/BC DDB_POV_2_PH_B_START
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC
1101 V>2 Start C/CA DDB_POV_2_PH_C_START
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA
1102 V2>1 Start DDB_NPSOV_1_START
NPS Over Voltage Stage 1 Start
1103 V<1 Start DDB_PUV_1_3PH_START
1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph
1104 V<1 Start A/AB DDB_PUV_1_PH_A_START
1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB
1105 V<1 Start B/BC DDB_PUV_1_PH_B_START
1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC
1106 V<1 Start C/CA DDB_PUV_1_PH_C_START
1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA
1119 FFail Line Start DDB_FIELDF_LINE_START
Field Failure Line Start
1120 FFail1 Start DDB_FIELDF_1_START
Field Failure Stage 1 Start
1121 FFail2 Start DDB_FIELDF_2_START
Field Failure Stage 2 Start
1122 PSlipz Z1 Start DDB_POLESLZ_ZONE1_START
Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Start
1123 PSlipz Z2 Start DDB_POLESLZ_ZONE2_START
Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Start
1124 PSlipz LensStart DDB_POLESLZ_LENS_START
Pole Slip (impedance) Lens Start
1125 PSlipz BlindStrt DDB_POLESLZ_BLINDER_START
Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder Start
1126 PSlipz ReactStrt DDB_POLESLZ_REACT_START
Pole Slip (impedance) Reactance Line Start
1127 V Dep OC Start DDB_VOLT_DEP_OC_3PH_START
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start 3Ph
1128 V Dep OC Start A DDB_VOLT_DEP_OC_PH_A_START
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start A
1129 V Dep OC Start B DDB_VOLT_DEP_OC_PH_B_START
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start B
1130 V Dep OC Start C DDB_VOLT_DEP_OC_PH_C_START
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start C
1131 Z<1 Start DDB_UNDERZ_1_3PH_START
Under Impedance 3Phase Stage 1 Start
1132 Z<1 Start A DDB_UNDERZ_1_PH_A_START
B136 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Under Impedance Phase A Stage 1 Start
1133 Z<1 Start B DDB_UNDERZ_1_PH_B_START
Under Impedance Phase B Stage 1 Start
1134 Z<1 Start C DDB_UNDERZ_1_PH_C_START
Under Impedance Phase C Stage 1 Start
1135 Z<2 Start DDB_UNDERZ_2_3PH_START
Under Impedance 3Phase Stage 2 Start
1136 Z<2 Start A DDB_UNDERZ_2_PH_A_START
Under Impedance Phase A Stage 2 Start
1137 Z<2 Start B DDB_UNDERZ_2_PH_B_START
Under Impedance Phase B Stage 2 Start
1138 Z<2 Start C DDB_UNDERZ_2_PH_C_START
Under Impedance Phase C Stage 2 Start
1139 S2>1 Start DDB_PWRNPS_1_START
NPS Overpower Stage 1 Start
1140 Power1 Start DDB_POWER_1_START
Power Stage 1 Start
Power Stage 2 Start
1142 SPower1 Start DDB_SPOWER_1_START
Sensitive Power Stage 1 Start
Sensitive Power Stage 2 Start
Power Stage 3 Start
Power Stage 4 Start
Sensitive Phase Power Stage 3 Start
Sensitive Phase Power Stage 4 Start
3rd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph
3rd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB
3rd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC
3rd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA
1168 V/Hz>1 Start DDB_VPERHZ_START
1st Stage Volts per Hz Start
1169 V/Hz>2 Start DDB_VPERHZ_START2
Volts per Hz Stage 2 Start
1172 F<1 Start DDB_UFREQ_1_START
Under Frequency Stage 1 Start
1176 F>1 Start DDB_OFREQ_1_START
Over Frequency Stage 1 Start
1177 F>2 Start DDB_OFREQ_2_START
P345-AD-EN-1 B137

DESCRIPTION
Over Frequency Stage 2 Start
1178 Freq Band1 Start DDB_TAF1_START1
Turbine Abnormal Frequency Band 1 Start
1184 df/dt>1 Start DDB_DFDT_1_START
df/dt>1 Start
df/dt>2 Start
df/dt>3 Start
df/dt>4 Start
1200 Hot Spot>1 Start DDB_XFORMER_HOT_SPOT_1_START
HotSpot>1 Start
HotSpot>2 Start
HotSpot>3 Start
1203 Top Oil>1 start DDB_XFORMER_TOP_OIL_1_START
Top Oil>1 Start
Top Oil>2 Start
Top Oil>3 Start
1232 CLI1 Alarm Start DDB_CL_INPUT_1_ALARM_START
Current Loop Input 1 Alarm Start
1236 CLI1 Trip Start DDB_CL_INPUT_1_TRIP_START
Current Loop Input 1 Trip Start
1248 VTS Fast Block DDB_VTS_FAST_BLOCK
VTS Fast Block
1249 VTS Slow Block DDB_VTS_SLOW_BLOCK
VTS Slow Block
1250 VTS Acc Ind DDB_VTS_ACCELERATE_INPUT
VTS Accelerate Indication
1251 VTS Volt Dep DDB_VTS_ANY_VOLTAGE_DEP_FN
Any Voltage Dependent
1252 VTS IA> DDB_VTS_IA_OPERATED
B138 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Ia Over Threshold
1253 VTS IB> DDB_VTS_IB_OPERATED
Ib Over Threshold
1254 VTS IC> DDB_VTS_IC_OPERATED
Ic Over Threshold
1255 VTS VA> DDB_VTS_VA_OPERATED
Va Over Threshold
1256 VTS VB> DDB_VTS_VB_OPERATED
Vb Over Threshold
1257 VTS VC> DDB_VTS_VC_OPERATED
Vc Over Threshold
1258 VTS I2> DDB_VTS_I2_OPERATED
I2 Over Threshold
1259 VTS V2> DDB_VTS_V2_OPERATED
V2 Over Threshold
1260 VTS IA delta> DDB_VTS_DELTA_IA_OPERATED
Superimposed Ia Over Threshold
1261 VTS IB delta> DDB_VTS_DELTA_IB_OPERATED
Superimposed Ib Over Threshold
1262 VTS IC delta> DDB_VTS_DELTA_IC_OPERATED
Superimposed Ic Over Threshold
1263 CTS-1 Block DDB_CTS_BLOCK
CTS-1 Block
1264 CTS-2 Block DDB_CTS_2_BLOCK
CTS-2 Block
1265 Diff CTS BLK DDB_DIFF_CTS_BLK
differential CTS
1266 Diff CTS CT1 DDB_DIFF_CTS_CT1
differential CTS
1267 Diff CTS CT2 DDB_DIFF_CTS_CT2
differential CTS
1269 CctFail Blk A DDB_CIR_FLT_A
Circuitry Fault Alarm A
1270 CctFail Blk B DDB_CIR_FLT_B
Circuitry Fault Alarm B
1271 CctFail Blk C DDB_CIR_FLT_C
Circuitry Fault Alarm C
1272 2nd Har Blk A DDB_2ND_HAR_BLKA
2nd Harmonic A
1273 2nd Har Blk B DDB_2ND_HAR_BLKB
2nd Harmonic B
1274 2nd Har Blk C DDB_2ND_HAR_BLKC
2nd Harmonic C
1275 5nd Har Blk A DDB_5TH_HAR_BLKA
5th Har Blk A
1276 5nd Har Blk B DDB_5TH_HAR_BLKB
5th Har Blk B
1277 5nd Har Blk C DDB_5TH_HAR_BLKC
5th Har Blk C
1278 Control Trip DDB_CONTROL_TRIP
Control Trip
1279 Control Close DDB_CONTROL_CLOSE
Control Close
1280 Close in Prog DDB_CONTROL_CLOSE_IN_PROGRESS
Control Close in Progress
1281 Lockout Alarm DDB_CB_LOCKOUT_ALARM
Composite Lockout Alarm
1282 CB Open 3 ph DDB_CB_OPEN
P345-AD-EN-1 B139

DESCRIPTION
3 ph CB Open
1283 CB Closed 3 ph DDB_CB_CLOSED
3 ph CB Closed
1284 All Poles Dead DDB_ALL_POLEDEAD
All Poles Dead
1285 Any Pole Dead DDB_ANY_POLEDEAD
Any Pole Dead
1286 Pole Dead A DDB_PHASE_A_POLEDEAD
Phase A Pole Dead
1287 Pole Dead B DDB_PHASE_B_POLEDEAD
Phase B Pole Dead
1288 Pole Dead C DDB_PHASE_C_POLEDEAD
Phase C Pole Dead
1289 BFail SEF Trip-1 DDB_CBF_SEF_STAGE_TRIP
CBF Current Prot SEF Stage Trip
1290 BFail Non I Tr-1 DDB_CBF_NON_CURRENT_STAGE_TRIP
CBF Non Current Prot Stage Trip
1291 BFail SEF Trip DDB_CURRENT_PROT_SEF_TRIP
CBF Current Prot SEF Trip
1292 BFail Non I Trip DDB_CBF_NON_CURRENT_PROT_TRIP
CBF Non Current Prot Trip
1293 Freq High DDB_FREQ_ABOVE_RANGE_LIMIT
Freq High
1294 Freq Low DDB_FREQ_BELOW_RANGE_LIMIT
Freq Low
1295 Freq Not found DDB_FREQ_NOT_FOUND
Freq Not Found
1297 64S F Band Block DDB_STEFI_LOW_F_BLOCK
64S 100% Stator Earth Fault - System frequency in blocking band
1298 64S Fail DDB_STEFI_FAIL
64S 100% Stator Earth Fault - Injection failure
1304 RTD 1 Alarm DDB_RTD_1_ALARM
RTD 1 Alarm
RTD 2 Alarm
RTD 3 Alarm
RTD 4 Alarm
RTD 5 Alarm
RTD 6 Alarm
RTD 7 Alarm
RTD 8 Alarm
RTD 9 Alarm
RTD 10 Alarm
1314 Blk Rmt. CB Ops DDB_BLOCK_REMOTE_CB_OPS
Blocks remote CB Trip/Close commands when asserted
1328 Live Gen DDB_SYSCHECKS_GEN_LIVE
Live Gen
1329 Dead Gen DDB_SYSCHECKS_GEN_DEAD
Dead Gen
1330 Live Bus DDB_SYSCHECKS_BUS_LIVE
B140 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Live Bus
1331 Dead Bus DDB_SYSCHECKS_BUS_DEAD
Dead Bus
1332 Check Sync 1 OK DDB_CHECKSYNC_1_OK
Check Sync 1 OK
1333 Check Sync 2 OK DDB_CHECKSYNC_2_OK
Check Sync 2 OK
1335 SysChks Inactive DDB_SYSCHECKS_INACTIVE
SysChks Inactive
1336 CS1 Enabled DDB_CHECKSYNC_1_ENABLED
CS1 Enabled
1337 CS2 Enabled DDB_CHECKSYNC_2_ENABLED
CS2 Enabled
1338 SysSplit Enabled DDB_SYSTEM_SPLIT_ENABLED
SysSplit Enabled
1339 CS1 Slipfreq> DDB_CS1_SLIP_ABOVE_SETTING
Check Synch 1 Slip > Setting
1340 CS1 Slipfreq< DDB_CS1_SLIP_BELOW_SETTING
Check Synch 1 Slip < Setting
1341 CS2 Slipfreq> DDB_CS2_SLIP_ABOVE_SETTING
Check Synch 2 Slip > Setting
1342 CS2 Slipfreq< DDB_CS2_SLIP_BELOW_SETTING
Check Synch 2 Slip < Setting
1343 CS Vgen< DDB_SYSCHECKS_VGEN_UV
Gen volts less than CS undervoltage setting
1344 CS Vbus< DDB_SYSCHECKS_VBUS_UV
Bus volts less than CS undervoltage setting
1345 CS Vgen> DDB_SYSCHECKS_VGEN_OV
Gen volts greater than CS overvoltage setting
1346 CS Vbus> DDB_SYSCHECKS_VBUS_OV
Bus volts greater than CS overvoltage setting
1347 CS Freq Low DDB_SYSCHECKS_FGEN_UF
Gen freq less than CS underfreq setting
1348 CS Freq High DDB_SYSCHECKS_FGEN_OF
Gen freq greater than CS overfreq setting
1349 CS Vgen>Vbus DDB_SYSCHECKS_VGEN_DIFF_HIGH
Gen volts greater than (bus volts + CS diff voltage setting)
1350 CS Vgen<Vbus DDB_SYSCHECKS_VBUS_DIFF_HIGH
Bus volts greater than (line volts + CS diff voltage setting)
1351 CS1 Fgen>Fbus DDB_CS1_GEN_FREQ_GT_BUS_FREQ
Gen freq greater than (bus freq + CS1 slip freq setting)
1352 CS1 Fgen<Fbus DDB_CS1_GEN_FREQ_LT_BUS_FREQ
Bus freq greater than (line freq + CS1 slip freq setting)
1353 CS1 Ang Not OK + DDB_CS1_ANG_NOT_OK_POS
Gen angle in range (CS1 ang setting to +180 deg)
1354 CS1 Ang Not OK - DDB_CS1_ANG_NOT_OK_NEG
Gen angle in range (-CS1 ang setting to -180 deg)
1355 CS2 Fgen>Fbus DDB_CS2_GEN_FREQ_GT_BUS_FREQ
Gen freq greater than (bus freq + CS2 slip freq setting)
1356 CS2 Fgen<Fbus DDB_CS2_GEN_FREQ_LT_BUS_FREQ
Bus freq greater than (gen freq + CS2 slip freq setting)
1357 CS2 Ang Not OK + DDB_CS2_ANG_NOT_OK_POS
Gen angle in range (CS2 angle setting to +180 deg)
1358 CS2 Ang Not OK - DDB_CS2_ANG_NOT_OK_NEG
Gen angle in range (-CS2 angle setting to -180 deg)
1359 CS Ang Rot ACW DDB_SYSCHECKS_ANG_ACW
Gen/Bus phase angle is rotating anti-clockwise
1360 CS Ang Rot CW DDB_SYSCHECKS_ANG_CW
P345-AD-EN-1 B141

DESCRIPTION
Gen/Bus phase angle is rotating clockwise
1361 CS Guard Enabled DDB_CHECKSYNC_GUARD_ON
Check Synch Guard on
1362 Man Check Synch DDB_MAN_SYSCHECKS
Manual check synchronization conditions are satisfied
1363 CS Guard Enable DDB_CHECKSYNC_GUARD_IN
Check Synch Guard input
1364 HMI Access Lvl 1 DDB_UIPASSWORD_ONE
bit 0 of the level access for HMI interface
1365 HMI Access Lvl 2 DDB_UIPASSWORD_TWO
bit 1 of the level access for HMI interface
1366 FPort AccessLvl1 DDB_FCURPASSWORD_ONE
bit 0 of the level access for the front port interface
1367 FPort AccessLvl2 DDB_FCURPASSWORD_TWO
bit 1 of the level access for the front port interface
1368 RPrt1 AccessLvl1 DDB_REMOTEPASSWORD_ONE
bit 0 of the level access for the rear port 1 interface
1369 RPrt1 AccessLvl2 DDB_REMOTEPASSWORD_TWO
1370 RPrt2 AccessLvl1 DDB_REMOTE2PASSWORD_ONE
1371 RPrt2 AccessLvl2 DDB_REMOTE2PASSWORD_TWO
1372 Active Group 1 DDB_CS103_GROUP1_CHANGED
Setting group 1 change
1376 Control Input 1 DDB_CONTROL_1
Control Input 1
Control Input 2
Control Input 3
Control Input 4
Control Input 5
Control Input 6
Control Input 7
Control Input 8
Control Input 9
Control Input 10
Control Input 11
Control Input 12
Control Input 13
B142 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Control Input 14
Control Input 15
Control Input 16
Control Input 17
Control Input 18
Control Input 19
Control Input 20
Control Input 21
Control Input 22
Control Input 23
Control Input 24
Control Input 25
Control Input 26
Control Input 27
Control Input 28
Control Input 29
Control Input 30
Control Input 31
Control Input 32
1408 Virtual Input 01 DDB_GOOSEIN_1
Virtual Input 01
Virtual Input 02
Virtual Input 03
Virtual Input 04
Virtual Input 05
Virtual Input 06
Virtual Input 07
Virtual Input 08
Virtual Input 09
Virtual Input 10
P345-AD-EN-1 B143

DESCRIPTION
Virtual Input 11
Virtual Input 12
Virtual Input 13
Virtual Input 14
Virtual Input 15
Virtual Input 16
Virtual Input 17
Virtual Input 18
Virtual Input 19
Virtual Input 20
Virtual Input 21
Virtual Input 22
Virtual Input 23
Virtual Input 24
Virtual Input 25
Virtual Input 26
Virtual Input 27
Virtual Input 28
Virtual Input 29
Virtual Input 30
Virtual Input 31
Virtual Input 32
Virtual Input 33
Virtual Input 34
Virtual Input 35
Virtual Input 36
Virtual Input 37
Virtual Input 38
Virtual Input 39
B144 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Virtual Input 40
Virtual Input 41
Virtual Input 42
Virtual Input 43
Virtual Input 44
Virtual Input 45
Virtual Input 46
Virtual Input 47
Virtual Input 48
Virtual Input 49
Virtual Input 50
Virtual Input 51
Virtual Input 52
Virtual Input 53
Virtual Input 54
Virtual Input 55
Virtual Input 56
Virtual Input 57
Virtual Input 58
Virtual Input 59
Virtual Input 60
Virtual Input 61
Virtual Input 62
Virtual Input 63
Virtual Input 64
1504 Quality VIP 1 DDB_VIP_QUALITY_1
GOOSE Virtual input 1 Quality bit
P345-AD-EN-1 B145

DESCRIPTION
B146 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
P345-AD-EN-1 B147

DESCRIPTION
1600 PubPres VIP 1 DDB_VIP_PUB_PRES_1
GOOSE Virtual input 1 publisher bit
B148 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
P345-AD-EN-1 B149

DESCRIPTION
1696 Virtual Output01 DDB_GOOSEOUT_1
Virtual Output 01
Virtual Output 02
Virtual Output 03
Virtual Output 04
Virtual Output 05
Virtual Output 06
Virtual Output 07
Virtual Output 08
Virtual Output 09
Virtual Output 10
Virtual Output 11
Virtual Output 12
Virtual Output 13
Virtual Output 14
Virtual Output 15
Virtual Output 16
Virtual Output 17
Virtual Output 18
Virtual Output 19
Virtual Output 20
Virtual Output 21
B150 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
Virtual Output 22
Virtual Output 23
Virtual Output 24
Virtual Output 25
Virtual Output 26
Virtual Output 27
Virtual Output 28
Virtual Output 29
Virtual Output 30
Virtual Output 31
Virtual Output 32
Virtual Output 33
Virtual Output 34
Virtual Output 35
Virtual Output 36
Virtual Output 37
Virtual Output 38
Virtual Output 39
Virtual Output 40
Virtual Output 41
Virtual Output 42
Virtual Output 43
Virtual Output 44
Virtual Output 45
Virtual Output 46
Virtual Output 47
Virtual Output 48
Virtual Output 49
Virtual Output 50
P345-AD-EN-1 B151

DESCRIPTION
Virtual Output 51
Virtual Output 52
Virtual Output 53
Virtual Output 54
Virtual Output 55
Virtual Output 56
Virtual Output 57
Virtual Output 58
Virtual Output 59
Virtual Output 60
Virtual Output 61
Virtual Output 62
Virtual Output 63
Virtual Output 64
1792 PSL Int. 1 DDB_PSLINT_1
PSL Internal connection
B152 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
P345-AD-EN-1 B153

DESCRIPTION
B154 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
P345-AD-EN-1 B155

DESCRIPTION
B156 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
P345-AD-EN-1 B157

DESCRIPTION
B158 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
P345-AD-EN-1 B159

DESCRIPTION
B160 P345-AD-EN-1

DESCRIPTION
P345-AD-EN-1 B161
B162 P345-AD-EN-1
APPENDIX C
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Appendix C - Wiring Diagrams P345
306 P345-AD-EN-1
P345 Appendix B – Wiring Diagrams
CORTEC DRAWING-
MODEL EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM TITLE ISSUE
OPTION* SHEET
Px4x - COMMS OPTIONS MICOM Px40 PLATFORM 10Px4001-1 K
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH 90% & 100% (3rd HARMONIC) STATOR E/F &
F 10P34501-1 F
INTERTURN PROTECTION (24 I/P & 24 O/P = CLIO & RTD)
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH 100% STATOR E/F PROTECTION. VIA NEUTRAL
F EARTHING TRANSFROMER WITH SECONDARY LOADING RESISTOR (24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO & 10P34501-3 F
RTD)
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH 100% STATOR E/F PROTECTION. VIA NEUTRAL
F 10P34501-4 F
EARTHING TRANSFORMER. WITH PRIMARY LOADING RESISTOR (24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO & RTD)
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) 100% STATOR EARTH FAULT (24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO &
F 10P34501-5 E
RTD)
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH 90% & 100% (3rd HARMONIC) STATOR E/ F &
F 10P34501-10 I
INTERTURN PROTECTION.(24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO & RTD)
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH 90% & 100% (3RD HARMONIC) STATOR E/F,
F 10P34501-11 G
INTERTURN PROTECTION & V CHK SYNC 24I/P & 24O/P + CLIO & RTD
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH 90% & 100% (3rd HARMONIC) STATOR E/ F
F 10P34501-13 D
PROTECTION & WATTMETRIC POWER (24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO & RTD)
P345
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) 100% STATOR E/F WITH GPM-S (24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO
F 10P34501-14 C
& RTD)
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH 90% & 100% (3rd HARMONIC) STATOR EARTH
H 10P34502-1 H
FAULT & INTERTURN PROTECTION (24 I/P & 32 O/P + RTD)
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH 90% & 100% (3rd HARMONIC) STATOR E/F,
G 10P34503-1 G
INTERTURN PROTECTION & V CHECK SYNC (32 I/P & 24 O/P + RTD)
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH V CHECK SYNC 90% & 100% (3rd HARMONIC)
J 10P34504-1 H
STATOR E/F & INTERTURN PROTECTION (32 I/P & 16 O/P + CLIO & RTD)
K 10P34505-1 H
P 10P34506-1 H
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH V CHECK SYNC 90% & 100%G (3rd HARMONIC)
T 10P34507-1 H
* When selecting the applicable wiring diagram(s), refer to appropriate model’s CORTEC.
P345-TM-AD-1 B1
GE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION PART DESCRIPTION MATERIAL
This document is the property of General Electric Company ("GE") and contains proprietary information of GE. This document is loaned on the express condition that neither it nor the information contained therein shall be disclosed to others
without the express written consent of GE, and that the information shall be used by the recipient only as approved expressly by GE. This document shall be returned to GE upon its request. This document may be subject to certain restrictions
under U.S. export control laws and regulations.© General Electric Company, GE CONFIDENTIAL UNPUBLISHED WORK.
Date: Name: Drg Next Stage: Drg ECN No: Revision: Iteration:
Title: No:
Date: Chkd: 10PX4001
Sub-contractor reference: Linear Tol PLM Sht:
K
Status:
3
CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm mm: No:
Finish: Angular Tol
Grid Solutions A20022917 Next IN WORK
DO NOT SCALE
deg: Sht:
DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW. NOTE 5
P1 P2 P2 P1 MiCOM P345 (PART) M11

A
A WATCHDOG
M12 CONTACT
S1 S2 S2 S1
B M13
- H1 WATCHDOG
C M14 CONTACT
OPTO 17 H2
S2 S1 A B C C B + L1
PHASE ROTATION - H3 L2 RELAY 1
OPTO 18 H4 L3
+
N L4 RELAY 2
- H5
D19 VA OPTO 19 L5
n H6
+ L6 RELAY 3
- H7
F1 5A L7
OPTO 20 H8
I A (2) a b c a b c + L8 RELAY 4
F2 - H9 L9
D20 VB OPTO 21 L10 RELAY 5
1A H10
F3 +
L11
F4 - H11
5A L12 RELAY 6
OPTO 22 H12
I B (2) + L13
F5 - H13 L14
D21 VC OPTO 23 RELAY 7
1A H14 L15
F6 +
F7 H15 L16
5A -
OPTO 24 L17
I C (2) H16 RELAY 8
D22 VN + L18
F8 H17
F23 COMMON K1
NOTE 2 F9 1A CONNECTION H18
K2 RELAY 9
D1 5A INTERTURN
VN(2) K3
PROTECTION C1
IA
20mA K4 RELAY 10
F24
D2 C2 K5
OUTPUT 1 1mA
1A C3 K6 RELAY 11
D3
D4 E1 C5 K7
5A - 20mA
OPTO 1 K8 RELAY 12
IB E2 C6
+ OUTPUT 2 1mA K9
D5 E3 C7
- K10 RELAY 13
D6 1A E4 OPTO 2 C9 K11
+ 20mA
D7 5A E5 C10 K12 RELAY 14
- OUTPUT 3 1mA
IC E6 OPTO 3 C11 K13
+
D8 K14
E7 C13 RELAY 15
- 20mA K15
D9 1A OPTO 4
E8 C14 K16
+ OUTPUT 4 1mA
D10 5A OPTIONAL
E9 - C15 K17
NOTE 7 CLIO RELAY 16
IN
E10 OPTO 5 C16 K18
+ CURRENT LOOP 20mA
D11
E11 INPUTS & OUTPUTS C17 J1
- INPUT 1 1mA
D12 1A OPTO 6 NOTE 8 J2 RELAY 17
E12 C18
+
J3
E13 - C20
D13 5A 20mA J4 RELAY 18
E14 OPTO 7 C21
NOTE 6 I SENSITIVE + INPUT 2 1mA J5
D14 E15 - C22 J6 RELAY 19
E16 OPTO 8 C24 J7
D15 1A + 20mA
E17 C25 J8 RELAY 20
D23 INPUT 3 1mA
COMMON J9
E18 CONNECTION C26
J10 RELAY 21
R LOAD 90% & 100% STATOR EARTH G1 C28
VN(1) - J11
FAULT (3rd HARMONIC) 20mA
D24 G2 OPTO 9 C29 J12 RELAY 22
+ INPUT 4 1mA
G3 C30 J13
-
G4 OPTO 10 J14
+ RELAY 23
F10 5A J15
G5 -
NOTES: 1. I 100% STEF NOTE 3 J16
G6 OPTO 11
C.T. SHORTING LINKS (20Hz INJECTION) + COMMS J17
(a) NOTE 4 F11 RELAY 24
G7 - J18
F12 1A
G8 OPTO 12 M17
+ -
(b) TERMINAL B1
G9 EIA485/ SEE DRAWING
-
(c) F21 OPTO 13 KBUS 10Px4001. B2 RTD 1
PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) G10 M18
+ PORT + B3
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS SHOWN AND ARE 1A CONNECTED V 100% STEF G11 - M16 B4
AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY. (20Hz INJECTION) OPTO 14 SCN
G12 B5 RTD 2
F22 +
3. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001. G13 M1 * B6
- -
G14 OPTO 15 AC OR DC B7
4. I 100% STEF USES THE 1A INPUT FOR CURRENT <2A & + x AUX SUPPLY M2 OPTIONAL
5A INPUT FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A FOR BETTER SENSITIVITY. + B8 RTD 3
G15 - B9
5. DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENTS FLOW FOR OPERATION G16 OPTO 16
+
OF DIRECTIONAL SEF PROTECTION.
G17
6. DIRECTIONAL SEF FOR PARALLEL GENERATORS CASE COMMON
G18 CONNECTION B28
CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE BUSBARS. EARTH
MiCOM P345 (PART) B29 RTD 10
7. 90% STATOR EARTH FAULT FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED B30
OR PRIMARY RESISTANCE EARTHED GENERATORS.
8. FOR 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA RANGE USE 20mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY
FOR 0-1mA RANGE USE 1mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS.
*
Issue: Revision: Title:

CID006234 Outlines updated to GE Format EXT. CONN DIAG: GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH 90% & 100%
F (3rd HARMONIC) STATOR E/F & INTERTURN PROT. (24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO & RTD)
Drg C
GE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION
Date: 4/30/2020 Name: S.J.BURTON This document is the property of General Electric Company ("GE") and contains proprietary information of GE. This document is loaned on the express
Sht: 1 UK Grid Solutions Ltd
No:
condition that neither it nor the information contained therein shall be disclosed to others without the express written consent of GE, and that the information St Leonards Building
shall be used by the recipient only as approved expressly by GE. This document shall be returned to GE upon its request. This document may be subject to Next Harry Kerr Drive, Stafford.
Date: Chkd: certain restrictions under U.S. export control laws and regulations.© General Electric Company, GE CONFIDENTIAL UNPUBLISHED WORK.
10P34501 2 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:

A
A WATCHDOG
M12 CONTACT
S1 S2 S2 S1
B M13
- H1 WATCHDOG
C M14 CONTACT
OPTO 17 H2
OPTO 18 H4 L3
+
N L4 RELAY 2
- H5
MiCOM P345 (PART) D19 VA OPTO 19 L5
n H6
+ L6 RELAY 3
- H7
F1 5A L7
OPTO 20 H8
F2 - H9 L9
1A H10
F3 +
L11
F4 H11
5A - L12 RELAY 6
OPTO 22 H12
I B (2) + L13
F5 - H13 L14
F6 1A H14 L15
+
F7 H15 L16
5A -
OPTO 24 L17
I C (2) H16 RELAY 8
D22 VN + L18
F8 H17
F23 COMMON K1
K2 RELAY 9
D1 5A INTERTURN
VN(2) PROTECTION K3
IA C1 K4 RELAY 10
F24 20mA
D2 C2 K5
OUTPUT 1 1mA
1A C3 K6 RELAY 11
D3
D4 E1 C5 K7
5A - 20mA
OPTO 1 K8 RELAY 12
IB E2 C6
+ OUTPUT 2 1mA K9
D5 E3 C7 RELAY 13
- K10
+ 20mA
- OUTPUT 3 1mA
+
D8 K14
E7 C13 RELAY 15
- 20mA K15
D9 1A OPTO 4
E8 C14 K16
+ OUTPUT 4 1mA
D10 5A OPTIONAL
E9 - C15 K17
CLIO RELAY 16
NOTE 7 IN E10 OPTO 5 C16 K18
+ CURRENT LOOP 20mA
D11
- INPUT 1 1mA
E12 C18
+
D13 5A J3
E13 - C20
20mA J4 RELAY 18
NOTE 6 I SENSITIVE
E14 OPTO 7 C21
+ INPUT 2 1mA J5
D14
E15 - C22 J6 RELAY 19
D15 1A
E16 OPTO 8 C24 J7
D23 + 20mA
20 Hz BAND. 20 Hz GEN. J8 RELAY 20
E17 C25
COMMON INPUT 3 1mA J9
90% STATOR EARTH E18 CONNECTION C26
VN(1) J10 RELAY 21
FAULT PROTECTION
G1 - C28 J11
D24 20mA
G2 OPTO 9 C29 J12 RELAY 22
+ INPUT 4 1mA
F21 G3 C30 J13
-
G4 OPTO 10 J14
V 100% STEF + RELAY 23
(20Hz INJECTION) J15
FOR DETAIL SEE G5
F22 - NOTE 3. J16
FIGURE 2 (SHT. 5) OPTO 11
G6 COMMS
+ J17
F10 5A RELAY 24
G7 - J18
G8 OPTO 12 M17
+ -
I 100% STEF F11
NOTE 4 G9 SEE DRAWING B1
(20Hz INJECTION) - EIA485/
F12 1A 10Px4001. B2 RTD 1
G10 OPTO 13 KBUS
+ M18
NOTES: PORT + B3
G11 - M16 B4
1. G12 OPTO 14 SCN
+ B5 RTD 2
(a) C.T. SHORTING LINKS
G13 M1 * B6
- -
5. DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENTS FLOW FOR OPERATION + x AUX SUPPLY M2 OPTIONAL
(b) + B8 RTD 3
TERMINAL OF DIRECTIONAL SEF PROTECTION. G15 - B9
G16 OPTO 16
(c) PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) 6. DIRECTIONAL SEF FOR PARALLEL GENERATORS +
CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE BUSBARS. G17
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS SHOWN AND ARE 1A CONNECTED COMMON
AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY. 7. 90% STATOR EARTH FAULT FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED CASE G18 CONNECTION B28
OR PRIMARY RESISTANCE EARTHED GENERATORS. EARTH
B29 RTD 10
3. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001.
B30
8. FOR 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA RANGE USE 20mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS
4. I 100% STEF USES THE 1A INPUT FOR CURRENT <2A & FOR 0-1mA RANGE USE 1mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS.
5A INPUT FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A FOR BETTER SENSITIVITY.
* POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY

CID006234 Outlines updated to GE Format EXT. CONN. DIAG: GENERATOR PROT. RELAY (80TE) WITH 100% STATOR EARTH FAULT PROT. VIA
F NEUTRAL EARTHING TRANS. WITH SECONDARY LOADING RESISTOR (24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO & RTD)
Drg C
No:
10P34501 4 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:

A
A WATCHDOG
M12 CONTACT
S1 S2 S2 S1
B M13
- H1 WATCHDOG
C M14
OPTO 17 H2 CONTACT
OPTO 18 H4 L3
+
N L4 RELAY 2
- H5
MiCOM P345 (PART) D19 VA OPTO 19 L5
n H6
+ L6 RELAY 3
- H7
F1 5A L7
OPTO 20 H8
F2 - H9 L9
1A H10
F3 +
L11
F4 - H11
5A L12 RELAY 6
OPTO 22 H12
I B (2) + L13
F5 - H13 L14
1A H14 L15
F6 +
F7 H15 L16
5A -
OPTO 24 L17
I C (2) H16 RELAY 8
D22 VN + L18
F8 H17
F23 COMMON K1
K2 RELAY 9
D1 5A INTERTURN
VN(2) PROTECTION K3
IA C1 K4 RELAY 10
F24 20mA
D2 C2 K5
OUTPUT 1 1mA
1A C3 K6 RELAY 11
D3
D4 E1 C5 K7
5A - 20mA
OPTO 1 K8 RELAY 12
IB E2 C6
+ OUTPUT 2 1mA K9
D5 E3 C7
- K10 RELAY 13
+ 20mA
- OUTPUT 3 1mA
+
D8 K14
E7 C13 RELAY 15
- 20mA K15
D9 1A OPTO 4
E8 C14 K16
+ OUTPUT 4 1mA
D10 5A OPTIONAL
E9 - C15 K17
CLIO RELAY 16
NOTE 7 IN
E10 OPTO 5 C16 K18
+ CURRENT LOOP 20mA
D11
- INPUT 1 1mA
D12 1A OPTO 6 NOTE8 J2 RELAY 17
E12 C18
+
D13 5A J3
E13 - C20
20mA J4 RELAY 18
NOTE 6 I SENSITIVE
E14 OPTO 7 C21
+ INPUT 2 1mA J5
D14
E15 - C22 J6 RELAY 19
D15 1A
E16 OPTO 8 C24 J7
D23 + 20mA
20 Hz BAND. 20 Hz GEN. J8 RELAY 20
E17 C25
COMMON INPUT 3 1mA
J9
90% STATOR EARTH E18 CONNECTION C26
VN(1) J10 RELAY 21
FAULT PROTECTION
G1 - C28 J11
D24 20mA
G2 OPTO 9 C29 J12 RELAY 22
+ INPUT 4 1mA
F21 J13
G3 - C30
G4 OPTO 10 J14
V 100% STEF + RELAY 23
(20Hz INJECTION) J15
G5 -
FOR DETAIL SEE F22 NOTE 3. J16
FIGURE 3 (SHT. 5) G6 OPTO 11
+ COMMS J17
F10 5A RELAY 24
G7 - J18
G8 OPTO 12 M17
+ -
I 100% STEF F11
NOTE 4 G9 SEE DRAWING B1
(20Hz INJECTION) - EIA485/
F12 1A 10Px4001. B2 RTD 1
G10 OPTO 13 KBUS
+ M18
PORT + B3
G11 - M16 B4
G12 OPTO 14 SCN
+ B5 RTD 2
NOTES: G13 M1 * B6
4. I 100% STEF USES THE 1A INPUT FOR CURRENT <2A & - -
1. 5A INPUT FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A FOR BETTER SENSITIVITY. + x AUX SUPPLY M2 OPTIONAL
+ B8 RTD 3
C.T. SHORTING LINKS G15 -
(a) B9
+
OF DIRECTIONAL SEF PROTECTION.
(b) G17
TERMINAL COMMON
6. DIRECTIONAL SEF FOR PARALLEL GENERATORS G18 B28
CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE BUSBARS. CONNECTION
(c) PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) RTD 10
B29
CASE
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS SHOWN AND ARE 1A CONNECTED 7. 90% STATOR EARTH FAULT FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED EARTH B30
AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY. OR PRIMARY RESISTANCE EARTHED GENERATORS.
3. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001. 8. FOR 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA RANGE USE 20mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY
*

CID006234 Outlines updated to GE Format EXT. CONN. DIAG: GENERATOR PROT. RELAY (80TE) WITH 100% STATOR EARTH FAULT PROT. VIA
F NEUTRAL EARTHING TRANS. WITH PRIMARY LOADING RESISTOR (24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO & RTD)
Drg C
No:
10P34501 5 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:
NOTE 1
20 Hz
Generator 20 Hz
P345 Band pass
AC DC
1
V A(L1) +V H 11 1B4 1B1 a
2 VN
V B(L2) -V H
3 1A1 3
V C(L3) Voltage b
1A2 500V/3
+ 6 Divider
External RLOAD
block - 8 c
7 NOTE 1 Supply
1A3 1A4 400A/200A 20 Hz voltage
9 20 Hz Generator
Device NOTE 3 5A Band pass
operative 12 P1 P2 P345
5 DC AC
1
F21 S1 S2 1B1 1B4 11 +V H V A(L1)
V 100% STEF
2
(20Hz Injection) -V H V B(L2)
1A1 3
F22 V C(L3)
1A2 Voltage
Divider 6 +
External
F10 VN 8 block
RLOAD 500V
-
5A 3 7
F11 I 100% STEF 1A4 1A3
NOTE 2 9 Device
(20Hz Injection) NOTE 3
1A 12 operative
F12 5
V 100% STEF F21
(20Hz Injection)
FIGURE 1 (SHT. 2 DETAIL)
F22
100% STATOR EARTH FAULT PROTECTION (20Hz INJECTION) VIA TERMINAL
EARTHING TRANSFORMER BROKEN DELTA WITH SECONDARY LOADING RESISTOR
F10
5A
P2 S2 I 100% STEF F11
NOTE 2
(20Hz Injection)
NOTE 1 Auxilliary Transformer ratio 1:1 1A
20 Hz voltage F12
20 Hz Generator
Band pass P345 P1 S1
DC AC
1
1B1 1B4 11 +V H V A(L1) FIGURE 3 (SHT. 4 DETAIL)
2
-V H V B(L2) 100% STATOR EARTH FAULT PROTECTION (20Hz INJECTION) VIA NEUTRAL
1A1 3
V C(L3) EARTHING TRANSFORMER WITH PRIMARY LOADING RESISTOR
1A2 Voltage
Divider 6 +
External
VN 8 block
500V
-
R LOAD
3 7
400A/200A 1A4 1A3
NOTE 3 9 Device
5A
P1 P2 12 operative
5
S1 S2 V 100% STEF F21
(20Hz Injection)
F22 NOTES
1. WIRING BETWEEN GENERATOR & BANDPASS FILTER TO BE SHIELDED IF IN DIFFERENT PANELS

F10
5A
2. FOR CURRENTS <2A USE 1A INPUTS & FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A USE 5A INPUTS
I 100% STEF F11
NOTE 2 3. EACH OF THE 5 RESISTORS IN THE VOLTAGE DIVIDER (500V/200V) CIRCUIT = 330 OHMS 80 WATTS
(20Hz Injection)
1A
F12

100% STATOR EARTH FAULT PROTECTION (20Hz INJECTION) VIA NEUTRAL
EARTHING TRANSFORMER DELTA WITH SECONDARY LOADING RESISTOR

CID006234 Outlines updated to GE Format EXTERNAL CONN. DIAG: GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE)
E 100% STATOR EARTH FAULT (24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO & RTD)
Drg C
No:
10P34501 6 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:
LV HV
A P1 P2 P2 P1
X A
S1 S2 S2 S1
X B
X C
C B C B A A B C
PHASE ROTATION
N N
MiCOM P345 (PART) MiCOM P345 (PART) M11
n n WATCHDOG
M12 CONTACT
M13
- H1 WATCHDOG
c b a c b a a b c M14 CONTACT
VA D19 OPTO 17 H2
+ L1
H3 L2 RELAY 1
5A F1 -
OPTO 18 H4 L3
I A (2) +
H5 L4 RELAY 2
F2 -
VB D20 OPTO 19 L5
1A H6
F3 + L6 RELAY 3
F4 H7
5A - L7
OPTO 20 H8
I B (2) + L8 RELAY 4
F5 - H9 L9
VC D21 OPTO 21
1A H10 L10 RELAY 5
F6 +
L11
5A F7 - H11
L12 RELAY 6
I C (2) OPTO 22 H12
VN D22 + L13
F8 H13 L14
- RELAY 7
F23 OPTO 23
1A F9 NOTE 2 H14 L15
+
INTERTURN H15 L16
VN(2) 5A D10 S2 -
PROTECTION OPTO 24 L17
P2 H16 RELAY 8
F24 IN + L18
D11 H17
COMMON K1
IA 1A D12 CONNECTION H18
P1 K2 RELAY 9
D2 S1 K3
D3 1A C1 K4 RELAY 10
F19 VG+ 20mA
D4 5A C2 K5
OUTPUT 1 1mA
IB V CHECK SYNC C3 K6 RELAY 11
NOTE 6 K7
D5 VG- C5
F20 20mA K8 RELAY 12
D6 1A C6
OUTPUT 2 1mA K9
D7 5A C7 RELAY 13
- K10
IC E2 OPTO 1 C9 K11
+ 20mA
D8 C10 K12 RELAY 14
E3 - OUTPUT 3 1mA
D9 1A OPTO 2 C11 K13
E4
E1
+ K14
D13 5A RELAY 15
E5 C13
- 20mA K15
I SENSITIVE OPTO 3
E6 C14 K16
D14 + OUTPUT 4 1mA
E7 C15 K17
1A - OPTIONAL RELAY 16
D15 OPTO 4 C16 K18
E8 20mA
D23 + CLIO
E9 C17 J1
- CURRENT LOOP INPUT 1 1mA
OPTO 5 INPUTS & OUTPUTS J2 RELAY 17
90% & 100% STATOR EARTH E10 C18
R LOAD VN(1) +
FAULT (3rd HARMONIC) NOTE 5 J3
E11 C20
D24 - 20mA J4 RELAY 18
E12 OPTO 6 C21
+ INPUT 2 1mA J5
E13 C22 J6 RELAY 19
-
F10 5A E14 OPTO 7 C24 J7
+ 20mA
NOTES: 1. I 100% STEF C25 J8 RELAY 20
E15 - INPUT 3 1mA
C.T. SHORTING LINKS (20Hz INJECTION) J9
(a) NOTE 4 F11 E16 OPTO 8 C26
+ J10 RELAY 21
F12 1A E17 C28
20mA J11
(b) COMMON
TERMINAL E18 C29 J12 RELAY 22
CONNECTION INPUT 4 1mA
F21 G1 C30 J13
(c) PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) -
OPTO 9 J14
V 100% STEF G2 RELAY 23
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS SHOWN AND ARE 1A CONNECTED + J15
AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY. (20Hz INJECTION) G3
- NOTE 3 J16
F22 OPTO 10
G4 COMMS J17
3. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001. + RELAY 24
G5 J18
4. I 100% STEF USES THE 1A INPUT FOR CURRENT <2A & -
OPTO 11 M17
5A INPUT FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A FOR BETTER SENSITIVITY. G6 -
+
5. FOR 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA RANGE USE 20mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS SEE DRAWING B1
G7 EIA485/
- 10Px4001. B2 RTD 1
FOR 0-1mA RANGE USE 1mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS. OPTO 12 KBUS
G8 M18
+ PORT + B3
6. VT CONNECTION IS SHOWN FOR A-N AND IS TYPICAL ONLY
OTHER PHASE - NEUTRAL OR PHASE-PHASE CONNECTIONS CASE G9 M16 B4
-
CAN ALSO BE USED EARTH OPTO 13 SCN
G10 B5 RTD 2
+
G11 M1 * B6
- -
OPTO 14 AC OR DC B7
G12 M2 OPTIONAL
+ x AUX SUPPLY
+ B8 RTD 3
G13 -
MiCOM P345 (PART) B9
G14 OPTO 15
+
G15 -
G16 OPTO 16 B28
+
B29 RTD 10
G17
COMMON B30
G18 CONNECTION

CID006234 Outlines updated to GE Format EXT. CONN DIAGRAM: GEN TRANSF PROT RELAY (80TE) WITH 90% & 100%
I (3rd HRM) STR EARTH FAULT & INTERTURN PROT.(24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO & RTD)
Drg C
No:
shall be used by the recipient only as approved expressly by GE. This document shall be returned to GE upon its request. This document may be subject to Next Harry Kerr Drive, Stafford. ST16 1WT,
Date: 05/03/2014 Chkd: G.LLOYD certain restrictions under U.S. export control laws and regulations.© General Electric Company, GE CONFIDENTIAL UNPUBLISHED WORK.
10P34501 11 UK
Sht:
A

X A WATCHDOG
C B M12 CONTACT
S1 S2 S2 S1
X B PHASE ROTATION M13
- H1 WATCHDOG
X C M14 CONTACT
OPTO 17 H2
S2 S1 A B C A B C + L1
- H3 L2 RELAY 1
NOTE 6.
OPTO 18 H4 L3
+
N N L4 RELAY 2
- H5
D19 VA OPTO 19 L5
n H6
n + L6 RELAY 3
- H7
F1 5A L7
OPTO 20 H8
I A (2) a b c a b c a b c + L8 RELAY 4
F2 - H9 L9
1A H10
F3 +
L11
F4 - H11
5A L12 RELAY 6
OPTO 22 H12
I B (2) + L13
F5 - H13 L14
1A H14 L15
F6 +
F7 H15 L16
5A -
OPTO 24 L17
I C (2) H16 RELAY 8
D22 VN + L18
F8 H17
F23 COMMON K1
K2 RELAY 9
D1 5A INTERTURN
VN(2) K3
PROTECTION C1
IA
20mA K4 RELAY 10
F24
D2 C2 K5
VG+ OUTPUT 1 1mA
F19 RELAY 11
D3 1A C3 K6
D4 NOTE 6. V CHECK SYNC/ C5 K7
5A 20mA
NOTE 9 K8 RELAY 12
IB
VG- C6
F20 OUTPUT 2 1mA K9
D5 C7 K10 RELAY 13
1A E1 -
D6 NOTE 9. C9 K11
E2 OPTO 1 20mA
D7 5A + VT CONNECTION IS SHOWN FOR A-N AND IS TYPICAL ONLY. C10 K12 RELAY 14
OUTPUT 3 1mA
IC E3 - OTHER PHASE - NEUTRAL OR PHASE-PHASE CONNECTIONS K13
C11
E4 OPTO 2 CAN ALSO BE USED. K14
D8 + C13 RELAY 15
E5 20mA K15
D9 1A - C14 K16
E6 OPTO 3 OUTPUT 4 1mA
D10 5A +
OPTIONAL
C15 K17
NOTE 7 E7 CLIO RELAY 16
IN - C16 K18
OPTO 4 CURRENT LOOP 20mA
D11 E8
+ INPUTS & OUTPUTS C17 J1
1A E9 INPUT 1 1mA
D12 - NOTE 8 J2 RELAY 17
C18
E10 OPTO 5 J3
+ C20
E11 - C21 J5
NOTE 6 I SENSITIVE OPTO 6 INPUT 2 1mA
E12
+ C22 J6 RELAY 19
D14
E13 -
1A C24 J7
D15 E14 OPTO 7 20mA
+ C25 J8 RELAY 20
D23 INPUT 3 1mA
E15 - J9
C26
E16 OPTO 8 J10 RELAY 21
R LOAD 90% & 100% STATOR EARTH + C28
VN(1) J11
FAULT (3rd HARMONIC) 20mA
E17
D24 COMMON C29 J12 RELAY 22
E18 INPUT 4 1mA
CONNECTION C30 J13
G1 - J14
RELAY 23
F10 5A G2 OPTO 9 J15
+
NOTES: 1. I 100% STEF G3 NOTE 3 J16
(20Hz INJECTION) -
C.T. SHORTING LINKS OPTO 10 COMMS J17
(a) NOTE 4 F11 G4 RELAY 24
+ J18
F12 1A G5 - M17
-
(b) TERMINAL G6 OPTO 11
+ SEE DRAWING B1
EIA485/
(c) F21 G7 KBUS 10Px4001. B2 RTD 1
PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) - M18
OPTO 12 PORT + B3
G8
V 100% STEF +
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS SHOWN AND ARE 1A CONNECTED M16 B4
AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY. (20Hz INJECTION) G9 - SCN
F22 B5 RTD 2
G10 OPTO 13
3. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001. + * B6
- M1
G11 - AC OR DC B7
4. I 100% STEF USES THE 1A INPUT FOR CURRENT <2A & OPTO 14 x AUX SUPPLY M2 OPTIONAL
5A INPUT FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A FOR BETTER SENSITIVITY. G12 + B8 RTD 3
+
G13 B9
5. DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENTS FLOW FOR OPERATION -
OF DIRECTIONAL SEF PROTECTION. G14 OPTO 15
+
6. DIRECTIONAL SEF FOR PARALLEL GENERATORS CASE G15 - B28
CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE BUSBARS. EARTH G16 OPTO 16
+ B29 RTD 10
7. 90% STATOR EARTH FAULT FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED G17 B30
OR PRIMARY RESISTANCE EARTHED GENERATORS. COMMON
G18 CONNECTION
8. FOR 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA RANGE USE 20mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS
MiCOM P345 (PART)

CID006234 Outlines updated to GE Format EXT. CONNECTION DIAGRAM: GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH 90% & 100%
G (3RD HRM) STR EARTH FAULT, INTERTURN PROT & V CHK SYNC 24I/P & 24O/P + CLIO & RTD
Drg C
No:
shall be used by the recipient only as approved expressly by GE. This document shall be returned to GE upon its request. This document may be subject to Next - Harry Kerr Drive, Stafford.
10P34501 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:
P1 P2 P1 P2 P2 P1 MiCOM P345 (PART) M11
A
A WATCHDOG
P1 P2 M12 CONTACT
S1 S2 S1 S2 S2 S1
B M13
- H1 WATCHDOG
S1 S2 M14
C OPTO 17 CONTACT
H2
A B C C B + L1
OPTO 18 H4 L3
+
N L4 RELAY 2
- H5
D19 VA OPTO 19 L5
n H6
+ L6 RELAY 3
- H7
F1 5A L7
OPTO 20 H8
F2 - H9 L9
1A H10
F3 +
L11
F4 - H11
5A L12 RELAY 6
OPTO 22 H12
I B (2) + L13
F5 - H13 L14
F6 1A H14 L15
+
F7 H15 L16
5A -
OPTO 24 L17
I C (2) H16 RELAY 8
D22 VN + L18
F8 H17
F23 COMMON K1
K2 RELAY 9
D1 5A INTERTURN
VN(2) K3
PROTECTION C1
IA
20mA K4 RELAY 10
F24
D2 C2 K5
OUTPUT 1 1mA
1A C3 K6 RELAY 11
D3
D4 E1 C5 K7
5A - 20mA
OPTO 1 K8 RELAY 12
IB E2 C6
+ OUTPUT 2 1mA K9
D5 E3 C7
- K10 RELAY 13
+ 20mA
- OUTPUT 3 1mA
+
D8 K14
E7 C13 RELAY 15
- 20mA K15
D9 1A OPTO 4
E8 C14 K16
+ OUTPUT 4 1mA
D10 5A OPTIONAL
E9 - C15 K17
NOTE 7 CLIO RELAY 16
IN E10 OPTO 5 C16 K18
+ CURRENT LOOP 20mA
D11
- INPUT 1 1mA
E12 C18
+
J3
E13 - C20
IN 1
E14 OPTO 7 C21
NOTE 5. SENSITIVE + INPUT 2 1mA J5
D14 E15 - C22 J6 RELAY 19
E16 OPTO 8 C24 J7
D15 1A + 20mA
E17 C25 J8 RELAY 20
F13 INPUT 3 1mA
IN 2 COMMON J9
NOTE 5.
E18 CONNECTION C26
SENSITIVE J10 RELAY 21
F14 G1 - C28 J11
20mA
1A G2 OPTO 9 C29 J12 RELAY 22
F15 + INPUT 4 1mA
G3 C30 J13
D23 -
G4 OPTO 10 J14
+ RELAY 23
J15
R LOAD VN(1) G5 - NOTE 3 J16
FAULT (3rd HARMONIC) 90% & 100% STATOR EARTH D24 G6 OPTO 11
+ COMMS J17
RELAY 24
G7 - J18
G8 OPTO 12 M17
NOTES: 1. + -
C.T. SHORTING LINKS F10 5A G9 SEE DRAWING B1
(a) - EIA485/
I 100% STEF OPTO 13 KBUS 10Px4001. B2 RTD 1
G10 M18
(20Hz INJECTION) + PORT + B3
NOTE 4 F11 G11
(b) TERMINAL - M16 B4
F12 1A G12 OPTO 14 SCN
+ B5 RTD 2
(c) PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) F21 G13 M1 * B6
- -
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS SHOWN AND ARE 1A CONNECTED G14 OPTO 15 AC OR DC B7
V 100% STEF + x AUX SUPPLY M2 OPTIONAL
AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY. (20Hz INJECTION) + B8 RTD 3
G15 -
3. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001. F22 B9
G16 OPTO 16
+
4. I 100% STEF USES THE 1A INPUT FOR CURRENT <2A & G17
5A INPUT FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A FOR BETTER SENSITIVITY. COMMON
CASE G18 B28
EARTH CONNECTION
5. SENSITIVE POWER. DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW AS SHOWN. B29 RTD 10
MiCOM P345 (PART)
6. FOR 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA RANGE USE 20mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS B30

CID006234 Outlines updated to GE Format EXT.CONN DIAG:GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH 90% & 100%
D (3RD HARMONIC) STATOR E/F & WATTMETRIC POWER. 24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO & RTD
Drg C
No:
Date: 05/03/2014 Chkd: G.LlOYD certain restrictions under U.S. export control laws and regulations.© General Electric Company, GE CONFIDENTIAL UNPUBLISHED WORK.
10P34501 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:
NOTE 1
20 Hz
Generator 20 Hz
P345 Band pass
GPM-S-G
B10 GPM-S-B
AC or DC + A5 A1 B1 a
Aux Supply Vx B9 VN
-
A1 B6 3
External
+
block 1 Voltage RLOAD
b 500V/3
A2 Divider
External
+
block 2 - A6 NOTE 3 c
A10 A3 B3
A3 NOTE 1
A6 A7 B7 400A/200A 20 Hz
A7 20 Hz
Watchdog 5A Generator
Band pass P345
contact P1 P2 GPM-S-G
A8 GPM-S-B B10 +
F21 S1 S2 B1 A1 A5 AC or DC
V 100% STEF Vx Aux Supply
B9
(20Hz Injection)
-
B6 A1
F22 Voltage + External
Divider block 1
A2
NOTE 3 External
+
F10 VN A6 block 2
RLOAD 500V
-
B3
5A 3 A3 A10 A3
F11 I 100% STEF B7 A7 A6
NOTE 2 A7 Watchdog
(20Hz Injection)
1A contact
F12 A8
V 100% STEF F21
(20Hz Injection)
F22
100% STATOR EARTH FAULT PROTECTION (20Hz INJECTION) VIA TERMINAL
EARTHING TRANSFORMER BROKEN DELTA WITH SECONDARY LOADING RESISTOR
F10
5A
P2 S2 I 100% STEF F11
NOTE 2
(20Hz Injection)
NOTE 1 Transformer ratio 1:1 1A
20 Hz F12
20 Hz
Generator
Band pass P345 P1 S1
GPM-S-G
GPM-S-B B10 +
B1 A1 A5 AC or DC FIGURE 3 (SHT. 4 DETAIL)
B9 Vx Aux Supply
-
B6 A1
Voltage + External EARTHING TRANSFORMER WITH PRIMARY LOADING RESISTOR
Divider block 1
A2
NOTE 3 External
+
RLOAD
VN A6 block 2
500V
-
B3
3 A3 A10 A3
400A/200A B7 A7 A6
A7 Watchdog
5A
P1 P2 contact
A8
S1 S2 V 100% STEF F21
(20Hz Injection)
F22 NOTES
1. WIRING BETWEEN GENERATOR & BANDPASS FILTER TO BE SHIELDED IF IN DIFFERENT PANELS

F10
5A
2. FOR CURRENTS <2A USE 1A INPUTS & FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A USE 5A INPUTS
I 100% STEF F11
NOTE 2 3. EACH OF THE 5 RESISTORS IN THE VOLTAGE DIVIDER (500V/200V) CIRCUIT = 330 OHMS 50 WATTS
(20Hz Injection)
1A
F12
4. FAULTS SHOULD BE CLEARED WITHIN 10 SECONDS TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE DIVIDER INPUT OF
THE GPM-S-B
EARTHING TRANSFORMER DELTA WITH SECONDARY LOADING RESISTOR

CID006234 Outlines updated to GE Format EXTERNAL CONN.DIAG: GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE)
C 100% STATOR E/F WITH GPM-S (24 I/P & 24 O/P + CLIO & RTD)
Drg C
No:
Date: Chkd: G. LLOYD certain restrictions under U.S. export control laws and regulations.© General Electric Company, GE CONFIDENTIAL UNPUBLISHED WORK.
10P34501 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:
A P1 P2 P2 P1
X A MiCOM P345 (PART) M11
S1 S2 S2 S1 WATCHDOG
X B M12 CONTACT
M13
X C H1 WATCHDOG
- M14
C B S2 S1 A B C A B C OPTO 17 H2 CONTACT
PHASE ROTATION + L1
- H3 L2 RELAY 1
N OPTO 18 H4 L3
N +
H5 L4 RELAY 2
D19 VA -
n n OPTO 19 L5
H6
+ L6 RELAY 3
F1 5A H7
- L7
I A (2) a b c a b c a b c OPTO 20 H8 L8 RELAY 4
+
F2
VB - H9 L9
D20
F3 1A OPTO 21 L10 RELAY 5
H10
+
F4 5A L11
- H11
L12 RELAY 6
I B (2) OPTO 22 H12
+ L13
F5
D21 VC
- H13 L14
F6 1A OPTO 23 RELAY 7
H14 L15
F7 +
5A L16
- H15
I C (2)
D22 VN OPTO 24 L17
H16 RELAY 8
F8 + L18
F23 H17
NOTE 2 F9 1A COMMON K1
CONNECTION H18
D1 5A INTERTURN K2 RELAY 9
VN(2)
PROTECTION K3
IA
F24 RELAY 10
D2 K4
F19 VG+ K5
1A C1
D3 RELAY 11
RELAY 25 C2 K6
D4 5A V CHECK SYNC
C3 K7
NOTE 8
IB K8 RELAY 12
F20 VG- RELAY 26 C4
D5 C5 K9
1A E1 8. VT CONNECTION IS SHOWN FOR A-N AND IS TYPICAL ONLY RELAY 27 C6 K10 RELAY 13
D6 -
OPTO 1 OTHER PHASE - NEUTRAL OR PHASE-PHASE CONNECTIONS
D7 E2 C7 K11
5A + CAN ALSO BE USED
RELAY 28 C8 K12 RELAY 14
IC E3
- K13
OPTO 2 C9
D8 E4
+ RELAY 29 C10 K14
1A RELAY 15
D9 E5 - K15
C11
D10 5A E6 OPTO 3 RELAY 30 K16
+ C12
NOTE 7 IN E7 C13 K17
- RELAY 16
D11 OPTO 4 C14 K18
E8 RELAY 31
+
1A C15 J1
D12 E9 - C16 J2 RELAY 17
E10 OPTO 5
D13 + C17 J3
5A RELAY 32
E11 - C18 J4 RELAY 18
NOTE 6 I SENSITIVE
OPTO 6
E12 J5
D14 +
E13 J6 RELAY 19
1A -
D15 OPTO 7 J7
E14
D23 + J8 RELAY 20
E15 - J9
90% & 100% STATOR EARTH E16 OPTO 8
R LOAD VN(1) + NOTE 3 J10 RELAY 21
FAULT (3rd HARMONIC)
D24 E17 COMMS J11
COMMON RELAY 22
E18 J12
CONNECTION
J13
G1 -
M17 J14
F10 5A G2 OPTO 9 - RELAY 23
+ J15
I 100% STEF G3 SEE DRAWING
NOTES: 1. (20Hz INJECTION) - EIA485/ J16
F11 OPTO 10 KBUS 10Px4001.
C.T. SHORTING LINKS NOTE 4 G4 M18 J17
(a) + PORT + RELAY 24
F12 1A J18
G5 - M16
G6 OPTO 11 SCN
(b) TERMINAL +
F21 B1
G7 - M1 *
(c) - B2 RTD 1
PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) G8 OPTO 12 AC OR DC
V 100% STEF + x AUX SUPPLY M2 B3
(20Hz INJECTION) +
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS SHOWN AND ARE 1A CONNECTED G9 B4
-
AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY. F22 OPTO 13
G10 B5 RTD 2
+
3. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001. G11 B6
-
OPTO 14 B7
4. I 100% STEF USES THE 1A INPUT FOR CURRENT <2A & G12 OPTIONAL
+ B8 RTD 3
5A INPUT FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A FOR BETTER SENSITIVITY.
G13 - B9
OF DIRECTIONAL SEF PROTECTION. +
CASE G15 -
6. DIRECTIONAL SEF FOR PARALLEL GENERATORS EARTH OPTO 16 B28
+
B29 RTD 10
G17
7. 90% STATOR EARTH FAULT FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED COMMON B30
OR PRIMARY RESISTANCE EARTHED GENERATORS. G18 CONNECTION
MiCOM P345 (PART) POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY
*

CID006234 Outlines updated to GE Format EXT. CONN. DIAGRAM: GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY (80TE) WITH 90% & 100%
H (3rd HARMONIC) STATOR EARTH FAULT & INTERTURN PROT. (24 I/P & 32 O/P + RTD)
Drg C
No:
10P34502 2 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:

A X A WATCHDOG
M12 CONTACT
S1 S2 S2 S1
X B M13
- H1 WATCHDOG
X C M14 CONTACT
OPTO 17 H2
C B S2 S1 A B C A B C + L1
OPTO 18 H4 L3
+
N N RELAY 2
H5 L4
-
D19 VA OPTO 19 L5
n n H6
+ L6 RELAY 3
- H7
F1 5A L7
OPTO 20 H8
I A (2) a b c a b c a b c + L8 RELAY 4
F2 H9 L9
-
1A H10
F3 +
L11
F4 - H11
5A L12 RELAY 6
OPTO 22 H12
I B (2) + L13
F5 - H13 L14
1A H14 L15
F6 +
F7 H15 L16
5A -
OPTO 24 L17
I C (2) H16 RELAY 8
D22 VN + L18
F8 H17
F23 COMMON K1
K2 RELAY 9
D1 5A INTERTURN
VN(2) K3
PROTECTION C1
IA - K4 RELAY 10
F24 OPTO 25
D2 C2 K5
+
F19 RELAY 11
D3 1A C3 K6
-
OPTO 26 C4 K7
D4 5A V CHECK SYNC +
NOTE 8 K8 RELAY 12
IB - C5
F20 K9
D5 OPTO 27 C6
+ K10 RELAY 13
1A E1 - C7
D6 - K11
E2 OPTO 1 OPTO 28
D7 5A + C8 K12 RELAY 14
+
IC E3 - C9 K13
-
E4 OPTO 2 OPTO 29 K14
D8 + C10 RELAY 15
+ K15
1A E5 - C11
D9 -
OPTO 3 K16
D10 5A E6 OPTO 30 C12
+ + K17
NOTE 7 E7 RELAY 16
IN - C13 K18
-
D11 E8 OPTO 4 OPTO 31
+ C14 J1
+
D12 1A E9 J2 RELAY 17
- - C15
E10 OPTO 5 J3
+ OPTO 32 C16
D13 5A + J4 RELAY 18
E11 - C17
NOTE 6 I SENSITIVE OPTO 6 COMMON J5
E12 C18
+ CONNECTION J6 RELAY 19
D14
E13 -
1A J7
D15 E14 OPTO 7
+ J8 RELAY 20
D23
E15 J9
-
OPTO 8 NOTE 3. J10 RELAY 21
90% & 100% STATOR EARTH E16
RLOAD VN(1) + COMMS
FAULT (3rd HARMONIC) J11
E17
D24 COMMON J12 RELAY 22
E18 CONNECTION J13
G1 - J14
M17 RELAY 23
NOTES: 1. OPTO 9 -
F10 5A G2 J15
+ SEE DRAWING
(a) C.T. SHORTING LINKS I 100% STEF EIA485/ J16
G3 10Px4001.
(20Hz INJECTION) - KBUS
OPTO 10 M18 J17
NOTE 4 F11 G4 PORT + RELAY 24
+ J18
(b) TERMINAL F12 1A G5 M16
- SCN
G6 OPTO 11
(c) PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) + B1
F21 G7 M1 * B2 RTD 1
- -
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS SHOWN AND ARE 1A CONNECTED AC OR DC
G8 OPTO 12 x AUX SUPPLY M2 B3
AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY. V 100% STEF + +
B4
(20Hz INJECTION) G9
3. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001. - B5 RTD 2
F22 G10 OPTO 13
4. I 100% STEF USES THE 1A INPUT FOR CURRENT <2A & + B6
5A INPUT FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A FOR BETTER SENSITIVITY. G11 - B7
OPTO 14 OPTIONAL
G12 B8 RTD 3
5. DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENTS FLOW FOR OPERATION +
OF DIRECTIONAL SEF PROTECTION. G13 B9
-
6. DIRECTIONAL SEF FOR PARALLEL GENERATORS G14 OPTO 15
+
CASE - B28
7. 90% STATOR EARTH FAULT FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED EARTH OPTO 16
G16 B29 RTD 10
+
G17 B30
8. VT CONNECTION IS SHOWN FOR A-N AND IS TYPICAL ONLY COMMON
G18 CONNECTION
OTHER PHASE - NEUTRAL OR PHASE-PHASE CONNECTIONS
CAN ALSO BE USED MiCOM P345 (PART) POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY
*

CID006234 Outlines updated to GE Format EXT. CONN. DIAGRAM: GEN. PROT. RELAY (80TE) + 90% & 100% (3rd HARM)
G STATOR EARTH FAULT, INTERTURN PROT.& V CHECK SYNC (32 I/P & 24 O/P + RTD)
Drg C
No:
10P34503 2 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:
MiCOM P345 (PART)
P1 P2 P2 P1 M11
A X A H1 WATCHDOG
- M12 CONTACT
S1 S2 S2 S1 OPTO 17 H2
X B + M13
WATCHDOG
H3 M14 CONTACT
X C -
C B S2 S1 A B C A B C OPTO 18 H4 L1
+
PHASE ROTATION L2 RELAY 1
- H5
L3
OPTO 19 H6
N N + L4 RELAY 2
- H7 L5
D19 VA
n n OPTO 20 H8 L6 RELAY 3
+
F1 5A H9 L7
-
a a c a b c OPTO 21 L8 RELAY 4
I A (2) b c b H10
+ L9
F2 H11
D20 VB - L10 RELAY 5
F3 1A OPTO 22 H12
+ L11
F4 5A H13 L12 RELAY 6
-
I B (2) OPTO 23 H14 L13
+
F5 L14
H15 RELAY 7
D21 VC - L15
F6 1A OPTO 24 H16 L16
+
F7 5A H17 L17
I C (2) COMMON RELAY 8
D22 VN CONNECTION H18 L18
F8
F23 - J1 K1
NOTE 2 F9 1A OPTO 25 RELAY 9
J2 K2
+
D1 5A INTERTURN K3
VN(2) J3
PROTECTION - RELAY 10
IA OPTO 26 K4
F24 J4
D2
+ K5
F19 VG+ - J5 K6 RELAY 11
D3 1A
OPTO 27 J6
+ K7
D4 5A V CHECK SYNC
NOTE 9 J7 K8 RELAY 12
IB -
F20 VG- OPTO 28 J8 K9
D5 + RELAY 13
K10
- J9
D6 1A K11
E1 OPTO 29 J10
D7 - + K12 RELAY 14
5A OPTO 1
E2 J11 K13
IC + -
E3 OPTO 30 J12 K14
D8 - + RELAY 15
E4 OPTO 2 K15
1A + - J13
D9 K16
E5 OPTO 31 J14
D10 5A - +
OPTO 3 K17
E6 J15 RELAY 16
NOTE 7 IN + - K18
E7 OPTO 32 J16
D11 - +
E8 OPTO 4
1A + J17
D12 COMMON NOTE 3
E9 - J18 COMMS
CONNECTION
D13 5A E10 OPTO 5
+ M17
NOTE 6 E11 -
I SENSITIVE
- C1
20mA SEE DRAWING
D14 E12 OPTO 6 C2 EIA485/
+ OUTPUT 1 1mA 10Px4001
M18 KBUS
D15 1A E13 C3 +
- PORT
D23 E14 OPTO 7 M16
+ C5
20mA SCN
E15 - C6
RLOAD 90% & 100% STATOR EARTH OUTPUT 2 1mA
VN(1) OPTO 8 * M1
FAULT (3rd HARMONIC) E16 C7 -
+ AC OR DC
D24
E17 C9 M2 x AUX SUPPLY
20mA +
COMMON
E18 CONNECTION C10
NOTES: 1. OUTPUT 3 1mA
G1 - C11
C.T. SHORTING LINKS F10 5A
(a) OPTO 9
I 100% STEF G2 C13
+ 20mA
(20Hz INJECTION) G3 C14
NOTE 4 F11 - OUTPUT 4 1mA
(b) TERMINAL OPTO 10
OPTIONAL
1A G4 C15
F12 + CLIO
(c) PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) G5 CURRENT LOOP C16
- 20mA
G6 OPTO 11 INPUTS & OUTPUTS B1
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS SHOWN AND ARE 1A CONNECTED F21 + C17
NOTE 8 INPUT 1 1mA B2 RTD 1
AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY. G7 C18
- B3
V 100% STEF OPTO 12
3. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001. (20Hz INJECTION) G8 C20 B4
+ 20mA
F22 G9 - C21 B5 RTD 2
4. I 100% STEF USES THE 1A INPUT FOR CURRENT <2A & INPUT 2 1mA
5A INPUT FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A FOR BETTER SENSITIVITY. G10 OPTO 13 C22 B6
+
B7
5. DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENTS FLOW FOR OPERATION G11 - C24 OPTIONAL
20mA B8 RTD 3
OF DIRECTIONAL SEF PROTECTION. G12 OPTO 14
+ C25
INPUT 3 1mA B9
6. DIRECTIONAL SEF FOR PARALLEL GENERATORS G13 C26
-
CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE BUSBARS. OPTO 15
G14 C28
CASE + 20mA
7. 90% STATOR EARTH FAULT FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED G15 B28
EARTH - C29
OR PRIMARY RESISTANCE EARTHED GENERATORS. INPUT 4 1mA
G16 OPTO 16 B29 RTD 10
+ C30
8. FOR 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA RANGE USE 20mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS B30
FOR 0-1mA RANGE USE 1mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS. G17
COMMON
G18 CONNECTION
9. VT CONNECTION IS SHOWN FOR A-N AND IS TYPICAL ONLY POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY
OTHER PHASE - NEUTRAL OR PHASE-PHASE CONNECTIONS MiCOM P345 (PART) *
CAN ALSO BE USED

CID006234 Outlines updated to GE Format EXT. CONNECTION DIAGRAM: GEN. PROT. RELAY (80TE) + V CHECK SYNC 90% & 100%
H (3rd HARMONIC) STATOR EARTH FAULT & INTERTURN PROT. (32 I/P & 16 O/P + CLIO & RTD)
Drg C
No:
10P34504 2 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:
MiCOM P345 (PART)
A P1 P2 P2 P1 M11
X A J1 WATCHDOG
S1 S2 S2 S1 M12 CONTACT
X B RELAY 17 J2
M13
J3 WATCHDOG
X C M14 CONTACT
C B A B C A B C RELAY 18 J4
S2 S1 L1
PHASE ROTATION J5 RELAY 1
L2
RELAY 19 J6
L3
N N J7
L4 RELAY 2
RELAY 20 J8
D19 VA L5
n n J9
L6 RELAY 3
F1 5A RELAY 21 J10
L7
a b c a b c a b c J11 RELAY 4
I A (2) L8
RELAY 22 J12
F2 L9
D20 VB J13
1A L10 RELAY 5
F3 J14
RELAY 23 L11
F4 5A J15
L12 RELAY 6
I B (2) J16
L13
F5 J17
RELAY 24 L14
D21 VC
J18 RELAY 7
F6 1A L15
F7 5A H1 L16
RELAY 25 H2 L17
I C (2) VN RELAY 8
D22 H3 L18
F8
F23 RELAY 26 H4
1A K1
NOTE 2 F9 H5
K2 RELAY 9
D1 5A INTERTURN RELAY 27 H6
VN(2) K3
PROTECTION
IA H7 RELAY 10
F24 K4
D2 RELAY 28 H8
K5
F19 VG+ H9
D3 1A K6 RELAY 11
RELAY 29 H10
D4 5A V CHECK SYNC K7
NOTE 9 H11 RELAY 12
IB K8
F20 VG- RELAY 30 H12
K9
D5 H13
K10 RELAY 13
D6 1A E1 H14
- RELAY 31 K11
D7 5A E2 OPTO 1 H15 RELAY 14
+ NOTE K12
H16
IC E3 K13
- H17
D8 OPTO 2 9. VT CONNECTION IS SHOWN FOR A-N AND IS TYPICAL ONLY RELAY 32 K14
E4 H18 RELAY 15
+ OTHER PHASE - NEUTRAL OR PHASE-PHASE CONNECTIONS K15
D9 1A
E5 - CAN ALSO BE USED K16
D10 5A E6 OPTO 3
+ K17
NOTE 7 IN RELAY 16
E7 - K18
NOTE 3
D11 OPTO 4
E8 COMMS
+
D12 1A
E9 -
E10 OPTO 5 M17
D13 5A + C1 -
20mA
E11 - C2 SEE DRAWING
NOTE 6 I SENSITIVE OUTPUT 1 1mA EIA485/
OPTO 6 10Px4001 KBUS
D14 E12 C3 M18
+ + PORT
1A E13 - C5
D15 20mA M16
E14 OPTO 7 SCN
D23 + C6
OUTPUT 2 1mA
E15 - C7 * M1 -
R LOAD 90% & 100% STATOR EARTH E16 OPTO 8 AC OR DC
VN(1) + C9
FAULT (3rd HARMONIC) 20mA M2 x AUX SUPPLY
D24 +
E17 C10
COMMON OUTPUT 3 1mA
E18 CONNECTION C11
G1 - C13
F10 5A 20mA
G2 OPTO 9
+ C14
NOTES: 1. I 100% STEF OPTIONAL OUTPUT 4 1mA
(20Hz INJECTION) G3 - C15
(a) C.T. SHORTING LINKS F11 CLIO
NOTE 4 G4 OPTO 10
1A + CURRENT LOOP C16
F12 20mA
G5 - INPUTS & OUTPUTS C17
(b) TERMINAL NOTE 8 INPUT 1 1mA B1
G6 OPTO 11
+ C18
F21 B2 RTD 1
(c) PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) G7 - C20 B3
20mA
V 100% STEF G8 OPTO 12
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS SHOWN AND ARE 1A CONNECTED + C21 B4
(20Hz INJECTION) INPUT 2 1mA
AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY. G9 B5 RTD 2
F22 - C22
3. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001. G10 OPTO 13 B6
+ C24
20mA B7
4. I 100% STEF USES THE 1A INPUT FOR CURRENT <2A & G11 - C25 OPTIONAL
INPUT 3 1mA B8 RTD 3
5A INPUT FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A FOR BETTER SENSITIVITY. G12 OPTO 14
+ C26 B9
5. DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENTS FLOW FOR OPERATION G13 C28
- 20mA
OF DIRECTIONAL SEF PROTECTION. OPTO 15
G14 C29
+ INPUT 4 1mA
6. DIRECTIONAL SEF FOR PARALLEL GENERATORS CASE G15 B28
CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE BUSBARS. EARTH - C30
G16 OPTO 16 B29 RTD 10
+
7. 90% STATOR EARTH FAULT FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED B30
G17
COMMON
G18 CONNECTION
8. FOR 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA RANGE USE 20mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS * POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY
FOR 0-1mA RANGE USE 1mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS. MiCOM P345 (PART)

Drg C
No:
10P34505 2 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:
P1 P2 P2 P1
MiCOM P345 (PART)
A A
X M11
- H1 WATCHDOG
S1 S2 S2 S1 M12
X B OPTO 17 H2 CONTACT
+ M13
X C H3 WATCHDOG
C - M14 CONTACT
C B S2 S1 A B A B C OPTO 18
PHASE ROTATION H4 L1
+
H5 L2 RELAY 1
-
N N OPTO 19 H6 L3
+ L4 RELAY 2
D19 VA
- H7
n n L5
OPTO 20 H8
+ L6 RELAY 3
F1 5A
- H9 L7
I A (2) a b c a b c a b c
OPTO 21 H10 L8 RELAY 4
F2 +
VB H11 L9
D20 -
F3 1A L10 RELAY 5
OPTO 22 H12
F4 5A + L11
- H13 L12 RELAY 6
I B (2)
OPTO 23 H14 L13
F5 +
D21 VC L14
1A - H15 RELAY 7
F6
OPTO 24 H16 L15
F7 5A + L16
H17
I C (2) VN COMMON L17
D22 RELAY 8
F8 CONNECTION H18 L18
F23
NOTE 2 F9 1A K1
D1 5A INTERTURN K2 RELAY 9
VN(2) NOTE 3
PROTECTION K3
IA COMMS
F24 K4 RELAY 10
D2
F19 VG+ M17 K5
D3 1A -
K6 RELAY 11
D4 5A V CHECK SYNC EIA485/ SEE DRAWING
10Px4001. K7
NOTE 9 KBUS
IB VG- M18 K8 RELAY 12
F20 PORT +
D5 K9
M16
1A SCN K10 RELAY 13
D6
E1 - K11
D7 5A M1 *
OPTO 1 9. VT CONNECTION IS SHOWN FOR A-N AND IS TYPICAL ONLY - K12 RELAY 14
E2 AC OR DC
IC + OTHER PHASE - NEUTRAL OR PHASE-PHASE CONNECTIONS
E3 CAN ALSO BE USED
x AUX SUPPLY M2 K13
D8 - +
OPTO 2 K14
E4 RELAY 15
D9 1A + K15
E5 - K16
D10 5A
E6 OPTO 3
NOTE 7 IN + K17
RELAY 16
D11 E7 K18
-
E8 OPTO 4
D12 1A +
E9 - J3 -
D13 5A E10 OPTO 5
+ C1
20mA RELAY 17
NOTE 6 I SENSITIVE E11 C2 J4
- OUTPUT 1 1mA +
D14 E12 OPTO 6
+ C3 J7 -
D15 1A
E13 - C5 RELAY 18
20mA
D23 E14 OPTO 7 J8
+ C6 + HIGH BREAK
OUTPUT 2 1mA
E15 C7 J11 - CONTACTS
RLOAD 90% & 100% STATOR EARTH -
VN(1) OPTO 8
FAULT (3rd HARMONIC) E16 C9 RELAY 19
D24 + 20mA J12
E17 +
C10
COMMON OUTPUT 3 1mA J15
E18 -
CONNECTION C11
RELAY 20
F10 5A G1 - C13 J16
20mA +
NOTES: 1. I 100% STEF G2 OPTO 9 C14
+ OPTIONAL OUTPUT 4 1mA
C.T. SHORTING LINKS (20Hz INJECTION)
(a) F11 G3 - C15
NOTE 4 CLIO
1A G4 OPTO 10
F12 + CURRENT LOOP C16 B1
20mA
(b) G5 INPUTS & OUTPUTS C17 B2 RTD 1
TERMINAL - INPUT 1 1mA
OPTO 11 NOTE 8 B3
F21 G6 C18
(c) PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) +
B4
G7 - C20
V 100% STEF 20mA B5 RTD 2
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS SHOWN AND ARE 1A CONNECTED G8 OPTO 12
(20Hz INJECTION) + C21 B6
AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY. INPUT 2 1mA
F22 G9 C22 B7
-
3. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001. OPTO 13 OPTIONAL
G10 C24 B8 RTD 3
+ 20mA
4. I 100% STEF USES THE 1A INPUT FOR CURRENT <2A & G11 B9
- C25
5A INPUT FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A FOR BETTER SENSITIVITY. INPUT 3 1mA
G12 OPTO 14
+ C26
5. DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENTS FLOW FOR OPERATION
OF DIRECTIONAL SEF PROTECTION. G13 - C28
20mA B28
G14 OPTO 15 C29
6. DIRECTIONAL SEF FOR PARALLEL GENERATORS CASE + INPUT 4 1mA B29 RTD 10
CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE BUSBARS. EARTH G15 C30 B30
-
G16 OPTO 16
7. 90% STATOR EARTH FAULT FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED +
OR PRIMARY RESISTANCE EARTHED GENERATORS. G17
COMMON POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY
8. FOR 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA RANGE USE 20mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS G18 CONNECTION
**
MiCOM P345 (PART)

Drg C
No:
10P34506 2 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:
MiCOM P345 (PART)
A P1 P2 P2 P1 M11
X A WATCHDOG
S1 S2 S2 S1 M12 CONTACT
X B M13
WATCHDOG
X C M14 CONTACT
C B S2 S1 A B C A B C L1
PHASE ROTATION L2 RELAY 1
L3
N N J3
- L4 RELAY 2
D19 VA RELAY 17 L5
n n J4
+ L6 RELAY 3
F1 5A - J7 L7
I A (2) a b c a b c a b c RELAY 18 L8 RELAY 4
J8 L9
F2 HIGH BREAK +
D20 VB
1A CONTACTS J11 L10 RELAY 5
F3 -
L11
F4 5A RELAY 19
J12 L12 RELAY 6
I B (2) +
L13
J15
F5 -
L14
D21 VC RELAY 7
1A RELAY 20
F6 J16 L15
L16
+
F7 5A
L17
I C (2) VN RELAY 8
D22 L18
F8
F23 H3 K1
NOTE 2 F9 1A -
RELAY 21 K2 RELAY 9
D1 5A INTERTURN
VN(2) H4 K3
PROTECTION +
IA RELAY 10
F24 H7 K4
D2
-
K5
F19 VG+ RELAY 22
D3 1A H8 K6 RELAY 11
HIGH BREAK +
K7
D4 5A V CHECK SYNC H11
CONTACTS
NOTE 9 - K8 RELAY 12
IB
F20 VG- RELAY 23 K9
D5 H12
+ K10 RELAY 13
D6 1A 9. VT CONNECTION IS SHOWN FOR A-N AND IS TYPICAL ONLY H15
- K11
D7 E1 OTHER PHASE - NEUTRAL OR PHASE-PHASE CONNECTIONS
5A - RELAY 24 K12 RELAY 14
CAN ALSO BE USED H16
IC E2 OPTO 1 K13
+
+
D8 E3 K14
- RELAY 15
1A E4 OPTO 2 K15
D9 + K16
D10 5A E5 - K17
NOTE 7 OPTO 3 NOTE 3 RELAY 16
IN E6 COMMS K18
+
D11 E7 -
D12 1A E8 OPTO 4
+
E9 - M17
D13 5A C1 -
OPTO 5 20mA
E10 SEE DRAWING
NOTE 6 I SENSITIVE + OUTPUT 1 C2 EIA485/
1mA 10Px4001
E11 - KBUS
D14 C3 M18
OPTO 6 + PORT
E12
D15 1A + C5 M16
20mA
E13 - SCN
D23 C6
E14 OPTO 7 OUTPUT 2 1mA
+ C7 * M1
90% & 100% STATOR EARTH E15 -
R LOAD VN(1) - C9 AC OR DC
FAULT (3rd HARMONIC) OPTO 8 20mA M2 x AUX SUPPLY
D24 E16 +
+ C10
OUTPUT 3 1mA
E17
COMMON C11
E18 CONNECTION C13
F10 5A 20mA
G1 -
NOTES: 1. C14
I 100% STEF OPTO 9 OPTIONAL OUTPUT 4 1mA
G2
C.T. SHORTING LINKS (20Hz INJECTION) + C15
(a) NOTE 4 F11 CLIO
G3 -
CURRENT LOOP C16
F12 1A OPTO 10 20mA
G4 INPUTS & OUTPUTS
+ C17
(b) TERMINAL INPUT 1 1mA B1
G5 NOTE 8
- C18
F21 OPTO 11 B2 RTD 1
(c) PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) G6
+ C20 B3
20mA
V 100% STEF G7 -
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS SHOWN AND ARE 1A CONNECTED C21 B4
AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY. (20Hz INJECTION) OPTO 12 INPUT 2 1mA
G8 B5 RTD 2
F22 + C22
3. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001. G9 - B6
C24
OPTO 13 20mA B7
G10
4. I 100% STEF USES THE 1A INPUT FOR CURRENT <2A & + C25 OPTIONAL
5A INPUT FOR CURRENTS 2A-10A FOR BETTER SENSITIVITY. INPUT 3 1mA B8 RTD 3
G11 - C26 B9
G12 OPTO 14
5. DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENTS FLOW FOR OPERATION + C28
OF DIRECTIONAL SEF PROTECTION. G13 20mA
- C29
6. DIRECTIONAL SEF FOR PARALLEL GENERATORS CASE OPTO 15 INPUT 4 1mA
G14 B28
EARTH + C30
CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE BUSBARS.
G15 B29 RTD 10
-
7. 90% STATOR EARTH FAULT FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED G16 OPTO 16 B30
OR PRIMARY RESISTANCE EARTHED GENERATORS. +
G17
8. FOR 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA RANGE USE 20mA INPUTS & OUTPUTS COMMON POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY
MiCOM P345 (PART) G18 CONNECTION *

Drg C
No:
Date: 17/03/2012 Chkd: G.LLOYD certain restrictions under U.S. export control laws and regulations.© General Electric Company, GE CONFIDENTIAL UNPUBLISHED WORK.
10P34507 2 ST16 1WT, UK
Sht:
Imagination at work
Grid Solutions
St Leonards Building
Redhill Business Park
Stafford, ST16 1WT, UK
+44 (0) 1785 250 070
[email protected]
© 2022 General Electric. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or
should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial
circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without
express written authority, is strictly prohibited.
P345-AD-EN-1

Micom P40 Agile: Ge Grid Solutions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micom P40 Agile: Ge Grid Solutions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micom P40 Agile: Ge Grid Solutions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE

MiCOM P40 Agile

Chapter 2 Safety Information 13

Chapter 3 Hardware Design 27

Chapter 4 Software Design 61

3.2 Getting Started 76

Chapter 7 Communications 109

1 Chapter Overview 111

6.2.5 Spontaneous Events 138

Chapter 8 Cyber-Security 179

Chapter 9 Installation 207

2.1 Receipt of the Goods 210

Chapter 10 Commissioning Instructions 223

5.2 Product Checks with the IED Energised 234

Chapter 11 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 253

2.8 Cleaning 263

Chapter 12 Technical Specifications 269

5.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 281

17.1 1 MHz Burst High Frequency Disturbance Test 298

Appendix A Ordering Options 301

Appendix B Settings and Signals 303

Appendix C Wiring Diagrams 305

2.1 TARGET AUDIENCE

2.2 TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS

3 SCOPE OF THIS ADDENDUM

4.1 ORDERING OPTIONS

5 FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS

5.1 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

ANSI Protection Function Model

ANSI Protection Function Model

5.2 CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Feature IEC 61850 ANSI Model

5.3 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS

Measurement Function IEC 61850 ANSI

5.4 COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS

IEC 2nd R emote R emote L oc al R ecord

VT S 27 81R 81O 8 1AB 24 47

Figure 1: Functional Overview

2 HEALTH AND SAFETY

Protective conductor (earth) terminal

Instructions on disposal requirements

4 INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

4.1 LIFTING HAZARDS

4.2 ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

4.3 UL/CSA/CUL REQUIREMENTS

4.4 FUSING REQUIREMENTS

4.5 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

4.6 PROTECTION CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

4.7 PRE-ENERGISATION CHECKLIST

4.8 PERIPHERAL CIRCUITRY

To reduce the risk of electric shock due to transferred potential hazards:

v. No equipment shall be connected to any download or maintenance circuits or

5 DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

6.1 EMC COMPLIANCE: 2014/30/EU

6.2 LVD COMPLIANCE: 2014/35/EU

6.3 R&TTE COMPLIANCE: 2014/53/EU

6.4 UL/CUL COMPLIANCE

Flash memory for settings VTs Power system voltages

Backed-up SRAM Analogue Inputs